A 

A 

ucsc 

0 
0 

1 

)UTH 

30 

2 
5 

O 

9 
2 
5 

0 

FACIL 

7 

Ail 

jr  cx^ 


c^^^'u^f  a^^- 


Infantry 
Drill  Regulations 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY 

1911 

With  Conections  to  November,   1913 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1914 


WAR  DEPARTMENT 
Document  No.  453 

CFFICE  OF  THE    CHIEF   OF   STAFF 


ADDITIONAL  COPIES 

GP  THIS  PUBLICATION  MAY  BE  PROCURED  FROM 

THE  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMENTS 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 

AT 

35  CENTS  PER  COPY 


ni3 


War  Department, 
Oeficr  or  THE  Chief  of  Staff, 

Wusltington,  November  19,  WIS. 
The  following  system  of  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911, 
with  corrections  to  November,  1913,  including  the  Manual  of  the 
Bayonet,  is  approved  and  herewith  published  for  the  informa- 
tion and  government  of  the  Regular  Army  and  the  Organized 
Militia  of  the  United  States.  With  a  view  to  insure  uniformity 
throughout  the  Army,  all  infantry  drill  foi*mations  not  embi-aced 
in  this  system  are  prohibited,  and  those  herein  prescribed  will 
l»e  strictly  observed. 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War : 

Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  titaff. 

3 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Part  I— Drill.  Paragraph. 

1.  lutroduction 1-  30 

2.  Orders,  commands  and  signals 31-  47 

3.  School  of  the  soldier 48-100 

4.  School  of  the  squad 101-158 

5.  School  of  the  company 159-257 

(«)   Close  order 167-198 

(b)  Extended  order 199-231 

(c)  Fire 232-257 

0.  The  battalion 258-326 

(«)   Close  order 263-289 

(h)   Combat  principles 290-326 

7.  The  rei^iment 327-346 

(«)   Close  order 333-341 

(h)   Combat  principles 342-346 

8.  The  brigade 347-349 

Part  II — Coml)at. 

1.  Introduction 350-357 

2.  Leadership 358-388 

(a)  General  considerations 358-370 

(b)  Teamwork 371-377 

(c)  Orders 378-383 

(f/)   Commnnication 384-388 

3.  Combat  reconnaissance 389-399 

4.  Fire  superiority 400-124 

(tt)   Purpose  and  nature 400-401 

{h)   Fire  direction  and  control 402-424 

5.  Deplovuient 425-441 

6.  Attack 442-488 

(a)   Deployment  for  attack 449-452 

{h)   Advancing  the  attack 453-457 

(ff)  The  fire  attack 458-463 

((f)   The  charge 464-475 

(f)   Pursuit 476-480 

(/)   Attack  of  fortifications 481-484 

{g)   Holding  attack 485-488 

T.  Defense 489-519 

(a)   Positions  and  intreuchments 489^94 

(ft)   Deployment  for  defense 495-510 

(c)  Counterattack 511-516 

(d)  Delaying  action . 517-519 

5 


6  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Paragraph. 

8.  Meeting  engagements 520-530 

9.  WitMrawal  from  action 531-535 

10.  Miscellaneous 537-622 

(a)   Machine  guns. 537-546 

(&)   Ammunition  supply 547-553 

(c)  Mounted  scouts 554-557 

(d)  Night  operations 558-568 

(e)  Infantry  against  Cavalry 569-574 

(/)   Infantry  against  Artillery 575-578 

(.g)   Artillery  supports 579-583 

{h)   Intrenchments : 584-595 

(i)  Minor  warfare 596-603 

(i)   Patrols 604-622 

Paet  III — Marches  and  camps. 

1.  Marches 623-660 

(a)   Training  and  discipline 623-635 

(&)   Protection  of  the  march 636-660 

2.  Camps 661-707 

(a)   Sanitation 661-677 

(&)   Protection  of  camp  or  bivouac 678-707 

Part  IV — Ceremonies  and  inspections. 

1.  Ceremonies 708-765 

(a)   Reviews 711-731 

(6)   Parades 732-735 

y,,^  (c)   Escorts 736-744 

J  -^.  Inspections , 745-754 

f  f.S.  Muster 755-757 

>i,4.  Honors  and  salutes 758-765 


Part  V — Manuals. 

1.  The  color -_  766-778 

12.  The  band 779-781 

:i.  Manual  of  the  saber 782-791 

_4.  Manual  of  tent  pitching 792-803 

l^p.  Manual  of  the  bugle 804-807 

'  "'  (0)   Bugle  calls. 

^',  (&)   Bugle  signals. 

rajPENDix  A.  Manual  of  Arms,  etc.,  for  Rifle  INIodel  189S. 
.| Appendix  B.  Inspection  and  shelter  tent  pitching  for  troops  not 
equipped  with  model  1910  shelter  tent. 
Appendix  C.  Manual  of  the  Bayonet. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

UNITED   STATES  ARMY.   1911. 


DEFINITIONS. 

A/ignment:  A  straight  line  upon  wbich  several  elements  are 
formed,  or  are  to  be  formed;  or  the  dressing  of  several  ele- 
ments upon  a  straight  line. 

Base:  The  element  on  which  a  movement  is  regulated. 

Battle  sight:  The  position  of  the  rear  sight  when  the  leaf  is 
laid  down. 

Center:  The  middle  point  or  element  of  a  command. 

Column:  A  formation  in  which  the  elements  are  placed  one  be- 
hind another. 

Deploy:  To  extend  the  front.  In  general  to  change  from  column 
to  line,  or  from  close  order  to  extended  order. 

Depth:  The  space  from  head  to  rear  of  any  formation,  including 
the  leading  and  rear  elements.  The  depth  of  a  man  is 
assumed  to  be  12  inches. 

Distance:  Space  between  elements  in  the  direction  of  depth. 
Distance  is  measured  from  the  back  of  the  man  in  front  to 
the  breast  of  the  man  in  rear.  The  distance  between  ranks 
is  40  inches  in  both  line  and  column. 

Element:  A  file,  squad,  platoon,  company,  or  larger  body,  form- 
ing part  of  a  still  larger  body. 

File:  Two  men,  the  front-rank  man  and  the  corresponding  man 
of  the  rear  rank.  The  front-rank  man  is  the  file  leader. 
A  file  which  has  no  rear-rank  man  is  a  blank  file.  The  term 
file  applies  also  to  a  single  man  in  a  single-rank  formation. 

File  closers:  Such  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  of  a 
company  as  are  posted  in  rear  of  the  line.  For  convenience, 
all  men  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

Flank:  The  right  or  left  of  a  command  in  line  or  in  column; 
also  the  element  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line. 

i 


8  DEFINITIONS. 

Formation:  Arrangement  of  the  elements  of  a  command.  The 
placing  of  all  fractions  in  their  order  in  line,  in  column,  or 
for  battle. 

Front:  The  space,  in  width,  occupied  by  an  element,  either  in 
line  or  in  column.  The  front  of  a  man  is  assumed  to  be  22 
inches.     Front  also  denotes  the  direction  of  the  enemy. 

Guide:  An  officer,  noncommissioned  officer,  or  private  upon  whom 
the  command  or  elements  thereof  regulates  its  march. 

Head :  The  leading  element  of  a  column. 

Interval:  Space  between  elements  of  the  same  line.  The  interval 
between  men  in  ranks  is  4  inches  and  is  measured  from 
elbow  to  elbow.  Between  companies,  squads,  etc.,  it  is 
measured  from  the  left  elbow  of  the  left  man  or  guide  of 
the  group  on  the  right,  to  the  right  elbow  of  the  right  man 
or  guide  of  the  group  on  the  left. 

Left:  The  left  extremity  or  element  of  a  body  of  troops. 

Line:  A  formation  in  which  the  dilferent  elements  are  abreast 
of  each  other. 

Order,  close:  The  formation  in  which  the  units,  in  double  ranli, 
are  arranged  in  line  or  in  column  with  normal  intervals 
and  distances. 

Order,  extended :  The  formation  in  which  the  units  are  separated 
by  intervals  greater  than  in  close  order. 

Pace:  Thirty  inches;  the  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time. 

Point  of  rest:  The  point  at  which  a  formation  begins.  Specific- 
ally, the  point  toward  which  units  are  aligned  in  successive 
movements. 

Rank:  A  line  of  men  placed  side  by  side. 

Right:  The  right  extremitj'  or  element  of  a  body  of  troops. 


.Tio: 


Part  I.— DKILL. 


INTRODUCTION. 

1.  Success  in  battle  is  the  ultimate  object  of  all  military 
training;  success  may  be  loolied  for  only  when  the  training  is 
intelligent  and  tliorougb. 

2.  Commanding  officers  are  accountable  for  the  proper  train- 
ing of  their  respective  organizations  within  the  limits  prescribed 
by  regulations  and  orders. 

The  excellence  of  an  organization  is  judged  by  its  field  effi- 
ciency. The  field  efficiency  of  an  organization  depends  primarily 
upon  its  effectiveness  as  a  whole.  Thoroughness  and  uniformity 
in  the  training  of  the  units  of  an  organization  are  indispensable 
to  the  efficiency  of  the  vrhole;  it  is  by  such  means  alone  that 
the  requisite  teamwork  may  be  developed. 

3.  Simple  movements  and  elastic  formations  are  essential  to 
correct  training  for  battle. 

4.  The  Drill  Regulations  are  furnished  as  a  guide.  They  pi'o- 
vide  the  principles  for  training  and  for  increasing  the  probability 
of  success  in  battle. 

In  the  interpretation  of  the  regulations,  the  spirit  must  be 
sought.  Quibbling  over  the  minutiae  of  form  is  indicative  of 
failure  to  grasp  the  spirit. 

5.  The  principles  of  coml>at  are  considered  in  Part  IT  of  these 
regulations.  They  ai-e  treated  in  the  various  schools  included 
in  Part  I  only  to  the  extent  necessary  to  indicate  the  functions 
of  the  various  commanders  and  the  division  of  responsibility 
between  them.  The  amplification  necessary  to  a  proper  under- 
standing of  their  application  is  to  be  sought  in  Part  II. 

6.  The  following  important  distinctions  must  be  observed: 
(«)   Drills  executed  at  attention  and  the  ceremonies  are  dis- 
ciplinary exercises  designed  to  teach  precise  and  soldierly  move- 
ment, and  to  inculcate  that  prompt  and  subconscious  obedience 
which   is   essential   to   proper   military   control.     To   this   end, 

9 


10  XXTRODTICTION. 

smartness  and  precision  should  be  exacted  in  the  execution  of 
every  detail.     Such  drills  should  be  frequent,  but  short. 

(&)  The  purpose  of  extended  order  drill  is  to  teach  the  mecha- 
nism of  deployment,  of  the  firings,  and,  in  general,  of  the  employ- 
ment of  troops  in  combat.  Such  drills  are  in  the  nature  of 
disciplinary  exercises  and  should  be  frequent,  thorough,  and 
exact  in  order  to  habituate  men  to  the  firm  control  of  their 
leaders.  Extended  order  drill  is  executed  at  ease.  The  com- 
pany is  the  largest  unit  which  executes  extended  order  drill. 

(c)  Field  exercises  are  for  instruction  in  the  duties  incident 
to  campaign.  Assumed  situations  are  employed.  Each  exercise 
should  conclude  with  a  discussion,  on  the  ground,  of  the  exercise 
and  principles  involved. 

(d)  The  combat  exercise,  a  form  of  field  exercise  of  the  com- 
pany, battalion,  and  larger  units,  consists  of  the  application  of 
tactical  principles  to  assumed  situations,  employing  in  the  exe- 
cution the  appropriate  formations  and  movements  of  close  and 
extended  order. 

Combat  exercises  must  simulate,  as  far  as  possible,  the  battle 
conditions  assumed.  In  order  to  familiarize  both  officers  and 
men  with  such  conditions,  companies  and  battalions  will  fre- 
quently be  consolidated  to  provide  war-strength  organizations. 
Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  not  required  to  complete 
the  full  quota  of  the  units  participating  are  assigned  as  ob- 
servers or  umpires. 

The  firing  line  can  rarely  be  controlled  by  the  voice  alone; 
thorough  training  to  insure  the  proper  use  of  prescribed  signals 
is  necessary. 

The  exercise  should  be  followed  by  a  brief  drill  at  attention 
in  order  to  restore  smartness  and  control. 

7.  In  field  exercises  the  enemy  is  said  to  be  imaginary  when 
his  position  and  force  are  merely  assumed;  outlined  when  his 
position  and  force  are  indicated  by  a  few  men;  represented  when 
a  body  of  troop  acts  as  such. 

General  Rules  for  Drills  and  Formations. 

8.  When  the  preparatory  command  consists  of  more  than  one 
part,  its  elements  are  arranged  as  follows: 

(1)  For  movements  to  be  executed  successively  by  the  sub- 
divisions or  elements  of  an  organization:  (a)  Description  of 
the  movement;  (b)  how  executed,  or  on  what  element  executed. 


INTRODUCTION.  H 

(2)  For  movements  to  be  executed  simultaneously  by  the 
subdivisions  of  an  organization:  (a)  The  designation  of  the 
subdivisions;  (&)  the  movement  to  be  executed. 

9.  Movements  that  may  be  executed  toward  either  flank  are 
explained  as  toward  but  one  flank,  it  being  necessary  to  sub- 
stitute the  word  "  left "  for  "  right,"  and  the  reverse,  to  have 
the  explanation  of  the  corresponding  movement  toward  the 
other  flank.  The  commands  are  given  for  the  execution  of  the 
movements  toward  either  flank.  The  substitute  word  of  the 
command  is  placed  within  parentheses. 

10.  Any  movement  may  be  executed  either  from  the  halt  or 
when  marching,  unless  otherwise  prescribed.  If  at  a  halt,  the 
command  for  movements  involving  marching  need  not  be  pref- 
aced by  forward,  as  1.  Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

11.  Any  movement  not  specially  excepted  may  be  executed 
in  double  time. 

If  at  a  halt,  or  if  marching  in  quick  time,  the  command  double 
time  precedes  the  command  of  execution. 

12.  In  successive  movements  executed  in  double  time  the 
leading  or  base  unit  marches  in  quick  time  when  not  otherwise 
prescribed ;  the  other  units  march  in  double  time  to  their  places 
in  the  formation  ordered  and  then  conform  to  the  gait  of  the 
leading  or  base  unit.  If  marching  in  double  time,  the  command 
double  time  is  omitted.  The  leading  or  base  unit  marches  in 
quick  time;  the  other  units  continue  at  double  time  to  their 
places  in  the  formation  ordered  and  then  conform  to  the  gait 
of  the  leading  or  base  unit 

13.  To  hasten  the  execution  of  a  movement  begun  in  quick 
time,  the  command :  1.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH,  is  given.  The 
leading  or  base  xmit  continues  to  march  in  quick  time,  or  re- 
mains at  halt  if  already  halted ;  the  other  units  complete  the 
execution  of  the  movement  in  double  time  and  then  conform 
to  the  gait  of  the  leading  or  base  unit. 

14.  To  stay  the  execution  of  a  movement  when  marching,  for 
the  correctio  >  of  errors,  the  command:  1.  In  place,  2.  HALT,  Is 
given.  All  halt  and  stand  fast,  without  changing  the  position 
of  the  pieces.  To  resume  the  movement  the  command :  1.  Re- 
sume, 2.  MARCH,  is  given. 

15.  To  revoke  a  preparatory  command,  or,  being  at  a  halt. 
to  begin  anew  a  movement  improperly  begun,  the  command. 
AS  YOU  WERE,  is  given,  at  which  the  movement  ceases  and  the 
former  position  is  resumed. 


12  INTRODUCTION. 

''"■16.  Unless  otherwise  announced,  the  guide  of  a  company  or 
subdivision  of  a  company  in  line  is  right;  of  a  battalion  in  line 
or  line  of  subdivisions  or  of  a  deployed  line,  center;  of  a  rank 
in  column  of  squads,  toward  the  side  of  the  guide  of  the  com- 
pany. 

To  march  with  guide  other  than  as  prescribed  above,  or  to 
change  the  guide :  Guide  (right,  left,  or  center). 

In  successive  formations  into  line,  the  guide  is  toward  the 
point  of  rest ;  in  platoons  or  larger  subdivisions  it  is  so  an- 
nounced. 

The  announcement  of  the  guide,  when  given  in  connection 
with  a  movement,  follows  the  coumiand  of  execution  for  that 
movemeut.  Exception:  1.  As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left  or 
center),  2.  MARCH. 

17.  The  turn  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  subdivisions  is  used  in  all 
formations  from  line  into  coluuni  and  the  reverse. 

The  turn  on  the  moving  pivot  is  used  by  subdivisions  of  a  column 
in  executing  changes  of  direction. 

18.  Partial  changes  of  direction  may  be  executed  : 

By  interpolating  in  the  preparatory  command  the  word  half, 
as  Column  half  right  (left),  or  Right  (left)  half  turn.  A  change 
of  direction  of  45°  is  executed. 

By  the  command :  INCLINE  TO  THE  RIGHT  (LEFT).  The  guide, 
or  guiding  element,  moves  in  the  indicated  direction  and  the 
remainder  of  the  couuuand  conforms.  This  movement  effects 
slight  changes  of  direction. 

19.  The  designations  line  of  platoons,  line  of  companies,  line 
of  battalions,  etc.,  refer  to  the  formations  in  which  the  platoons, 
companies,  battalions,  etc.,  each  in  column  of  squads,  are  in 
line. 

120.  Full  distance  in  column  of  subdivisions  is  such  that  in 
forming  line  to  the  right  or  left  the  subdivisions  will  have  their 
p roller  intervals. 

In  column  of  subdivisions  the  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision 
is  charged  with  the  step  and  direction ;  the  guides  in  rear  pre- 
serve the  trace,  step,  and  distance. 

21.  In  close  order,  all  details,  detachments,  and  other  bodies 
of  troops  are  habitually  formed  in  double  rank. 

To  insure  uniformity  of  interval  between  tiles  when  falling 
in,  and  in  alignments,  each  man  places  the  palm  of  the  left  hand 
upon  the  hip,  fingers  pointing  downward.     In  the  first  case  the 


INTRODUCTION.  'H 

baud  is  dropped  by  the  side  wlien  the  next  man  on  the  left  has 
his  interval ;  in  the  second  case,  at  the  command  front. 

22.  The  posts  of  officers,  uoucommissioued  ofiicers,  special 
units  (such  as  band  or  machine-gun  company),  etc..  In  the 
various  formations  of  the  company,  battalion,  or  regiment,  are 
shown  in  plates. 

In  all  changes  from  oue  formation  to  another  involving  a 
change  of  post  on  the  part  of  any  of  these,  posts  are  promptly 
taken  by  the  most  convenient  route  as  soon  as  practicable  after 
the  command  of  execution  for  the  movement ;  officers  and  nou- 
coujuiissioned  officers  who  have  prescribed  duties  in  connection 
with  the  movement  ordereil,  take  their  new  posts  when  such 
duties  are  completed. 

As  instructors,  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  go 
wherever  their  presence  is  necessary.  As  file  closers  it  is  their 
duty  to  rectify  mistakes  and  insure  steadiness  and  promptness 
in  the  ranks. 

2;J.  Except  at  ceremonies,  the  special  units  have  no  fixed 
places.  They  take  places  as  directed ;  in  the  absence  of  direc- 
tions, they  conform  as  nearly  as  practicable  to  the  plates,  aud 
in  subsequent  movements  maintain  their  relative  positions  with 
respect  to  the  flank  or  end  of  the  command  on  which  they  were 
originally  posted. 

24.  General,  Held,  and  staff  officers  are  habitually  mounted. 
The  staff  of  an  officer  forms  in  single  rank  3  paces  in  rear  of 
him,  the  right  of  the  rank  extending  1  pace  to  the  right  of  u 
point  directly  in  rear  of  him.  Members  of  the  staff  are  ar- 
ranged in  ordei-  from  right  to  left  as  follows:  General  staff 
officers,  adjutant,  aids,  other  staff  officers,  arranged  in  each 
classilicatiou  in  order  of  rank,  the  senior  on  the  right.  The 
flag  «»f  the  general  officer  and  the  orderlies  are  3  i>aces  in  rear 
of  the  staff,  the  flag  on  the  right.  When  necessary  to  reduce 
the  frout  of  the  staff  and  orderlies,  each  line  executes  twos  right 
or  fours  riglit,  as  explained  in  the  Cavalry  Drill  Regulations, 
and  follows  the  commander. 

When  not  otherwise  prescribed,  staff  officers  draw  and  return 
saber  with  their  chief. 

25.  In  making  the  about,  an  officer,  mounted,  habitually  turns 
to  the  left. 

When  the  commander  faces  to  give  commands,  the  stafl",  flag, 
and  orderlies  do  not  change  position. 


14  INTRODUCTION. 

26.  When  making  or  receiving  official  reports,  all  officers  will 
salute,  if  covered ;  if  uncovered,  they  stand  at  attention. 

When  under  ai*ms,  the  salute  is  made  with  the  sword  or  saber 
if  drawn,  otherwise  with  the  hand.  A  mounted  officer  dis- 
mounts before  addressing  a  superior  not  mounted. 

On  meeting,  all  officers  salute  when  covered ;  when  uncovered, 
they  exchange  the  courtesies  observed  between  gentlemen. 

Military  courtesy  requires  the  .iunior  to  salute  first,  but  when 
the  salute  is  introductory  to  a  report  made  at  a  military  cere- 
mony or  formation,  to  the  representative  of  a  common  superior 
(as  for  example,  to  the  adjutant,  officer  of  the  day,  etc.),  the 
officer  making  the  report,  whatever  his  rank,  will  salute  first; 
the  officer  to  whom  the  report  is  made  will  acknowledge  by 
saluting,  if  covered,  or  verbally,  if  uncovered,  that  he  has  re- 
ceived and  understood  the  report. 

27.  For  ceremonies,  all  mounted  enlisted  men  of  a  regiment 
or  smaller  unit,  except  those  belonging  to  the  machine-gun 
organizations,  are  consolidated  into  a  detachment ;  the  senior 
present  commands  if  no  officer  is  in  charge.  The  detachment  is 
formed  as  a  platoon  or  squad  of  cavalry  in  line  or  column  of 
fours;  noncommissioned  staff  officers  are  on  the  right  or  in  the 
leading  ranks. 

28.  For  ceremonies,  such  of  the  noncommissioned  staff  officers 
as  are  dismounted  are  formed  5  paces  in  rear  of  the  color,  in 
order  of  rank  from  right  to  left.  In  column  of  squads  they 
march  as  file  closers. 

29.  Other  than  for  ceremonies,  noncommissioned  staff  officers 
and  orderlies  accompany  their  immediate  chiefs  unless  othei'- 
wise  directed.  If  mounted,  the  noncommissioned  staff  officers 
are  ordinarily  posted  on  the  right  or  at  the  head  of  the  orderlies. 

30.  In  ali  formations  and  movements  a  noncommissioned 
officer  commanding  a  platoon  or  company  carries  his  piece  as 
the  men  do,  if  he  is  so  armed,  and  takes  the  same  post  as  an 
officer  in  like  situation.  When  the  command  is  formed  in  line 
for  ceremonies,  a  noncommissioned  officer  commanding  a  com- 
pany takes  post  on  the  right  of  the  right  guide  after  the  com- 
pany hus  been  aligned. 


.'ctAsaao 


ORDERS,  COMMANDS,  AND  SIGNALS. 

31.  Commands  only  are  employed  in  drill  at  attentiou.  Other- 
wise either  a  command,  signal,  or  order  is  employed,  as  best  suits 
the  occasion,  or  one  may  be  used  in  conjunction  with  another. 

32.  Signals  should  be  freely  used  in  instruction,  in  order  that 
oflicers  and  men  may  readily  know  them.  In  making  arm  sig- 
nals the  saber,  rifle,  or  lieaddress  may  be  lield  in  the  hand. 

33.  Officei-s  and  men  fix  their  attention  at  the  first  word  of 
command,  the  first  note  of  the  bugle  or  whistle,  or  the  first 
motion  of  the  signal.  A  signal  includes  both  the  preparatory 
command  and  the  command  of  execution ;  tlie  movement  com- 
mences as  soon  as  the  signal  is  understood,  unless  otherwise 
prescribed. 

34.  Except  in  movements  executed  at  aitention,  commanders 
or  leaders  of  subdivisions  rei)eat  orders,  commands,  or  signals 
whenever  such  repetition  i.s  deemed  necessary  to  insure  prompt 
and  correct  execution. 

Officers,  platoon  leaders,  guides,  and  musicians  are  equipped 
with  whistles.  Guides  and  musicians  assist  by  repeating  signals 
when  necessary. 

35.  Prescribed  signals  are  limited  to  such  as  are  essential 
as  a  substitute  for  the  voice  under  conditions  which  i-ender  the 
voice  inadequate. 

Before  or  during  an  engagement  special  signals  may  be  agreed 
upon  to  facilitate  the  solution  of  such  special  difficulties  as  the 
particular  situation  is  likely  to  develop,  but  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  simplicity  and  cr-rtainty  are  indispensable  qualities 
of  a  signal. 

Orders. 

36.  In  these  regulations  an  order  embraces  instructions  or 
directions  given  orally  or  in  writing  in  terms  suited  to  the  par- 
ticular occasion  and  not  pre.scribed  herein. 

Orders  are  employed  only  when  the  commands  prescribed 
herein  do  not  sufficiently  indicate  the  will  of  the  commander. 

Orders  are  more  fully  described  in  paragraphs  378  to  383, 
inclusive. 

15 


16  GKDERS,  COMMANDS,  AND  SIGNALS. 

Commands. 

37.  In  these  regulations  a  command  is  tlie  will  of  the  com- 
mander expressed  in  the  phraseology  prescribed  herein. 

38.  There  are  two  kinds  of  commands: 

The  preparatory  command,  such  as  forward,  indicates  the  move- 
ment that  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  MARCH,  HALT,  or  ARMS, 
causes  the  execution. 

Preparatory  commands  are  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of 
execution  by  CAPITALS. 

Where  it  is  not  mentioned  in  the  text  who  gives  the  com- 
mands prescribed,  they  are  to  be  given  by  the  commander  of  the 
unit  concerned. 

The  preparatory  command  should  be  given  at  such  an  interval 
of  time  before  the  command  of  execution  as  to  admit  of  being 
properly  understood ;  the  command  of  execution  sliould  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  movement  is  to  commence. 

The  tone  of  command  is  animated,  distinct,  and  of  a  loudness 
proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  for  whom  it  is  intended. 

Each  preparatory  conimaud  is  enunciated  distinctly,  with  a 
rising  inflection  at  the  end,  and  in  such  manner  that  the  com- 
mand of  execution  may  be  more  energetic. 

The  command  of  execution  is  firm  in  tone  and  brief. 

39.  Majors  and  commanders  of  units  larger  than  a  battalion 
repeat  such  commands  of  their  superiors  as  are  to  be  executetl 
by  their  units,  facing  their  units  for  that  purpose.  The  bat- 
talion is  the  largest  unit  that  executes  a  movement  at  the  com- 
mand of  execution  of  its  commander. 

40.  When  giving  commands  to  troops  it  is  usually  best  to 
face  toward  them. 

Indifference  in  giving  commands  must  be  avoided  as  it  leads 
to  laxity  in  execution.  Commands  should  be  given  with  spirit 
at  all  times. 

Bugle  Signals. 

41.  The  authorized  bugle  signals  are  published  in  Part  V  of 
these  regulations. 

The  following  bugle  signals  may  be  used  off  the  battle  field, 
when  not  likely  to  convey  information  to  the  enemy : 
Attention:  Troops  are  brought  to  attention. 


ORDERS,  COMMANDS,  AND  SIGNALS.  If 

Attention  to  orders:  Troops  fix  their  atteution. 

Forward,  march:  Used  also  to  execute  quick  time  from  double 
time. 

Double  time,  march. 

To  the  rear,  march:  lu  close  oi'der,  execute  squads  right  about. 

Halt. 

Assemble,  march. 

The  following  bugle  signals  may  be  used  ou  the  battle  field : 

Fix  bayonets. 

Charge. 

Assemble,  march. 

These  siguals  are  used  only  when  Intended  for  the  entire 
firing  line;  hence  they  can  be  authorized  only  by  the  commander 
of  a  unit  (for  example,  a  regiment  or  brigiide)  which  occupies 
a  distinct  section  of  the  battle  tield.  Exception:  Fix  bayonet. 
(See  par.  31S.) 

The  following  bugle  signals  are  used  in  exceptional  cases  on 
the  battle  field.  Their  principal  uses  are  in  field  exercises  and 
practice  firing. 

Commence  firing:  Oflicers  charged  with  fire  direction  and  con- 
trol open  fire  as  soon  as  practicable.  When  given  to  a  firing 
line,  the  signal  is  equivalent  to  fire  at  will. 

Cease  firing:  All  parts  of  the  line  execute  cease  firing  at  once. 

These  signals  are  not  used  by  units  smaller  than  a  regiment, 
excei>t  when  such  unit  is  independent  or  detached  from  its 
regiment. 

Whistle  Signals. 

42.  Attention  to  orders.  A  short  blast  of  the  whistle.  This 
signal  is  used  on  the  march  or  in  combat  when  necessary  to  fix 
the  attention  of  troops,  or  of  their  commanders  or  leaders,  pre- 
paratory to  giving  commands,  orders,  or  signals. 

When  the  firing  line  is  firing,  each  squad  leader  suspends 
firing  and  fixes  his  attention  at  a  short  blast  of  his  platoon 
leader's  whistle.  The  platoon  leader's  subsequent  commands  or 
signals  are  repeated  and  enforced  by  the  squad  leader.  It  a 
squad  leader's  attention  is  attracted  by  a  whistle  other  than 
that  of  his  platoon  leader,  or  if  there  are  no  orders  or  commands 
to  convey  to  his  squad  he  resumes  firing  at  once. 

Suspend  firing.     A  long  blast  of  the  whistle. 
19069° — 14 2 


18  ORDERS,  COMMANDS,  AUTD  SIGNALS. 

Arm  Signals.  .nJ'. 

43.  The  following  arm  signals  are  prescribed-  In  mailing 
signals  either  arm  may  be  used.  Officers  who  receive  signals 
on  the  firing  line  "  repeat  back  "  at  oncei  to  prevent  misunder- 
standing. 

Forward,  march.  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder;  straighten 
and  hold  the  arm  horizontally,  thrusting  it  in  direction  of 
march. 

This  signal  is  also  used  to  execute  quick  time  from  double 
time. 

Halt.  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder;  thrust  the  hand  upward 
and  bold  the  arm  vertically. 

Double  time,  march.  Carry  the  hand  to  the  shoulder;  rapidly 
thrust  the  hand  upward  the  full  extent  of  the  arm  several  times. 

Squads  right,  march.  liaise  the  arm  laterally  until  horizontal: 
carry  it  to  a  vertical  position  above  the  head  and  swing  it 
several  times  between  the  vertical  and  horizontal  positions. 

Squads  left,  march,  liaise  the  arm  laterally  until  horizontal; 
carry  it  downward  to  the  side  and  swing  it  several  times  be- 
tween the  downward  and  horizontal  jjositions. 

Squads  right  about,  march  (if  in  close  order)  or,  To  the  rear, 
march  (if  in  skirmish  line).  E]xtend  the  arm  vertically  above 
the  head;  carry  it  laterally  downward  to  the  side  and  swing 
it  several  times  between  the  vertical  and  downward  i)Ositions. 

Change  direction  or  Column  right  (left),  march.  The  hand  on  the 
side  toward  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made  is  car- 
ried across  the  body  to  the  opposite  shoulder,  forearm  horizon- 
tal; then  swing  in  a  horizontal  plane,  arm  extended^  poiftting 
in  the  new  direction. 

As  skirmishers,  march.  HaiSe  both  ariiis  laterally  until  hori- 
zontal. 

As  skirmishers,  guide  center,  march.  Raise  both  arms  laterally 
until  horizontal ;  swing  both  simultaneously  upward  until  ver- 
tical and  return  to  the  horizontal ;  repeat  several  times. 

As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left),  march.  Raise  both  arms  lat- 
erally until  horizontal;  hold  the  arm  on  the  side  of  the  guide 
steadily  in  the  horizontal  position;  swing  the  other  upward 
until  vertical  and  return  it  to  the  horizontal ;  repeat  se\  eral 
times. 

Assemble,  march.  Raise  the  arm  vertically  to  its  full  extent 
and  descri^"^  hori^ontsii  rircle^ 


ORDERS.  COMMANDS,  AND  SIONAIS,  Itf 

Range,  or  Change  elevation.  To  announce  range,  extend  the  arm 
towai'd  the  leaders  or  men  lor  whom  the  si^ial  is  intended, 
fist  closed;  by  keeping  the  fist  closed  battle  sight  is  indicated;  by 
opening  and  closing  the  fist,  expose  thumb  and  fingers  to  a  num- 
ber equal  to  the  hundreds  of  yards;  to  add  50  yards  describe  a 
short  horizontal  line  with  forefinger.  To  change  elevation,  indi- 
cate the  amount  of  increase  or  decrease  by  fingers  as  above;  point 
upward  to  indicate  increase  and  downward  to  indicate  decrease. 

Suspend  firing.  Raise  and  hold  the  forearm  steadily  in  a  hori- 
zontal jtosition  in  front  of  tlie  forehead,  palm  of  the  hand  to 
the  front. 

Cease  firing.  Raise  the  forearm  as  in  suspend  firing  and  swing 
it  up  and  down  several  times  in  front  of  the  face. 

Platoon.  Extend  tlie  arm  horizontally  toward  the  platooit 
leadei' :  ilescribe  small  circles  with  the  hand.     (See  par.  44.) 

Squad.  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  toward  the  platoon  leader ; 
swing  the  hand  ui>  and  down  from  the  wrist.     (See  par.  44.) 

Rush.  Same  as  double  time. 

44.  The  signals  platoon  and  squad  are  intended  primarily  for 
comniunicatlou  between  the  captain  and  his  platoon  leaders. 
The  signal  platoon  or  squad  indicates  that  the  platoon  com- 
mander is  to  cause  the  signal  which  follows  to  be  executed  by 
platoon  or  squad. 

Flag  Signals. 

45.  The  signal  flags  described  below  are  carried  by  the  com- 
pany nnisicians  in  the  field. 

In  a  regiment  in  which  it  is  impracticable  to  make  the  perma- 
nent biittalion  division  alphabetically,  the  flags  of  a  battalion 
are  as  shown  :  flags  are  assigned  to  the  companies  alphabetically, 
within  their  respective  battalions,  in  the  order  given  below. 

First  battalion : 

Company  A.  Red  field,  white  square. 

Company  B.  Red  field,  blue  square. 

Company  C.  Red  field,  white  diagonals. 

Company  D.  Red  field,  blue  diagonals. 
Second  battalion : 

Company  E.  White  field,  red  square. 

Company  F.  White  field,  blue  square. 

Company  G.  White  field,  red  diagonals. 

Company  H.  White  field,  blue  diagonals. 


20 


ORDERS,  COMMANDS,  AND  SIGNALS. 


Third  battalion:  ■ 

Company  I.  Bine  field,  retl  square. 

Company  K.  Blue  field,  white  square. 

Company  L.  Blue  field,  red  diagonals. 

Company  M.  Blue  field,  white  diagonals. 
46.  In  addition  to  their  use  in  visual  signaling,  these  flags 
serve  to  mark  the  assembly  point  of  the  company  when  dis- 
organized by  combat,  and  to  mark  the  location  of  the  company 
in  bivouac  and  elsewhere,  when  such  use  is  desirable. 

4  7.  For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the  reserve 
or  commander  in  reai%  the  subjoiued  signals  (Signal  Corps 
codes)  are  prescribed  and  should  be  memorized.  In  transmis- 
sion, their  concealment  from  the  enemy's  view  should  be  insured. 
In  the  absence  of  signal  flags,  the  headdress  or  other  substitute 
mav  be  used. 


Letter  of 
alpliabet. 

If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the 
firing  line. 

If  signaled  from  the  firing  line  to 
tlic  rear. 

AAA 

c  c  c 

C  F 

Ammunition  going  forward 

Charge  (mandatory  at  all  times) . . 

Ammimition  requked.                   ' 

Am  about  to  charge  if  no  instruft; 

tions  to  tlie  contrary.                     , 

Cease  firing.                 "                       * 

D  T 

F  , 

Commence  firing 

P  B 

Fix  bayonets 

instructions  to  the  contrary. 

H  HH.... 

Halt 

L 

Lett 

Left. 

N 

Negative 

Negative. 

O 

Q 

What  is  tlie  range  ? 

WJiat  is  the  range  V 

Range. 

Right. 

Support  needed. 

Suspend  firing. 

Target. 

Affirmative. 

R 

R  T 

Right 

ss  s 

SUF 

Suspend  firing 

T 

Target 

y 

Affirmative -  . 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

48.  The  instructor  explains  briefly  each  movement,  first  exe- 
cuting it  himself  if  practicable.  He  requires  the  recruits  to 
take  the  proijer  positions  unassisted  and  does  not  touch  them 
for  the  purpose  of  correcting  them,  except  when  they  are  unable 
to  correct  themselves.  He  avoids  keeping  them  too  long  at  the 
same  movement,  although  each  should  be  understood  before 
passing  to  anotht^r.  He  exacts  by  degi'ees  the  desired  precision 
and  uniformity. 

49.  In  order  that  all  may  advance  as  rapidly  as  their  abili- 
ties permit,  the  recruits  are  grouped  according  to  proficiency  as 
instruction  progresses.  Those  who  lack  aptitude  and  quickness 
are  separated  from  the  others  and  placed  under  experienced 
drill  masters. 

INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT  ARMS. 

50.  For  preliminary  instruction  a  number  of  recruits,  usually 
not  exceeding  three  or  four,  are  formed  as  a  squad  in  single 
rank. 

Position  of  the  Soldier,  or  Attention. 

51.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45°. 

Knees  straight  without  stitfness. 

Hips  level  and  drawn  back  slightly;  body  erect  and  resting 
equally  on  hips ;  chest  lifted  and  arched ;  shoulders  square  and 
falling  equally. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the  seam 
of  the  trousers. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  drawTi  in  so  that 
the  axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical ;  eyes  straight  to  the 
front. 

Weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and  balls 
of  the  feet. 

The  Rests. 

52.  Being  at  a  halt,  the  commands  are:  FALL  OUT;  REST; 
AT  EASE;  and.  1.  Parade,  -J..  REST. 

21 


22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

At  the  command  fall  out,  the  men  may  leave  the  ranks,  but 
are  required  to  remaiu  iu  the  immediate  vicinity.  They  resume 
their  former  places,  at  attention,  at  the  command  fall  in. 

At  the  command  rest  each  man  Ijeeps  one  foot  in  place,  but  is 
not  required  to  preserve  silence  or  immobility. 

At  the  command  at  ease  each  man  Iteeps  one  foot  in  place 
and  is  required  to  preserve  silence  but  not  immobility. 

53.  1.  Parade,  2.  REST.  Carry  the  right  foot  6  inches  straight 
to  the  rear,  left  knee  slightly  bent;  clasp  the  hands,  without 
constraint,  in  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  fingers  joined, 
left  hand  uppermost,  left  thumb  clasi>ed  by  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  right  hand ;  preseme  silence  and  steadiness  of 
position. 

•  54.  To  resume  the  attention:  1.  i.quad,  2.  ATTEftTION. 
''The  men  tal<e  the  ]x»sition  of  the  soldier. 

Eyes  Right  or  Left. 

55.  1.  Eyes,  2.  RIGHT  (LEFT),  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  right,  turn  the  head  to  the  right  oblique, 
eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be 
in,  the  same  rank.  At  the  command  front,  turn  the  head  and 
eyes  to  the  front. 

Facings. 

56.  To  the  flank:  1.  Riffht  (left),  2.  FACE. 

Raise  slightly  the  left  heel  and  right  toe;  face  to  the  right, 
turning  on  the  right  heel,  assisted  by  a  slight  pressure  on  the 
ball  of  the  left  foot ;  place  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right. 
Left  face  is  executed  on  the  left  heel  lu  the  cori'espondiug 
manner. 

Right  (left)  half  face  is  executed  similarly,  facing  45°. 

"To  face  in  marching"  and  advance,  turn  on  the  ball  of 
either  foot  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot  iu  the  new  line  of 
direction;  to  face  in  marching  without  gaining  ground  in  the 
new  direction,  turn  on  the  ball  of  either  foot  and  mark  time. 

57.  To  the  rear:  1.  About,  2.  FACE. 

Carry  the  toe  of  the  right  foot  about  a  half  foot-length  to  the 
rear  and  slightly  to  the  left  of  the  left  heel  without  changing 
the  position  of  the  left  foot;  face  to  the  rear,  turning  to  the 
right  on  the  left  heel  and  right  toe;  place  the  right  heel  by  the 
«,ide  of  the  left.  '^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  9*" 

Salute  with  the  Hand. 

58.  1.  Hand,  2.  SALUTE. 

Raise  tbe  right  liaiul  smartly  till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger 
touches  the  lower  part  of  the  headdress  above  the  right  eye, 
thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  joined,  palm  to  the  left,  fore- 
arm inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist  straight;  at  the  same 
time  look  toward  yie  person  saluted.  (TWO)  Drop  the  arm 
smartly  by  the  side.  ' 

For  rules  governing  salutf^,  s^  *'  Honors  and  Salutes,"  pars. 
758-7(55. 

STEPS  AND  MARCHINGS. 

59.  All  steps  and  marchings  executed  from  a  halt,  except 
right  step,  begin  with  the  left  foot. 

60.  The  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time  is  30  inches, 
measured  from  heel  to  heel,  and  the  cadence  is  at  the  rate  of 
120  steps  per  minute. 

The  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time  is  36  inches;  the 
cadence  is  at  the  rate  of  ISO  steps  per  minute. 

The  instructor,  when  ne<^essary,  indicates  the  cadence  of  ttie 
step  by  calling  one,  two,  three,  four,  or  /eft,  right,  the  instant  the 
left  and  right  foot,  resijectively,  should  be  planted. 

61.  All  stejis  and  marchings  and  movements  involving  march 
are  executed  In  quick  time  unless  the  squad  be  marching  in 
double  time,  or  double  time  bn  added  to  the  command;  in  the 
latter  case  double  time  is  added  to  the  pre))aratory  command. 
Example:  1.  Squad  right,  double  time,  2.  MARCH  (School  of  the 
Squad).  '"  . 

Quick  Time. 

62.  Being  at  a  halt,  to  march  forward  in  quick  time:  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  forward,  shift  the  weight  of  the  body  to  the 
right  leg,  left  knee  straight. 

At  the  command  march,  move  the  left  foot  smartly  straight 
forward  30  inches  from  the  right,  sole  near  the  ground,  and 
plant  it  without  shock ;  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right 


24  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

foot   and   plant   it   as  above;  continue  the   march.     The   arms 
swing  naturally. 

63.  Being  at  a  halt,  or  in  march  in  quick  time,  to  march  in 
double  time:  1.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  at  the  first  command  shift  the  weight  of  the 
body  to  the  right  leg.  At  the  command  march,  raise  the  fore- 
arms, fingers  closed,  to  a  horizontal  position  along  the  waist 
line;  take  up  an  easy  run  with  the  step  and  cadence  of  double 
time,  allowing  a  natural  swinging  motion  to*"  the  arms. 

If  marching  in  quick  time,  at  the  command  march,  given  as 
either  foot  strikes  the  ground,  take  one  step  in  quick  time,  and 
then  step  off  in  double  time. 

64.  To  resume  the  quick  time:  1.  Quick  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
advance  and  plant  the  other  foot  in  double  time;  resume  the 
quick  time,  dropping  the  hands  by  the  sides. 

To  Mark  Time. 

65.  Being  in  march:     1.  Mark  time,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
advance  and  plant  the  other  foot ;  bring  up  the  foot  in  rear  and 
continue  the  cadence  by  alternately  raising  each  foot  about 
2  inches  and  planting  it  on  line  with  the  other. 

Being  at  a  halt,  at  the  command  march,  raise  and  plant  the 
feet  as  described  above. 

The  Half  Step. 

66.  1.  Half  step,  2.  MARCH. 

Take  steps  of  15  inches  in  quick  time,  IS  inches  in  double 
time. 

6  7.  Forward,  half  step,  halt,  and  mark  time  may  be  executetl 
one  from  the  other  in  quick  or  double  time. 

To  resume  the  full  step  from  half  step  or  mark  time:  1.  For- 
ward, 2.  MARCH. 

Side  Step. 

68.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Right  (left)  step, 
2.  MARCH. 

Carry  and  plant  the  right  foot  15  inches  to  the  right;  bring 
the  left  foot  beside  it  and  continue  the  movement  in  the  cadence 
of  quick  time. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  ^ 

The  side  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not  exe- 
cuted in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  side  step  is  executed  at  trail  withxjut 
command. 

Back  Step. 

69.  Being  at  a  halt  or  mark  time:  1.  Backward,  2.  MARCH. 
Take  steps  of  15  inches  straight  to  the  rear. 

The  back  step  is  used  for  short  distances  only  and  is  not  exe- 
cuted in  double  time. 

If  at  order  arms,  the  back  step  is  executed  at  trail  without 
command. 

To  Halt. 

70.  To  arrest  the  march  in  quick  or  double  time:  1.  Squad, 
2.  HALT. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  as  either  foot  strikes  the  ground, 
plant  the  other  foot  as  in  marching;  raise  and  place  the  first 
foot  by  the  side  of  the  other.  If  in  double  time,  drop  the  hands 
by  the  sides. 

To  March  by  the  Flank. 

71.  Being  in  march:  1.  By  the  right  (left)  flank,  2.  MARCH. 
At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 

ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  then  face  to  the  right 
In  marching  and  step  off  in  the  new  direction  with  the  right  foot 

To  March  to  the  Rear. 

72.  Being  in  march :  1.  To  the  rear,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  riglit  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot ;  turn  to  the  right  about 
on  the  balls  of  both  feet  and  immediately  step  off  with  the  left 
foot. , 

If  marching  in  double  time,  turn  to  the  right  about,  taking 
four  steps  in  place,  keeping  the  cadence,  and  then  step  off  with 
the  left  foot. 

Change  Step. 

73.  Being  in  march:  1.  Change  step,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  given  as  the  right  foot  strikes  the 
ground,  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot;  plant  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot  near  the  heel  of  the  left  and  step  off  with  the  left  foot. 

The  change  on  the  right  foot  is  similarly  executed,  the  com- 
mand march  being  given  as  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground 


26  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

MAHUAL  OF  ARMS. 

74.  As  soon  as  practicable  the  recruit  is  taught  the  use, 
nomenclature  (PI.  I),  and  care  of  his  rifle;  when  fair  progress 
has  been  made  in  the  instruction  without  arms,  he  is  taught 
the -manual  of  arms;  instruction  without  arms  and  tliat  with 
arms  alternate. 

75.  The  following  rules  govern  the  carrying  of  the  piece: 
First.  The  piece  is  not  carried  with  cartridges  in  either  the 

chamber  or  the  magazine  except  when  specifically  ordered. 
When  so  loaded,  or  supposetl  to  be  loaded,  it  is  habitually  car- 
ried locked ;  that  is,  with  the  safety  lock  turned  to  the  "  safe." 
At  all  other  times  it  is  carried  unlocked,  with  the  trigger 
pulled. 

Second.  Whenever  troops  are  formed  under  arms,  pieces  are 
immediately  inspectetl  at  the  conunands:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS; 
3.  Order  (Right  shoulder^  port),  4.  ARMS. 

A  similar  inspection  is  made  immediately  before  dismissal. 

If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chaml)er  or  magazine  they  are 
removed  and  placed  in  the  belt. 

Third.  The  cat-olf  is  kept  turned  "off"  except  when  car- 
tridges are  actually  used. 

Fourth.  The  bayonet  is  not  fixed  except  in  bayonet  exercise, 
on  guard,  or  for  combat. 

Fifth.  Fall  in  is  executed  with  the  piece  at  the  order  afms. 
Fall  out,  rest,  and  at  ease  are  executed. as  without  arms.  On 
resuming  attention  the  position  of  order  arms  is  taken. 

Sixth.  If  at  the  order,  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  piece 
is  brought  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  march,  the 
three  motions  corresponding  with  the  first  three  steps.  Move- 
ments may  be  executed  at  the  trail  by  prefacing  the  ])repara- 
tory  command  with  the  words  at  trail ;  as,  1.  At  trail,  forward, 
2.  MARCH ;  the  trail  is  taken  at  the  command'  march. 

When  the  facings,  alignments,  open  and  close  ranks,  taking 
interval  or  distance,  and  assemblings  are  executed  from  the 
order,  raise  the  piece  to  the  trail  while  in  motion  and  resume 
the  order  on  halting. 

Seventh.  The  piece  is  brought  to  the  order  on  halting.  The 
execution  of  the  order  begins  when  the  halt  is  completed. 

Eighth.  A  disengaged  hand  in  double  time  is  held  as  when 
without  arms. 


<S4 


GL 


V/a 


caT-orr  sm/DL£. 


SL££y£  LOC*:  SPfffMG. 


TLOCK.   /& 


ej£croR/vN. 


SL(D£  CAP  SCfietf.- 


e^CrOP.      £X77?ACTQf? COLLAfi     SUD£ AW  SlfSC CAP./    WWSAGC  SCfi£W. 


exTMcrop.      r/x£o  basc.i  si/z^sc/for. /  w/ksmot scpof  /c/vob 

^i  DRfFT^LfDC.       m^OAGC  SCP£W  COLLAf? 

SAF£TY  LOCK  TfiUMB  P/£C£.  SA/TTY  LOCK  SP/NOL£.  F/P/NG  PW  SU£y£.   BOLT.    BAPP£L,       M0ya8L£^8AS£.     L£Ar.        ^Af^DGi/APD. 
f7P//VG  P/U  POD.  ' 
C0CfaM>  Pt£C£. 


SLCIVC 


m 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  87 

76.  The  following  rules  govern  the  execution  of  the  manual 
of  arms: 

First.  In  all  positions  of  the  left  hand  at  the  balance  (center 
of  gravity,  bayonet  uulixed)  the  thumb  clasps  the  piece;  the 
sling  is  included  in  the  grasp  of  the  hand. 

Second.  In  all  positions  of  the  piece  "  diagonally  across  the 
body  "  the  position  of  the  piece,  left  arm  and  hand  are  the  same 
as  in  port  arms. 

Third.  In  resuming  the  order  from  any  position  in  the 
manual,  the  motion  next  to  the  last  concludes  with  the  butt  of 
the  piece  about  o  inches  from  the  ground,  barrel  to  the  rear, 
the  left  hand  above  and. near  the  right,  steadying  the  piece, 
lingers  extended  and  joined,  forearm  and  wrist  straight  and  in- 
clining downward,  all  lingers  of  the  right  hand  grasping  the 
piece.  To  complete  the  order,  lower  the  piece  gently  to  the 
gi'ouud  with  the  right  hand,  drop  the  left  quickly  by  the  side, 
and  take  the  position  of  order  arms. 

Allowing  the  piece  to  drop  through  the  right  hand  to  the 
ground,  or  other  similar  abuse  of  the  rifle  to  produce  effect  in 
executing  the  manual,  is  prohibited. 

Fourth.  The  cadence  of  the  motions  is  that  of  quick  time; 
the  recruits  are  first  required  to  give  their  whole  attention  to 
the  details  of  the  motions,  the  cadence  being  gradually  ac- 
quired as  they  become  accustomed  to  handling  their  pieces. 
The  instructor  may  require  them  to  count  aloud  in  cadence 
with  the  motions. 

Fifth.  The  manual  is  taught  at  a  halt  and  the  movements  are, 
for  the  purpose  of  instruction,  divided  into  motions  and  exe- 
cuted in  detail;  in  this  case  the  command  of  execwf/o/;  deter- 
mines the  prompt  execution  of  the  first  motion,  and  the  comi 
mands,  two,  three,  four,  that  of  the  other  motions. 

To  execute  the  movements  in  detail,  the  instructor  first  cau- 
tions:  By  the  numbers;  all  movements  divided  into  motions  are 
then  executed  as  above  explained  until  he  cautions:  Without  the 
numbers;  or  commands  movements  other  than  those  in  the  man- 
ual of  arms. 

Sixth.  Whenever  circumstances  require,  the  regular  positions 
of  the  manual  of  arms  and  the  firings  may  be  ordered  without 
regard  to  the  previous  position  of  the  piece. 

Under  exceptional  conditions  of  weather  or  fatigue  the  rifle 
may  be  carried  in  any  manner  directed. 


28  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

77.  Position  of  order  arms  standing:  The  butt  rests  evenly  on 
the  groimd,  barrel  to  the  rear,  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with  toe 
of,  and  touchmg,  the  right  shoe,  arms  and  hands  hanging  nat- 
urally, right  hand  holding  the  piece  between  the  thumb  and 
hugers. 

78.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  carry  the  piece  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body,  barrel  to  the  rear  and  vertical,  grasp  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  balance,  forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the 
body.     (TWO)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

79.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  grasi)  it  smartly  with  both  hands;  the  right, 
palm  down,  at  the  small  of  the  stock ;  the  left,  palm  up,  at  the 
balance ;  barrel  up.  slojiing  to  the  left  and  crossing  opposite  the 
junction  of  the  neck  with  the  left  shoulder;  right  foi-earm  hori- 
zontal; left  forearm  resting  against  the  body;  the  piece  in  a 
vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  front. 

80.  Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  piece  diagonally  acro.ss  the  body  and  take  the  posi- 
tion of  port  arms. 

81.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  piece  to  a  vertical  position  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body  and  take  the  position  of  present  arms. 

82.  Being  at  present  or  port  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Let  go  with  the  right  hand;  lower  and  carry  the  piece  to  the 
right  with  the  left  hand ;  regras])  it  with  the  right  hand  just 
above  the  lower  band;  let  go  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the 
next  to  the  last  position  in  coming  to  the  order.'  (TWO)  Ck>m- 
plete  the  order.  ' 

83.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

With  the  right  hand  raise  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the- body;  carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  butt,  em- 
bracing it,  the  heel  between  the  first  two  fingers.  (TWO)  With- 
out changing  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  place  the  piece  on  the 
right  shoulder,  barrel  up  and  inclined  at  an  angle  of  about  45° 
from  the  horizontal,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder, 
right  elbow  near  the  side,  the  piece  in  a  vertical  plane  perpen- 
dicular to  the  front;  carry  the  left  hand,  thumb  and  fingers 
extended  and  joined,  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  tip  of  the  fore- 
finger touching  the  cocking  piece,  wrist  straigbt  and  elbow 
down.     (THREE)  l>rop  I  be  left  band  by  the  side. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  29 

84.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Press  the  l)utt  down  quickly  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  the  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO),  (THREE)  Execute  order  arms  as  described  from  port 
arms. 

85.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Change  the  right  hand  to  the  butt.     (TWO),  (THREE)  As  in 

right  shoulder  arms  from  order  arms. 

86.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

Press  the  butt  down  (luickly  and  throw  the  piece  diagonally 
across  the  body,  the  right  hand  retaining  its  grasp  of  the  butt. 
(TWO)  Change  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  .stock. 

87.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS. 
E.xecute  port  arms.     (THREE)  Execute  jn-eseut  arms. 

88.  Being  at  present  arms:  1.  Right  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 
Execute  port  arms.     (TWO),  (THREE),  (FOUR)  Execute  right 

shoulder  arms  as  from  port  arms. 

89.  Being  at  port  arms:  1.  Left  shoulder,  2.  ARMS. 

Carry  the  i)iece  with  the  right  hand  and  place  it  on  the 
left  shoulder,  barrel  ui>,  trigger  guard  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoul- 
der; at  the  same  time  grasp  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  heel 
between  first  and  second  fingers,  thumb  and  fingers  closed  on 
the  stock.     (TWO)  Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

Being  at  left  shoulder  arms:  1.  Port,  2.  ARMS. 

(!ra.sp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 
(TWO)  Carry  the  piece  to  the  right  with  the  right  hand,  regrasp 
it  with  the  left,  and  lake  the  position  of  port  arms. 

Left  shoulder  arms  may  be  ordered  directly  from  the  order, 
right  shoulder  or  itresent,  or  the  reverse.  At  the  command  arms 
execute  port  arms  and  continue  in  cadence  to  the  position 
ordered. 

90.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

Carry  the  right  foot  0  inches  straight  to  the  rear,  left  knee 
slightly  bent:  carry  the  nuizzle  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
body,  barrel  to  the  left :  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  just 
below  the  stacking  swivel,  and  with  the  right  hand  below  and 
against  the  left.      * 

Being  at  parade  rest:  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION. 

Resume  the  order,  the  left  hand  quitting  the  i)iece  opposite 
the  right  hip. 


30  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

91.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Trail,  2.  ARMS. 

Raise  tlie  piece,  right  arm  sliglitly  bent,  and  incline  the 
muzzle  forward  so  that  the  barrel  makes  au  angle  of  about  30'' 
with  the  vertical. 

When  it  can  be  done  without  danger  or  inconvenience  to 
others,  the  piece  may  be  grasped  at  the  balance  and  the  muzzle 
lowered  until  the  piece  is  horizontal ;  a  similar  position  in  the 
left  hand  may  be  used. 

92.  Being  at  trail  arms :  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

liower  the  piece  with  the  light  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

Rifle  Saluie, 

93.  Being  at  right  shoulder  arms:  1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 
Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  forearm 

horizontal,  palm  of  hand  down,  thumb  and  hngers  extended  and 
joined,  forefinger  touching  end  of  cocking  piece ;  look  toward  the 
person  saluted.  (TWO)  Drop  left  hand  by  the  side;  turn  head 
and  eyes  lo  the  front. 

94.  Being  at  order  or  trail  arms:  1.  Rifle,  2.  SALUTE. 
•f  Carry  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm  of  the 
hand  down,  thumb  and  Hngers  extended  and  joined,  foretinger 
against  piece  near  the  muzzle;  look  toward  the  pei'son  saluted. 
(TWO)  Di'op  the  left  hand  by  the  side;  turn  the  head  and  eyes 
to  the  front.  .  ■ 

For  rules  governing  salutes,  see  "  Honors  and  Salutes  "  (pars. 
758-765). 

,  , ,  The  Bayonet. 

^,'95.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Fix,  2.  BAYONET. 

It  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt  :  Execute  parade 
rest ;  grasp  the  bayonet  with  the  right  hand,  back  of  hand  to- 
ward the  body;  draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scabbard  and  fix  it 
on  the  barrel,  glancing  at  the  muzzle;  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  is  carried  on  the  haversack  :  Draw  the  bayonet 
with  the  left  hand  and  fix  if  in  the  most  cunvniiient  manner. 

96.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Unfix,  2.  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  sqabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt :  Execute  parade 
rest;  grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly  with  the  right  hand, 
pressing  the  spring  with  the  foretiuger  of  the  right  hand;  raise 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  31 

the  bayonet  until  the  handle  is  about  12  inches  above  the  muzzle 
of  the  piece ;  drop  the  poait  to  the  left,  bade  of  the  hand  toward 
the  body,  and,  glancing  at  the  scabbard,  return  the  bayonet,  the 
blade  passing  between  the  left  arm  and  the  body ;  regrasp  the 
piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  haversack:  Take 
the  bayonet  from  the  ritle  with  the  left  hand  and  return  it  to 
the  scabi)ard  in  the  most  convenient  manner. 

If  marching  or  lying  down,  the  bayonet  is  fixed  and  unflxeil 
in  tlie  most  expeditions  and  convenient  manner  and  the  piece 
returned  to  the  original  position. 

Fix  and  uulix  bayonet  are  exQCiJifed.  with  proipptness  and 
regnlaritv  l»ut  not  in  cadence. 

.97.  CHARGE  BAYONET.  Whether  executed  at  halt  or  in 
motion,  the  bayonet  is  held  towar^l  the  opi)onent  as  in  the  posi- 
tion   of    guard    in    the    Manual    for    Bayonet    Exercise. 

iOxen-isps  for  instruction  in  bayonet  combat  are  prescribed  in 
tl»e  Miinual  for  Bayonet  Exerci.se. , 

The  Inspeciion. 

98.  Being  at  order  arms:  I.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  second  command  take  the  position  of  port  arms. 
(TWO)  Seize  tlie  bolt  handle  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of 
the  right  hand,  turn  tlie  handle  up,  draw  the  bolt  back,  an^ 
glajK-e  at  the  chamber.  Having  found  tlie  chamber  empty,  or 
having  emiitied  it,  raise  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

99.  Being  at  inspection  arms:  1.  Order  (Right  shoulder,  port), 
2.  ARMS. 

At  th«  jjreiJai'atory  command  imsh  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the 
handle  down,  pull  the. trigger,  and  resume  yoor/  arms.  At  the 
couiiuand  ar/»s,  complete  the  movement  (W!dered. 

To  Dismiss  the  Squad. 

I  100.  Being  at  halt:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  '6.  Port,  4.  ARMS. 
5.  DISMISSED. 


T'?^  ITTT  '^C'  JCi'Tif:' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD. 

101.  Soldiers  are  grouped  into  squads  for  purposes  of  instruc- 
tion, discipline,  control,  and  order. 

102.  The  squad  proper  consists  of  a  corporal  and  seven 
privates. 

The  movements  in  the  School  of  the  Squad  are  designed  to 
make  the  squad  a  fixed  imit  and  to  facilitate  the  control  and 
movement  of  the  company.  If  the  number  of  men  grouped  is 
more  than  3  and  less  than  12,  they  are  formed  as  a  squad  of 
4  files,  the  excess  above  S  being  posted  as  file  closers.  If  the 
number  grouped  is  greater  than  11,  2  or  more  squads  are  formeil 
and  the  group  is  termed  a  platoon. 

For  the  instruction  of  recruits,  these  rules  may  be  modified. 

103.  The  corporal  is  the  squad  leader,  and  when  absent  is 
replaced  by  a  designated  private.  If  no  private  is  designated, 
the  senior  in  length  of  service  acts  as  leader. 

The  corporal,  when  in  ranks,  is  posted  as  the  left  man  in  the 
front  rank  of  the  squad. 

When  the  corporal  leaves  the  ranks  to  lead  his  squad,  his  rear 
rank  man  steps  into  the  front  rank,  and  the  file  remains  blank 
until  the  corporal  returns  to  his  place  in  ranks,  when  his  rear 
rank  man  steps  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

104.  In  battle  officers  and  sergeants  endeavor  to  preserve 
the  integrity  of  squads;  they  designate  new  leaders  to  replace 
those  disabled,  organize  new  squads  when  necessary,  and  see 
that  every  man  is  placed  in  a  squad. 

Men  ax'e  taught  the  necessity  of  remaining  with  the  squad  to 
which  they  belong  and,  in  case  it  be  broken  up  or  they  become 
separated  therefrom,  to  attach  themselves  to  the  nearest  squad 
and  platoon  leaders,  whether  these  be  of  their  own  or  of  another 
organization. 

105.  The  squad  executes  the  ha/t,  rests,  facings,  steps  and 
marchings,  and  the  manual  of  arms  as  explained  in  the  School 
uf  the  Soldier. 

To  Form  the  Squad. 

106.  To  form  the  squad  the  instructor  places  himself  3  paces 
in  front  of  where  the  center  is  to  be  and  commands:  FALL  IN. 

31i 


SCHOOL  or  THE  SttUAD.  33 

The  men  assemble  at  attention,  pieces  at  the  order,  and  are 
arranged  by  the  corporal  in  double  rank,  as  nearly  as  practicable 
in  order  of  height  from  right  to  left,  each  man  dropping  his  left 
hand  as  soon  as  the  man  on  his  left  has  his  interval.  The  rear 
rank  forms  with  distance  of  40  inches. 

The  instructor  then  comuiunds :  COUNT  OFF. 

At  this  command  all  except  the  right  file  execute  eyes  right, 
and  beginning  on  the  right,  the  men  in  each  rank  count  one, 
two,  three,  four;  each  man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front 
as  ho  counts. 

Pieces  are  then  Inspected. 

Alignments. 

107.  To  align  the  squad,  the  base  file  or  files  having  been 
established:  1.  Right  (Left),  2.  DRESS,  3.  FRONT. 

At  the  command  dress  uU  men  place  the  left  hand  upon  the 
hip  (whether  dressing  to  the  right  or  left)  ;  each  man,  except 
the  base  tile,  when  on  or  near  the  new  line  executes  eyes  right, 
and,  taking  steps  of  2  or  3  inches,  places  himself  so  that  his 
right  arm  rests  lightly  against  the  arm  uf  the  man  on  his  right, 
and  so  that  his  eyes  and  shoulders  are  in  line  with  those  of  the 
men  on  his  right ;  the  rear  rank  men  cover  in  file. 

The  instructor  verifies  the  alignment  of  both  ranks  from  the 
right  flank  and  orders  up  or  back  such  men  as  may  be  in  rear, 
or  in  advance,  of  the  line ;  only  the  men  designated  move. 

At  the  command  front,  given  when  the  ranks  are  aligned,  each 
man  turns  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  and  drops  his  left 
hand  by  his  side. 

In  the  first  drills  the  basis  of  the  alignment  is  established  on, 
or  ijarallel  to,  the  front  of  the  squad;  afterwards,  in  oblique 
directions. 

Whenever  the  position  of  the  base  file  or  files  necessitates  a 
considerable  movement  by  the  squad,  such  movement  will  be 
executed  by  marching  to  the  front  or  oblique,  to  the  flank  or 
backward,  as  the  case  may  be,  without  other  command,  and  at 
the  trail. 

108.  To  preserve  the  alignment  when  marching :  GUIDE 
RIGHT  (LEFT). 

The  men  preserve  their  intervals  from  the  side  of  the  guide, 
yielding  to  pressure  from  that  side  and  resisting  pressure  from 

19069°— 14 3 


34  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD. 

the  opposite  direction ;  they  recover  intervals,  if  lost,  by  gradu- 
ally opening  out  or  closing  in ;  they  recover  alignment  by  slightly 
lengthening  or  shortening  the  step ;  the  rear-rank  men  cover 
their  file  leaders  at  40  inches. 

In  double  rank,  the  front-rank  man  on  the  right,  or  designated 
flank,  conducts  the  march ;  when  marching  faced  to  the  flank, 
^5>the  leading  man  of  the  front  rank  is  the  guide. 

To  Take  Intervals  and  Distances. 

109.  Peing  in  line  at  a  halt:  1.  Take  interval,  2.  To  the  right 
(left),  3.  MARCH,  4.  Squad,  5.  HALT. 

At  the  second  cummand  the  rear-rank  men  march  backward 
4  steps  and  halt;  at  the  command  march  all  face  to  the  right 
and  the  leading  man  of  each  rank  steps  off;  the  other  men  step 
off  in  succession,  each  following  the  pi-eceding  man  at  4  paces, 
rear-rank  men  marching  abreast  of  their  file  leaders. 

At  the  command  halt,  given  when  all  have  their  intervals,  all 
halt  and  face  to  the  front. 

110.  Being  at  intervals,  to  assemble  the  squad:  1.  Assemble, 
to  the  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  front-rank  man  on  the  right  stands  fast,  the  rear-rank 
man  on  the  right  closes  to  40  inches.  The  other  men  face  to 
the  right,  close  by  the  shortest  Hue,  and  face  to  the  front. 

111.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt  and  having  counted  off:  1.  Take 
distance,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

At  the  command  march  No.  1  of  the  front  rank  moves  straight 
to  the  front ;  Nos.  2,  3,  and  4  of  the  front  rank  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3, 
and  4  of  the  rear  rank,  in  the  order  named,  move  straight  to 
the  front,  each  stepping  off  so  as  to  follow  the  preceding  man 
at  4  paces.  The  command  halt  is  given  when  all  have  their 
distances. 

In  case  more  than  one  sqnad  is  in  line,  each  squad  executes 
the  movement  as  above.  The  guide  of  each  rank  of  numbers  is 
right. 

112.  Being  at  distances,  to  assemble  the  squad:  1.  Assemble, 
2.  MARCH. 

No.  1  of  the  front  rank  stands  fast;  the  other  numbers  move 
forward  to  their  proper  places  in  line. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SftUAD.  35 

To  Stack  and  Take  Arms. 

113.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  STACK  ARMS. 

^J  Each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band  and  rests  the  butt  between  his 
feet,  barrel  to  the  front,  muzzle  inclined  slightly  to  the  front 
and  opposite  the  center  of  the  interval  on  his  right,  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  raising  the  stacking  swivel;  each  even  number 
of  the  rear  rank  then  passes  his  piece,  barrel  to  the  rear,  to 
his  file  leader,  who  grasps  it  between  the  bands  with  his  right 
hand  and  throws  the  butt  about  2  feet  in  advance  of  that  of 
his  own  piece  and  opposite  the  right  of  the  interval,  the  right 
hand  slipping  to  the  upper  band,  the  thumb  and  forefinger 
raising  the  stacking  swivel,  which  he  engages  with  that  of  his 
o^ni  piece;  each  odd  number  of  the  front  rank  raises  his  piece 
with  the  right  hand,  carries  it  well  forward,  barrel  to  the  front; 
the  left  hand,  guiding  the  stacking  swivel,  engages  the  lower 
hook  of  the  swivel  of  his  own  piece  with  the  free  hook  of  that 
of  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank ;  he  then  turns  the  barrel 
outward  into  the  angle  formed  by  the  other  two  pieces  and 
lowers  the  butt  to  the  ground,  to  the  right  of  and  against  the 
toe  of  his  right  shoe. 

The  stacks  made,  the  loose  pieces  are  laid  on  them  by  the 
even  numbers  of  the  front  rank. 

When  each  man  has  finished  handling  pieces,  he  takes  the 
position  of  the  soldier. 

114.  Being  in  line  behind  the  stacks  :  TAKE  ARMS. 

The  loose  pieces  are  returned  by  the  even  numbers  of  the 
front  rank ;  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  own 
piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  with 
his  right  hand,  gi-asping  both  between  the  bands;  each  odd 
number  of  the  front  rank  grasps  his  piece  in  the  same  way  with 
the  right  hand,  disengages  it  by  raising  the  butt  from  the 
ground  and  then,  turning  the  piece  to  the  right,  detaches  it 
from  the  stack :  each  even  number  of  the  front  rank  disengages 
and  detaches  his  piece  by  turning  it  to  the  left,  and  then  passes 
the  piece  of  his  rear-rank  man  to  him,  and  all  resume  the  order. 

11.5.  Should  any  squad  have  Nos.  2  and  3  blank  files.  No.  1 
rear  i*auk  takes  the  place  of  No.  2  rear  rank  in  making  and 
breaking  the  stack ;  the  stacks  made  or  broken,  he  resumes  his 
post. 

Pieces  not  used  in  making  the  stack  are  termed  loose  pieces. 

Pieces  are  never  stacked  with  the  bayonet  fixed. 


36  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD 

The  Oblique  March. 

lie.  For  tlie  instruction  of  recruits,  tlie  squad  being  in 
column  or  correctly  aligned,  the  instructor  causes  the  squad  to 
face  half  right  or  half  left,  points  out  to  the  men  their  relative 
positions,  and  explains  that  these  are  to  be  maintained  in 
the  oblique  march. 

117.  1.  Right  (Left)  oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

Each  man  steps  off  in  a  direction  45°  to  the  right  of  his 
original  front.  He  preserves  his  relative  position,  keeping  his 
shoulders  parallel  to  those  of  the  guide  (the  man  on  the  right 
front  of  the  line  or  column),  and  so  regulates  his  steps  that  the 
ranks  remain  parallel  to  their  original  front. 

At  the  command  halt  the  men  halt  faced  to  the  front. 

To  resume  the  original  direction:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  half  face  to  the  left  in  marching  and  then  move 
straight  to  the  front. 

If  at  half  step  or  mark  time  while  obliquing,  the  oblique  march 
is  resumed  by  the  couimandt^:  1.  Oblique,  2.  MARCH. 

To  Turn  on  Moving  Pivot. 

118.  Being  in  line:  1.  Right  (Left)  turn,  2.  MARCH. 

The  movement  is  executed  by  each  rank  successively  and  on 
the  same  ground.  At  the  second  command,  the  pivot  man  of 
the  front  rank  faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  takes  the 
half  step;  the  other  men  of  the  rank  oblique  to  the  right  until 
opposite  their  places  in  line,  then  execute  a  second  right  oblique 
and  take  the  half  step  on  arriving  abreast  of  the  i)ivot  man. 
All  glance  toward  the  marching  tlank  while  at  half  step  and 
take  the  full  step  without  command  as  the  last  man  arrives  on 
the  line. 

Right  (Left)  half  turn  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner.  The 
pivot  man  makes  a  half  change  of  direction  to  the  right  and 
the  other  men  make  quarter  changes  in  obliquing. 

To  Turn  on  Fixed  Pivot. 

119.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  march:  1.  Squad  right  (left), 
2.  MARCH. 

At  tlie  second  command,  the  right  flank  man  in  the  front  rank 
faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks  time;  the  other  front 
rank  men  oblique  to  the  right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SftTJAD.  «* 

pivot,  and  mark  time.  In  the  rear  rank  the  third  man  from  the 
right,  followed  in  column  by  the  second  and  first,  moves  straight 
to  the  front  until  in  rear  of  bis  front-rank  man,  when  all  face 
to  the  right  in  marching  and  mark  time;  the  other  number  of 
the  renr  rank  moves  straight  to  the  front  four  paces  and  places 
himself  abreast  of  the  man  on  his  right.  Men  on  the  new  line 
glance  toward  the  marching  flank  while  marking  time  and,  as 
the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line,  both  ranks  execute  forward, 
march,  without,  conmiand. 

120.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  and  halt:  1.  Squad  right  (left),  2. 
MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

The  third  command  is  given  immediately  after  the  second. 

The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  paragraph 

except  that  all  men,  on  arriving  on  the  new  line,  mark  time 

until  the  fourth  ct)nimand  is  given,  wlien  all  halt.     The  fourth 

.command  should  be  given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 

^-  "*  '121.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  about  and  march:  1.  Squad  right 

"  (left)  about,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command,  the  front  rank  twice  executes  squad 
right,  initiating  the  second  squad  right  when  the  man  on  the 
marching  flank  has  arrived  abreast  of  the  rank.  In  the  rear 
rank  the  third  man  from  the  right,  followed  by  the  second  and 
first  in  column,  moves  straight  to  the  front  until  on  the  pi'olonga- 
tion  of  the  line  to  be  occupied  by  the  rear  rank ;  changes  direc- 
tion to  the  right;  moves  in  the  new  direction  until  in  rear  of 
his  front-rank  man,  when  all  face  to  the  right  iu  marching, 
mark  time,  and  glance  toward  the  marching  flank.  The  fourth 
man  marches  on  the  left  of  the  third  to  his  new  position  ;  as  he 
arrives  on  the  line,  both  ranks  execute  forward,  march,  without 
command. 

122.  lieing  in  line,  to  turn  about  and  halt:  1.  Squad  right 
(left)  about,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Squad,  4.  HALT. 

The  third  command  is  given  immediately  after  the  second. 
The  turn  is  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  paragraph 
except  that  all  men,  on  arriving  on  the  new  line,  mark  time 
until  the  fourth  command  is  given,  when  all  halt.  The  fourth 
command  should  be  given  as  the  last  man  arrives  on  the  line. 

To  Follow  the  Corporal. 

12.'?.  Being  assembled  or  di-plnycd,  to  march  the  squad  with- 
out unnecessary  conunands.  the  cDriwral  places  himself  in  front 
of  it  and  cunuuands:  FOLLOW  ME. 


vi'?440l 


38  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SaUAD. 

If  iu  Hue  or  skirmish  liue,  No.  2  of  the  front  rank  follows  in 
the  trace  of  the  corporal  at  about  3  paces ;  the  other  men  con- 
form to  the  movements  of  No.  2,  guiding  on  him  and  maintain- 
ing their  relative  positions. 

If  in  column,  the  head  of  the  column  follows  the  corporal. 

To  Deploy  as  Skirmishers, 

124.  Being  in  anv  formation,  assembled:  1.  As  skirmishers, 
„  2.  MARCH. 

The  corporal  places  himself  in  front  of  the  squad,  if  not 
already  there.  Moving  at  a  run,  the  men  place  themselves 
abreast  of  the  corporal  at  half -pace  intervals,  Nos.  1  and  2  on 
his  right,  Nos.  3  and  4  on  his  left,  rear-rank  men  on  the  right 
of  their  file  leaders,  extra  men  on  the  left  of  No.  4 ;  all  then 
conform  to  the  corporal's  gait. 

When  the  squad  is  acting  alone,  skirmish  line  is  similarly 
formed  on  No.  2  of  the  fi'ont  rank,  who  stands  fast  or  con- 
tinues the  march,  as  the  case  may  be ;  the  corporal  places  him- 
self in  front  of  the  squad  when  advancing  and  in  rear  when 
halted. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  the  men  march  at  ease,  pieces 
"at  the  trail  unless  otherwise  ordered. 

'^"     The  corporal  is  the  guide  when  in  the  line;  otherwise  No.  2 
front  rank  is  the  guide. 

125.  The  normal  interval  between  skirmishers  is  one-half 
pace,  resulting  practically  in  one  man  per  yard  of  front.  The 
front  of  a  squad  thus  deployed  as  skirmishers  is  about  10  paces. 

To  Increase  or  Diminish  Intervals. 

126.  If  assembled,  and  it  is  desired  to  deploy  at  gi-eater  than 
the  normal  interval ;  or  if  deployed,  and  it  is  desired  to  increase 
or  decrease  the  interval:  1.  As  skirmishers,  (so  many)  paces, 
2.  /if  ARCH. 

Intervals  are  taken  at  the  indicated  number  of  paces.  If 
already  deployed,  the  men  move  by  the  flank  toward  or  away 
from  the  guide. 

The  Assembly. 

127.  Being  deployed:  1.  Assemble.  2.  MARCH. 

The  men  move  toward  the  corporal  and  form  in  their  proper 
Diaces. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SQUAD.  39 

If  the  corporal  continues  to  advance,  the  men  move  in  double 
time,  form,  and  follow  him. 

The  assembly  while  marching  to  the  rear  is  not  executed. 

Kneeling  and  Lying  Down. 

128.  If  standing  :  KNEEL. 

Half  face  to  the  right ;  carry  the  Wght  toe  about  1  foot  to  the 
left  rear  of  the  left  heel ;  kneel  on  right  knee,  sitting  as  nearly 
as  possible  on  the  right  heel ;  left  forearm  across  left  thigh ; 
piece  remains  in  position  of  order  arms,  right  hand  grasping  it 
above  the  lower  band. 

129.  If  standing  or  kneeling:  LIE  DOWN. 

Kneel,  but  with  right  knee  agains-t  left  heel ;  carry  back  the 
left  foot  and  lie  flat  on  the  belly,  inclining  body  about  35°  to  the 
I'ight ;  piece  horizontal,  barrel  up,  muzzle  off  the  gi-ound  and 
pointed  to  the  front ;  elbows  on  the  ground ;  left  hand  at  the 
balance,  right  hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock  opposite  the 
neck.    This  is  the  position  of  order  arms,  lying  down. 

130.  If  kneeling  or  lying  down:  RISE. 

If  kneeling,  stand  up,  faced  to  the  front,  on  the  ground  marked 
by  the  left  heel. 

If  lying  down,  raise  body  on  both  knees;  stand  up,  faced  to 
the  front,  on  the  ground  marked  by  the  knees. 

131.  If  lying  down:  KNEEL. 

Raise  the  body  on  both  knees;  take  the  position  of  kneel. 

132.  In  double  I'auk,  the  positions  of  kneeling  and  lying 
down  are  ordinarily  used  only  for  the  better  utilization  of  cover. 

When  deployed  as  skirmishers,  a  sitting  position  may  be  taken 
in  lieu  of  the  position  kneeling. 

LOADINGS  AND  FIRINGS. 

133.  The  commands  for  loading  and  firing  are  the  same 
whether  standing,  kneeling,  or  lying  down.  The  firings  are 
always  executed  at  a  halt. 

When  kneeling  or  lying  down  in  double  rank,  the  rear  rank 
does  not  load,  aim,  or  fire. 

The  instruction  in  firing  will  be  preceded  by  a  command  for 
loading. 

Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skirmish  line  only. 

134.  Pieces  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded 
without  command  until  the  command  unload,  or  inspection  arms, 
fresh  clips  being  inserted  when  the  magazine  is  exhausted. 


40  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SftTTAD. 

135.  The  aiming  point  or  target  is  carefully  pointed  out. 
This  may  be  done  before  or  after  announcing  the  sight  set- 
ting. Both  are  indicated  before  giving  the  command  for  firing, 
but  may  be  omitted  when  the  target  appears  suddenly  and  is 
unmistakable;  in  such  case  battle  sight  is  used  if  no  sight  set- 
ting is  announced. 

136.  The  target  or  aiming  point  having  been  designated  and 
the  sight  setting  announced,  such  designation  or  announcement 
need  not  be  repeated  until  a  change  of  either  or  both  is  neces- 
sary. 

Troops  are  trained  to  continue  their  fire  upon  the  aiming  point 
or  target  designated,  and  at  the  sight  setting  announced,  until 
a  change  is  ordered. 

137.  If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  position  of  load,  that 
position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight  setting; 
if  the  announcement  is  omitted,  the  position  is  taken  at  the  first 
command  for  firing. 

138.  When  deployed,  the  use  of  the  sling  as  an  aid  to  accu- 
rate firing  is  discretionary  with  each  man. 

To  Load. 

139.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt:  1.  WUh  dummy 
(blank  or  ball)  cartridges,  2.  LOAD. 

At  the  command  load  each  front-rank  man  or  skirmisher  faces 
half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  about  1  foot, 
to  such  position  as  will  insure  the  greatest  firmness  and  steadi- 
ness of  the  body ;  raises,  or  lowers,  the  piece  and  drops  it  into 
the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  left  thumb  extended  along  the 
stock,  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  breast,  and  turns  the  cut-off 
up.  With  the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back, 
takes  a  loaded  clip  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip  slots,  places 
the  thumb  on  the  powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers 
extending  around  the  piece  and  tips  resting  on  the  magazine 
floor  plate;  forces  the  cartridges  into  the  magazine  by  pressing 
down  with  the  thumb ;  without  removing  the  clip,  thrusts  the 
bolt  home,  turning  down  the  handle ;  turns  the  safety  lock  to 
the  "  safe "  and  carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 
Each  rear  rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes  a  similar 
position  opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front  ranlc  man, 
muzzle  of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front  rank,  and  loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces  being  held 
as  nearly  as  practicalile  in  the  jjositiun  of  load. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SftUAD.  41 

If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar;  if 

*  kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh ;  if  sitting  the 

elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees.    If  lying  down,  the  left  hand 

steadies  and  supports  the  piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of  the 

butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying 
down)  are  designated  as  that  of  load. 

140.  For  instruction  in  loading:  1.  Simulate,  2.  LOAD. 
Executed  as  above  described  except  that  the  cut-off  remains 

"  off  "  and  the  handling  of  cartridges  is  simulated. 

The  recruits  ai'e  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and  firing; 
after  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  may  be  used.  Later, 
blank  cartridges  may  be  used. 

141.  The  rifle  may  be  used  as  a  single  loader  by  turning  the 
magazine  "  oft'."  The  magazine  may  be  filled  in  whole  or  in 
part  while  "off"  or  "on"  by  pressing  cartridges  singly  down 
and  back  until  they  are  in  the  proi)er  place.  The  use  of 
the  rifle  as  a  single  loader  is,  however,  to  be  regarded  as 
exceptional. 

To  Unload. 

142.  UNLOAD. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  safety  lock  up  and  move 
bolt  alternately  back  and  forward  until  all  the  cartridges  are 
ejected.  After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected  the  chamber  is 
closetl  by  first  thrusting  the  bolt  slightly  forward  to  free  it 
from  the  stud  holding  it  in  place  when  the  chamber  is  open, 
pressing  the  follower  down  and  back  to  engage  it  under  the 
bolt  and  then  thrusting  the  bolt  home;  the  trigger  is  pulled. 
The  cartridges  are  then  picko<l  up,  cleaned,  and  returned  to  the 
belt  and  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  order. 

To  Set  the  Sight. 

143.  RANGE.  ELEVEN  HUNDRED  (EIGHT-FIFTY,  etc.),  or  BAT- 
TLE SIGHT. 

The  sight  is  set  at  the  elevation  indicated.  The  instructor 
explains  and  verifies  sight  settings. 

To  Fire  by  Volley. 

144.  1.  READY,  2.  AIM.  3.  Squad.  4.  FIRE. 

At  the  command  ready  turn  the  safety  lock  to  the  "ready;  " 
at  the  command  aim  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands  and  sup- 


42  SCHOOL  or  THE  SaXTAD. 

port  the  butt  firmly  against  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder, 
right  thumb  clasping  the  stock,  barrel  horizontal,  left  elbow 
well  under  the  piece,  right  elbow  as  high  as  the  shoulder ;  in- 
cline the  head  slightly  forward  and  a  little  to  the  right,  cheek 
against  the  stock,  left  eye  closed,  right  eye  looking  through  the 
notch  of  the  rear  sight  so  as  to  perceive  the  object  aimed  at, 
second  joint  of  forefinger  resting  lightly  against  the  front  of 
the  trigger  and  taking  up  the  slack ;  top  of  front  sight  is  care- 
fully raised  Into,  and  held  in,  the  line  of  sight. 

Each  rear-rank  man  aims  through  the  interval  to  the  right 
of  his  file  leader  and  leans  slightly  forward  to  advance  the 
muzzle  of  his  piece  beyond  the  front  rank. 

In  aiming  kneeling,  the  left  elbow  rests  on  the  left  knee, 
point  of  elbow  in  front  of  kneecap.  In  aiming  sitting,  the  elbows 
are  supported  by  the  knees. 

In  aiming  lying  down,  raise  the  piece  with  both  hands;  rest 
on  both  elbows  and  press  the  butt  firmly  against  the  right 
shoulder. 

At  the  command  fire  press  the  finger  against  the  trigger ;  fire 
without  deranging  the  aim  and  without  lowering  or  turning  the 
piece;  lower  the  piece  in  the  position  of  Load  and  load. 

145.  To  continue  the  firing:  1.  AIM,  2.  Squad,  3.  F/RE. 
Each   command    is   executed    as   previously    explained.     Load 

(from  magazine)  is  executed  by  drawing  back  and  thrusting 
home  the  bolt  with  the  right  hand,  leaving  the  safety  lock  at 
the  "  ready." 

To  Fire  at  Will. 

146.  FIRE  AT  WILL. 

Each  man,  independently  of  the  others,  comes  to  the  ready, 
aims  carefully  and  deliberately  at  the  aiming  point  or  target, 
fires,  loads,  and  continues  the  firing  until  ordered  to  suspend  or 
cease  firing. 

14  7.  To  increase  (decrease)  the  rate  of  fire  in  progress  the 
instructor  shouts :  FASTER  (SLOWER). 

Men  are  trained  to  fire  at  the  rate  of  about  three  shots  per 
minute  at  effective  ranges  and  five  or  six  at  close  ranges,  de- 
voting the  minimum  of  time  to  loading  and  the  maximum  to 
deliberate  aiming.  To  illustrate  the  necessity  for  deliberation, 
and  to  habituate  men  to  combat  conditions,  small  and  compara- 
tively indistinct  targets  are  designated. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SftUAD.  43 

To  Fire  by  Clip. 

148.  CLIP  FIRE. 

Executei.1  in  the  same  ruauuer  as  fire  at  will,  except  that  each 
man,  after  having  exhausted  the  cartridges  then  iu  the  piece, 
suspends  firing. 

To  Suspend  Firing. 

149.  The  instructor  blows  a  long  blast  of  the  whistle  and 
repeats  same,  if  necessary,  or  commands :  SUSPEND  FIRING. 

Firing  stops ;  pieces  are  held,  loaded  and  locked,  in  a  posi- 
tion of  readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  firing,  rear  sights 
unchanged.  The  men  continue  to  observe  the  target  or  aiming 
point,  or  the  place  at  which  the  target  disappeared,  or  at  which 
it  is  expected  to  reappear. 

This  whistle  signal  may  be  used  as  a  preliminary  to  ceose 
liring. 

To  Cease  Firing. 

150.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the 
position  of  load;  those  not  loaded,  are  loaded;  sights  are  laid, 
pieces  are  locked  and  brought  to  the  order. 

Cease  liring  is  used  for  long  jjauses,  to  pi'epare  for  changes  of 
position,  or  to  steady  the  men. 

151.  Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be  given 
at  any  time  after  the  preparatory  command  for  firing  whether 
the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not. 

THE  USE  OF  COVER. 

152.  The  recruit  should  be  given  careful  instruction  in  the 
individual  use  of  cover. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that,  in  taking  advantage  of 
natural  cover,  he  must  be  able  to  fire  easily  and  effectively 
upon  the  enemy ;  if  advancing  on  an  enemy,  he  must  do  so 
steadily  and  as  rapidly  as  possible ;  he  must  conceal  himself  as 
much  as  possible  while  firing  and  while  advancing.  While  set- 
ting his  sight  he  should  be  under  cover  or  lying  prone. 

153.  To  teach  him  to  fire  easily  and  effectively,  at  the  same 
time  concealing  himself  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  he  is 
practiced  in  simulated  firing  in  the  prone,  sitting,  kneeling,  and 
crouching  positions,  from  behind  hillocks,  trees,  heaps  of  earth 
or  rocks,  from  depressions,  gullies,  ditches,  doorways,  or  win- 
dows. He  is  taught  to  fire  around  the  right  side  of  his  conceal- 
ment whenever  possible,  or,  when  this  is  not  possible,  to  rise 
enough  to  fire  over  the  top  of  his  concealment. 


44  fSCHOOl  OF  THE  SaUAD. 

When  these  details  fire  understood,  he  is  required  to  select 
cover  with  reference  to  an  assumed  enemy  and  to  place  himself 
behind  it  in  proper  position  for  firing, 

154.  The  evil  of  remaining  too  long  in  one  place,  however 
good  the  concealment,  should  be  explained.  He  should  be  taught 
to  advance  from  cover  to  cover,  selecting  cover  in  advance 
before  leaving  his  concealment. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that  a  man  running  rapidly 
toward  an  enemy  furnishes  a  poor  target.  He  should  be  trained 
in  springing  from  a  prone  position  behind  concealment,  running 
at  top  speed  to  cover  and  throwing  himself  behind  it.  He  should 
also  be  practiced  in  advancing  from  cover  to  cover  by  crawling, 
or  by  lying  on  the  left  side,  rifle  grasped  in  the  right  hand,  and 
pushing  himself  forward  with  the  right  leg,  ,  , 

155.  He  should  be  taught  that,  when  fired  on  while  acting 
independently,  he  should  ilrop  to  the  ground,  seek  cover,  and 
then  endeavor  to  locate  his  enemy. 

156.  The  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the  use  of  cover  is  con- 
tinued in  the  combat  exercises  of  the  company,  but  he  must 
then  be  taught  that  the  proper  advance  of  the  platoon  or  com- 
pany and  the  effectiveness  of  its  fire  is  of  greater  importance 
than  the  question  of  cover  for  individuals.  He  should  also  be 
taught  that  he  may  not  move  about  or  shift  his  position  in  the 
firing  line  except  the  better  to  see  the  target, 

OBSERVATION. 

1.'5  7.  The  ability  to  use  his  ey^s  accurately  is  of  great  impor- 
tance to  the  soldier.  The  recruit  should  be  trnined  in  observing 
his  surrounding  fi'om  positions  and  when  on  the  march. 

He  should  be  i)racticed  in  pointing  out  and  naming  military 
features  of  the  ground;  in  distinguishing  between  living  beings; 
in  countng  distant  groups  of  objects  or  beings ;  in  recognizing 
colors  and  forms. 

158.  In  the  training  of  men  in  the  mechanism  of  the  firing 
line,  they  should  be  practiced  in  repeating  to  one  another  target 
and  aiming  point  designations  and  in  quickly  locating  and  point- 
ing out  a  designated  target.  They  should  be  taught  to  dis- 
tinguish, from  a  ])rone  position,  distant  objects,  particularly 
troops,  both  with  the  naked  eye  and  with  field  glasses.  Simi- 
larly, they  should  be  trained  iu  estimating  distances. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

159.  The  captain  is  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and  prac- 
tical instruction  of  his  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers,  not 
only  in  the  duties  of  their  respective  grades,  but  in  those  of  the 
next  higher  grades. 

IGO.  The  company  in  line  is  formed  in  double  rank  with  the 
men  arranged,  as  far  as  practicable,  according  to  height  from 
right  to  left,  the  tallest  on  the  right. 

The  original  division  into  squads  is  effected  by  the  command : 
COUNT  OFF.  The  squads,  successively  from  the  right,  count  off 
as  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  cori)orals  placing  themselves 
as  Nos.  4  of  the  front  rank.  If  the  left  squad  contains  less  than 
six  men,  it  is  either  increased  to  that  number  by  transfers  from 
other  squads  or  is  broken  up  and  its  members  assigned  to  other 
squads  and  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers.  These  squad  or- 
ganizations are  maiutalue<I,  by  transfers  if  necessary,  until  the 
company  becomes  so  reduced  in  numbers  as  to  necessitate  a  new 
division  into  squads.     No  squad  will  contain  less  than  six  men. 

161.  The  company  is  further  divided  into  two,  three,  or  four 
platoons,  each  consisting  of  not  less  than  two  nor  more  than 
four  squads.  In  garrison  or  ceremonies  the  strength  of  platoons 
may  exceed  four  squads. 

1C2.  At  the  formation  of  tlie  company  the  platoons  or  squads 
are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left  and  these  designa- 
tions do  not  change. 

For  convenience  in  giving  commands  and  for  reference,  the 
designations,  right,  center,  left,  when  in  line,  and  leading,  center, 
rear,  when  in  column,  are  applied  to  platoons  or  squads.  These 
designations  apply  to  the  actual  right,  left,  center,  head,  or  rear, 
in  whatever  direction  the  company  may  be  facing.  The  center 
squad  is  the  middle  or  right  middle  squad  of  the  company. 

The  designation  "  So-and-so's "  squad  or  platoon  may  also 
be  used. 

163.  Platoons  are  assigned  to  the  lieutenants  and  noncom- 
missioned officers,  in  order  of  rank,  as  follows:  1,  right;  2,  left; 
3,  center  (right  center)  ;  4,  left  center. 

45 


46 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


'  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  r  ;  r  I  I  I  I  ■[  I  I  I  I  J  11  J  I  I  I 


I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I 


COLUMN  or  SQDS  COLUMN  ^j  (lOSqds 

t  flkrp,  ('^^'^'^'V  orPLATOONS  '  2P 

•^    i^.  Plats) 


s!< 


M  [  I   M 
r-|-TT-i 
k1    I    I    !•! 

la 


1^    I    I  T* 

M  I   I   M 

ui  I   I   I 


n~nn 
M  M   ■ 


Plats) 


n     I     I     I     I     I     I     I     I     I     I     1     1^1     I     I     l-T-l-l 

3  Ix)   El   ril 


M-1    I    I    U-U_ 


Plate  II. 
THE    COMPANY 

CAPTAIN  ( 

1"  LIEUT  I 

;""U£uT.  I 

1"  ':£RCT.  I 

LEADER.  3"PLAT.  ( 

GOIPE  ( 

SQuaD  LEADER  1 

MUSICIAN  i 

OTHERS  IN  LINE 

OF  FILE -CLOSERS  ( 


LINEo.  PLATOONS 
US) 


I  I  I  I  f 
lyi  I  I  1 


J""  PLAT 
171    11    I 

rr-n-i 
oi  I  I  I 

I    I    I    I  T 


J""  PLAT 
1^    1    I  1 


(nSqds.-^  Plats) 


Mill 
I    I    I    J    I 


SKIRMISH    LiNL  -  HALTED.  (l6  Sqds.  -  aHqts) 

4'-PLAT.  3"°PlAT  ^-^PLAT 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  47 

The  noncommissioned  officers  next  in  rank  are  assigned  as 
guides,  one  to  eacli  platoon.  If  sergeants  still  remain,  they  are 
assigned  to  platoons  as  additional  guides.  When  the  platoon  is 
deployed,  its  guide,  or  guides,  accompany  the  platoon  leader. 

During  battle,  these  assignments  are  not  changed;  vacancies 
are  filled  by  noncommissioned  officers  of  the  platoon,  or  by  the 
nearest  available  officers  or  noncommissioned  officers  arriving 
with  reenforcing  troops. 

164.  The  first  sergeant  is  never  assigned  as  a  guide.  When 
not  commanding  a  platoon,  he  is  posted  as  a  file  closer  opposite 
the  third  file  from  the  outer  flank  of  the  first  platoon ;  and  when 
the  company  is  deployed  he  accompanies  the  captain. 

The  quartermaster  sergeant,  when  present,  is  assigned  accord- 
ing to  his  rank  as  a  sergeant. 

Enlisted  men  below  the  grade  of  sergeant,  armed  with  the 
rifle,  are  in  ranks  unless  serving  as  guides;  when  not  so  armed, 
they  are  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

Musicians,  when  required  to  play,  are  at  the  head  of  the 
column.  When  the  company  is  deployed,  they  accompany  the 
captain. 

16.').  The  company  executes  the  halt,  rests,  facings,  steps  and 
marchings,  manual  of  arms,  loadings  and  firings,  takes  intervals 
and  distances  and  assembles,  increases  and  diminishes  intervals, 
resumes  attention,  obliques,  resumes  the  direct  march,  preserves 
alignments,  kneels,  lies  down,  rises,  stacks  and  takes  arms,  as 
explained  in  the  Schools  of  the  Soldier  and  the  Squad,  sub- 
stituting in  the  commands  company  for  squad. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  platoons,  detachments,  details,  etc, 
substituting  their  designation  fur  squad  in  the  commands.  In  the 
same  manner  these  execute  the  movements  prescribed  for  the 
company,  whenever  possible,  substituting  their  designation  for 
company  in  tlie  commands. 

166.  A  company  so  depleted  as  to  make  division  into  platoons 
impracticable  is  led  by  the  captain  as  a  single  platoon,  but  re- 
tains the  designation  of  company.  The  lieutenants  and  first 
sergeant  assist  in  fire  control ;  the  other  sergeants  place  them- 
selves In  the  firing  line  as  skirmishers. 


48  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY, 

CLOSE  ORDER. 

Rules. 

3  6  7.  The  guides  of  the  right  and  left,  or  leading  and  rear, 
platoons,  are  the  right  and  left,  or  leading  and  rear,  guides, 
respectively,  of  the  company  when  it  is  in  line  or  in  column 
of  squads.     Other  guides  are  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

In  platoon  movements  the  post  of  the  platoon  guide  is  at  the 
head  of  the  platoon,  if  the  platoon  is  in  column,  and  on  the 
guiding  flank  if  in  line.  When  a  platoon  has  tvv^o  guides  their 
original  assignment  to  flanks  of  the  platoon  does  not  change. 

168.  The  guides  of  a  column  of  squads  place  themselves  on 
the  flank  opposite  the  file  closers.  To  change  the  guides  and 
file  closers  to  the  other  flank,  the  captain  commands:  1.  File 
closers  on  left  (right)  flank;  2.  MARCH.  The  file  closers  dart 
through  the  column ;  the  captain  and  guides  change. 

In  column  of  squads,  each  rank  preserves  the  alignment  to- 
ward the  side  of  the  guide. 

16  9.  Men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  do  not  e.xecute  the  load- 
ings or  firings. 

Guides  and  enlisted  men  in  the  line  of  file  closers  execute  the 
manual  of  arms  during  the  drill  unless  specially  excused,  when 
they  remain  at  the  order.  During  ceremonies  they  execute  all 
movements. 

170.  In  taking  intervals  and  distances,  unless  otherwise  di- 
rected, the  right  and  left  guides,  at  the  first  command,  place 
themselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  and,  with  them,  take  a 
distance  of  4  paces  from  the  rear  rank.  In  taking  intervals,  at 
the  command  march,  the  file  closers  face  to  the  flank  and  each 
steps  off  with  the  flle  nearest  him.  In  assembling  the  guides 
and  file  closers  resume  their  positions  in  line. 

171.  In  movements  executed  simultaneously  by  platoons  (as 
platoons  right  or  platoons,  column  right),  platoon  leaders  repeat 
the  preparatory  command  (platoon  right,  etc.),  applicable  to 
their  respective  platoons.  The  command  of  execution  is  given 
by  the  captain  only. 

To  Form  the  Company. 

172.  At  the  sounding  of  the  assembly  the  first  sergeant  takes 
position  G  paces  in  front  of  where  the  center  of  the  company  is 
to  be,  faces  it,  draws  saber,  and  commands:  FALL  IN. 


SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY.  49 

The  right  guide  of  the  company  places  himself,  facing  to  the 
front,  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  and  at  such 
point  that  the  center  of  the  company  will  be  G  paces  from  and 
opposite  the  first  sergeant;  the  squads  form  in  their  proper 
places  on  the  left  of  the  right  guide,  superintended  by  the  other 
sergeants,  who  then  take  their  jiosts. 

The  first  sergeant  commands:  REPORT.  Remaining  in  posi- 
tion at  the  order,  the  squad  leaders,  in  succession  from  the 
right,  salute  and  report :  All  present;  or,  Private(s)  ab- 
sent. The  first  sergeant  does  not  return  the  salutes  of  the 
squad  leaders;  he  then  commands:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3. 
Order,  4.  ARMS,  faces  about,  salutes  the  captain,  reports:  Sir, 
all  present  or  accounted  for,  or  the  names  of  the  unauthorized 
absentees,  and,  without  cummand,  takes  his  post. 

If  the  company  can  not  be  formed  by  squads,  the  first  ser- 
geant commands:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  li.  Right  shoulder,  4. 
ARMS,  and  calls  the  roll.  Each  man,  as  his  name  is  called, 
answers  here  and  executes  order  arms.  The  sergeant  then 
effects  the  division  into  squads  and  reports  the  company  as 
prescribed  above. 

The  captain  places  himself  12  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of. 
and  facing,  the  company  in  time  to  receive  the  report  of  the 
first  sergeant,  whose  salute  he  returns,  and  then  draws  saber. 

The  lieutenants  take  their  posts  when  the  first  sergeant  has 
reported  and  draw  saber  with  the  captain.  The  company,  if  not 
under  arms,  is  formed  in  like  manner  omitting  reference  to 
arms. 

173.  For  the  instruction  of  platoon  leaders  and  guides,  the 
company,  when  small,  may  be  formed  in  single  rank.  In  this 
formation  close  order  movements  only  are  executed.  The  single 
rank  executes  all  mu\ements  as  explahied  for  the  front  i*ank  of 
a  company.  .>Wj«1  .' 

To  Dismiss   the  Company.  ..  .i 

174.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  captain  directs  the  first 
sergeant :  Dismiss  the  company.  The  officers  fall  out ;  the  first 
sergeant  places  himself  faced  to  the  front,  3  paces  to  the  front 
and  2  paces  from  the  nearest  flank  of  the  company,  salutes, 
faces  toward  opposite  flank  of  the  compauv,  and  commands:  1, 
Inspection,  2.  ARMS,  3.  Port,  4.  ARMS,  5.  DISMISSED. 

Alignments. 

175.  The  alignments  are  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
School   of  the   Squad,   the  guide  being  established   instead   of 

19069°— 14 4 


50  SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY. 

the  flank  file.    The  rear-rank  man  of  the  flank  file  keeps  his 
head  and  eyes  to  the  front  and  covers  his  file  leader. 

At  each  alignment  the  captain  places  himself  in  prolongation 
of  the  line,  2  paces  from  and  facing  the  flank  toward  which 
the  dress  is  made,  verifies  the  alignment,  and  commands: 
FRONT. 

Platoon  leaders  take  a  like  position  when  required  to  verify 
alignments. 

Movements  on  the  Fixed  Pivot. 

176.  Being  in  line,  to  turn  the  company:  1.  Company  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT;' or,  3.  Forward,  4. 
MARCH. 

At  the  second  command  the  right-flank  man  in  the  front  rank 
faces  to  the  right  in  marching  and  marks  time;  the  other  front- 
rank  men  oblique  to  the  right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the 
pivot,  and  mark  time;  in  the  I'ear  rank  the  third  man  from  the 
right,  followed  in  column  by  the  second  and  first,  moves  straight 
to  the  front  until  in  rear  of  his  front-rank  man,  when  all  face 
to  the  right  in  marching  and  mark  time;  the  remaining  men  of 
the  rear  rank  move  straight  to  the  front  4  paces,  oblique  to  the 
right,  place  themselves  abreast  of  the  third  man,  cover  their  file 
leaders,  and  mark  time;  the  right  guide  steps  back,  takes  post 
on  the  flank,  and  marks  time. 

The  fourth  command  is  given  when  the  last  man  is  1  pace  in 
rear  of  the  new  line. 

The  command  ha/t  may  be  given  at  any  time  after  the  move- 
ment begins ;  only  those  halt  who  are  in  the  new  position. 
Each  of  the  others  halts  upon  arriving  on  the  line,  aligns  him- 
self to  the  right,  and  executes  front  without  command. 

177.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  platoons,  or  the 
reverse:  1.  Platoons  right  (left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT; 
or,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  i)latoon  as  described  for  the  company. 

Before  forming  line  the  captain  sees  that  the  guides  on  the 
flank  toward  which  the  movement  is  to  be  executed  are  cover- 
ing. This  is  efl:"ected  by  previously  announcing  the  guide  to 
that  flank. 

1  78.  Being  iu  line,  to  form  column  of  squads,  or  the  reverse; 
or,  being  in  line  of  platoons,  to  form  column  of  platoons,  or  the 
reverse :  1.  Squads  right  (left),  2.  MARCH;  or,  1.  Squads  right 
(left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company,  4.  HALT. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  51 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  iu  the  School  of  the 
Squad. 

If  the  company  or  platoons  be  formed  iu  line  toward  the  side 
of  the  file  closers,  they  dart  through  the  column  and  take 
posts  in  rear  of  the  company  at  the  second  command.  If  the 
column  of  squads  be  formed  from  line,  the  file  closers  take  posts 
on  the  pivot  flank,  abreast  of  and  4  inches  from  the  nearest 
rank. 

Movements  on  the  Moving  Pivot. 

1  79.  Being  in  line,  to  change  direction :  1.  Right  (Left)  turn, 
2.  MARCH.  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

Executed  as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  except 
that  the  men  do  not  glance  toward  the  marching  flank  and  that 
all  take  the  full  step  at  the  fourth  command.  The  right  guide 
is  the  pivot  of  the  front  rank.  Each  rear-rank  man  obliques  on 
the  same  ground  as  his  file  leader. 

180.  Being  iu  column  of  platoons,  to  change  direction:  1. 
Column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  platoon  com- 
mands :  Right  turn.  At  the  command  march  the  leading  platoon 
turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot;  its  leader  commands: 
1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH,  on  completion  of  the  turn.  Rear  platoons 
march  squarely  up  to  the  turning  point  of  the  leading  platoon 
and  turn  at  command  of  their  leaders. 

181.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  change  direction :  1.  Col- 
umn right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  second  command  the  front  rank  of  the  leading  squad 
turns  to  the  right  ou  moving  pivot  as  in  the  School  of  the 
Squad ;  the  other  ranks,  without  command,  turn  successively 
on  the  same  ground  and  in  a  similar  manner. 

182.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  line  of  platoons  or 
the  reverse :  1.  Platoons,  column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company. 

183.  Being  in  line,  to  form  column  of  squads  and  change 
direction :  1.  Squads  right  (left),  column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH; 
or,  1.  Right  (Left)  by  squads,  2.  MARCH. 

In  the  first  case  the  right  squad  initiates  the  column  right  as 
soon  as  it  has  completetl  the  squad  right. 

In  the  second  case,  at  the  command  march,  the  right  squad 
marches  forward;  the  remainder  of  the  company  executes  squada 


S2  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

right,  column  left,  and  follows  tlie  right  squad.  The  right  guide, 
wheu  he  has  posted  himself  in  front  of  the  right  squad,  takes 
four  short  steps,  then  resumes  the  full  step ;  the  right  squad 
conforms. 

184.  Being  in  line,  to  form  line  of  platoons:  1.  Squads  right 
(left),  platoons,  column  right  (left),  2.  MARCH;  or,  1.  Platoons, 
right  (left)  by  squads.  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company  in 
the  preceding  paragraph. 

Facing  or  Marching  to  the  Rear. 

185.  Being  in  line,  line  of  platoons,  or  in  column  of  platoons 
or  squads,  to  face  or  march  to  the  rear:  1.  Squads  right  (left) 
about,   2.  MARCH;    or,    1.  Squads    right    (left)    about,    2.  MARCH, 

3.  Company,  4.  HALT. 

Executed  by  each  squad  as  described  in  the  School  of  the 
Squad. 

If  the  company  or  platoons  be  in  column  of  squads,  the  file 
closers  turn  about  toward  the  column,  and  take  their  posts; 
if  in  line,  each  darts  through  the  nearest  interval  between 
squads. 

186.  To  march  to  the  rear  for  a  few  paces:  1.  About,  2. 
FACE,  3.  Forward,  4.  MARCH. 

If  in  line,  the  guides  place  themselves  in  the  rear  rank,  now 
the  front  rank;  the  file  closers,  on  facing  about,  maintain  their 
relative  positions.  No  other  movement  is  executed  until  the 
line  is  faced  to  the  original  front. 

On  Right  (Left)  Into  Line. 

'  187.  Being  in  column  of  platoons  or  squads,  to  form  line  on 
right  or  left:  3.  On  right  ((eft)  into  line,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company, 

4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

At  the  first  command  the  leader  of  the  leading  unit  commands : 
Right  turn.  The  leaders  of  the  other  units  command :  Forward, 
if  at  a  halt.  At  the  second  command  the  leading  unit  turns  to 
the  right  on  moving  pivot.  The  command  halt  is  given  when 
the  leading  unit  has  advanced  the  desired  distance  in  the  new 
direction;  it  halts;  its  leader  then  commands:  Right  dress. 

The  units  in  rear  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front; 
each,  when  opposite  the  right  of  its  place  in  line,  executes  right 
turn  at  the  command  of  its  leader;  each  is  halted  on  the  line 


SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY.  53 

:it  tbe  conmiaud  of  its  leader,  who  tbeu  couimauds:  Right  dress. 
All  di'ess  ou  tbe  first  unit  iu  line. 

If  executed  iu  double  tiiue,  tbe  leading  squad  marches  in 
double  time  until  baited. 

Front  Into  Line. 

188.  Being  in  column  of  platoons  or  squads,  to  form  line  to 
tbe  front:  1.  Rigfit  (Left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company, 
4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

At  tbe  first  command  tbe  leaders  of  tbe  units  in  rear  of 
tbe  leading  one  command :  Right  oblique.  If  at  a  bait,  tbe 
leader  of  tbe  leading  unit  commuuds:  Forward.  At  tbe  second 
command  tbe  leading  unit  moves  straight  forward ;  tbe  rear 
units  oblique  as  indicated.  Tbe  command  halt  is  given  wbeu 
tbe  leading  unit  bas  advanced  tbe  desired  distance;  it  baits;  its 
leader  tbeu  commands:  Left  dress.  Eacb  of  tbe  rear  units, 
wben  opposite  its  place  in  line,  resumes  tbe  original  direction 
at  tbe  command  of  its  leader ;  eacb  is  baited  ou  tbe  line  at  tbe 
command  of  its  leader,  wbo  then  commands :  Left  dress.  All 
di'ess  on  tbe  first  unit  in  line. 

189.  Being  in  column  of  squads  to  form  column  of  platoons, 
or  being  in  line  of  platoons,  to  form  tbe  company  in  line : 
1.  Platoons,  right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Company, 
4.  HALT,  5.  FRONT. 

Executed  by  eacb  platoon  as  described  for  tbe  company.  In 
forming  tbe  company  in  line,  tbe  dress  is  on  tbe  left  squad  of 
tbe  left  platoon.  If  forming  column  of  platoons,  platoon  leaders 
verify  tbe  alignment  before  taking  their  posts;  the  captain  com- 
mands front  wben  the  alignments  have  been  verified. 

Wben  front  into  line  is  executed  in  double  time  the  commands 
for  halting  and  aligning  are  omitted  and  tbe  guide  is  toward 
the  side  of  the  first  unit  in  line. 

AT  EASE  AND  ROUTE  STEP. 

190.  The  column  of  squads  is  the  habitual  column  of  route, 
but  route  step  and  at  ease  are  applicable  to  any  marching 
formation, 

191.  To  march  at  route  step:  1.  Route  step,  2.  MARCH. 
Sabers  are  carried  at  will  or  iu  tbe  scabbard;  tbe  men  carry 
their  pieces  at  will,  keeping  tbe  muzzles  elevated ;  they  are  not 
required  to  preserve  silence,  nor  to  keep  tbe  step.  The  rapks 
cover  and  preserve  their  distance.  If  halted  from  route  step, 
the  men  stand  at  rest. 


54  SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY. 

192.  To  march  at  ease:  1.  At  ease,  2.  MARCH. 

Tlie  company  marches  as  iu  route  step,  except  that  silence  is 
preserved ;  when  halted,  the  men  remain  at  ease. 

198.  Marching  at  route  step  or  at  ease:  1.  Company,  2.  AT- 
TENTION. 

At  the  command  attention  the  pieces  are  brought  to  the  right 
shoulder  and  the  cadenced  step  in  quicli  time  is  resumed. 

TO   DIMINISH   THE  FRONT  OF  A    COLUMN   OF  SQUADS. 

194.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Right  (Left)  by  twos, 
2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  all  files  except  the  two  right  files  of 
the  leading  squad  execute  in  place  halt;  the  two  left  files  of  the 
leading  squad  oblique  to  the  right  when  disengaged  and  follow 
the  right  files  at  the  shortest  practicable  distance.  The  remain- 
ing squads  follow  successively  in  like  manner. 

195.  Being  in  column  of  squads  or  twos:  1.  Right  (Left)  by 
file,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  all  files  execute  in  place  halt  except 
the  right  file  of  the  leading  two  or  squad.  The  left  file  or  files 
of  the  leading  two  or  squad  oblique  successively  to  the  right 
when  disengaged  and  each  follows  the  file  on  its  right  at  the 
shoi'test  practicable  distance.  The  remaining  twos  or  squads 
follow  successively  in  like  manner. 

196.  Being  in  column  of  files  or  twos,  to  form  column  of 
squads ;  or,  being  in  column  of  files,  to  form  column  of  twos :  1. 
Squads  (Twos),  right  (left)  front  into  line,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march,  the  leading  file  or  files  halt.  The 
remainder  of  the  squad,  or  two,  obliques  to  the  right  and  halts 
on  line  with  the  leading  file  or  files.  The  remaining  squads 
©r  twos  close  up  and  successively  form  in  rear  of  the  first  in 
like  manner. 

The  movement  described  in  this  paragraph  will  be  ordered 
right  or  left,  so  as  to  restore  the  files  to  their  normal  relative 
positions  in  the  two  or  squad. 

19  7.  The  movements  prescribed  in  the  three  preceding  para- 
graphs are  difficult  of  execution  at  attention  and  have  no  value 
as  disciplinary  exercises.  , 

198.  ISIarching  by  twos  or  files  can  not  be  executed  without 
serious  delay  and  waste  of  road  space.  Every  reasonable  pre- 
caution will  be  taken  to  obviate  the  necessity  for  these  forma- 
tions. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  5S 

EXTENDED  ORDEE. 

Rules  for  Deployment. 

199.  Tlie  command  guide  right  (left  or  center)  indicates  the 
base  squad  for  the  deployment;  if  in  line  it  designates  the  actual 
right  (left  or  center)  squad;  if  in  column  the  command  guide 
right  (left)  designates  the  leading  squad,  and  the  command 
guide  center  designates  the  center  squad.  After  the  deployment 
is  completed,  the  guide  is  center  without  command,  unless  other- 
wise ordered. 

200.  At  the  preparatory  command  for  forming  skirmish 
line,  from  either  column  of  squads  or  line,  each  squad  leader 
(except  the  leader  of  the  base  squad,  when  his  squad  does  not 
advance),  cautious  his  squad,  follow  me  ur  by  the  right  (left) 
flank,  as  the  case  may  be;  at  the  command  march,  he  steps  in 
front  of  his  stiuad  and  leads  it  to  its  place  in  line. 

201.  Having  given  the  command  for  forming  skirmish  line, 
the  captain,  if  necessary,  indicates  to  the  corporal  of  the  base 
squad  the  point  on  which  the  squad  is  to  march;  the  corporal 
habitually  looks  to  the  captain  for  such  directions. 

202.  The  base  squad  is  deployed  as  soon  as  it  has  sufficient 
interval.  The  other  squads  are  deployed  as  they  arrive  on  the 
general  line ;  each  corporal  halts  in  his  place  in  line  and  com- 
mands or  signals,  as  skirmishers;  the  squad  deploys  and  halts 
abreast  of  him. 

If  tactical  considerations  demand  it,  the  squad  is  deployed 
before  arriving  on  the  line. 

203.  Deployed  lines  preserve  a  general  alignment  toward  the 
guide.  Within  their  respective  fronts,  individuals  or  units 
march  so  as  best  to  secure  cover  or  to  facilitate  the  advance, 
but  the  general  and  orderly  progress  of  the  whole  is  paramount. 

On  halting,  a  deployed  line  faces  to  the  front  (direction  of 
the  enemy)  in  all  cases  and  takes  advantage  of  cover,  the  men 
lying  down  if  necessary. 

204.  The  company  in  skirmish  line  advances,  halts,  moves  by 
the  flank,  or  to  the  rear,  obliques,  resumes  the  direct  march,  passes 
from  quick  to  double  time  and  the  reverse  by  the  same  commands 
and  in  a  similar  manner  as  in  cloae  order ;  if  at  a  halt,  the 
movement  by  the  flank  or  to  the  rear  is  executed  by  the  same 
commands  as  when  marching.     Company  right  (left,  half  right, 


56  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

half  left)  is  executed  as  explained  for  the  front  rank,  skirmish 
intervals  being  maintained, 

205.  A  platoon  or  other  part  of  the  company  is  deployed  and 
marched  in  the  same  manner  as  the  company,  substituting  in 
the  commands,  platoon  (detachment,  etc.)  for  company. 

Deployments. 

206.  Being  in  line,  to  form  skirmish  line  to  the  front:  1. 
As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left  or  center),  2.  MARCH. 

If  marching,  the  corporal  of  the  base  squad  moves  straight  to 
the  front;  when  that  squad  has  advanced  the  desired  distance, 
the  captain  commands:  1.  Company,  2.  HALT.  If  the  guide  be 
right  (left),  the  other  corporals  move  to  the  left  (right)  front, 
and,  in  succession  from  the  base,  place  their  srjuads  on  the  line; 
if  the  guide  be  center,  the  other  corporals  move  to  the  right  or 
left  front,  according  as  they  are  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  center 
squad,  and  in  succession  from  the  center  squad  place  their 
squads  on  the  line. 

If  at  a  halt,  the  base  squad  is  deployed  without  advancing; 
the  other  squads  may  be  conducted  to  their  proper  places  by  the 
flank ;  interior  squads  may  be  moved  when  squads  more  distant 
from  the  base  have  gained  comfortable  marching  distance. 

20  7.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  to  form  skirmish  line  to  the 
front:  1.  As  skirmishers,  guide  right  (left  or  center),  2.  MARCH. 

If  marching,  the  corporal  of  the  base  squad  deploys  it  and 
moves  straight  to  the  front;  if  at  a  halt,  he  deploys  his  squad 
without  advancing.  If  the  guide  be  right  (left),  the  other  cor- 
porals move  to  the  left  (right)  front,  and,  in  succession  from  the 
base,  place  their  squads  on  the  line:  if  the  guide  be  renter,  the 
corporals  in  front  of  the  center  squad  move  to  the  right  ( if  at  a 
halt,  to  the  right  rear),  the  corporals  in  rear  of  the  center  squad 
move  to  the  left  front,  and  each,  in  succession  from  the  base, 
places  his  squad  on  the  line. 

The  column  of  twos  or  files  is  deployed  by  the  same  commands 
and  in  like  manner. 

208.  The  company  in  line  or  in  column  of  squads  may  be 
deployed  in  an  oblique  direction  by  the  same  commands.  The 
captain  points  out  the  desired  direction;  the  corporal  of  the 
base  squad  uoves  in  the  direction  indicated ;  the  other  corporals 
conform. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  67 

209.  To  form  skirmisli  ]ine  to  the  flank  or  rear  the  line  or 
the  cohimn  of  squads  is  turned  by  squads  to  the  flank  or  rear 
and  then  deployed  as  described. 

210.  The  intervals  between  men  are  Increased  or  decreased 
as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  adding  to  the  prepara- 
tory command,  guide  right  (left  or  center)  if  necessary. 

The  Assembly. 

211.  The  captain  takes  his  post  in  front  of,  or  designates, 
the  element  ou  which  the  company  is  to  assemble  and  com- 
mands: 1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

If  in  skirmish  line  the  men  move  promptly  toward  the  desig- 
nated point  and  the  company  is  re-formed  in  line.  If  assembled 
by  platoons,  these  ai"e  conducted  to  the  designated  point  by 
platoon  leaders,  and  the  company  is  re-formed  in  line. 

Platoons  may  be  assembled  by  the  command:  1.  Platoons, 
assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  each  platoon  as  described  for  the  company. 

One  or  mure  platoons  may  be  assembled  by  the  command : 
1.  Such  platoon(s),  assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

Executed  by  the  designated  platoon  or  platoons  as  described 
for  the  company. 

The  Advance. 

212.  The  advance  of  a  company  into  an  engagement  (whether 
for  attack  or  defense)  is  conducted  in  close  order,  preferably 
column  of  squads,  until  the  probability  of  encountering  hostile 
fire  makes  it  advisable  to  deploy.  After  deployment,  and  before 
opening  fire,  the  advance  of  the  company  may  be  continued  in 
skirmish  line  or  other  suitable  formation,  depending  upon  cir- 
cumstances. The  advance  may  often  be  facilitated,  or  better 
advantage  taken  of  cover,  or  losses  reduced  by  the  employment 
of  the  platoon  or  squad  columns  or  by  the  use  of  a  succession  of 
thin  lines.  The  selection  of  the  method  to  be  used  is  made  by 
the  captain  or  major,  the  choice  depending  upon  conditions  aris- 
ing during  the  progress  of  the  advance.  If  the  deployment  ia 
found  to  be  premature,  it  will  generally  be  best  to  assemble  the 
company  and  proceed  in  close  order. 

Patrols  are  used  to  provide  the  necessary  security  against 
surprise. 


58  SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY. 

213.  Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  Plaioon  columns,  2.  MARCH. 
The  platoon  leaders  move  forward  through  the  center  of  their 

respective  platoons ;  men  to  the  right  of  the  platoon  leader 
march  to  the  left  and  follow  him  in  file ;  those  to  the  left  march 
in  like  manner  to  the  right;  each  platoon  leader  thus  conducts 
the  march  of  his  platoon  in  double  column  of  files;  platoon 
guides  follow  in  rear  of  their  respective  platoons  to  insure 
prompt  and  orderly  execution  of  the  advance. 

214.  Being  in  skirmish  line:  1.  Squad  columns,  2.  MARCH. 
Each  squad  leader  moves  to  the  front ;  the  members  of  each 

squad  oblique  toward  and  follow  their  squad  leader  in  single 
file  at  easy  marching  distances. 

215.  Platoon  columns  are  profitably  used  where  the  groimd  Is 
so  difficult  or  cover  so  limited  as  to  make  it  desirable  to  take 
advantage  of  the  few  favorable  routes;  no  two  platoons  should 
march  within  the  area  of  burst  of  a  single  shrapnel.^  Squad 
columns  are  of  value  principally  in  facilitating  the  advance  over 
rough  or  brush-grown  ground ;  they  afford  no  material  advantage 
in  securing  cover. 

216.  To  deploy  platoon  or  squad  columns:  1.  As  skirmishers, 
2.  MARCH. 

Skirmishers  move  to  the  right  or  left  front  and  successively 
place  themselves  in  their  original  positions  on  the  line. 

217.  Being  in  platoon  or  squad  columns:  1.  Assemble,  2. 
MARCH. 

The  platoon  or  squad  leaders  signal  assemble.  The  men  of 
each  platoon  or  squad,  as  the  case  may  be,  advance  and,  moving 
to  the  right  and  left,  take  their  proper  places  in  line,  each  unit 
assembling  on  the  leading  element  of  the  column  and  re-forming 
in  line.  The  platoon  or  squad  leaders  conduct  their  units 
toward  the  element  or  point  indicated  by  the  captain,  and  to 
their  places  in  line;  the  company  is  re-formed  in  line. 

218.  Being  in  skirmish  line,  to  advance  by  a  succession  of 
thin  lines:  1.  (Such  numbers),  forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  captain  points  out  in  advance  the  selected  po.sition  in 
front  of  the  line  occupied.  The  designated  number  of  each 
squad  moves  to  the  front;  the  line  thus  formed  preserves  the 
original  intervals  as  nearly  as  practicable;  when  this  line  has 
advanced  a  suitable  distance  (generally  from  100  to  250  yards, 


'  Ordinarily  about  20  yards  wide. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  59 

depending  upon  the  terrain  and  the  character  of  the  hostile 
fire),  a  second  is  sent  forward  by  similar  commands,  and  so 
on  at  irregular  distances  until  the  whole  line  has  advanced. 
Upon  arriving  at  the  indicated  position,  the  first  line  is  halted. 
Successive  lines,  upon  arriving,  halt  on  line  with  the  first  and 
the  men  take  their  proper  places  in  the  skirmish  line. 

Ordinarily  each  line  is  made  up  of  one  man  per  squad  and  the 
men  of  a  squad  are  sent  forward  in  order  from  right  to  left  as 
deployed.  The  first  line  is  led  by  the  platoon  leader  of  the  right 
platoon,  the  second  by  the  guide  of  the  right  platoon,  and  so  on 
in  order  from  right  to  left. 

The  advance  is  conducted  in  quick  time  unless  conditions  de- 
mand a  faster  gait. 

The  company  having  arrived  at  the  indicated  position,  a  fur- 
ther advance  by  the  same  means  may  be  advisable. 

219.  The  advance  in  a  succession  of  thin  lines  is  used  to 
cross  a  wide  stretch  swept,  or  likely  to  be  swept,  by  artillery 
fire  or  heavy,  long-range  rifle  fire  which  can  not  profitably  be 
returned.  Its  purpose  is  the  building  up  of  a  strong  skirmi-sh 
line  preparatory  to  engaging  in  a  fire  fight.  This  method  of 
advancing  results  in  serious  (though  temporai-y)  loss  of  control 
over  the  company.  Its  advantage  lies  in  the  fact  that  it  offers 
a  less  definite  target,  hence  is  less  likely  to  draw  fire. 

220.  The  above  are  suggestions.  Other  and  better  forma- 
tions may  be  devised  to  fit  particular  cases.  The  best  formation 
is  the  one  which  advances  the  line  farthest  with  the  least  loss 
of  men,  time,  and  control. 

The  Fire  Attack. 

221.  The  principles  governing  the  advance  of  the  firing  line 
in  attack  are  considered  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion. 

When  it  becomes  impracticable  for  the  company  to  advance 
as  a  whole  by  ordinary  means,  it  advances  by  rushes. 

222.  Being  in  skirmish  line :  1.  By  platoon  (two  platoons, 
squad,  four  men,  etc. ) ,  from  the  right  (left),  2.  RUSH. 

The  platoon  leader  on  the  indicated  flank  carefully  arranges 
the  details  for  a  prompt  and  vigorous  execution  of  the  rush 
and  puts  it  into  effect  as  soon  as  practicable.  If  necessary,  he 
designates  the  leader  for  the  indicated  fraction.  When  about  to 
rush,  he  causes  the  men  of  the  fraction  to  cease  firing  and  to 
hold  themselves  flat,  but  in   readiness  to   spring  forward  in- 


60  SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY. 

stautly.  The  leader  of  the  rush  (at  the  signal  of  the  platoon 
leader,  if  the  latter  be  not  the  leader  of  the  rush)  commands: 
Follow  me,  and,  running  at  top  speed,  leads  the  fraction  to  the 
new  line,  where  he  halts  it  and  causes  it  to  open  fire.  The 
leader  of  the  rush  selects  the  new  line  if  it  has  not  been  pre- 
viously designated. 

The  first  fraction  having  established  itself  on  the  new  line, 
the  next  like  fraction  is  sent  forward  by  its  platoon  leader, 
without  further  command  of  the  captain,  and  so  on,  successively, 
until  the  entire  company  is  on  the  line  established  by  the  first 
rush. 

If  more  than  one  platoon  is  to  join  in  one  rush,  the  junior 
platoon  leader  conforms  to  the  action  of  the  senior. 

A  part  of  the  line  having  advanced,  the  captain  may  increase 
or  decrease  the  size  of  the  fractious  to  complete  the  movement. 

223.  When  the  couipany  forms  a  part  of  the  tiring  line,  tlie 
rush  of  the  company  as  a  whole  is  conducted  by  the  captain,  as 
described  for  a  platoon  iu  the  preceding  paragraph.  The  cap- 
tain leads  the  rush ;  platoon  leaders  lead  their  respective  pla- 
toons; platoon  guides  follow  the  line  to  insure  prompt  and 
orderly  execution  of  the  advance. 

224.  When  the  foregoing  method  of  rushing,  by  running, 
becomes  impracticable,  any  method  of  advance  that  brings  the 
attack  closer  to  the  enemy,  such  as  crawling,  should  be  employed. 

For  regulations  governing  the  charge,  see  paragraphs  318 
and  319. 

The  Company  in  Support. 

225.  To  enable  it  to  follow  or  reach  the  firing  line,  the  sup- 
port adopts  suitable  formations,  following  the  principles  ex- 
plained in  paragraphs  2111-218. 

The  support  should  be  kept  assembled  as  long  as  practicable. 
If  after  deploying  a  favorable  oppoi-tunity  arises  to  hold  it  for 
some  time  iu  close  formation,  it  should  be  reassembled.  It  is 
redeployed  when  necessary. 

226.  The  movements  of  the  support  as  a  whole  and  the 
dispatch  of  reeiiforcements  from  it  to  the  firing  line  are  con- 
trolled by  the  majoi'. 

A  reenforcement  of  less  than  one  platoon  has  little  influence 
and  will  be  avoided  whenever  practicable. 

The  captain  of  a  company  in  support  is  constantly  on  the 
alert  for  the  major's  signals  or  commands. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  6l 

227.  A  reenforcement  sent  to  the  firing  line  joins  it  deployed 
as  skirmishers.  Tlie  leader  of  the  rt'eiiforcement  places  it  in  an 
interval  in  the  line,  if  one  exists,  and  coumiands  it  thereafter 
as  a  unit.  If  no  such  suitable  interval  exists,  the  reenforce- 
ment is  advanced  with  increased  intervals  l>etween  slvirmishers; 
each  man  occupies  the  nearest  interval  in  tlie  firijis  line,  and 
each  then  obeys  the  orders  of  the  nearest  squad  leader  and 
platoon  leader. 

228.  A  reenforcement  joins  the  firing  line  as  quielily  as  pos- 
sibhi  without  exhausting  the  men. 

229.  The  original  platoon  division  of  the  companies  in  the 
firing  line  should  be  mainlalncd  and  should  not  be  broken  up  by 
the  mingling  of  reeiifurcements. 

Upon  joining  the  firing  line,  otUoers  and  sergeants  accompany- 
ing a  reenforcement  take  over  the  duties  of  others  of  like  grade 
who  liave  been  disabled,  or  distribute  themselves  su  as  best  to 
exercise  their  normal  functu)n.s.  C^onditions  will  vary  and  no 
rules  can  be  i)rescribed.  It  is  essential  that  all  assist  in  master- 
ing the  increasing  ditficulties  of  control. 

The  Company  Acting  Alone. 

230.  In  general,  the  company,  when  acting  alone,  is  employed 
according  to  the  principles  applicable  to  the  battalion  acting 
alone;  the  captain  employs  platoons  as  the  major  employs  com- 
panies, making  due  allowance  for  the  difference  in  strength. 

The  support  may  be  smaller  in  proportion  or  may  be  dis- 
pensed with. 

231.  The  company  must  be  well  protected  against  surprise. 
Combat  patrols  on  the  flanks  are  specially  important.  Each 
leader  of  a  flank  platoon  details  a  man  to  watch  for  the  signals 
of  the  patrol  or  patrols  on  his  flank. 

FIRE. 

232.  Ordinarily  pieces  are  loade<l  and  extra  ammunition  is 
issued  before  the  company  deploys  for  combat. 

In  close  order  the  company  executes  the  firings  at  the  com- 
mand of  the  captain,  who  posts  himself  in  rear  of  the  center  of 
tlie  company. 

Usually  the  firings  in  close  order  consist  of  saluting  volleys 
only. 


62  SCHOOI  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

233.  When  the  company  is  deployed,  the  men  execute  th« 

firings  at  the  command  of  their  platoon  leaders ;  the  latter  give 
such  commands  as  are  necessary  to  carry  out  the  captain's 
directions,  and,  from  time  to  time,  add  such  further  commands 
as  are  necessary  to  continue,  correct,  and  control  the  fire 
ordered. 

234.  The  voice  is  generally  inadequate  for  giving  commands 
during  fire  and  must  be  replaced  by  signals  of  such  character 
that  proper  fire  direction  and  control  is  assured.  To  attract 
attention,  signals  must  usually  be  preceded  by  the  whistle  signal 
(short  blast).  A  fraction  of  the  firing  line  about  to  rush  should, 
if  practicable,  avoid  using  the  long  blast  signal  as  an  aid  to 
cease  firing.  Officers  and  men  behind  the  firing  line  can  not 
ordinarily  move  freely  along  the  line,  but  must  depend  on  mutual 
watchfulness  and  the  proper  use  of  the  prescribed  signals.  All 
should  post  themselves  so  as  to  see  their  immediate  superiors 
and  subordinates. 

235.  The  musicians  assist  the  captain  by  observing  the 
enemy,  the  target,  and  the  fire  effect,  by  transmitting  commands 
or  signals,  and  by  watching  for  signals. 

236.  Firing  with  blank  cartridges  at  an  outlined  or  repre- 
sented enemy  at  distances  less  than  100  yards  is  prohibited. 

237.  The  effect  of  fire  and  the  influence  of  the  ground  in 
relation  thereto,  and  the  individual  and  collective  instruction 
in  marksmanship,  are  treated  in  the  Small-Arms  Firing  Manual. 

Ranges. 

238.  For  convenience  of  reference  ranges  are  classified  as 
follows : 

0  to  600  yards,  close  range, 
600  to  1,200  yards,  effective  range. 
1,200  to  2,000  yards,  long  range. 
2,000  yards  and  over,  distant  range. 

239.  The  distance  to  the  target  must  be  determined  as  accu- 
rately as  possible  and  the  sights  set  accordingly.  Aside  from 
training  and  morale,  this  is  the  most  important  single  factor  in 
securing  effective  fire  at  the  longer  ranges. 

240.  Except  in  a  deliberately  prepared  defensive  position, 
the  most  accurate  and  only  practicable  method  of  determining 
the  range  will  generally  be  to  take  the  mean  of  several  esti- 
mates. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  IBS 

Five  or  six  oificers  or  men,  selected  from  the  most  accurate 
estimators  in  tlie  company,  are  designated  as  range  finders  and 
are  specially  trained  in  estimating  distances. 

Whenever  necessary  and  practicable,  the  captain  assembles 
the  range  finders,  points  out  the  target  to  them,  and  adopts  the 
mean  of  their  estimates.  The  range  finders  then  take  their 
cusomary  posts. 

C/asses  of  Firing. 

341.  Volley  firing  has  limited  application.  In  defense  it  may 
be  used  in  the  early  stages  of  the  action  if  the  enemy  presents 
a  large,  compact  target.  It  may  be  used  by  troops  executing 
fire  of  position.  When  the  ground  near  the  target  is  such  that 
the  strike  of  bullets  can  be  seen  from  the  firing  line,  ranging 
volleys  may  be  used  to  correct  the  sight  setting. 

In  combat,  volley  firing  is  executed  habitually  by  platoon. 

242.  Fire  at  will  is  the  class  of  fire  normally  employed  in 
attack  or  defense. 

243.  Clip  fire  has  limited  application.  It  is  principally  used; 
1.  In  the  early  stages  of  combat,  to  steady  the  men  by  habitu- 
ating them  to  brief  pauses  in  firing.  2.  To  produce  a  short  burst 
of  fire. 

The  Target. 

24  4.  Ordinarily  the  major  will  assign  to  the  company  an 
objective  in  attack  or  sector  in  defense ;  the  company's  target 
will  lie  within  the  limits  so  assigned.  In  the  choice  of  target, 
tactical  considerations  are  paramount;  the  nearest  hostile  troops 
within  the  objective  or  sector  will  thus  be  the  usual  target. 
This  will  ordinarily  be  the  hostile  firing  line ;  troops  in  rear 
are  ordinarily  proper  targets  for  artillery,  machine  guns,  or,  at 
times,  infantry  employing  fire  of  position. 

Change  of  target  should  not  be  made  without  excellent  reasons 
therefor,  such  as  the  sudden  appearance  of  hostile  troops  under 
conditions  which  make  them  more  to  be  feared  than  the  troops 
comprising  the  former  target. 

245.  The  distribution  of  fire  over  the  entire  target  is  of 
special  importance. 

The  captain  allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon,  or 
each  platoon  leader  takes  as  his  target  that  part  which  corre- 
sponds to  his  position  in  the  company.     Men  are  so  instructed 


64  SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY. 

that   eacli  fires  on   that  part  of  the   target  which   is  directly 
opposite  him. 

246.  All  parts  of  the  target  are  equally  important.  Care 
must  be  exercised  that  the  men  do  not  slight  its  less  visible 
parts.  A  section  of  the  target  not  covered  by  fire  represents  a 
number  of  the  enemy  permitted  to  fire  coolly  and  effectively. 

247.  If  the  target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye,  platoon 
leaders  select  an  object  in  front  of  or  behind  it,  designate  this 
as  the  aiming  point,  and  direct  a  sight  setting  which  will  carry 
the  cone  of  fire  into  the  target. 

Fire  Direction. 

248.  When  the  company  is  lar^e  enough  to  be  divided  into 
platoons,  it  is  impracticable  for  the  captain  to  command  it 
directly  in  combat.  His  efficiency  in  managing  the  firing  line 
Is  measured  by  his  ability  to  enforce  his  will  through  the  platoon 
leaders.  Having  indicated  clearly  what  he  desires  them  to  do, 
he  avoids  interfering  except  to  correct  serious  errors  or  omis- 
sions. 

249.  The  captain  directs  the  fire  of  the  company  or  of  desig- 
nated platoons.  He  designates  the  target,  and,  when  practicable, 
allots  a  part  of  the  target  to  each  platoon.  Before  beginning 
the  fire  action  he  determines  the  range,  announces  the  sight 
setting,  and  indicates  the  class  of  fire  to  be  employed  and  the 
time  to  open  fire.  Thereafter,  he  observes  the  fire  effect,  cor- 
rects material  errors  in  sight  setting,  prevents  exhaustion  of 
the  ammunition  supply,  and  causes  the  distribution  of  such  extra 
ammunition  as  may  be  received  from  the  rear. 

Tire  Control. 

250.  In  combat  the  platoon  is  the  fire  unit.  From  20  to  35 
rifles  are  as  many  as  one  leader  can  control  effectively. 

251.  Each  platoon  leader  puts  into  execution  the  commands 
or  directions  of  the  captain,  having  first  taken  such  precau- 
tions to  insure  correct  sight  setting  and  clear  description  of 
the  target  or  aiming  point  as  the  situation  permits  or  requires ; 
thereafter,  he  gives  such  additional  commands  or  directions  as 
are  necessary  to  exact  compliance  with  the  captain's  will.  He 
corrects  the  sight  setting  when  necessary.  He  designates  an 
aiming  point  when  the  target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  65 

252.  lu  general,  plaioon  leaders  observe  tlie  target  and  the 
effect  of  their  fire  and  are  on  the  alert  for  the  captain's  com- 
mands or  signals;  they  observe  and  regulate  the  rate  of  fire 
The  platoon  guides  watch  the  firing  line  and  check  every  breach 
of  fire  discipline.  Squad  leaders  transmit  commands  and  signals 
when  necessary,  observe  the  conduct  of  their  squads  and  abate 
excitement,  assist  in  enforcing  fire  discipline  and  participate  in 
the  firing. 

253.  The  best  troops  are  those  that  submit  longest  to  fire 
control.  Loss  of  control  is  an  evil  which  robs  success  of  its 
greatest  results.  To  avoid  or  delay  such  loss  should  be  the  con- 
stant aim  of  all. 

Fire  control  implies  the  ability'  to  stop  firing,  change  the 
sight  setting  and  target,  and  resume  a  well  directed  fire. 

Fire  Discipline. 

254.  "  Fire  discipline  implies,  besides  a  habit  of  obedience,  a 
control  of  the  rifle  by  the  soldier,  the  result  of  training,  which 
will  enable  him  in  action  to  make  hits  instead  of  misses.  It 
embraces  taking  advantage  of  the  ground;  care  in  setting  the 
sight  and  delivery  of  fire;  constant  attention  to  the  orders  of 
the  leaders,  and  careful  observation  of  the  enemj^ ;  an  increase 
of  fire  when  the  target  is  favorable,  and  a  cessation  of  fire  when 
the  enemy  disappeai-s;  economy  of  ammunition."  (Small-Arms 
Firing  Manual.) 

In  combat,  shots  which  graze  the  enemy's  trench  or  position 
and  thus  reduce  the  efl'ectiveness  of  his  fire  have  the  approxi- 
mate value  of  hits;  such  shots  only,  or  actual  hits,  contribute 
toward  fire  superiority. 

Fire  discipline  implies  that,  in  a  firing  line  without  leaders, 
each  man  retains  his  presence  of  mind  and  diiects  effective  fire 
upon  the  proper  target. 

255.  To  create  a  correct  appreciation  of  the  requirements  of 
fire  discipline,  men  are  taught  that  the  rate  of  fire  should  I)e  as 
rapid  as  is  consistent  with  accurate  aiming;  that  the  rate  will 
depend  upon  the  visibility,  proximity,  and  size  of  the  target;  and 
that  the  i)roper  rate  will  ordinarily  suggest  itself  to  each  trained 
man,  usually  rendering  cautions  or  conmiands  imneoessary. 

In  attack  the  highest  rate  of  fire  is  employed  at  the  halt  pre- 
ceding the  assault,  and  lu  pursuing  fire, 

lyooy — 14 3 


66  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

356.  In  an  advance  by  rushes,  leaders  of  troops  in  firing  po- 
sitions are  responsible  for  the  delivery  of  heavy  fire  to  cover 
the  advance  of  each  rushing  fractioxi.  Troops  are  trained  to 
change  slightly  the  direction  of  fire  so  as  not  to  endanger  the 
flanks  of  advanced  portions  of  the  firiyg  line. 

25  7.  In  defense,  when  the  target  disappears  behind  cover, 
platoon  leaders  suspend  fire,  prepare  their  platoons  to  fire  upon 
the  point  where  it  is  expected  to  reappear,  and  greet  its  re- 
appearance instantly  with  vigorous  fire. 


68 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

258.  The  battalion  being  purely  a  tactical  unit,  tbe  major's 
duties  are  primarily  those  of  an  instructor  in  drill  and  tactics 
and  of  a  tactical  commander.  He  is  responsible  for  the  theo- 
retical and  practical  training  of  the  battalion.  He  supervises 
the  training  of  the  companies  of  the  battalion  with  a  view  to 
insuring  the  thoroughness  and  uniformity  of  their  instruction. 

In  the  instruction  of  the  battalion  as  a  whole,  his  efforts  will 
be  directed  chiefly  to  the  development  of  tactical  efficiency,  de- 
voting only  such  time  to  the  mechanism  of  drill  and  to  the 
ceremonies  as  may  be  necessary  in  order  to  insure  precision, 
smartness,  and  proper  control. 

259.  The  movements  explained  herein  are  on  the  basis  of  a 
battalion  of  four  companies;  they  may  be  executed  by  a  bat- 
talion of  two  or  more  companies,  not  exceeding  six. 

260.  The  companies  are  generally  arranged  from  right  to 
left  according  to  the  rank  of  the  captains  present  at  the  forma- 
tion. The  arrangement  of  the  companies  may  be  varied  by  the 
major  or  higher  commander. 

After  the  battalion  is  formed,  no  cognizance  is  taken  of  the 
relative  order  of  the  companies. 

261.  In  whatever  direction  the  battalion  faces,  the  companies 
are  designated  numerically  from  right  to  left  in  line,  and  from 
head  to  rear  in  column,  first  company,  second  company,  etc. 

The  terms  right  and  left  apply  to  actual  right  and  left  as  the 
line  faces ;  if  the  about  by  squads  be  executed  when  in  line,  the 
right  company  becomes  the  left  company  and  the  right  center 
becomes  the  left  center  company. 

The  designation  center  company  indicates  the  right  center  or 
the  actual  center  company  according  as  the  number  of  com- 
panies is  even  or  odd. 

262.  The  band  and  other  special  units,  when  attached  to  the 
battalion,  take  the  same  post  with  respect  to  it  as  if  it  were  the 
nearest  battalion  shown  in  Plate  IV. 

67 


68 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


CLOSE  ORDER. 

Rules. 

263.  Captains  repeat  such  preparatory  commands  as  are  to 
be  immediately  executed  by  their  companies,  as  forward,  squads 
right,  etc. ;  the  men  execute  the  commands  inarch,  halt,  etc.,  if 
applying  to   their   companies,   when   given  by   the   major.     In 


I- 


'•.4 

T 


UNE.(Cos.  in  Line.) 


-1^ 


^^Bu 


-1    ~A 
O    O 


LINE  or  COr>/lPANIE:S.(Cos.in  Col.  pf  Sqds.) 


-CO.  FRONT*  5-.I 


CLOSE 
^os.in  Li 


CLOSE  ^(Cosin  Col. 

LINE  jf  of  Sqds) 


THE  BATTALION.  "-• 

Bate   III.  MAJOR  (with  STAFF  tTC.j- 4       guide:  AND  OlFJECTION-t       THE  COLOR- i 

fNluMERAI_S  are:    □ISTA.-slCElS   OH    llslTERVAUS   IN    FWCELS. 

movements  executed  in  route  step  or  at  ease  the  captains  repeat 
the  command  of  execution,  if  necessary.  Captains  do  not  repeat 
the  major's  commands  in  executing  the  manual  of  arms,  nor 
those  commands  which  are  not  essential  to  the  execution  of  a 
movement  by  their  companies,  as  column  of  squads,  first  com- 
pany, squads  right,  etc. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  69 

In  giving  commands  or  cautions  captains  may  prefix  the 
proper  letter  designations  of  their  companies,  as  R  Company, 
HALT ;  B  Company,  squads  right,  etc. 

264.  At  the  connnand  guide  center  (right  or  left),  captains 
command :  Guide  right  or  left,  according  to  the  positions  of  their 
companies.  Guide  center  designates  the  left  guide  of  the  center 
company. 

265.  When  the  companies  are  to  be  dressed,  captains  place 
themselves  on  that  flank  toward  which  the  dress  is  to  be  made, 
ns  follows: 

The  battalion  in  line :  Beside  the  guide  (or  the  flank  file  of  the 
front  i-ank,  if  the  guide  is  not  in  line)  and  facing  to  the  front. 

The  battalion  in  column  of  companies:  Two  paces  from  the 
guide,  in  prolongation  of  and  facing  down  the  line. 

Each  captain,  after  dressing  his  company,  commands :  FRONT, 
and  takes  his  post. 

The  battalion  being  in  !ine  and  unless  otherwise  prescribed, 
at  the  captain's  connnand  dress,  or  at  the  command  halt,  when 
it  is  j)rescribetl  that  the  company  shnll  dress,  the  guide  on  the 
flank  away  from  the  point  of  rest,  with  his  piece  at  right  shoul- 
der, dresses  promptly  on  the  captain  and  the  companies  beyond. 
During  the  dross  he  moves,  if  necessary,  to  the.  right  and  left 
only;  the  captain  dresses  the  company  on  the  line  thus  estab- 
lished. The  guide  takes  the  position  of  order  arms  at  the  com- 
mand front. 

266.  The  battalion  executes  the  halt,  rests,  facings,  steps  and 
marchings,  manual  of  arms,  resumes  attention,  kneels,  lies  down, 
rises,  stacks  and  takes  arms,  as  explained  in  the  Schools  of  the 
Soldier  and  Squad,  substituting  in  the  commands  battalion  for 
squad. 

The  battalion  executes  squads  right  (left),  squads  right  (left) 
about,  route  step  and  at  ease,  and  obliques  and  resumes  the 
direct  march,  as  explained  in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

267.  The  battalion  in  column  of  platoons,  squads,  twos,  or 
files  changes  direction;  in  column  of  squads  forms  column  of 
twos  or  files  and  re-forms  columns  of  twos  or  squads,  as  ex- 
plained in  the  Scliool  of  the  Company. 

268.  Wlien  the  formation  admits  of  the  simultaneous  execu- 
tion by  companies  or  platoons  of  movements  in  the  School  of 
the  Company  the  major  may  cause  such  movement  to  be  exe- 
cuted by  prefixiiig,  when  necessary,  companies  (platoons)  to  the 
conmiands  prescribed  therein  :  as  1.  Companies,  right  front  into 
line,  2.  MARCH.    To  complete  such  sinmltaneous  movements,  the 


^.}^0  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

commands  hali  or  march,  if  prescribed,  are  given  by  the  major. 
The  command  front,  when  prescribed,  is  given  by  the  captains. 

2G9.  The  battalion  as  a  unit  executes  the  loadings  and  firings 
jj.only  in  firing  saluting  volleys.  The  commands  are  as  for  the 
company,  substituting  batialion  for  company.  At  the  first  com- 
mand for  loading,  captains  take  post  in  rear  of  the  center  of 
their  respective  companies.  At  the  conclusion  of  the  firing, 
the  captains  resume  their  posts  in  line. 

On  other  occasions,  when  firing  in  close  order  is  necessary, 
it  is  executed  by  company  or  other  subdivision  under  instruc- 
tions from  the  major. 

To  Form  the  Battalion. 

270.  For  purposes  other  than  ceremonies:  The  battalion  is 
formed  in  column  of  squads.  The  companies  having  been 
formed,  the  adjutant  posts  himself  so  as  to  be  facing  the  col- 
umn, when  formed,  and  6  paces  in  front  of  the  place  to  be  occu- 
pied by  the  leading  guide  of  the  battalion ;  he  draws  saber ; 
adjutant's  call  is  sounded  or  the  adjutant  signals  assemble. 

jl   The  companies  are  formed,  at  attention,  in  column  of  squads 

rin  their  proper  order.     Each  captain,  after  halting  his  company, 

salutes  the  adjutant ;  the  adjutant  returns  the  salute  and,  when 

the  last  captain  has  saluted,  faces  the  major  and  reports:  Sir, 

the  battalion  is  formed.     He  then  joins  the  major. 

271.  For  ceremonies  or  when  directed:  The  battalion  is 
formed  in  line. 

The  companies  having  been  formed,  the  adjutant  posts  himself 
so  as  to  be  6  paces  to  the  right  of  the  right  company  when  line 
is  formed,  and  faces  in  the  direction  in  which  the  line  is  to 
extend.  He  draws  saber ;  adjutant's  call  is  sounded ;  the  band 
plays  if  present. 

The  right  company  is  conducted  by  its  captain  so  as  to  arrive 
from  the  rear,  parallel  to  the  line;  its  right  and  left  guides  pre- 
cede it  on  the  line  by  about  20  paces,  taking  post  facing  to  the 
right  at  order  arms,  so  that  their  elbows  will  be  against  the 
breasts  of  the  right  and  left  files  of  their  company  when  it  is 
dressed.  The  guides  of  the  other  companies  successively  pro- 
long the  line  to  the  left  in  like  manner  and  the  companies 
approach  their  respective  places  in  line  as  explained  for  the 
right  company.  The  adjutant,  from  his  post,  causes  the  guides 
to  cover. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  71 

When  about  1  pace  in  rear  of  the  line,  each  company  is  halted 
and  dressed  to  the  right  against  the  arms  of  the  guides. 

The  band,  arriving  from  the  rear,  tal^es  its  place  in  line  when 
the  right  company  is  halted;  it  ceases  playing  when  the  left 
company  has  halted. 

When  the  guides  of  the  left  company  have  been  posted,  the 
adjutant,  moving  by  the  shortest  route,  takes  post  facing  the 
battalion  midway  between  the  post  of  the  major  and  the  center 
of  the  battalion. 

The  major,  staft',  noncommissioned  staff,  and  orderlies  take 
their  post.s. 

When  all  parts  of  the  line  have  been  dressed,  and  officers  and 
others  have  reached  their  posts,  the  adjutant  commands:  1, 
Guides,  2.  POSTS,  3.  Present,  4.  ARMS.  At  the  second  command 
guides  take  their  places  in  the  line.  The  adjutant  llien  turns 
about  and  reports  to  the  major:  Sir,  tfie  battalion  is  formed; 
the  major  directs  the  adjutant:  Tal<e  your  post,  Sir;  draws  saber 
and  brings  the  battalion  to  the  order.  The  adjutant  takes  his 
post,  passing  to  the  right  of  the  major. 

To  Dismiss  the  Battalion. 

272.  DISMISS  YOUR  COMPANIES. 

Stuff  and  noncuuiniissloned  staff  officers  fall  out;  each  captain 
marches  his  company  off  and  dismisses  it. 

To  Rectify  the  Alignment. 

273.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt,  to  align  the  battalion:  1.  Center 
(right  or  left),  2.  DRESS. 

The  captains  dress  their  companies  successively  toward  the 
center  (right  or  left)  guide  of  the  battalion,  each  as  soon  as  the 
captain  next  toward  the  indicated  guide  commands:  Front.  The 
captains  of  the  center  companies  (if  the  dress  is  center)  dress 
them  without  waiting  for  each  other. 

274.  To  give  the  battalion  a  new  alignment:  1.  Guides  cen- 
ter (right  or  left)  company  on  the  line,  2.  Guides  on  the  line,  3. 
Center  (right  or  left),  4.  DRESS.  Tk  Guides,  G.  POSTS. 

At  the  first  command,  the  designated  guides  place  themselves 
on  the  line  (par.  271)  facing  the  center  (right  or  left).  The 
major  establishes  them  in  the  direction  he  wishes  to  give  the 
battalion. 


72  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

At  the  second  command,  the  guides  of  the  other  companies 
take  posts,  facing  the  center  (right  or  left),  so  as  to  prolong 
the  line. 

At  the  command  dress,  each  captain  dresses  his  company  to 
the  flank  toward  which  the  guides  of  his  company  face. 

At  the  command  posts,  given  when  all  companies  have  com- 
pleted the  dress,  the  guides  return  to  their  posts. 

To  Rectify  the  Column. 

275.  Being  in  column  of  companies,  or  in  close  column,  at  a 
halt,  if  the  guides  do  not  cover  or  have  not  their  proper  dis- 
tances, and  it  is  desired  to  correct  them,  the  major  commands: 
1.  Right  (left),  2.  DRESS. 

Captains  of  companies  in  rear  of  the  first  place  their  right 
guides  so  as  to  cover  at  the  proper  distance;  each  captain 
aligns  his  company  to  the  right  and  commands :  FRONT. 

On  Right  (Left)  into  Line. 

2  76.  Being  in  column  of  squads  or  companies:  1.  On  right 
(left)  into  line,  2.  MARCH,  3.  Battalion,  4.  HALT. 

Being  in  column  of  squads:  At  the  first  command,  the  captain 
of  the  leading  company  commands :  Squads  right.  If  at  a  halt 
each  captain  in  rear  commands :  Forward.  At  the  second  com- 
mand the  leading  company  marches  in  line  to  the  right;  the 
companies  in  rear  continue  to  march  to  the  trout  and  form  suc- 
cessively on  the  left,  each,  when  opposite  its  place,  being 
marched  in  line  to  the  right. 

The  fourth  command  is  given  when  the  first  company  has 
advanced  the  desired  distance  in  the  new  direction;  it  halts 
and  is  dressed  to  the  right  by  its  captain ;  the  others  complete 
the  movement,  each  being  halted  1  pace  in  rear  of  tlie  line 
est.nblished  by  the  first  company,  and  then  dressed  to  the  right. 

Being  in  column  of  companies :  At  the  first  command,  the 
captain  of  the  first  company  commands :  Right  turn.  If  at  a 
halt,  each  captain  in  rear  commands:  Forward.  Each  of  the 
captains  in  rear  of  the  leading  company  gi\'es  the  command : 
1.  Right  turn,  in  time  to  add,  2.  MARCH,  when  his  company 
arrives  opposite  the  right  of  its  place  in  line. 

The  foui'th  command  is  given  and  the  movement  completed  as 
explained  above. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION".  73 

Whether  executed  from  colniun  of  squads  or  column  of  com- 
panies, each  captain  places  himself  so  ag  to  march  beside  the 
right  guide  after  his  compaBy.  Jformg  line  jor.  qhanges  direction 
to  the  right.  .  '    .     ,.       '       '•  ,   . 

If  executed  in  double  time,  the  leading  company  marches  in 
double  time  until  halted. 

Front  info  Line. 

27  7.  Being  in  column  of  squads  or  companies:  1.  Right  (Left) 
front  into  fine,  2.  MARCH. 

Being  in  column  of  squads :  At  the  first  command,  the  captain 
of  the  leading  company  commands :  Column  rigfit;  the  captains 
of  the  companies  in  rear,  co/umn  fia/f  rigfit.  At  the  second  com- 
mand the  leading  company  executes  column  rigfit,  and.  as  the 
last  squad  completes  the  change  of  direction,  is  formed  in  line 
to  the  left,  halted,  and  dressed  to  the  left.  Each  of  the  com- 
panies in  rear  is  conducted  by  the  most  convenient  route  to  the 
rear  of  the  right  of  the  preceding  company,  thence  to  the  right, 
parallel  to  and  1  pace  in  rear  of  the  new  line;  when  opposite  its 
place,  it  is  formed  in  line  to  the  left,  halted,  and  dressed  to  the 
left. 

Being  in  column  of  companies:  If  marching,  the  captain  of 
the  leading  company  gives  the  necessary  commands  to  halt  his 
companj^  at  the  second  conunaud ;  if  at  a  halt,  the  leading  com- 
pany stands  fast.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  each 
company  in  rear  conuuands:  Squads  rigfit,  or  Rigfit  by  squads, 
and  after  the  second  command  conducts  his  company  by  the 
most  convenient  route  to  its  place  in  line,  as  described  above. 

Whether  executed  from  column  of  squads  or  column  of  com- 
panies, each  captain  halts  when  opposite  or  at  the  point  where 
the  left  of  his  company  is  to  rest.    ..      . 

To  Form  Column  of  Companies  Successively  to  tfie  Rigfit  or  Left. 

278.  Being  in  column  of  squads:  1.  Cofumn  of  companies,  first 
company,  squads  rigfit  (teft),  2-  MARCH. 

The  leading  company  executes  squads  rigfit  and  moves  for- 
ward. The  other  companies  move  forward  in  column  of  squads 
and  successively  march  in  line  to  the  right  on  the  same  ground 
as  the  leading  company  and  in  such  manner  that  the  guide 
covers  the  guide  of  the  preceding  company. 


74  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

To  Form  Column  of  Squads  Successively  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

279.  Being  in  column  of  companies:  1.  Column  of  squads,  first 
company,  squads  right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  leading  company  executes  squads  right  and  moves  for- 
ward. The  other  companies  move  forward  in  column  of  com- 
panies and  successively  march  in  column  of  squads  to  the  right 
on  the  same  ground  as  the  leading  company. 

To  Change  Direction. 

280.  Being  in  column  of  companies  or  close  column:  1.  Col- 
umn right  (left),  2.  MARCH. 

The  captain  of  the  first  company  coQimands :  Right  turn. 

The  leading  company  turns  to  the  right  on  moving  pivot,  the 
captain  adding:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH,  upon  its  completion. 
'  The  other  companies  march  squarely  up  to  the  turning  point; 
each  changes  direction  bj-  the  same  commands  and  means  as  the 
first  and  in  such  manner  that  the  guide  covers  the  guide  of  the 
preceding  company. 

281.  Being  in  liue  of  companies  or  close  line:  1.  Battalion 
right  (left),  2.  MARCH,  3.  Battalion,  4.  HALT. 

The  right  company  changes  direction  to  the  right ;  the  other 
companies  are  conducted  by  the  shortest  line  to  their  places 
abreast  of  the  first. 

The  fourth  command  is  given  when  the  right  company  has 
advanced  the  desired  distance  in  the  new  direction ;  that  com- 
pany halts;  the  others  halt  successively  upon  arriving  on  the 
line. 

282.  Being  in  column  of  squads,  the  battalion  changes  direc- 
tion by  the  same  commands  and  in  the  manner  i)rescribed  fur 
the  company. 

Mass  Formations. 

283.  Being  in  line,  line  of  companies,  column  of  companies  or 
column  of  squads:  1.  Close  on  first  (fourth)  company,  2.  MARCH. 

If  at  a  halt,  the  indicated  company  stands  fast:  if  marching, 
it  is  halted :  each  of  the  other  companies  is  conducted  toward  it 
and  is  halted  in  proi^er  order  in  close  columu  if  the  indicated 
company  be  in  line,  or  in  close  line  if  the  indicated  company  be 
in  column  of  squads. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  375 

If  the  battaliou  is  iu  line,  companies  form  successively  iu  rear 
of  the  indicated  company ;  if  in  column  of  squads,  companies  iu 
rear  of  the  leading  company  form  on  the  left  of  it. 

In  close  colunm  formed  from  line  on  the  first  company,  the 
left  guides  cover;  formed  on  the  fourth  company,  right  guides 
cover.  If  formed  on  the  leading  company,  the  guide  remains  as 
before  the  formation.  In  close  line,  the  guides  are  halted 
abreast  of  the  guide  of  the  leading  company. 

The  battaliou  in  column  closes  on  the  leading  company  only. 

To  Extend  the  Mass. 

284.  Being  in  close  column  or  in  close  line:  1.  Extend  on 
first  (fourth)  company.  2.  MARCH. 

Being  in  close  line :  If  at  a  halt,  the  indicated  company 
stands  fast;  if  marching,  it  halts;  each  of  the  other  companies 
is  conducted  away  from  the  indicated  company  and  is  halted  in 
its  proper  order  in  line  of  companies. 

Being  in  close  column,  the  extension  is  made  on  the  fourth 
company  only.  If^marching,  the  leading  company  continues  to 
march;  companies* in  rear  are  halted  and  successively  resume 
the  march  in  time  to  follow  at  full  distance.  If  at  halt,  the 
leading  company  marches  ;  companies  iu  rear  successively  march 
in  time  to  follow  at  full  distance. 

Close  column  is  not  extended  in  double  time. 

285.  Being  in  close  column:  1.  Rig/tt  (Left)  front  into  line, 
2.  MARCH.     Executed  as  from  column  of  companies. 

286.  Being  in  close  column  :  1.  Column  of  squads,  first  (fourtfi) 
company,  squads  right  (left),  2.  MARCH, 

The  designated  company  marches  in  column  of  squads  to  the 
right.  Each  of  the  other  companies  executes  tJie  same  move- 
ment in  time  to  follow  the  preceding  company  in  coliiuui. 

28  7.  Being  in  close  line:  1.  Column  of  squads,  first  (fourth) 
company,  forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  designated  company  moves  forward.  The  other  compa- 
nies (halting  if  iu  march)  successively  take  up  the  march  and 
follow  in  column. 

Route  Step  and  At  Ease. 

288.  The  battalion  marches  in  route  step  and  at  ease  as 
prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Company.  When  marching 
in  column  of  companies  or  platoons,  the  guides  maintain  ,tti.e 
trace  and  distance.  .!,,,/> 


76  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

In  route  marches  the  major  marches  at  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn ;  when  necessary,  the  tile  closers  may  be  directed  to  march 
at  the  head  and  rear  of  their  companies. 

Assembly. 

289.  The  battalion  being  wholly  or  partially  deployed,  or  the 
companies  being  separated:  1.  Assemble,  2.  MARCH. 

The  major  places  himself  opposite  to  or  designates  the  ele- 
ment or  point  on  which  the  battalion  is  to  assemble.  Compa- 
nies are  assembled  and  marched  to  the  indicated  point.  As  the 
companies  arrive  the  major  or  adjutant  indicates  the  formation 
to  be  taken. 

COMBAT  PKINCIPLES. 

Orders. 

290.  The  following  references  to  orders  are  applicable  to 
attack  or  defense. 

291.  In  extended  order,  the  company  is^the  largest  unit  to 
execute  movements  by  prescril>ed  commands  or  means.  The 
major,  assembling  his  captains  if  practicable,  directs  the  dispo- 
sition of  the  battalion  by  means  of  taciical  orders.  He  controls 
its  subsefiuent  movements  by  such  orders  or  commands  as  are 
suitable  to  the  occasion. 

292.  In  every  disposition  of  the  battalion  for  combat  the 
major's  order  should  give  subordinates  sufficient  informatioii 
of  the  enemy,  of  the  position  of  supporting  and  neighboring 
troops,  and  of  the  object  sought  to  enable  them  to  conform 
intelligently  to  the  general  plan. 

The  order  should  then  designate  the  companies  which  are  to 
constitute  the  firing  line  and  those  which  are  to  constitute  the 
support.  In  nttack,  it  should  designate  tlie  direction  or  the 
objective,  the  order  and  front  of  the  companies  on  the  firing 
line,  and  should  designate  the  right  or  left  company  as  base 
company.  In  defense,  it  should  describe  the  front  of  each  com- 
pany and,  if  necessary,  the  sector  to  be  observed  by  each. 

293.  When  the  battalion  is  operating  alone,  the  major  pro- 
vides for  the  reconnaissance  and  jtrotection  of  his  flanks;  if  part 
of  a  larger  force,  the  major  makes  similar  provisions,  when 
necessary,  without  orders  from  higher  authoi'ity,  unless  siicii 
authority  has  specificallj'  directed  other  suitable  reconnaissance 
and  protection. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION.  ^7 

294.  When  the  battalion  is  deployed  upon  the  initiative  of 
the  major,  he  will  indicate  whether  extra  ammunition  shall 
be  issued;  if  deployed  in  pursuance  of  orders  of  higher  authoi-- 
ity,  the  major  will  cause  the  issue  of  extra  ammunition,  unless 
such  authority  has  given  directions  to  the  contrary. 

Deployment. 

295.  The  following  principles  of  deployment  are  applicable 
to  attack  or  defense. 

296.  A  premature  deployment  involves  a  long,  disorganizing 
and  fatiguing  advance  of  the  skirmish  line,  and  should  bo 
avoided.  A  greater  evil  is  to  be  caught  by  heavy  tire  when 
in  dense  column  or  other  close  order  formation ;  hence  ad- 
vantage should  be  taken  of  cover  in  order  to  retain  the  battalion 
in  close  order  formation  until  exposure  to  heavy  hostile  fire 
may  reasonably  be  anticipated. 

297.  The  major  regulates  the  depth  of  the  deployment  and 
the  extent  and  density  of  the  firing  line,  subject  to  such  restric- 
tions as  a  senior  may  have  imposed. 

Companies  or  designated  subdivisions  and  detachments  are 
conducted  by  their  commanders  in  such  manner  as  best  to  ac- 
complish the  mission  assigned  to  them  under  the  major's 
orders.  Companies  designated  for  the  firing  line  march  inde- 
pendently to  the  place  of  deployment,  form  skirmish  line,  and 
take  up  the  advance.  They  conform,  in  general,  to  the  base 
company. 

298.  The  conmiander  of  a  battalion,  whether  it  is  operating 
alone  or  as  part  of  a  larger  force,  should  hold  a  part  of  his 
command  out  of  the  firing  line.  By  the  judicious  use  of  this 
force  the  major  can  exert  an  influence  not  otherwise  possible 
over  his  firing  line  and  can  control,  within  reasonable  limits,  an 
action  once  begun.  So  if  his  battalion  be  assigned  to  the  firing 
line  the  major  will  cause  one,  two,  or  three  companies  to  be 
deployed  on  the  firing  line,  retaining  the  remaining  companies 
or  company  as  a  support  for  that  firing  line.  The  division  of 
the  battalion  into  firing  line  and  support  will  depend  upon 
the  front  to  be  covered  and  the  nature  and  anticipated  severity 
of  the  action. 

299.  If  the  battalion  be  part  of  a  larger  command,  the  num- 
ber of  companies  in  the  firing  line  will  generally  be  determin- 
able from  the  regimental  commander's  oi"der;  the  remainder 
constitutes  the  support.     If  the  battalion  is  acting  alone,  the 


78  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

support  must  be  strong  enough  to  maintain  the  original  fire 
power  of  the  firing  line,  to  protect  the  flanks,  and  to  perform 
the  functions  of  a  reserve,  whatever  be  the  issue  of  the  action. 
See  paragraph  346. 

300.  If  the  battalion  is  operating  alone,  the  support  may, 
according  to  circumstances,  be  held  in  one  or  two  bodies  and 
placed  behind  the  center,  or  one  or  both  flanks  of  the  firing  lihe, 
or  echeloned  beyond  a  flank.  If  the  battalion  is  part  of  a. larger 
force,  the  support  is  generally  held  in  one  body. 

301.  The  distance  between  the  firing  line  and  the  supporting 
group  or  groups  will  vary  between  wide  limits ;  it  should  be  as 
short  as  the  necessity  for  protection  from  heavy  losses  will  per- 
mit. When  cover  is  available,  the  support  should  be  as  close 
as  50  to  100  yards;  when  such  cover  is  not  available,  it  should 
not  be  closer  than  300  yards.  It  may  be  as  far  as  500  yards  in 
rear  if  good  cover  is  there  obtainable  and  is  not  obtainable  at 
a  lesser  distance. 

302.  In  exceptional  cases,  as  in  a  meeting  engagement,  it 
may  be  necessary  to  place  an  entire  battalion  or  regiment  in  the 
firing  line  at  the  initial  deployment,  the  support  being  furnished 
by  other  troops.  Such  deployment  causes  the  early  mingling 
of  the  larger  units,  thus  rendering  leadership  and  control  ex- 
tremely difficult.  The  necessity  for  such  deployment  will  in- 
ci'ease  with  the  inefficiency  of  the  commander  and  of  the  serv- 
ice of  information. 

Fire. 

303.  Fire  direction  and  fire  control  are  functions  of  company 
and  platoon  commanders.  The  major  makes  the  primary 
apportionment  of  the  target — in  defense,  by  assigning  sectors 
of  fire;  in  attack,  by  assigning  the  objective.  In  the  latter  case 
each  company  in  the  firing  line  takes  as  its  target  that  part  of 
the  general  objective  which  lies  in  its  front. 

304.  The  major  should  indicate  the  point  or  time  at. which 
the  fire  fight  is  to  open.  He  may  do  this  in  his  order  foj  de- 
ployment or  he  may  follow  the  firing  line  close  enough  to  do  so 
at  the  proper  time.  If  it  be  impracticable  for  him  to  do  either, 
the  senior  officer  with  the  firing  line,  in  each  battalion,  selects 
the  time  for  opening  fire. 

Attack. 

305.  The  battalion  is  the  attack  unit,  whether  operating  alone 
or  as  part  of  a  larger  unit. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  ,,^9 

306.  If  his  battalion  be  oue  of  several  lu  the  firing  line,  the 
major,  in  executing  his  part  of  the  attack,  pushes  his  battalion 
forward  as  vigorously  as  possible  within  the  front,  or  section, 
assigned  to  it.  The  great  degree  of  independence  allowed  to 
him  as  to  details  demands,  in  turn,  the  exercise  of  good  judg- 
ment on  his  part.  Better  leadership,  better  troops,  and  more 
favorable  terrain  enable  one  battalion  to  advance  more  rapidly 
in  attack  than  another  less  fortunate,  and  such  a  battalion  will 
insure  the  further  advance  of  the  others.  The  leading  battalion 
should  not,  however,  become  isolated;  isolation  may  lead  to  its 
destruction. 

30  7.  The  deployment  having  been  made,  the  firing  line  ad- 
vances without  firing.  The  predominant  idea  must  be  to  close 
with  the  enemy  as  soon  as  possible  without  ruinous  losses.  The 
limited  supply  of  ammunition  and  the  uncertainty  of  resupply, 
the  necessity  for  securing  fire  superiority  in  order  to  advance 
within  the  shorter  ranges,  and  the  impossibility  of  accomplish- 
ing this  at  ineffective  ranges,  make  it  imperative  that  fire  be  not 
opened  as  long  as  the  advance  can  be  continued  without  de- 
moralizing losses.  The  attack  which  halts  to  open  fire  at  ex- 
treme range  (over  1,200  yards)  is  not  likely  ever  to  reach  its 
destination.  Every  effort  should  be  made,  by  using  cover  or  in- 
conspicuous formations,  or  by  advancing  the  firing  line  as  a 
whole,  to  arrive  within  800  yards  of  the  enemy  before  opening 
fire. 

308.  Except  when  the  enemy's  artillery  is  able  to  effect  an 
unusual  concentration  of  fire,  its  fire  upon  deployed  infantry 
causes  losses  which  are  unimportant  when  compared  with  those 
inflicted  by  liis  infantry ;  hence  the  attacking  infantry  should 
proceed  to  a  position  as  described  above,  and  from  which  an 
effective  fire  can  be  directed  against  the  hostile  infantry  with  a 
view  to  obtaining  fire  superiority.  The  effectiveness  of  the 
enemy's  fire  must  be  reduced  so  as  to  permit  further  advance. 
The  more  effective  the  fire  to  which  the  enemy  is  subjected  the 
less  effective  will  be  his  fire, 

309.  Occasionally  the  fire  of  adjacent  battalions,  or  of  infan- 
try employing  fire  of  position,  or  of  supporting  artillery,  will 
permit  the  further  advance  of  the  entire  firing  line  from  this 
point,  but  it  will  generally  be  necessary  to  advance  by  rushes 
of  fractious  of  the  line. 

The  fraction  making  the  rush  shoi^ild  be  as  large  as  the  hostile 
fire    and    the    necessity    for    maintaining    fire    superiority    will 


80  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

permit.     Depending   upon   circumstances,   tlie   strength   of   the 
fraction  may  vary  from  a  company  to  a  few  men. 

The  advance  is  made  as  rapidly  as  possible  without  losing 
fire  superiority.  The  smaller  the  fraction  which  rushes,  the 
greater  the  number  of  rifles  which  continue  to  fire  upon  the 
enemy.  On  the  other  hand,  the  smaller  the  fraction  which 
rushes  the  slower  will  be  the  progress  of  the  attack. 

310.  Enough  rifles  must  continue  in  action  to  insure  the  suc- 
cess of  each  rush.  Frequently  the  successive  advances  of  the 
firing  line  must  be  effected  by  rushes  of  fractions  of  decreased 
size ;  that  is,  advances  by  rushes  may  first  be  made  by  company, 
later  by  half  company  or  platoon,  and  finally  by  squads  or  files; 
but  no  subsequent  opportunity  to  increase  the  rate  of  advance, 
such  as  better  cover  or  a  decrease  of  the  hostile  fire,  should  be 
overlooked. 

311.  AVhenever  possible,  the  rush  is  begun  by  a  flank  fraction 
of  the  firing  line.  In  the  absence  of  express  directions  from  the 
major,  each  captain  of  a  flank  company  determines  when  an 
advance  by  rushes  shall  be  attempted.  A  flank  company  which 
inaugurates  an  advance  by  rushes  becomes  the  base  company, 
if  not  already,  the  base.  An  advance  by  rushes  having  been 
inaugurated  on  one  flank,  the  remainder  of  the  firing  line  con- 
forms; fractions  rush  successively  from  that  flank  and  halt  on 
the  line  established  by  the  initial  rush. 

The  fractions  need  not  be  uniform  in  size;  each  captain  indi- 
cates how  his  company  shall  rush,  having  due  regard  to  the 
ground  and  the  state  of  the  fire  fight. 

3  3  2.  A  fraction  about  to  rush  is  sent  forward  when  the 
remainder  of  the  line  is  firing  vigorously ;  otherwise  the  chief 
advantage  of  this  method  of  advancing  is  lost. 

The  length  of  the  rush  will  vary  from  SO  to  80  yards,  de- 
pending upon  the  existence  of  cover,  positions  for  firing,  and  the 
hostile  fire, 

313.  When  the  entire  firing  line  of  the  battalion  has  advanced 
to  the  new  line,  tresh  opportunities  to  advance  are  sought  as 
before. 

314.  Two  identical  situations  will  never  confront  the  bat- 
talion; hence  at  drill  it  is  prohibited  to  arrange  the  details  of 
an  advance  before  the  preceding  one  has  been  concluded,  or  to 
employ  a  fixed  or  prearranged  method  of  advancing  by  rushes. 

315.  The  major  posts  himself  so  as  best  to  direct  the  reeu- 
forcing  of  the  firing  line  from  the  support.    When  all  or  nearly 


SCHOOI  OF  THE  BATTALIOlT.'  81 

all  of  the  support  has  been  absorbed  by  the  firing  line,  he  joins, 
and  takes  full  charge  of,  the  latter. 

316.  The  reenforoiog  of  the  firing  lino  by  driblets  of  a  sqnad 
or  a  few  men  has  no  appreciable  effect.  The  firing  line  recjuires 
either  no  reenforcement  or  a  strong  one.  Generally  one  or  two 
platoons  will  be  sent  forward  under  cover  of  a  heavy  fire  of  the 
firing  line. 

317.  To  facilitate  control  and  to  provide  intervals  in  which 
reenforcements  may  be  placed,  the  companies  in  the  firing  line 
should  be  kept  closed  in  on  their  centers  as  they  become  depleted 
by  casualties  during  the  advance. 

When  this  is  impracticable,  reenforcements  must  mingle  with 
and  thicken  the  firing  line.  In  battle  the  latter  method  will  be 
the  rule  rather  than  the  exception,  and  to  familiarize  the  men 
with  such  conditions  the  combat  exercises  of  the  battalion 
should  include  both  methods  of  reenforcing.  Occasionally,  to 
provide  the  neces.sary  intervals  for  reenforcing  by  either  of 
these  methods,  the  firing  line  should  be  thinned  by  causing  men 
to  drop  out  and  simulate  losses  during  the  various  advances. 
Under  ordinary  conditions  the  depletion  of  the  firing  line  for 
this  purpose  will  be  from  one-fifth  to  one-half  of  its  strength. 

318.  The  major  or  senior  officer  in  the  firing  line  determines 
when  bayonets  shall  be  fixed  and  gives  the  proper  command  or 
signal.  It  is  repeated  by  all  parts  of  the  tiring  line.  Each  man 
who  was  in  the  front  rank  lU'ior  to  deployment,  as  soon  as  he 
recognizes  the  command  or  signal,  suspends  firing,  quickly  fixes 
his  bayonet,  and  immediately  resumes  firing;  after  which  the 
other  men  suspend  firing,  fix  bayonets,  and  immediately  resume 
firing.  The  supiwrt  also  fixes  bayonets.  The  concerted  fixing  of 
the  bayonet  by  the  firing  line  at  drill  does  not  simulate  battle 
conditions  and  should  not  be  required.  It  is  essential  that  there 
be  no  marked  pause  in  the  firing.  Bayonets  will  be  fixed  gen- 
erally before  or  during  the  last,  or  second  last,  advance  preceding: 
the  charge. 

319.  Subject  to  orders  from  higher  authority,  the  major  de-ii 
termines  the  point  from  which  the  charge  is  to  be  made.  The  fir- 
ing line  having  arrived  at  that  point  and  being  in  readiness,  the 
major  causes  the  charge  to  be  sounded.  The  signal  is  repeated 
by  the  musicians  of  all  itarts  of  the  line.  The  company  officers 
lead  the  charge.  The  skirmishers  spring  forward  shouting,  run 
with  bayonets  at  charge,  and  close  with  the  enemy. 

The  further  conduct  of  the  ehaiging  troops  will  depend  upon 
circumstances ;  they  may  halt  and  engage  in  bayonet  combat  or 
19069°— 14 6 


82  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

in  pursuing  fire;  they  may  advance  a  short  distance  to  obtain  a 
field  of  fire  or  to  drive  the  enemy  from  the  vicinity;  they  may 
assemble  or  reorganize,  etc.  If  the  enemy  vacates  his  position 
every  effort  should  be  made  to  open  fire  at  once  on  the  retreat- 
ing mass,  reorganization  of  the  attacking  troops  being  of  second- 
ary importance  to  the  infliction  of  further  losses  upon  the 
enemy  and  to  the  increase  of  his  confusion.  In  combat  exercises 
the  major  will  assume  a  situation  and  terminate  the  assault 
accordingly. 

Defense. 

320.  In  defense,  as  in  attack,  the  battalion  is  the  tactical 
unit  best  suited  to  independent  assignment.  Defensive  positions 
are  usually  divided  into  sections  and  a  battalion  assigned  to 
each. 

321.  The  major  locates  such  fire,  communicating,  and  cover 
trenches  and  obstacles  as  are  to  be  constructed.  He  assigns 
companies  to  construct  them  and  details  the  ti'oops  to  occupy 
them. 

322.  The  major  reenforces  the  firing  line  in  accordance  with 
the  principles  applicable  to,  and  explained  in  connection  with, 
the  attack,  maintaining  no  more  rifles  in  the  firing  line  than  are 
necessary  to  prevent  the  enemy's  advance. 

323.  The  supply  of  ammunition  being  usually  ample,  fire  is 
opened  as  soon  as  it  is  possible  to  break  up  the  enemy's  forma- 
tion, stop  his  advance,  or  inflict  material  loss,  but  this  rule  must 
be  modified  to  suit  the  ammunition  supply. 

324.  The  major  causes  the  firing  line  and  support  to  fix 
bayonets  when  an  assault  by  the  enemy  is  imminent.  Captains 
direct  this  to  be  done  if  they  are  not  in  communication  with  the 
major  and  the  measure  is  deemed  advisable. 

Fire  alone  will  not  stop  a  determined,  skillfully  conducted 
attack.  The  defender  must  have  equal  tenacity ;  if  he  can  stay 
in  his  trench  or  position  and  cross  bayonets,  he  will  at  least 
have  neutralized  the  hostile  first  line,  and  the  combat  will  be 
decided  by  reserves. 

325.  If  oi-dered  or  compelled  to  withdraw  under  hostile  in- 
fantry fire  or  in  the  presence  of  hostile  infantry,  the  support 
will  be  posted  so  as  to  cover  the  retirement  of  the  firing  line.       ^ 

326.  When  the  battalion  is  operating  alone,  the  support  muslj] 
be  strong  and  must  be  fed  sparingly  into  the  firing  line,  espej( 
cially  if  a  counterattack  is  planned.  Opportunities  for  counter-^^ 
attack  should  be  sought  at  all  Lii^es.  ■, , 

I'rUlo /.»..(  Oar;  Kiiil 


THE  EEGIMENT. 

327.  Normally,  the  regiment  consists  of  three  battalions,  but 
these  regulations  are  applicable  to  a  regiment  of  two  or  more 


z 

3f! 


LINE     (Bns  in  Line) 


^ 


CD 

30 

CD 

10 

a 

JO        io 


COLUMN  or    . 

MASSES 

(Bns  in  Close 

Column). 


LINE  Of  MASSES      (Bns  in  Close  Column). 
f 

30 
il  30 

i  i 


Plate  IV 
THE  REGIMENT 

COLONEL  (with  staff  etc)  ■ 

BAND  ^ 

MtCMINC  CUNS^1_AT  ok  COMfWIY)  ^ 
t«UNTEO  OfTACHMENT  S 


(rigm-t  ce;^J-^ER)BATXAulOlM.SEE;  F^^oXeim. 

rJUMERALS     ARE  DISTAMCES      OR     itNlTr.R- 
VA1_S     ir  J     RACF-& 


battalions.     Special  units,  such  as  band,  machine-gun  company, 
and  mounted  scouts,  have  special  formations  for  their  own  use. 


84  THE  REGIMENT. 

Movements  herein   prescribed  are  for  the  battalions;   special 
units  conform  thereto  unless  otherwise  prescribed  or  directed. 

328.  The  colonel  is  responsible  for  the  theoretical  instruction 
and  practical  training  of  the  regiment  as  a  whole.  Under  his 
immediate  supervision  the  training  of  the  units  of  the  regiment 
is  conducted  by  their  respective  commanders. 

329.  The  colonel  either  gives  his  commands  or  orders  orally, 
by  bugle,  or  by  signal,  or  communicates  them  by  staff  officers  or 
orderlies. 

Each  major  gives  the  appropriate  commands  or  orders,  and, 
in  close-order  movements,  causes  his  battalion  to  execute  the 
necessary  movements  at  his  command  of  execution.  Each 
major  ordinarily  moves  his  battalion  from  one  formation  to  an- 
other, in  column  of  squads,  in  the  most  convenient  manner,  and, 
in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  in  the  most  direct  manner  con- 
sistent with  cover. 

Commanders  of  the  special  units  observe  the  same  prineiples 
as  to  commands  and  movements.  They  take  places  in  the  new 
formation  as  directed  by  the  colonel ;  in  the  absence  of  such 
directions  they  conform  as  nearly  as  practicable  to  Plate  IV, 
maintaining  their  relative  positions  with  respect  to  the  flank 
or  end  of  the  regiment  on  which  they  are  originally  posted. 

330.  When  the  regiment  is  formed,  and  during  ceremonies, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  is  posted  2  paces  to  the  left  of,  and  1  pace 
less  advanced  than  the  colonel.  In  movements  subsequent  to 
the  formation  of  the  regiment  and  other  thou  ceremonies,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  is  on  the  left  of  the  colonel. 

331.  In  whatever  formation  the  regiment  may  be,  the  bat- 
talions retain  their  permanent  administx-ative  designations  of 
first,  second,  third  battalion.  For  convenience,  they  may  be  desig- 
nated, when  in  line,  as  right,  center,  or  left  battalion;  when  in 
column,  as  leading,  center,  or  rear  battalion.  These  designations 
apjjly  to  the  actual  positions  of  the  battalions  in  line  or 
column. 

332.  Except  at  ceremonies,  or  when  rendering  honors,  or 
when  otherwise  directed,  after  the  regiment  is  formed,  the  bat- 
talions march  and  stand  at  ease  during  subsequent  movements. 


,  THE  REGIMEWT.  8S3 

CLOSE  ORDER. 

To  Form  the  Regiment. 

333.  Unless  otherwise  directed,  the  battalions  are  posted 
from  right  to  left,  or  from  head  to  rear,  according  to  the  rank 
of  the  battalion  commanders  present,  the  senior  on  the  right 
or  at  the  head.  A  battalion  whose  major  is  in  command  of  the 
regiment  retains  its  place. 

334.  For  ordinary  purposes,  the  regiment  is  formed  in  column 
of  squads  or  in  column  of  masses. 

The  adjutant  informs  the  majors  what  the  formation  is  to  be. 
The  battalions  and  8j)ecial  units  having  been  formed,  he  posts 
himself  and  draws  saber.  Adjutant's  call  is  souiided,  or  the 
adjutant  signals  assemble. 

If  forming  in  column  of  squads,  the  adjutant  posts  himself 
so  as  to  be  facing  the  colunni  when  formed,  and  C  paces  in  front 
of  the  place  to  be  occupied  by  the  leading  guide  of  the  regiment; 
if  forming  in  column  of  masses,  he  posts  himself  so  as  to  be 
facing  the  right  guides  of  the  column  when  formed,  and  6  paces 
in  front  of  the  place  to  be  occupied  by  the  right  guide  of  the 
leading  company.  Later,  he  moAes  so  as  best  to  observe  the 
formation. 

The  battalions  are  halted,  at  attention,  in  column  of  squads 
or  close  column,  as  the  case  may  be.  successively  from  the  front 
in  their  proper  order  and  places.  Tlie  band  takes  its  place  when 
the  leading  battalion  has  halted.  Other  special  units  take  their 
places  in  turn  when  the  rear  battalion  has  halted. 

The  majors  and  the  commanders  of  the  machine-gun  company 
and  mounted  scouts  (or  detachment)  each,  when  his  command  is 
in  place,  salutes  the  adjutant  and  ct>nnuands:  At  ease;  the  adju- 
tant returns  the  salutes.  When  all  have  saluted  and  the  band  is 
in  place,  the  adjutant  rides  to  the  colonel,  reports :  Sir,  the  regi- 
ment is  formed,  and  takes  his  post.    The  colonel  draws  saber. 

The  formation  in  column  of  squads  may  be  modified  to  the 
extent  demanded  by  circumstances.  Prior  to  the  formation  the 
adjutant  indicates  the  point  where  the  head  of  the  column  is  to 
rest  and  the  direction  in  which  it  is  to  face :  he  then  posts  him- 
self so  as  best  to  observe  the  formation.  At  adjutant's  call  or 
assemble  the  leading  battalion  marches  to,  and  halts  at,  the 
indicated  point.  The  other  battalions  take  positions  from  which 
they  may  conveniently  follow  in  their  propel'  places.- 


86  THE  REGIMENT. 

335.  For  ceremonies,  or  wlien  directed,  the  regiment  is 
formed  in  line  or  line  of  masses. 

The  adjutant  posts  himself  so  as  to  be  6  paces  to  the  right 
of  the  right  or  leading  company  of  the  right  battalion  when  the 
regiment  is  formed  and  faces  in  the  direction  in  which  the  line 
is  to  extend.     Adjutant's  call  is  sounded;  the  band  plays. 

The  adjutant  indicates  to  the  adjutant  of  the  right  battalion 
the  point  of  rest  and  the  direction  in  which  the  line  is  to 
extend,  and  then  takes  post  facing  the  regiment  midway  be- 
tween the  post  of  the  colonel  and  the  center  of  the  regiment. 
Each  of  the  other  battalion  adjutants  precedes  his  battalion 
to  the  line  and  marks  its  point  of  rest. 

The  battalions,  arriving  from  the  rear,  each  in  line  or  close 
column,  as  the  case  may  be,  are  halted  on  the  line  successively 
from  right  to  left  in  their  proper  order  and  places.  Upon  halt- 
ing, each  major  commands:  1.  Right,  2.  DRESS.  The  battalion 
adjutant  assists  in  aligning  the  battalion  and  then  takes  his 
post. 

The  band,  arriving  from  the  rear,  takes  its  place  in  line 
when  the  right  battalion  has  halted;  it  ceases  playing  when 
the  left  battalion  has  halted.  The  machine-gun  company  and 
the  mounted  scouts  (or  detachment)  take  their  places  in  line 
after  the  center  battalion  has  halted. 

The  colonel  and  those  who  accompany  him  take  post. 

When  all  parts  of  the  line  have  been  dressed,  and  officers  and 
all  others  have  reached  their  posts,  the  adjutant  commands  : 
1.  Present,  2.  ARMS.  Ho  then  turns  about  and  reports  to  the 
colonel :  Sir,  the  regiment  is  formed;  the  colonel  directs  the  ad- 
jutant :  Ta/ce  your  post.  Sir,  draws  saber  and  brings  the  regiment 
to  the  order.  The  adjutant  takes  his  post,  passing  to  the  right 
of  the  colonel. 

To  Dismiss  the  Regiment. 

336.  Being  in  any  formation:   O/SMISS   YOUR  BATTALIONS. 
Each  major  marches  his  battalion  off  and  dismisses  it. 

Movements  by  the  Regiment. 

337.  The  regiment  executes  the  halt,  rests,  facings,  steps 
and  marchings,  manual  of  arms,  resumes  attention,  kneels,  lies 
down,  rises,  stacks  and  takes  arms,  as  explained  in  the  Schools 
of  the  Soldier  and  Squad,  substituting  in  the  commands,  when 
necessary,  battalions  for  squad. 


THE  REGIMENT.  87 

The  regiment  executes  squads  right  (left),  squads  right  (left) 
about,  route  step  and  at  ease,  obliques  and  resumes  the  dii-ect 
march  as  explained  in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

The  regiment  in  column  of  files,  twos,  squads,  or  platoons, 
changes  direction,  and  in  column  of  squads  forms  column  of 
twos  or  files  and  re-forms  column  of  twos  or  squads,  as  ex- 
plained in  the  School  of  the  Company.  In  column  of  companies, 
it  changes  direction  as  explained  in  the  School  of  the  Battalion. 

338.  When  the  formation  admits  of  the  simultaneous  execu- 
tion, by  battalions,  companies,  or  platoons,  of  movements  pre- 
scribed in  the  School  of  the  Company  or  Battalion,  the  colonel 
may  cause  such  movements  to  be  executed  by  prefixing,  where 
necessary,  battalions  (companies,  platoons),  to  the  commands 
prescribed  therein. 

339.  The  column  of  squads  is  the  iisual  column  of  march;  to 
shorten  the  column,  if  conditions  permit,  a  double  column  of 
squads  may  be  used,  the  companies  of  each  battalion  marching 
abreast  in  two  columns.  Preliminary  to  an  engagement,  the 
regiment  or  its  units  will  be  placed  in  the  foripation  best  suited 
to  its  subsequent  tactical  employment. 

340.  To  assume  any  formation,  the  colonel  indicates  to  the 
majors  the  character  of  the  formation  desired,   the  order  of 
the  battalions,  and  the  point  of  rest.     Each  battalion  is  con-  , 
ducted  by  its  major,  and  is  placed  in  its  proper  order  in  the 
formation,  by  the  most  convenient  means  and  route. 

Having  halted  in  a  formation,  no  movements  for  the  purpose 
of  correcting  minor  discrepancies  in  alignments,  intervals,  or 
distances  are  made  unless  specially  directed  by  the  colonel 
or  necessitated  by  conditions  of  cover. 

341.  To  correct  intervals,  distances,  and  alignments,  the 
colonel  directs  one  or  more  of  the  majors  to  rectify  their  bat- 
talions. Each  major  so  directed  causes  his  battalion  to  correct 
its  alignment,  intervals,  and  distances,  and  places  it  in  its 
proper  position  in  the  formation. 

COMBAT  PRINCIPLES. 

342.  The  regiment  is  deployed  by  the  colonel's  order  to  the 
commanders  of  battalions  and  special  xuiits.     The  order  should: > 
give  them   information   of  the  situation   and   of  the   proposed  I 
plan   of  action.     In   attack,    the   order    should   assign    to   each 
battalion  not  in   reserve  its  objective  or  line  of  advance.     In 
defense,  it  should  assign  to  each  it&  sector.     In  either  case  it 


88  THE   REGIMENT.  ' 

sliould  designate  the  troops  for,  and  the  position  of,  the  reserve'' 
and  prescribe  the  employment  of  the  machine  guns  and  mounted'* 
scouts. 

Both  in  attack  and  defense  the  order  may  fix  the  front  to  be 
covered  in  the  deploj^ment. 

Encroachment  upon  the  proper  functions  of  subordinates  and 
unnecessary  details  should  be  studiously  avoided.     When  the,^ 
regiment  deploys,  the  colonel  habitually  places  the  band  at  the 
disposal    of   the   sui'geon    for    employment    in    caring   for    the 
wounded. 

343.  The  regiment,  when  operating  alone  and  attacking, 
should  undertake  an  enveloping  attack  if  it  does  not  result  iu 
ovei'exteusion. 

Assuming  a  regiment  of  1,500  rifles,  an  extension  of  more  than 
1,000  yards  between  its  extreme  flanks  when  making  an  envelop- 
ing attack  alone  is  seldom  justifiable;  when  part  of  a  battle 
line,  a  front  of  500  yards  can  rarely  be  exceeded. 

344.  In  defense  the  front  occupied  when  acting  alone  or 
posted  on  or  near  the  flank  of  a  battle  line  should  seldom  exceed 
600  yards;  when  posted  as  an  interior  regiment,  the  front  may" 
be  increased  to  800  yards.  The  front  may  be  somewhat  longer 
than  in  the  attack,  since  smaller  battalion  supports  are  justi- " 
flable.  When  the  regiment  is  operating  alone,  however,  the  regi- 
mental reserve  should  be  as  strong  in  the  defense  as  in  the 
attack  unless  the  flanks  are  secure. 

345.  The  colonel  should  always  hold  out  a  reserve — generally 
one  battalion ;  but  when  the  regiment  is  operating  alone,  it  is 
generally  advisable  to  hold  out  more  at  first. 

346.  Whereap  the  support  held  out  in  each  battalion  of  the 
firing  line  is  intended  to  thicken  the  diminishing  firing  line  at 
the  proper  times  and  sometimes  to  lengthen  it,  the  reserve  held 
out  iu  a  regiment  operating  alone  is  used  for  this  purpose  only 
as  a  last  resort.  Its  primary  functions  are :  In  attack,  to  pro- 
tect the  flanks,  to  improve  fully  the  advantage  following  a 
victory,  or  to  cover  defeat ;  in  defense,  to  prolong  the  flring  line, 
to  effect  a  counterattack,  or  to  cover  withdrawal.  It  is  the 
colonel's  chief  means  of  influencing  an  action  once  begun.  It 
should  be  conserved  to  await  the  proper  moment  for  its  em- 
ployment; the  combat  will  seldom  come  to  a  successful  issue 
without  its  employment  in  some  form. 

The  reserve  of  a  regiment  operating  as  part  of  a  large  force 
becomes  a  local  reserve.  It  replaces  depleted  supports  and,  in 
attack  strengthens  and  protects  the  firing  line  in  the  charge. 


THE  BKIGADE. 

347.  The  brigade  does  not  engage  in  prescribed  drills.  It 
engages  in  route  a  arches  and  battle  or  other  tactical  exercises. 
These  are  conducted  pursuant  to  commands  or  orders  formu- 
lated to  suit  the  conditions  of  the  proposed  movement  or  exer- 
cise, and,  in  general,  in  accordance  with  the  principles  applicable 
to  the  regiment. 

348.  A  brigade  of  about  4,000  rifles,  as  part  of  a  general 
battle  line,  would  be  deployed  on  a  front  of  not  more  than  1,200 
yards  in  attack  or  1,600  yards  in  defense. 

When  acting  alone  the  distance  between  extreme  flanks  in  an 
enveloping  attack  should  not  exceed  2,000  yards  at  the  time  the 
attacking  infantry  opens  fire. 

When  acting  alone,  the  front  in  defense  should  not  exceed 
1,600  yards. 

These  limits  apply  to  the  original  deployment  of  the  brigade 
for  combat  and  presuppose  an  enemy  of  equal  or  nearly  ecjual 
training  and  morale.  The  limits  necessitated  by  the  subsequent 
progress  of  the  combat  can  not  be  foreseen, 

349.  Units  larger  than  the  brigade  are  generally  composed 
of  all  arms.  Combined  tactics  are  considei'ed  in  the  Field 
Service  Regulations. 

89 


Part  II.— COMBAT. 


INTRODUCTION. 

350.  Part  II  of  tbese  regulations  treats  only  of  the  basic 
principles  of  combat  tactics  as  applied  to  infantry  and  to  the 
special  units,  such  as  machine  guns  and  mounted  scouts,  which 
form  a  part  of  infantry  regiments  and  battalions. 

The  combat  tactics  of  the  arms  combined  are  considered  in 
Field  Service  Regulations. 

351.  jNIodern  combat  demands  the  highest  order  of  training, 
discipline,  leadership,  and  morale  on  the  part  of  the  infantry. 
Complicated  maneuvers  are  impracticable;  efficient  leadership 
and  a  determination  to  win  by  simple  and  direct  methods  must 
be  depended  upon  for  success. 

352.  The  duties  of  infantry  are  many  and  difficult.  All  in- 
fanti-y  must  be  fit  to  cope  with  nil  conditions  that  may  arise. 
Modern  war  requires  but  one  kind  of  infantry — good  infantry. 

353.  The  infantry  must  take  the  offensive  to  gain  decisive 
results.  Both  sides  are  therefore  likely  to  attempt  it,  though 
not  necessarily  at  the  same  time  or  in  the  same  part  of  a  long 
battle  line. 

In  the  local  combats  which  make  up  the  general  battle  the 
better  endurance,  use  of  ground,  fire  efficiency,  discipline,  and 
training  will  win.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  infantry  to  win  the 
local  successes  which  enable  the  commanding  general  to  win  the 
battle. 

354.  The  infantry  must  have  the  tenacity  to  hold  every  ad- 
vantage gained,  the  individual  and  collective  discipline  and  skill 
needed  to  master  the  enemy's  fire,  the  determination  to  close 
with  the  enemy  in  attack,  and  to  meet  him  with  the  bayonet  in 
defense.  Infantry  must  be  trained  to  bear  the  heaviest  burdens 
and  losses,  both  of  combat  and  march. 

91 


92  INTRODUCTION. 

Good  infantry  can  defeat  an  enemy  greatly  superior  in  num- 
bers, but  lacking  iu  training,  discipline,  leadership,  and  morale. 

355.  It  is  inipossiljle  to  establish  fixed  forms  or  to  give  gen- 
eral instructions  that  will  cover  all  cases.  Officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  must  be  so  trained  that  they  can  apply 
suitable  means  and  methods  to  each  case  as  it  arises.  Study 
and  practice  are  necessary  to  acquire  proper  facility  in  this  re- 
spect. Theoretical  instruction  can  not  replace  practical  instruc- 
tion ;  the  former  supplies  correct  ideas  and  gives  to  practi- 
cal work  an  interest,  puii^ose,  and  definiteness  not  otherwise 
obtainable. 

356.  After  the  mechanism  of  extended  order  drill  has  been 
learned  with  precision  in  the  company,  every  exercise  should  be. 
as  far  as  practicable,  in  the  nature  of  a  maneuver  (combat  exer- 
cise) against  an  imaginary,  outlined,  or  represented  enemy. 

Company  extended  order  drill  may  be  conducted  without  ref- 
erence to  a  tactical  situation,  but  a  combat  exercise,  whatever 
may  be  the  size  of  the  unit  employed,  should  be  conducted  under 
an  assumed  tactical  situation. 

357.  An  effective  method  of  conducting  a  combat  exercise  is 
to  outline  the  enemy  with  a  few  men  equipped  with  flags.  The 
umpire  or  inspector  states  the  situation  and  the  commander 
leads  his  troops  with  due  regard  to  the  assumptions  made. 

Changes  in  the  situation,  the  results  of  reconnaissance,  the 
character  of  artillery  fire,  etc.,  are  made  known  to  the  com- 
mander when  necessary  by  the  umpire  or  inspector,  who,  iu 
order  to  observe  and  influence  the  conduct  of  the  exercise,  re- 
mains in  rear  of  the  firing  line.  From  this  position  he  indicates, 
witli  the  aid  of  prearranged  signals,  the  character  of  the  fire 
and  movements  of  the  hostile  infantry.  These  signals  are  in- 
tended for  the  men  outlining  the  enemy.  These  men  repeat  the 
signals;  all  ofiicers  and  men  engaged  iu  the  exercise  and  in  sight 
of  the  outlined  enemy  are  thus  informed  of  the  enemy's  action 
and  the  exercise  is  conducted  accox'dingly. 

Assistant  umpires,  about  one  for  each  company  in  the  firing 
line,  may  assist  in  indicating  hostile  fire  and  movements  and  in 
observing  the  conduct  of  the  exercise. 

An  outlined  enemy  may  be  made  to  attack  or  defend. 

Situations  should  be  simple  and  natural.  During  or  after  the 
exercise  the  umpire  or  insptKtor  should  call  attention  to  any 
Improper  movements  or  incorrect  methods  of  execution.  He 
will  prohibit  all  movements  of  troops  or  individuals  that  would 


LEADERSHIP.  dSf 

be  impossible  if  tlie  enemy  weve  real.  The  slow  progress  of 
events  to  be  expected  on  the  battle  field  can  hardly  be  simulated, 
but  the  umpire  or  inspector  will  prevent  undue  haste  and  will 
attempt  to  enforce  a  reasonably  slow  rate  of  progress. 

The  same  exercise  should  not  be  repeated  over  the  same 
ground  and  under  the  same  situation.  Such  repetitions  lead  to 
the  adoption  of  a  fixed  mode  of  attack  or  defense  and  develop 
mere  drill  masters.  Fixed  or  prearranged  systems  are  pro- 
hibited. 

LEADEKSHIP. 

General  Considerations. 

358.  The  art  of  leadership  consists  of  applying  sound  tactical 
principles  to  concrete  cases  on  the  battle  field. 

Self-reliance,  initiative,  aggressiveness,  and  a  conception  of 
teamwork  are  the  fundamental  characteristics  of  successful 
leadership. 

359.  A  correct  grasp  of  the  situation  and  a  definite  plan  of 
action  form  the  soundest  basis  for  a  successful  combat. 

A  good  plan  once  adopted  and  put  into  execution  should  not 
be  abandoned  unless  it  becomes  clear  that  it  can  not  succeed. 
Afterthoughts  are  dangerous,  except  as  they  aid  in  the  execu- 
tion of  details  in  the  original  plan. 

360.  Combats  that  do  not  in-omise  success  or  some  real  advan- 
tage to  the  general  issue  should  be  avoided ;  they  cause  unneces- 
sary losses,  impair  the  morale  of  one's  own  troops,  and  raise 
that  of  the  enemy. 

•  361.  Complicated  maneuvers  are  not  likely  to  succeed  in  war. 
All  plans  and  the  methods  adopted  for  carrying  them  into 
effect  must  be  simple  and  direct. 

362.  Order  and  cohesion  must  be  maintained  within  the  units 
if  success  is  to  be  expected. 

363.  Officers  must  show  themselves  to  be  true  leaders.  They 
must  act  in  accordance  with  the  spirit  of  their  orders  and  must 
require  of  their  troops  the  strictest  discipline  on  the  field  of 
battle. 

364.  The  best  results  are  obtained  when  leaders  know  the 
capacity  and  traits  of  those  whom  they  command;  hence  in 
making  detachments  units  should  not  be  broken  up,  and  a  de- 
ployment that  would  cause  an  intermingling  of  the  larger  units 
in  the  firing  line  should  be  avoided. 


S4  LEADERSHIP. 

365.  Leading  is  difficult  when  troops  ai'e  deployed.  A  high 
degree  of  training  and  discipline  and  the  u.se  of  close  order  for- 
mations to  the  fullest  extent  possible  are  therefore  required. 

366.  In  order  to  lighten  the  severe  physical  strain  insepar- 
able from  infantry  service  in  campaign,  constant  efforts  must  be 
made  to  spare  the  troops  unnecessary  hardship  and  fatigue ; 
but  when  necessity  arises,  the  limit  of  endurance  must  be  ex-, 
acted.  s  '•-'-  ,: 

367.  When  officers  or  men  belonging  to  fighting  troops  leave 
their  proper  places  to  carry  back,  or  to  care  for,  wounded  dur- 
ing the  progress  of  the  action,  they  are  guilty  of  skulking.  This 
offense  must  be  repressed  with  the  utmost  vigor. 

368.  The  complete  equipment  of  the  soldier  is  carried  into 
action  unless  the  weather  or  the  physical  condition  of  the  men 
renders  such  measure  a  severe  hardship.  In  any  event,  only 
the  pack  ^  will  be  laid  aside.  The  determination  of  this  ques- 
tion rests  with  the  regimental  oonmmander.  The  complete 
equipment  affords  to  men  lying  prone  considerable  protection 
against  shrapnel. 

369.  The  post  of  the  commander  must  be  such  as  will  enable 
him  to  observe  the  progress  of  events  and  to  communicate  his 
orders.  Subordinate  commanders,  in  addition,  must  be  in 
position  to  transmit  the  orders  of  superiors. 

Before  entering  an  action  the  commander  should  be  as  far  to 
the  front  as  possible  in  order  that  he  personally  may  see  the 
situation,  order  the  deployment,  and  begin  the  action  strictly 
in  accordance  with  his  own  washes. 

During  the  action,  he  must,  as  a  rule,  leave  to  the  local 
leaders  the  detailed  conduct  of  the  firing  line,  posting  himself 
either  with  his  own  reserve  or  in  such  a  position  that  he  is  in 
constant,  direct,  and  easy  communication  with  it. 

A  commander  takes  full  and  direct  charge  of  his  firing  line 
only  when  the  line  has  absorbed  his  whole  command. 

When  their  troops  are  victorious,  all  commanders  should  press 
forward  in  order  to  clinch  the  advantage  gained  and  to  use 
their  reserves  to  the  best  advantage. 

3  70.  The  latitude  allowed  to  officers  is  in  direct  proportion 
to  the  size  of  their  commands.  Each  should  see  to  the  general 
execution  of  his  task,  leaving  to  the  proper  subordinates  the 

1  The  "  pack  "  includes  blanket,  poncho,  and  shelter  tent. 


LEABERSHIF.  95 

supervision  of  details,  and  interfering  only  when  niiptakes  are 
made  that  threaten  to  seriously  prejudice  the  general  plan. 

Teamwork. 

371.  The  comparatively  vpide  fronts  of  deployed  units  in- 
crease the  difficulties  of  control.  Subordinates  must  therefore 
be  given  great  latitude  in  the  execution  of  their  tasks.  The 
success  of  the  whole  depends  largely  upon  how  well  each 
subordinate  coordinates  his  work  with  the  general  plan. 

A  great  responsibility  is  necessarily  thrown  upon  subordinates, 
but  resix)nsibility  stimulates  the  right  kind  of  an  officer. 

372.  In  a  given  situation  it  is  far  better  to  do  any  intelligent 
thing  consistent  with  the  aggressive  execution  of  the  general 
plan,  than  to  search  hesitatingly  for  the  ideal.  This  is  the 
true  rule  of  conduct  for  suboi'dinates  who  are  required  to  act 
upon  their  own  initiative. 

A  subordinate  who  is  reasonably  sure  that  his  intended 
action  is  such  as  would  be  ordered  by  the  commander,  were 
the  latter  present  and  in  possession  of  the  facts,  has  enough 
encouragement  to  go  ahead  confidently.  He  must  possess  the 
loyalty  to  carry  out  the  plans  of  his  superior  and  the  keenness 
to  recognisie  and  to  seize  opportunities  to  further  the  general 
plan. 

3  73.  Independence  nmst  not  become  license.  Regardless  of 
the  number  of  subordinates  who  are  apparently  supreme  in 
their  own  restricted  spheres,  there  is  but  one  battle  and  but 
one  supreme  will  to  which  all  must  conform. 

Every  subordinate  must  therefore  work  for  the  general  re- 
sult. He  does  all  in  his  power  to  insure  cooperation  between 
the  subdivisions  under  his  command.  He  transmits  important 
information  to  adjoining  units  or  to  superiors  in  rear  and, 
with  the  assistance  of  information  received,  keei)s  himself  and 
bis  suboi'dinates  duly  posted  as  to  the  situation. 

374.  When  circumstances  render  it  impracticable  to  consult 
the  authority  issuing  an  order,  officers  should  not  hesitate  to 
vary  from  such  order  when  it  is  clearly  based  upon  an  incorrect 
view  of  the  situation,  is  Impossible  of  execution,  or  has  been 
rendered  impracticable  on  account  of  changes  which  have  oc- 
curred since  its  promulgation.  In  the  application  of  this  rule 
the  responsibility  for  mistakes  rests  upon  the  subordinate,  but 


96  LEADERSHIP. 

unwillingness  to  assume  responsibility  on  proper  occasions  is 
indicative  of  weakness. 

Superiors  should  be  careful  not  to  censure  an  apparent  dis- 
obedience where  tlie  act  was  done  in  the  proper  spirit  and  to 
advance  the  general  plan.  _ 

375.  When  the  men  of  two  or  more  units  intermingle  in'th^. 
firing  line,  all  ofiicers  and  men  submit  at  once  to  the  senioiVj 
Officers  and   platoon   guides   seek   to  fill   vacancies  caused  by', 
casualties.     Each  seizes  any  opportunity  to  exercise  the  func- 
tions consistent  with  his  grade,  and  all  assist  in  the  mainte- 
nance of  order  and  control. 

Every  lull  in  the  action  should  be  utilized  for  as  complete 
restoration  of  order  in  the  firing  line  as  the  ground  or  ott^er^^ 
conditions  permit.  .  ,,' 

376.  Any  othcor  or  noncommissioned  officer  who  becomes  sep-' 
arated  from  his  proper  unit  and  can  not  rejoin  must  at  once 
place  himself  and  his  command  at  the  disposal  of  the  nearest 
higher  commander. 

Anyone  having  completed  an  assigned  task  must  seek  to  rejoin 
his  proper  command.    Failing  in  this,  he  should  join  the  neare^|,^ 
troops  engaged  with  the  enemy.  ,  t 

377.  Soldiers  are  taught  the  necessity  of  remaining  witli 
their  companies,  but  those  who  become  detached  must  join  the 
nearest  company  and  serve  with  it  until  the  battle  is  over  or 
reorganization  is  ordered. 

Orders. 

3  78.  Commands  are  deployed  and  enter  the  combat  by  the 
orders  of  the  commander  to  the  subordinate  commanders. 

The  initial  combat  orders  of  the  division  are  almost  invariably 
written;   those  of  the  brigade  are  generally  so.     The  writteiu 
order  is  preferable  and  is  used  whenever  time  permits.  7 

If  time  permits,  subsequent  orders  are  likewise  written,  either 
as  field  orders  or  messages. 

379.  The  initial  combat  orders  of  regiments  and  smaller  units 
are  given  verbally.  For  this  purpose  the  subordinates  for  whom 
the  orders  are  intended  are  assembled,  if  practicable,  at  a  place 
from  which  the  situation  and  plan  can  be  explained. 

Subsequent  orders  are  verbal  or  in  the  form  of  verbal  or 
written  messages.  Verbal  messages  should  not  be  used  unless 
they  are  short  and  unmistakable. 


LEADERSHIP.  fT 

380.  The  initial  combat  order  of  any  commander  or  subordi- 
nate is  based  upon  his  definite  plan  for  executing  the  task  con- 
fronting him. 

Whenever  possible  the  formation  of  the  plan  is  preceded  by 
a  I  torsi  ma  I  roconiiaissance  of  the  ten-ain  and  a  careful  consid- 
eration of  all  information  of  the  enemy, 

;581.  The  combat  order  gives  such  information  of  the  enemy 
and  of  neighboring  or  supiwrting  friendly  troops  as  will  enable 
subordinates  to  understand  the  situation. 

The  general  plan  of  action  is  stated  in  brief  terms,  but 
enough  of  the  commander's  intentions  is  divulged  to  guide  the 
subsequent  actions  of  the  subordinates. 

Clear  and  concise  instructions  are  given  as  to  the  action  to 
be  taken  in  the  combat  by  each  part  of  the  command.  In  this 
way  the  commander  assigns  tasks,  fronts,  objectives,  sectors 
or  areas,  etc.,  in  accordance  with  his  plan.  If  the  terms  em- 
ployed convey  definite  ideas  and  leave  no  loopholes,  the  conduct 
of  subordinates  will  generally  be  correspondingly  satisfactory. 

Such  miscellaneous  matter  relating  to  special  troops,  trains, 
ammunition,  and  future  movements  of  the  commander  is  added 
as  concerns  the  combat  itself. 

Combat  orders  should  prescribe  communication,  reconnais- 
sance, flank  protection,  etc.,  when  some  special  disposition  is 
desired  or  when  an  omission  on  the  part  of  a  subordinate  may 
reasonably  be  feared. 

382.  When  issuing  orders,  a  commander  should  indicate 
clearly  what  is  to  be  done  by  each  subordinate,  but  not  how  it 
is  to  be  done.  lie  should  not  encroach  upon  the  functions  of 
a  subordinate  by  prescribing  details  of  execution  unless  he  has 
good  reason  to  dOubt  the  ability  or  judgment  of  the  subordinate, 
and  can  not  substitute  another. 

Although  general  in  its  terms,  an  order  must  be  definite  and 
must  be  the  expression  of  a  fixed  decision.  Ambiguity  or 
vagueness  indicates  either  vacillation  or  the  inability  to  formu- 
late orders. 

383.  Usually  the  orders  of  a  commander  are  intended  for, 
and  are  given  to,  the  commanders  of  the  next  lower  units,  but 
in  an  emergency  a  counnandor  should  not  hesitate  to  give  orders 
directly  to  any  subordinate.  In  sucli  case  he  should  promptly 
inform  the  intermediate  commander  concerned. 

19069°— 14 7 


98  COMBAT  RECONNAISSANCE. 

Communication. 

384.  Communication  is  maintained  by  means  of  staff  offlcers, 
messengers,  relay  systems,  connecting  files,  visual  signals,  tele- 
graph, or  telephone. 

385.  The  signal  corps  troops  of  the  division  establish  lines  of 
information  from  division  to  brigade  headquarters.  The  fur- 
ther extension  of  lines  of  information  in  combat  by  signal 
troops  is  exceptional. 

386.  Each  regiment,  employing  its  own  personnel,  is  responsi- 
ble for  the  maintenance  of  communication  from  the  colonel 
back  to  the  brigade  and  forward  to  the  battalions.  For  this 
purpose  the  regiment  uses  the  various  means  which  may  be 
furnished  it.  The  staff'  and  orderlies,  regimental  and  battalion, 
are  practiced  in  the  use  of  these  means  and  in  messenger  serv- 
ice.    Orderlies  carry  signal  flags. 

387.  Connection  between  the  firing  line  and  the  major  or 
colonel  is  practically  limited  to  the  prescribed  flag,  arm,  and 
bugle  signals.  Other  means  can  only  be  supplemental.  Com- 
pany musicians  carry  company  flags  and  are  practiced  in  sig- 
naling. 

388.  The  artillery  generally  communicates  with  the  firing 
line  by  means  of  its  own  staff  offlcers  or  thi'ough  an  agent  who 
accompanies  some  unit  in  or  near  the  front.  Tiie  infantry 
keei)S  him  informed  as  to  the  situation  and  affords  him  any 
reasonable  assistance.  When  the  infantry  is  dependent  upon 
the  artillery  for  fire  support,  perfect  coordination  thi-ough  this 
representative  is  of  great  importance. 

COMBAT  RECONNAISSANCE. 

389.  Combat  reconnaissance  is  of  vital  importance  and  must 
not  be  neglected.  By  proper  preliminary  reconnaissance,  deploy- 
ments on  wrong  lines,  or  in  a  wrong  direction,  and  surprises 
may  generally  be  prevented. 

390.  Troops  deployed  and  under  fire  can  not  change  front 
and  thus  they  suffer  greatly  when  enfiladed.  Troops  in  close 
order  formation  may  suffer  heavy  losses  in  a  short  time  if  sub- 
jected to  hostile  fire.  In  both  formations  troops  must  be  pro- 
tected by  proper  reconnaissance  and  warning. 


COMBAT  RECONNAISSANCE.  99 

391.  The  cliflRcuUy  of  reconnaissance  increases  in  proportion 
to  the  measures  adopted  by  the  enemy  to  screen  himself. 

The  strength  of  the  reconnoitering  party  is  determined  by  the 
character  of  the  information  desired  and  the  nature  of  the 
hostile  screen.  In  exceptional  cases  as  much  as  a  battalion  may 
be  necessary  in  order  to  break  through  the  hostile  screen  and 
enable  the  commander  or  officer  in  charge  to  reconnoiter  in 
person. 

A  large  reconnoitering  party  is  conducted  so  as  to  open  the 
way  for  small  pati'ols,  to  serve  as  a  supporting  force  or  rallying 
point  for  them,  and  to  receive  and  transmit  information.  Such 
parties  maintain  signal  communication  with  the  main  body  if 
practicable. 

392.  Each  separate  column  moving  forward  to  deploy  must 
reconnoiter  to  its  front  and  flank  and  keep  in  touch  with  ad- 
joining colunuis.  The  extent  of  the  reconnaissiince  to  the  flank 
depends  upon  the  isolation  of  the  columns. 

393.  Before  an  attack  a  reconnaissance  must  be  made  to  de- 
termine the  enemy's  position,  the  location  of  his  flanks,  the 
character  of  the  terrain,  the  nature  of  the  hostile  field  works, 
etc.,  in  order  to  prevent  premature  deployment  and  the  result- 
ing fatigue  and  loss  of  time. 

It  will  frequently  be  necessary  to  send  forward  a  thin  skir- 
mish line  in  order  to  induce  the  enemy  to  open  Are  and  reveal 
bis  position. 

394.  It  will  frequently  be  impossible  to  obtain  satisfactory 
information  until  after  the  action  has  begun.  The  delay  that 
uiaj'  be  warranted  for  the  purpose  of  reconnaissance  depends 
upon  the  nature  of  the  attack  and  the  necessity  for  promptness. 
For  example,  in  a  meeting  engagement,  and  sometimes  in  a 
holding  attack,  the  I'econnaissauce  may  have  to  be  hasty  and 
superficial,  whereas  in  an  attack  against  an  enemy  carefully 
preparetl  for  defense  there  will  generally  be  both  time  and 
necessity  for  thorough  reconnaissance. 

395.  In  defense,  reconnaissance  must  be  kept  up  to  determine 
the  enemy's  line  of  advance,  to  ascertain  his  dispositions,  to 
prevent  his  reconnaissance,  etc. 

Patrols  or  parties  posted  to  prevent  hostile  reconnaissance 
should  relieve  the  main  body  of  tlie  necessity  of  betraying  its 
position  by  firing  on  small  bodies  of  the  enemy. 

396.  Reconnaissance  continues  throughout  the  action. 


100  FIRE  SUPERIORITY. 

A  firing  or  skirmish  line  can  talie  care  of  its  front,  but  its 
flanks  are  especially  vulnerable  to  modern  firearms.  The  moral 
effect  of  flanking  fire  is  as  great  as  the  physical  effect.  Hence, 
combat  pati'ols  to  give  warning  or  covering  detachments  to  give 
security  are  indisi)ensable  on  exposed  flanivs.  This  is  equally 
true  in  attack  or  defense. 

397.  The  fact  that  cavalry  patrols  are  known  to  be  posted 
in  a  certain  direction  does  not  relieve  infantry  commanders  of 
the  responsibility  for  reconnaissance  and  security. 

To  be  surprised  by  an  enemy  at  short  range  is  an  unpardon- 
able offense. 

398.  The  commander  of  a  battalion  on  a  flank  of  a  general 
line  invariably  provides  for  the  necessary  reconnaissance  and 
security  on  that  flank  unless  higher  authority  has  specifically 
ordered  it.  In  any  event,  he  sends  out  combat  patrols  as 
needed. 

Where  his  battalion  is  on  a  flank  of  one  section  of  the  line 
and  a  considerable  interval  lies  between  his  battalion  and  the 
next  section,  he  makes  similar  provision. 

399.  Battalion  commanders  in  the  first  line  establish  patrols 
to  observe  and  report  the  progress  or  conduct  of  adjoining 
troops  when  these  can  not  be  seen. 

FIKE  SUPEEIORITY. 

PURPOSE  AND  NATURE. 

400.  In  a  decisive  battle  success  depends  on  gaining  and 
maintaining  fire  superiority.  Every  effort  must  be  made  to  gain 
it  early  and  then  to  keep  if. 

Attacking  troops  must  first  gain  fire  superiority  in  order  to 
reach  the  hostile  position.  Over  oi^en  ground  attack  is  possible 
only  when  the  attacking  force  has  a  decided  fire  superiority. 
With  such  superiority  the  attack  is  not  only  possible,  but  suc- 
cess is  probable  and  without  ruinous  losses. 

Defending  troops  can  prevent  a  charge  only  when  they  can 
master  the  enemy's  fii'e  and  inflict  heavy  losses  ut)on  him. 

401.  To  obtain  fire  superiority  it  is  necessary  to  produce  a 
heavy  volume  of  accurate  fire.  Every  Increase  in  the  effective- 
ness of  the  fire  means  a  cori'esponding  decrease  in  the  effective- 
ness of  the  enemy's  fire. 


FIRE  SUPERIORITY.  101 

The  volume  and  accuracy  of  fire  will  depend  upon  several 
considerations : 

(a)  The  number  of  rifles  employed.  On  a  given  front  the 
greatest  volume  of  fire  is  produced  by  a  firing  line  having  only 
sutticieiit  intervals  between  men  to  permit  the  free  use  of  their 
rifles.  The  maximum  density  of  a  firing  line  is  therefore  about 
one  man  per  yard  of  front. 

ih)  The  rate  of  fire  affects  its  volume;  an  excessive  rate 
reduces  its  accuracy. 

(c)  The  character  of  the  target  influences  both  volume  and 
accuracy.  Larger  dimensions,  greater  visibility,  and  shorter 
range  increase  the  rate  of  fire;  greater  density  increases  the 
effect. 

{d)  Training  and  discipline  have  an  important  bearing  on  the 
rate  or  volume  of  fire,  but  their  greatest  influence  is  upon 
accuracy. 

The  firing  efficiency  of  troops  is  reduced  by  fatigue  and  ad- 
verse psychological  influences. 

(c)  Fire  direction  and  control  improve  collective  accuracy. 
The  importance  of  fire  direction  increases  rapidly  with  the 
range.    Control  exerts  a  powerful  influence  at  all  ranges. 

FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL. 

Opening  Fire. 

402.  Beyond  effective  ranges  important  results  can  be  ex- 
pected only  when  the  target  is  large  and  distinct  and  much 
ammunition  is  used. 

l^ong-rauge  fire  is  permissible  in  pursuit  on  account  of  the 
moral  effect  of  any  fire  under  the  circumstances.  At  other 
times  such  fire  is  of  doubtful  value. 

4  03.  In  attack,  the  desire  to  open  fire  when  losses  are  first 
felt  must  be  repressed.  Considerations  of  time,  target,  ammu- 
nition, and  morale  make  it  imperative  that  the  attack  withhold 
its  fire  and  pre^s  forward  to  a  first  firing  position  close  to  the 
enemy.  The  attacker's  target  will  be  smaller  and  fainter  than 
the  one  he  presents  to  the  enemy. 

404.  In  defense,  more  ammunition  is  available,  ranges  are 
more  easily  determined,  and  the  enemy  usually  presents  a  larger 
target.    The  defender  may  therefore  open  fire  and  expect  results 


102  FIRE  SUPERIORITY. 

at  longer  ranges  than  the  attacker,  and  particularly  if  the  de- 
fenders intend  a  delaying  action  only. 

If  the  enemy  has  a  powerful  artillery,  it  will  often  be  best  for 
the  defending  infantry  to  withhold  its  fire  until  the  enemy  offers 
a  specially  favorable  target.  Vigorous  and  well-directed  bursts 
of  fire  are  then  employed.  The  troops  should  therefore  be 
given  as  much  artificial  protection  as  time  and  means  permit, 
and  at  an  agreed  signal  expose  themselves  as  much  as  necessary 
and  open  fire. 

405.  In  unexpected,  close  encounters  a  great  advantage  ac- 
crues to  the  side  which  first  opens  rapid  and  accurate  fire  with 
battle  sight. 

Use  of  Ground. 

'    406.  The  position  of  the  firers  must  afford  a  suitable  field 

pf  fire. 

'  The  ground  should  permit  constant  observation  of  the  enemy, 

and  yet  enable  the  men  to  secure  some  cover  when  not  actually 

firing. 

Troops  whose  target  is  for  the  moment  hidden  by  unfavorable 
ground,  either  move  forward  to  better  ground  or  seek  to  execute 
cross  fire  on  another  target. 

407.  The  likelihood  of  a  target  being  hit  depends  to  a  great 
extent  upon  its  visibility.  By  skillful  use  of  ground,  a  firing 
line  may  reduce  its  visibility  without  loss  of  fire  power.  Sky 
lines  are  particularly  to  be  avoided. 

''  '  Choice  of  Target. 

408.  The  target  chosen  should  bo  the  hostile  troops  most 
dangerous  to  the  firers.  These  will  usually  be  the  nearest  hos- 
tile infantry.  When  no  target  is  specially  dangerous,  that  one 
should  be  chosen  which  promises  the  most  hits. 

4  09.  Frequent  changes  of  target  impair  the  fire  effect.  Ran- 
dom changes  to  small,  unimportant  targets  impair  fire  discipline 
and  accomplish  nothing.  Attention  should  be  confined  to  the 
main  target  until  substantial  reason  for  change  is  apparent. 

410.  An  opportunity  to  deliver  fianking  fire,  esj)ecially  against 
artillery  protected  in  front  by  shields,  is  an  example  warrant- 
ing change  of  target  and  should  never  be  overlooked.  Such  fire 
demoralizes  the  troops  subjected  to  it,  even  if  the  losses  in- 


FIRE  SUPERIORITY.  108 

flicted  are  small.     In  this  manner  a  relatively  small  number  of 
rifles  can  produce  important  results. 

The  Range. 

411.  Beyond  close  ranj^e,  the  correct  setting  of  the  rear  sight 
is  of  primary  importance,  provided  the  troops  are  trained  and 
well  in  hand.  The  necessity  for  correct  sight  setting  increases 
rapidly  with  the  range.  Its  importance  decreases  as  the  quality 
of  the  ti-oops  decrease,  for  the  error  in  sight  setting,  except  pos- 
sibly at  very  long  ranges,  becomes  unimportant  when  compared 
with  the  error  in  holding  and  aiming. 

4  12.  In  attack,  distances  must  usually  be  estimated  and  cor- 
rections made  as  errors  are  observetl.  Mechanical  range  finders 
and  rangiug  volleys  are  i)rncticable  at  times. 

In  defense,  it  is  generally  jn'acticable  to  measure  more  accu- 
rately the  distances  to  visible  objects  and  to  keep  a  record  of 
them  for  future  use. 

Distribution  of  Fire  and  Target. 

413.  The  purpose  of  fire  superiority  is  to  get  hits  whenever 
possible,  but  at  all  events  to  keep  down  the  enemy's  fire  and 
render  it  harmless.  To  accomplish  this  the  target  must  be  cov- 
ered with  fire  throughout  its  whole  extent.  Troops  who  are  not 
fired  upon  will  fire  with  nearly  peace-time  accuracy. 

The  target  is  roughly  divided  and  a  part  is  assigned  to  each 
unit.  No  part  of  the  target  is  neglected.  In  attack,  by  a  system 
of  overlapping  in  assigning  targets  to  platoons,  the  entire  hostile 
line  can  be  kept  under  fire  even  during  a  rush. 

Observation, 

414.  The  correctness  of  the  sight  setting  and  the  distribution 
of  fire  over  the  target  can  be  verified  only  by  careful  observa- 
tion of  the  target,  the  adjacent  ground,  and  the  effect  upon  the 
enemy. 

415.  Observation  only  can  determine  whether  the  fire  fight 
is  being  properly  conducted.  If  the  enemy's  fire  is  losing  in 
accuracy  and  effect,  the  observer  realizes  that  his  side  is  gaining 
superiority.  If  the  enemy's  fire  remains  or  becomes  effective 
and  persistent,  he  realizes  that  corrective  measures  are  neces- 
sary to  increase  either  volume  or  accuracy,  or  both. 


104  FIRE  SUPEEIORITY. 

Discipline, 

416.  Discipline  lualies  good  direction  and  control  possible 
and  is  tbe  distinguishing  mark  of  trained  troops. 

417.  The  discipline  necessary  in  the  firing  line  will  be  absent 
unless  otficers  and  noncommissioned  otficers  can  make  their 
will  known  to  the  men.  In  the  company,  therefore,,  communica- 
tion must  be  by  simple  signals  which,  in  the  roar  of  musketry, 
will  attract  the  attention  and  convey  the  correct  meaning. 

Expenditure  of  Ammunition. 

418.  In  attack  the  supply  is  more  limited  than  in  defense. 
Better  judgment  must  be  exercised  in  expenditure.  Ordinarily, 
troops  in  the  firing  line  of  an  attack  can  not  expect  to  have 
that  day  more  ammunition  than  they  carry  into  the  combat, 
except  such  additions  as  come  from  the  distribution  of  ammuni- 
tion of  dead  and  wounded  and  the  surplus  brought  by  rein- 
forcements. 

419.  When  a  certain  fire  effect  is  required,  the  necesary 
ammunition  must  be  expended  without  hesitation.  Several 
hours  of  firing  may  be  necessary  to  gain  fire  superiority.  True 
economy  can  be  practiced  only  by  closing  on  the  enemy  before 
first  opening  fire  and  thereafter  suspending  fire  when  there  is 
nothing  to  shoot  at. 

Supporting  Artillery. 

420.  Artillery  fire  is  the  principal  aid  to  the  infantry  in  gain- 
ing and  keeping  fire  superiority,  not  only  by  its  hits,  but  by  the 
moral  effect  it  produces  on  the  enemy. 

421.  In  attack,  artillery  assists  the  forward  movement  of  the 
infantry.  It  keeps  down  the  fire  of  the  hostile  artillery,  and 
seeks  to  neutralize  the  hostile  infantiy  by  inflicting  losses  upon 
it,  destroying  its  morale,  driving  it  to  cover,  and  preventing  it 
from  using  its  weapons  effectively. 

In  defense,  it  ignores  the  hostile  artillery  when  the  enemy's 
attack  reaches  a  decisive  stage  and  assists  in  checking  the  at- 
tack, .ioining  its  fire  power  to  that  of  the  defending  infantry. 

422.  Troops  should  be  accustomed  to  being  fired  over  by 
friendly  artillery  and  imi)ressed  with  the  fact  that  the  artillery 
should  continue  firing  upon  the  enemy  until  the  last  possible 


DEPLOYMENT.  105 

moment.  The  few  casualties  resulting  from  shrapnel  bursting 
short  are  trifling  compared  with  those  that  would  result  from 
the  increased  effectiveness  of  the  enemy's  infantry  fire  were  the 
friendly  artillery  to  cease  firing. 

Casualties  inflicted  by  supporting  artillery  are  not  probable 
until  the  opposing  infantry  lines  are  less  than  200  yards  apart. 

423.  When  the  distance  between  the  hostile  infantry  lines 
becomes  so  short  as  to  render  further  use  of  friendly  artillery 
inadvisable,  the  commander  of  the  infantry  firing  line,  using  a 
preconcerted  signal,'  informs  the  artillery  commander.  The 
latter  usually  increases  the  range  in  order  to  impede  the 
strengthening  of  the  enemy's  foremost  line.  •'•! 

Fire  of  Position. 

424.  Infantry  is  said  to  execute  fire  of  position  when  it  is 
posted  so  as  to  assist  an  attack  by  firing  over  the  heads,  or  ofl; 
the  flank,  of  the  attacking  troops  and  is  not  itself  to  engage  in 
the  advance;  or  when,  in  defense,  it  is  similarly  posted  to  aug- 
ment the  fire  of  the  main  firing  line. 

Machine  guns  serve  a  like  purpose. 

In  a  decisive  action,  fire  of  position  should  be  employed  when- 
ever the  terrain  permits  and  reserve  infantry  is  available. 

DEPLOYIVIENT. 

425.  Troops  are  massed  preparatory  to  deployment  when 
the  nature  of  their  deployment  can  not  be  foreseen  or  it  is 
desirable  to  shorten  the  column  or  to  clear  the  road.  Otherwise. 
in  the  deployment  of  large  commands,  whether  in  march  col- 
umn, in  bivouac,  or  massed,  and  whether  forming  for  attack 
or  for  defense,  they  are  ordinarily  first  formed  into  a  line  of 
columns  to  facilitate  the  extension  of  the  front  prior  to  de- 
ploying. 

The  rough  line  or  lines  of  columns  thus  formed  enable  troops 
to  take  advantage  of  the  terrain  in  advancing  and  shorteti  the 
time  occupied  in  forming  the  firing  line.  ■  '    ' " 

426.  In  deploying  the  division  each  brigade  is  assigned  a 
definite  task  or  objective.    On  receipt  of  his  orders,  the  brigade 

1  With  a  4-foot  white  and  red  regimental  signal  flag. 


106  DEPLOYMENT. 

commander  conducts  his  brigade  in  column  or  in  line  of  regi- 
ments until  it  is  advisable  that  it  be  broken  into  smaller 
columns.  He  then  issues  his  order,  assigning  to  each  regiment 
its  task,  if  jiracticable.  In  a  similar  manner  the  regimental 
conmianders  loud  their  regiments  forward  in  column,  or  in  line 
of  columns,  until  the  time  arrives  for  issuing  the  regimental 
order.  It  is  seldom  advisable  to  break  up  the  battalion  before 
issuing  orders  for  its  deployment. 

427.  Each  subordinate  commander,  after  receiving  his  order 
for  the  action,  should  precede  his  command  as  far  as  possible, 
in  order  to  reconnoiter  the  ground  personally,  and  should  pre- 
pare to  issue  his  orders  promptly. 

428.  Each  commander  of  a  column  directs  the  necessary 
reconnaissance  to  front  and  flank ;  by  this  means  and  by  a 
judicious  choice  of  ground  he  guards  against  surprise. 

429.  The  premature  formation  of  the  firing  line  causes  un- 
necessary fatigue  and  loss  of  time,  and  may  result  in  a  faulty 
direction  being  taken.  Troops  once  deployed  make  even  minor 
changes  of  direction  with  difficulty,  and  this  difficulty  increases 
with  the  length  of  the  firing  line. 

430.  In  the  larger  units,  when  the  original  deployment  is 
found  to  be  in  the  wrong  direction,  it  will  usually  be  necessary 
to  deploy  the  reserve  on  the  correct  front  and  withdraw  and 
assemble  the  first  line. 

431.  To  gain  decisive  results,  it  will  generally  be  necessary 
to  use  all  the  ti'oops  at  some  stage  of  the  combat.  But  in  the 
beginning,  while  the  situation  is  uncertain,  care  should  be 
taken  not  to  engage  too  lax'ge  a  proportion  of  the  command.  On 
the  other  hand,  there  is  no  greater  error  than  to  employ  too 
few  and  to  sacrifice  them  by  driblets. 

432.  When  it  is  intended  to  fight  to  a  decision,  fire  superi- 
ority is  essential.  To  gain  this,  two  things  are  necessary :  A 
heavy  fire  and  a  fire  well  directed  and  controlled.  Both  of 
these  are  best  obtained  when  the  firing  line  is  as  dense  as  prac- 
ticable, while  leaving  the  men  room  for  the  free  use  of  their 
rifles. 

If  the  men  are  too  widely  separated,  direction  and  control 
are  very  diflicult,  often  impossible,  and  the  intensity  of  fire  is 
slight  in  proijorfion  to  the  front  occupied. 

433.  In  an  attack  or  stubborn  defense  the  firing  line  should 
have  a  density  of  one  man  per  j'ard  of  front  occupied. 


DEPLOYMENT.  IfffJ 

Where  the  tactical  situation  demands  the  holding  of  a  line 

too  long  to  be  occupied  throughout  at  this  density,  it  is  gen- 
erally better  to  deploy  companies  or  platoons  at  one  man  per 
yard,  leaving  gaps  in  the  line  between  them,  than  to  distribute 
the  men  uniformly  at  increased  intervals. 

434.  A  relatively  thin  firing  line  may  be  employed  when 
merely  covering  the  movements  of  other  forces  •  when  on  the 
defensive  against  poor  troops ;  when  the  final  action  to  be  taken 
has  not  yet  been  determined;  and,  in  general,  when  fire  superi- 
ority is  not  necessary. 

435.  The  length  of  the  firing  line  that  the  whole  force  may 
emi^loy  depends  upon  the  density  of  the  line  and  tlie  strength 
in  rear  required  by  the  situation- 
Supports  and  reserves  constitute  the  strength  in  rear. 

In  a  decisive  attack  they  should  be  at  least  sti-ong  enough  to 
replace  a  heavy  loss  in  the  original  firing  line  and  to  increase 
the  charging  line  to  a  density  of  at  least  one  and  one-half  men 
per  yard  and  still  have  troops  in  rear  for  protection  and  for 
the  other  purposes  mentioned  above.  , 

436.  In  the  original  deployment  the  strength  of  the  reserve 
held  out  by  each  commander  comprises  from  one-sixth  to  tw'o- 
thirds  of  his  miit,  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  service 
expected  of  the  reserve. 

A  small  force  in  a  covering  or  delaying  action  requires  very 
little  strength  in  rear,  while  a  large  force  fighting  a  decisive 
battle  requires  much.  Therefore,  depending  ujion  circumstances, 
the  original  deployment,  including  the  strength  in  rear,  may 
vary  from  1  to  10  men  per  yard.  Against  an  enemy  poorly  dis- 
ciplined and  trained,  or  lacking  in  morale,  a  thinner  deployment 
is  permissible. 

437.  The  density  of  the  whole  deployment  increases  with  the 
size  of  the  command,  because  the  larger  the  command  the 
greater  the  necessity  for  reserves.  Thu.s,  a  battalion  acting 
alone  may  attack  with  t\vo  men  per  yard  of  front,  but  a  regi- 
ment, witli  three  battalions,  may  only  double  the  front  of  the 
one  battalion. 

438.  By  the  assignment  of  divisions  or  larger  units  to  parts 
of  a  line  of  battle  several  miles  long,  a  series  of  semi-independent 
battle,  or  local  combat,  districts  are  created. 

The  general  deployment  for  a  long  line  of  battle  comprising 
se^  eral  battle  districts  is  not  directly  considered  in  these  regular 


108  ATTACK. 

tions.    The  deployments  treated  of  herein  are  those  of  the  hifan- 
try  within  such  districts. 

The  density  of  deployment  in  these  districts  may  vary  greatly, 
depending  upon  the  activity  expected  in  each.  Within  these 
battle  districts,  as  well  as  in  smaller  forces  acting  alone,  parts 
of  the  line  temporarily  of  less  importance  may  be  held  weakly, 
in  order  to  economize  troops  and  to  have  more  at  the  decisive 
point. 

439.  The  front  that  a  unit  may  occupy  when  deployed  de- 
pends also  upon  whether  its  flanks  are  secured.  If  both  flanks 
are  secured  by  other  troops,  the  unit  may  increase  its  front 
materially  by  reducing  its  reserve  or  supports.  If  only  one 
flank  is  so  secured,  the  front  may  still  be  somewhat  increased, 
but  the  exposed  flank  must  be  guarded  by  posting  the  supports 
or  reserve  toward  that  flank. 

Natural  obstacles  that  secure  the  flanks  have  practically  the 
same  effect  upon  deployment. 

440.  Except  when  assigned  as  supports  or  reserve,  regiments 
in  the  brigade,  battalions  in  the  regiment,  and  companies  in  the 
battalion  are,  when  practicable,  deployed  side  by  side. 

441.  In  the  deployment,  battalions  establish  the  firing  line, 
each  furnishing  its  own  support. 

In  each  unit  larger  than  the  battalion  a  reserve  is  held  out, 
its  strength  depending  upon  circumstances.  In  general,  the 
reserve  is  employed  by  the  commander  to  meet  or  improve  con- 
ditions brought  about  by  the  action  of  the  firing  line.  It  must 
not  be  too  weak  or  too  split  up.  It  must  be  posted  where  the 
commander  believes  it  will  be  needed  for  decisive  action,  or 
where  he  desires  to  bring  about  such  action.  When  necessary, 
I>arts  of  it  reenforce  or  pi-olong  the  firing  line. 

ATTACK. 

442.  Ab  attack  is  bound  to  succeed  if  fire  superiority  is 
gained  and  properly  used. 

To  gain  this  superiority  generally  requires  that  the  attack 
employ  more  rifles  than  the  defense ;  this  in  turn  means  a  longer 
line,  as  both  sides  will  probably  hold  a  strong  firing  line. 

443.  With  lai-ge  forces,  a  direct  frontal  attack  gives  the 
attacker  little  opportunity  to  bring  more  rifles  to  bear.  How- 
ever, if  the  enemy  is  unduly  extended,  a  frontal  attack  may  give 
very  decisive  results. 


ATTACK.  it/d 

444.  Owing  to  the  difficulty  of  control  and  the  danger  of  the 
parts  being  defeated  in  detail,  wide  turning  movements  are  sel- 
dom allowable  except  in  large  forces. 

445.  If  the  attaelv  can  be  so  dircKjted  that,  while  the  front 
is  coverefl,  another  fraction  of  the  command  strikes  a  flank 
more  or  less  obliquely  (an  enveloping  attack)  the  advantages 
gained  are  a  longer  line  and  more  rifles  in  action;  also  a  con- 
verging fire  opposed  to  the  enemy's  diverging  fire. 

446.  An  envelopment  of  both  flanks  should  never  be  attempted 
without  a  very  decided  superiority  in  numbers. 

447.  The  enveloping  attack  will  nearly  always  result  locally 
in  a  frontal  attack,  for  it  will  be  met  by  the  enemy's  reserve. 
The  advantage  of  envelopment  lies  in  the  longer  concentric  line, 
with  its  preijoiiderance  of  rifles  and  its  converging  flre. 

448.  Cooperation  between  the  frontal  and  enveloping  attacks 
is  essential  to  success.  Both  should  be  pushed  vigorously  and 
simultaneously,  and  ordinarily  both  should  move  simultaneously 
to  the  charge;  but  at  the  final  stage  of  the  attack  conditions 
may  sometimes  warrant  one  in  charging  while  the  other  supports 
it  with  fire. 

The  envelopment  of  a  flank  is  brought  about  with  difficulty 
when  made  by  troops  already  deployed  in  another  direction 
or  by  their  reserves.  The  two  attacks  should  be  deployed  at  a 
suitable  distance  apart,  with  the  lines  of  attack  converging  in 
rear  of  the  hostile  position.  The  troops  that  are  to  make  the 
enveloping  attack  should  deploy  in  the  proper  direction  at  the 
start  and  should  be  given  orders  which  enable  them  to  gain 
their  point  of  deployment  in  the  most  direct  and  practical 
maJiner. 

The  enveloping  attack  is  generally  made  the  stronger,  es- 
pecially in  small  forces. 

DEPLOYMENT  FOR  ATTACK, 

449.  Where  open  terrain  exposes  troops  to  hostile  artillery 
fire  it  may  be  necessary  to  make  the  deployment  2  miles  or 
more  from  the  hostile  jiosition. 

The  foreground  should  be  temporarily  occupied  by  covering 
troops.  If  the  enemy  occujiies  the  foreground  with  detachments, 
the  covei'ing  troops  must  drive  them  back. 

450.  To  enable  large  forces  to  gain  ground  toward  the  enemy, 
it  may  sometimes  be  cheaper  and  quicker  in  the  end  to  move  well 


110  ATTACK. 

forward  and  to  deploy  at  night.  In  such  case  the  area  in  which 
the  deployment  is  to  be  made  should,  if  practicable,  be  occupied 
by  covering  troops  before  dark. 

The  deployment  will  be  made  with  great  difficulty  unless  the 
ground  has  been  studied  by  daylight.  The  deployment  gains 
little  unless  it  establishes  the  firing  line  well  within  effective 
range  of  the  enemy's  main  position.     (See  Night  Operations.) 

451.  Each  unit  assigned  a  task  deploys  when  on  its  direction 
line,  or  opposite  its  objective,  and  when  it  has  no  longer  suffi- 
cient cover  for  advancing  in  close  order.  In  the  firing  line, 
intervals  of  25  to  50  yards  should  be  maintained  as  long  as 
possible  between  battalions.  In  the  larger  units  it  may  be  nec- 
essary to  indicate  on  the  map  the  direction  or  objective,  but  to 
battalion  conunanders  it  should  be  pointed  out  on  the  gi'ound. 

452.  The  reserve  is  kept  near  enough  to  the  firing  line  to  be 
on  hand  at  the  decisive  stage.  It  is  posted  with  reference  to 
the  attack,  or  to  that  part  of  the  attacking  line,  from  which  the 
greater  results  are  ex])ected ;  it  is  also  charged  with  flank  pro- 
tection, but  should  be  kei>t  intact. 

Suijporls  are  considered  in  paragraphs  225  to  22S,  inclusive, 
and  2y$  to  302,  inclusive. 

ADVANCING  THE  ATTACK. 

4.53.  The  firing  line  must  ordinarily  advance  a  long  distance 
before  it  is  justified  in  opening  fire.  It  can  not  combat  the 
enemy's  artillery,  and  it  is  at  a  disadvantage  if  it  combats  the 
defender's  long-range  rifle  fire.  Hence  it  ignores  both  and,  by 
taking  full  advantage  of  cover  and  of  the  discipline  of  the 
troops,  advances  to  a  first  firing  position  at  the  shortest  range 
possible. 

Formations  for  crossing  this  zone  sv\t\\  the  minimum  loss  are 
considered  in  paragraphs  212  to  220,  inclusive.  These  and  other 
methods  of  crossing  such  zones  should  be  studied  and  practiced. 

454.  The  best  protection  agaiaist  loss  while  advancing  is  to 
escape  the  enemy's  view. 

4.55.  Each  battalion  finds  its  own  firing  position,  conforming 
to  the  general  advance  as  long  as  practicable  and  taking  ad- 
vantage of  the  more  advanced  position  of  an  adjacent  battalion 
in  order  to  gain  ground. 

The  position  from  which  the  attack  opens  fire  is  further  con- 
sidered in  j>aragraphs  300  to  308,  inclusive. 


ATTACK.  Wl 

456.  It  will  frequently  become  necessary  for  infantry  moving 
to  the  attack  to  pass  through  deployed  artillery.  This  should 
be  done  so  as  to  interfere  as  little  as  possible  with  the  latter's 
fire,  and  never  so  as  to  cause  that  fire  to  cease  entirely.  As  far 
as  practicable,  advantaij;e  should  be  taken  of  intervals  in  the 
line,  if  any.  An  understanding  between  artillery  and  infantry 
commanders  should  be  had,  so  as  to  effect  the  movement  to  the 
best  advantage. 

457.  In  advancing  the  attack,  advanced  elements  of  the  firing 
line  or  detachments  in  front  of  it  should  not  open  fire  excei)t 
in  defense  or  to  clear  the  foreground  of  the  enemy.  Fire  on 
the -hostile  main  position  should  not  be  opened  until  all  or  nearly 
all  of  the  firing  line  can  join  in  the  fii'e. 

THE  FIRE  ATTACK. 

4  58.  At  the  first  firing  iiosition  the  attack  seeks  to  gain  fire 
superiority.  This  may  necessitate  a  steady,  accurate  fire  for  a 
long  time.  The  ob.iect  is  to  subdue  the  enemy's  fire  and  keep 
it  subdued  so  that  the  attacking  troops  may  advance  from  this 
point  to  a  favorable  place  near  the  enemy  from  which  the 
charge  may  be  made.  Hence,  in  the  advance  by  rushes,  sutti- 
cient  rifles  must  be  kept  constantly  in  action  to  keep  down  the 
enemy's  fire;  this  determines  the  size  of  the  fraction  rushing. 

450.  To  advance  williout  fire  superiority  against  a  deter- 
mined defense  would  result  in  such  losses  as  to  bring  the  at- 
tack to  a  standstill  or  to  make  the  apparent  success  barren  of 
results. 

4G0.  Diminution  of  the  enemy's  fire  and  a  pronounced  loss  in 
effectiveness  are  the  surest  signs  that  fire  superiority  has  been 
gained  and  that  a  part  of  the  firing  line  can  advance. 

4  61.  The  men  must  be  impressed  with  the  fact  that,  having 
made  a  considerable  advance  under  fire  and  having  been 
checked,  it  is  suicidal  to  turn  back  in  daylight. 

If  they  can  advance  no  farther,  they  must  intrench  and  hold 
on  until  the  fall  of  darkness  or  a  favorable  turn  in  the  situation 
develops. 

Intrenching  is  resorted  to  only  when  necessary.  Troops  who 
have  intrenched  themselves  under  fire  are  moved  forward  again 
witli  difiiculty. 

462.  SupjKirts  and  reserves  occupying  intrenchments  vacated 
by  the  firing  line  should  improve  them,  but  they  must  not  be 
held  back  or  diverted  from  their  true  missions  on  this  account. 


112  ATTACK. 

463.  Paragraphs  309  to  317,  inclusive,  deal  more  in  detail 
with  the  conduct  of  the  fire  attack. 

THE  CHARGE. 

464.  Fire  superiority  l)Oiits  down  the  enemy's  fire,  destroys 
his  resistance  and  morale,  and  enables  the  attacking  troops  to 
close  on  him,  but  an  actual  or  threatened  occupation  of  his  posi- 
tion is  needed  to  drive  him  out  and  defeat  him. 

The  i^sychological  moment  for  the  charge  can  not  be  deter- 
mined far  in  advance.  The  tactical  instinct  of  the  resix)nsible 
officer  must  decide. 

465.  The  defenders,  if  subjugated  by  the  fire  attack,  will 
frequently  leave  before  the  charge  begins.  On  the  other  hand, 
it  may  be  necessary  to  carry  the  fire  attack  close  to  the  position 
and  follow  it  up  with  a  short  dash  and  a  bayonet  combat. 
Hence  the  distance  over  which  the  charge  may  be  made  will 
vary  between  wide  limits.     It  may  be  from  2.5  to  400  yards. 

The  charge  should  be  made  at  the  earliest  moment  that 
promises  success ;  otherwise  the  full  advantage  of  victory  will 
be  lost. 

466.  The  commander  of  the  attacking  line  should  indicate 
his  approval,  or  give  the  order,  before  the  charge  is  made. 
Subordinate  counnanders,  usually  battalion  commanders,  whose 
troops  are  ready  to  charge  signal  that  fact  to  the  commander. 
It  may  be  necessary  for  them  to  wait  until  other  battalions  or 
other  ijarts  of  the  line  are  readj^  or  until  the  necessary  reserves 
arrive. 

At  the  signal  for  the  charge  the  firing  line  and  near-by  sup- 
ports and  reserves  rush  forward.     See  i)aragraphs  318  and  319. 

The  charge  is  made  simultaneously,  if  possible,  by  all  the 
units  participating  therein,  but,  once  committed  to  the  assault, 
battalions  should  be  pushed  with  the  utmost  vigor  and  no  re- 
straint placed  on  the  ardor  of  charging  troops  by  an  attempt  to 
maintain  alignment. 

467.  Before  ordering  the  charge  the  commander  should  see 
that  enough  trooiis  are  on  hand  to  make  it  a  success.  Locnl 
reserves  joining  the  firing  line  in  time  to  participate  in  the 
charge  give  it  a  strong  im]ietus.  Too  dense  a  mass  should  be 
■avoided. 


ATTACK.  A18 

468.  The  line  should  be  strengthened  by  prolongation,  if  prac- 
ticable, and  remaining  troops  liept  in  formation  for  future  use; 
but  rather  than  that  the  attack  should  fail,  the  last  formed 
body  will  be  sent  in,  unless  it  is  very  apparent  that  it  can  do  no 
good. 

469.  To  arrive  in  the  hostile  position  with  a  very  compact 
firing  line  and  a  few  formed  supports  is  sufficient  for  a  victory, 
but  an  additional  force  kept  well  in  hand  for  pursuit  is  of  inesti- 
mable value. 

470.  A  premature  charge  by  a  part  of  the  line  should  be 
avoided,  but  if  begun,  the  other  parts  of  the  line  should  join  at 
once  if  there  is  any  pi'ospect  of  success.  Under  exceptional 
conditions  a  part  of  the  line  may  be  compelled  to  charge  with- 
out authority  from  the  rear.  The  intention  to  do  so  should 
be  signaled  to  the  rear. 

471.  Confidence  in  their  ability  to  use  the  bayonet  gives  the 
assaulting  troops  the  promise  of  success. 

472.  If  the  enemy  has  left  the  position  when  the  charging 
troops  reach  it,  the  latter  should  open  a  rapid  fire  upon  the 
retreating  enemy,  if  he  is  in  sight.  It  is  not  advisable  for  the 
mixed  and  disordered  units  to  follow  him,  except  to  advance 
to  a  favorable  firing  position  or  to  cover  the  reorganization  of 
others. 

473.  The  nearest  formed  bodies  accompanying  or  following 
the  charge  are  sent  instantly  in  pursuit.  Under  cover  of  these 
troops  order  is  restored  in  the  charging  line.  If  the  captured 
position  is  part  of  a  general  line  or  is  an  advanced  post,  it 
should  be  intrenched  and  occupied  at  once. 

The  exhaustion  of  officers  and  men  must  not  cause  the  neglect 
of  measures  to  meet  a  counterattack. 

474.  If  the  attack  receives  a  temporary  setback  and  it  is 
intended  to  strengthen  and  continue  it,  officers  will  make  every 
effort  to  stop  the  rearward  movement  and  will  reestablish  the 
firing  line  in  a  covered  positioa  as  close  as  possible  to  the 
enemy. 

4  75.  If  the  attack  must  be  abandoned,  the  rearward  move- 
ment should  continue  with  promptness  until  the  troops  reach  a 
feature  of  the  terrain  that  facilitates  the  task  of  checking  and 
reorganizing  them.  The  point  selected  should  be  so  far  to  the 
rear  as  to  prevent  interference  by  the  enemy  before  the  troops 
are  ready  to  resist.  The  withdrawal  of  the  attacking  troops 
19069" — 14 8 


114  ATTACK. 

should  be  (Covered  liy  tlie  artillery  and  by  reserves,  if  any  are 
available. 

See  Night  Operations. 

PURSUIT. 

476.  To  reap  the  full  fruits  of  victory  a  vigorous  pursuit 
must  be  made.  The  natural  inclination  to  be  satisfied  with  a 
successful  charge  must  be  overcome.  The  enemy  must  be  al- 
lowed no  more  time  to  reorganize  than  is  positively  unavoidable. 

4  77.  The  part  of  the  reserve  that  is  still  formed  or  is  best 
under  control  is  sent  forward  in  pursuit  and  vigorously  attacks 
the  enemy's  main  body  or  covering  detachments  wherever  found. 

The  artillery  delivers  a  heavy  fire  upon  the  retreating  enemy ; 
the  disordered  attacking  troops  secure  the  position,  promptly 
re-form,  and  become  a  new  reserve. 

4  78.  If  the  captured  iwsition  is  a  section  of  the  general  line, 
the  breach  should  be  heavily  occupied,  made  wider,  and  strongly 
secured  by  drawing  on  all  reserves  in  the  vicinity. 

479.  After  the  pursuit  from  the  immediate  battle  field,  pur- 
suit by  parallel  roads  is  especially  efCeqtive  where  large  com- 
mands are  concerned. 

480.  Artillery  and  cavalry  are  very  effective  in  pursuit. 

ATTACK  OF  FORTIFICATIONS. 

481.  Few  modifications  enter  into  the  problem  of  attacking 
fortifications.  Such  as  are  to  be  considered  relate  chiefly  to  the 
greater  time  and  labor  of  advancing,  the  more  frequent  use  of 
darkness  and  the  use  of  hand  grenades  to  augment  the  fire. 

482.  If  the  enemy  is  strongly  fortified  and  time  permits,  it 
may  be  advisable  to  wait  and  approach  the  charging  point  under 
cover  of  darkness.  The  necessary  reconnaissance  and  arrange- 
ments should  be  made  before  dark.  If  the  charge  is  not  to  be 
made  at  once,  the  troops  intrench  the  advanced  position,  using 
sand  bags  if  necessary.  Before  daylight  the  foreground  should 
be  cleared  of  obstacles. 

483.  If  the  distance  is  short  and  other  conditions  ai-e  favor- 
able, the  charge  may  be  made  without  fire  preparation.  If 
made,  it  should  be  launched  with  spirit  and  suddenness  at  the 
break  of  day.     (See  Night  Operations.) 

484.  In  siege  operations  troops  are  usually  advanced  to  the 
charging  point  by  sapping.    This  method,  however,  presupposes 


DElPKlTSfi.  115 

that  an  early  victory  is  not  necessary  or  that  it  is  clearly 
inadvisable  to  attempt  more  direct  methods. 

HOLDING  ATTACK. 

485.  The  holding  attack  must  be  vigorous  enough  to  hold 
the  enemy  in  position  and  must  present  a  front  strong  enough 
to  conceal  the  secondary  nature  of  the  attack. 

The  holding  attack  need  have  comparatively  little  strength 
in  rear,  but  conceals  the  fact  by  a  firing  line  not  distinguish- 
able from  that  of  a  decisive  attack. 

486.  Supports  and  reserves  are  kept  at  short  distances. 
Their  strength  is  less  if  the  object  is  merely  to  hold  the  enemy 
"fast  than  if  the  object  is,  in  addition,  to  compel  him  to  use  up 
reserves. 

487.  Holding  attacks  which  may  later  develop  into  decisive 
attacks  should  be  correspondingly  strong  in  rear, 

488.  All  feint  attacks  should  employ  dense  firing  lines.  Their 
weakness  is  in  rear  and  is  concealed. 

DEFENSE. 

POSITIONS  AND  INTRENCHMENTS. 

489.  The  first  requirement  of  a  good  position  is  a  clear  field 
of  fire  and  view  to  the  front  and  exposed  flanks  to  a  distance 
©f  600  to  800  yards  or  more.  The  length  of  front  should  be 
suitable  to  the  size  of  the  command  and  the  flanks  should  be 
secure.  The  position  should  have  lateral  communication  and 
cover  for  supports  and  reserves.  It  should  be  one  which  the 
enemy  can  not  avoid,  but  must  attack  or  give  up  his  mission. 

A  position  having  all  these  advantages  will  rarely,  if  ever,  be 
found.  The  one  should  be  taken  which  conforms  closest  to  the 
description. 

490.  The  natural  cover  of  the  position  should  be  fully  util- 
ized. In  addition,  it  should  be  strengthened  by  fieldworks  and 
obstacles. 

The  best  protection  is  afforded  by  deep,  narrow,  inconspicu- 
ous trenches.  If  little  time  is  available,  as  much  as  practicable 
must  be  done.  That  the  fieldworks  may  not  be  needed  should 
not  cause  their  construction  to  be  omitted,  and  the  fact  that 


116  DEFENSE. 

tliey  have  been  constructed  should  not  influence  the  action  of  a 
commander,  if  conditions  are  found  to  be  other  than  expected. 

491.  When  time  and  troops  are  available  the  preparations 
include  the  necessary  communicating  and  cover  trenches,  head 
cover,  bombproofs,  etc.  The  fire  trenches  should  be  well  sup- 
plied with  ammunition. 

The  supports  are  placed  close  at  hand  in  cover  trenches  when 
natural  cover  is  not  available. 

493.  Dummy  trenches  frequently  cause  the  hostile  artillery 
to  waste  time  and  ammunition  and  to  divert  its  fire. 

493.  The  location,  extent,  profile,  garrison,  etc.,  of  fieldworks 
are  matters  to  be  decided  by  the  infantry  commanders.  Officers 
must  be  able  to  choose  ground  and  properly  intrench  it.  (See 
Intrenchmeuts.) 

494.  In  combat  exercises,  when  it  is  impracticable  to  con- 
struct the  trenches  appropriate  to  the  exercise,  their  trace  may 
be  outlined  by  bayonets,  sticks,  or  other  markers,  and  the  re- 
sponsible officers  required  to  indicate  the  profile  selected, 
method  and  time  of  construction,  garrisons,, etc. 

DEPLOYMENT  FOR  DEFENSE. 

495.  The  density  of  the  whole  deployment  depends  upon  the 
expected  severity  of  the  action,  the  character  of  the  enemy,  the^ 
condition  of  the  flanks,  the  field  of  fire,  the  terrain,  and  the 
available  artificial  or  natural  protection  for  the  troops. 

496.  If  exposed,  the  firing  line  should  be  as  dense  in  defense 
as  in  attack.  If  the  firing  line  is  well  intrenched  and  has  a 
good  field  of  fire,  it  may  be  made  thinner. 

Weaker  supports  are  permissible.  For  the  same  number  of 
troops  the  front  occupied  on  the  defensive  may  therefore  be 
longer  than  on  the  offensive,  the  battalions  placing  more  com- 
panies in  the  firing  line. 

497.  If  it  is  intended  only  to  delay  the  enemy,  a  fairly  strong 
deployment  is  sufficient,  but  if  decisive  results  are  desired,  a 
change  to  the  offensive  must  be  contemplated  and  the  corre- 
sponding strength  in  rear  provided.  This  strength  is  in  the 
reserve,  which  should  be  as  large  as  the  demands  of  the  firing 
line  and  supports  permit.  Even  In  a  passive  defense  the  re- 
serve should  be  as  strong  as  in  the  attack,  unless  the  flanks  are 
protected  by  other  means. 


DEFENSE.  117 

498.  Supports  are  posted  as  close  to  the  firing  line  as  practi- 
cable and  reinforce  the  latter  according  to  the  principles  ex- 
plained in  the  attack.  When  natural  cover  is  not  sufficient  for 
the  purpose,  communicating  and  cover  trenches  are  constructed. 
If  time  does  not  permit  their  construction,  it  is  better  to  begin 
the  action  with  a  very  dense  firing  line  and  no  immediate  sup- 
ports than  to  have  supports  greatly  exposed  in  rear. 

499.  The  reserve  should  be  posted  so  as  to  be  entirely  free 
to  act  as  a  whole,  according  to  the  developments.  The  distance 
from  firing  line  to  reserve  is  generally  greater  than  in  the  at- 
tack. By  reason  of  such  a  location  the  reserve  is  best  able  to 
meet  a  hostile  enveloping  attacli;  it  has  a  better  position  from 
which  to  malie  a  counter  attack;  it  is  in  a  better  position  to 
cover  a  withdrawal  and  permit  an  orderly  retreat. 

The  distance  from  firing  line  to  reserve  increases  with  the 
size  of  the  reserve. 

500.  When  the  situation  is  no  longer  in  doubt,  the  reserve 
should  be  held  in  rear  of  the  flank  which  is  most  in  danger  or 
offers  the  best  opportunity  for  counterattack.  Usually  the  same 
flank  best  suits  both  purposes. 

501.  In  exceptional  cases,  on  broad  fronts,  it  may  be  neces- 
sary to  detach  a  part  of  the  reserve  to  protect  the  opposite 
flaiik.  This  detachment  should  be  the  smallest  consistent  with 
its  purely  protective  mission. 

502.  The  commander  assigns  to  subordinates  the  front  to  be 
occupied  by  them.  These,  in  turn,  subdivide  the  front  among 
their  next  lower  units  in  the  firing  line. 

503.  An  extended  position  is  so  divided  into  sections  that 
each  has,  if  practicable,  a  field  of  fire  naturally  made  distinct 
by  the  terrain.  .        . 

Unfavorable  and  unimportant  ground  will  ordinarily  cause 
gaps  to  exist  in  the  line. 

504.  The  size  of  the  unit  occupying  each  section  depends 
upon  the  latter's  natural  strength,  front,  and  importance.  . If 
practicable,  battalion^s  should  be  kept  intact  and  assigned  as 
units  to  sections  or  parts  of  sections. 

505.  Where  important  dead  space  lies  in  front  of  one  section, 
an  adjoining  section  should  be  instructed  to  cover  it  with  fire 
wlien  necessarj',  or  machine  guns  should  be  concealed  for  the 
like  purpose. 

506.  Advanced  posts,  or  any  other  form  of  unnecessary  dis- 
persion, should  be  avoided. 


118  DEFENSE. 

507.  Unless  the  difflcnlty  of  moving  the  troops  into  the  posi- 
tion be  gi'eat,  most  of  the  troops  of  the  firing  line  are  held  in 
rear  of  it  until  the  infantry  attack  begins.  The  position  itself 
is  occupied  by  a  small  garrison  only,  with  the  necessary  out- 
gun  rds  or  patrols  in  front. 

508.  Fire  alone  can  not  be  depended  upon  to  stop  the  attack. 
The  troops  must  be  determined  to  resort  to  the  bayonet,  if 
necessary. 

509.  If  a  night  attack  or  close  approach  by"  the  enemy  is 
expected,  troops  in  a  prepared  position  should  strengthen  the 
outguards  and  firing  line  and  construct  as  numerous  and  ef- 
fective obstacles  as  possible.  Supports  and  local  reserves  should 
move  close  to  the  llring  line  and  should,  with  the  firing  line, 
keep  bayonets  fixed.  If  practicable,  the  front  should  be  illumi- 
nated, preferably  from  the  flanks  of  the  section. 

510.  Only  short  range  fire  is  of  any  value  in  resisting  night 
attacks.  The  bayonet  is  the  chief  reliance.  (See  Night  Opera- 
tions.) 

COUNTERATTACK. 

511.  The  passive  defense  should  be  assumed  only  when  cir- 
cumstances force  it.     Only  the  offensive  wins. 

512.  An  active  defense  seeks  a  favorable  decision.  A  favor- 
able decision  can  not  be  expected  without  counterattack. 

513.  A  passive  defense  in  a  position  whose  flanks  are  not 
protected  by  natural  obstacles  is  generally  out  of  the  question. 

514.  Where  the  defense  is  assumed  with  a  view  to  making  a 
counterattack,  the  troops  for  the  counterattack  should  be  held 
in  reserve  until  the  time  arrives  for  such  attack.  The  defensive 
line  should  be  held  by  as  few  troops  as  possible  in  order  that 
the  force  for  the  offensive  may  be  as  large  as  possible. 

The  force  for  the  counterattack  should  be  held  echeloned  in 
rear  of  the  flank  which  offers  it  the  greatest  advantage  for  the 
proposed  attack. 

515.  The  counterattack  should  be  made  vigorously  and  at 
the  proper  time.    It  will  usually  be  made: 

By  launching  the  reserve  against  the  enemy's  flank  when  his 
attack  is  in  full  progress.  This  is  the  most  effective  form  of 
counterattack. 

Straight  to  the  front  by  the  firing  line  and  supports  after 
repulsing  the  enemy's  attack  and  demoralizing  him  with  pur- 
suing fire. 


MEETING  ENGAGEMENTS.  U9 

Or,  by  the  troops  in  rear  of  the  firing  line  when  the  enemy 
has  reached  the  defensive  position  and  is  in  disorder. 

516.  Minor  counterattacks  are  sometimes  necessary  in  order 
to  drive  the  enemy  from  important  positions  gained  by  him. 

DELAYING  ACTION. 

II',  6 17.  When  a  position  is  taken  merely  to  delay  the  enemy  and 
lo  withdraw  before  becoming  closely  engaged,  the  important 
considerations  are : 

The  enemy  should  be  forced  to  deploy  early.  The  field  of  fire 
should  therefore  be  good  at  distances  from  500  to  1,200  yards 
or  more;  a  good  field  of  fire  at  close  range  is  not  necessary. 

The  ground  in  reiir  of  the  position  should  favor  the  with- 
drawal of  the  firing  line  by  screening  the  troops  from  the  ene- 
my's view  and  fire  as  soon  as  the  position  is  vacated. 

518.  A  thin  firing  line  using  much  ammunition  will  generally 
answer  the  purpose.  Supports  are  needed  chiefly  to  protect  the 
flanks. 

The  reserve  should  be  posted  well  in  rear  to  assist  in  the 
withdrawal  of  the  firing  line. 

519.  Artillery  is  especially  valuable  to  a  delaying  force. 

MEETING  ENGAGEMENTS. 

520.  Meeting  engagements  are  characterized  by  the  necessity 
for  hasty  reconnaissance,  or  the  almost  total  absence  of  recon- 
naissance; by  the  necessity  for  rapid  deployment,  frequently 
under  fire;  and  usually  by  the  absence  of  trenches  or  other 
artificial  cover.  These  conditions  give  further  advantages  to  the 
offensive. 

531.  The  whole  situation  will  usually  indicate  beforehand 
the  proper  general  action  to  be  taken  on  meeting  the  enemy. 

522.  Little  fresh  information  can  be  expected.  The  boldness, 
initiative,  and  determination  of  the  commander  must  be  relied 
upon. 

523.  A  meeting  engagement  affords  an  ideal  opportunity  to 
the  commander  who  has  intuition  and  quick  decision  and  who 
is  willing  to  take  long  chances.  His  opponent  is  likely  to  be 
overcautious. 


120  MEETING  ENGAGEMENTS. 

524.  The  amount  of  information  that  tlie  commander  is  war- 
ranted in  awaiting  before  taking  final  action  depends  entirely 
upon  his  mission.  One  situation  may  demand  a  blind  attack; 
another  may  demand  rapid,  partial  deployment  for  attack,  but 
careful  and  time-consuming  reconnaissance  before  the  attack  is 
launched. 

525.  A  great  advantage  accrues  to  the  side  which  can  deploy 
the  faster.  The  advantage  of  a  close-order  formation,  favoring 
rapid  deployment,  becomes  more  pronounced  with  the  size  of  the 
force. 

526.  The  first  troops  to  deploy  will  be  able  to  attack  with 
longer  firing  lines  and  weaker  supports  than  are  required  in 
the  ordinary  case.  But  if  the  enemy  succeeds  in  deploying  a 
strong  defensive  line,  the  attack  must  be  strengthened  accord- 
ingly before  it  is  wasted. 

527.  If  the  situation  warrants  the  advance,  the  leading  troops 
seek  to  deploy  faster  than  the  enemy,  to  reach  his  flanks,  check 
his  deployment,  and  get  information.  In  any  event,  they  seek 
to  cover  the  deployment  of  their  own  troops  in  rear — especially 
the  artillery — and  to  seize  important  ground. 

528.  The  commander  of  a  long  column  which  meets  the 
enemy  should  be  with  the  advance  guard  to  receive  informa- 
tion promptly  and  to  reconnoiter.  If  he  decides  to  fight,  the 
advance  guard  must  hold  the  enemy  while  the  commander 
formulates  a  plan  of  action,  issues  the  necessary  orders,  and 
deploys  the  main  body.  Meantime,  the  column  should  be  clos- 
ing up,  either  in  ma^s  or  to  form  line  of  columns,  so  that  the 
deployment,  when  determined  upon,  may  be  made  more  promptly. 

529.  The  action  of  the  advance  guard,  prior  to  the  receipt  of 
orders,  depends  upon  the  situation.  Whether  to  attack  deter- 
minedly or  only  as  a  feint,  or  to  assume  the  defensive,  depends 
upon  the  strength  of  the  advance  guard,  the  terrain,  the  char- 
acter of  the  hostile  force  encountered,  and  the  mission  and  in- 
tentions of  the  commander  of  the  whole. 

530.  If  the  enemy  is  beforehand  or  more  aggressive,  or  if  the 
advance  guard  is  too  weak,  it  may  be  necessary  to  put  ele- 
ments of  the  main  body  into  action  as  fast  as  they  arrive,  in 
order  to  check  him.  This  method  should  be  avoided;  it  pre- 
vents the  formation  and  execution  of  a  definite  plan  and  com- 
pels piecemeal  action.  The  best  results  are  obtained  when  the 
main  body  is  used  as  a  whole. 


WITHDRAWAL  FROM  ACTION.  121 

WITHDRAWAL  FROM  ACTION. 

531.  The  witlidi'awal  of  a  defeated  force  can  generally  be 
effected  only  at  a  heavy  cost.  When  it  is  no  longer  possible  to 
give  the  action  a  favorable  turn  and  the  necessity  for  with- 
drawal arises,  every  effort  must  be  made  to  place  distance  and 
a  rear  guard  between  the  enemy  and  the  defeated  troops. 

532.  Artillery  gives  esi^ecially  valuable  assistance  in  the 
withdrawal.  The  long-range  fire  of  machine  guns  should  also 
be  employed.  Cavalry  assists  the  withdrawal  by  charging  the 
pursuing  troops  or  by  taking  flank  positions  and  using  fire 
action. 

533.  If  an  intact  reserve  remains  it  should  be  placed  in  a 
covering  position,  preferably  on  a  flank,  to  check  the  pursuit 
and  thus  enable  the  defeated  troops  to  withdraw  beyond  reach 
of  hostile  fire. 

The  covering  position  of  the  reserve  should  be  at  some  dis- 
tance from  the  main  action,  but  close  enough  to  bring  the  with- 
drawing troops  quickly  under  the  protection  of  its  fire.  It 
should  have  a  good  field  of  fire  at  effective  and  long  ranges  and 
should  facilitate  its  own  safe  and  timely  withdrawal. 

534.  If  the  general  line  is  divided,  by  terrain  or  by  organiza- 
tion, into  two  or  more  parts,  the  firing  line  of  the  part  in  the 
least  danger  from  pursuit  should  be  withdrawn  first.  A  con- 
tinuous firing  line,  whose  parts  are  dependent  upon  one  another 
for  fire  support,  should  be  withdrawn  as  a  whole,  retiring  by 
echelon  at  the  beginning  of  the  withdrawal.  Every  effort  must 
be  made  to  restore  the  organizations,  regain  control,  and  form 
column  of  march  as  soon  as  the  troops  ai-e  beyond  the  reach  of 
hostile  fire. 

As  fast  as  possible  without  delaying  the  march,  companies, 
and  the  larger  units  should  be  re-formed,  so  that  the  command 
will  again  be  well  in  hand. 

535.  The  commander  of  the  whole,  having  given  orders  for 
withdrawal,  should  go  to  the  rear,  select  a  rendezvous  point,  and 
devote  himself  to  the  reorganization  of  his  command. 

The  rendezvous  point  is  selected  with  regard  to  the  natural 
channels  of  movement  approximately  straight  to  the  rear.  It 
should  be  distant  from  the  bottle  field  and  should  facilitate  the 
gathering  and  protection  of  the  command. 


SUMMARY. 

536.  1.  Avoid  combats  that  offer  uo  cbauce  of  victory  or 
otlier  valuable  results. 

2.  Make  every  effort  for  the  success  of  the  general  plan  and 
avoid  spectacular  plays  that  have  no  bearing  on  the  general 
result. 

3.  Have  a  definite  plan  and  carry  it  out  vigorously.  Do  not 
vacillate. 

4.  Do  not  attempt  complicated  maneuvers. 

5.  Keep  the  command  in  hand;  avoid  undue  extension  and 
dispersion. 

G.  Study  the  ground  and  direct  the  advance  in  such  a  way 
as  to  take  advantage  of  all  available  cover  and  thereby 
diminish  losses. 

7.  Never  deploy  until  the  purpose  and  the  proper  direction  are 
known. 

8.  Deploy  enough  men  for  the  immediate  task  in  hand ;  hold 
out  the  rest  and  avoid  undue  haste  in  committing  them  to  the 
action. 

9.  Flanks  must  be  protected  either  by  reserves,  fortifications, 
or  the  terrain. 

10.  In  a  decisive  action,  gain  and  keep  fire  superiority. 

11.  Keep  up  reconnaissance. 

12.  Use  the  reserve,  but  not  until  needed  or  a  very  favorable 
opportunity  for  its  use  presents  itself.  Keep  some  reserve  as 
long  as  practicable. 

13.  Do  not  hesitate  to  sacrifice  the  command  if  the  result  is 
worth  the  cost. 

14.  Spare  the  command  all  unnecessary  hardship  and  exertion. 
122 


*r  ' 


MISCELLANEOUS. 

MACHINE  GUNS. 

53  7.  Machine  guus  must  be  considered  as  weapous  of  emer- 
gency. Tlieir  effectiveness  combined  witli  ttieir  mobility  rea- 
ders tliem  of  great  value  at  critical,  thougli  infrequent,  periods 
of  an  engagement. 

538.  Wben  operating  against  infantry  only,  they  can  be  used 
to  a  great  extent  throughout  the  combat  as  circumstances  may 
indicate,  but  they  are  quickly  rendered  powerless  by  efficient 
field  artillery  and  will  promptly  draw  artillery  fire  whenever 
they  open.  Hence  their  use  in  engagements  between  large 
commands  must  be  for  short  periods  and  at  times  when  their 
great  effectiveness  will  be  most  valuable. 

539.  Machine  guns  should  be  attached  to  the  advance  guard. 
In  meeting  engagements  they  will  be  of  great  value  in  assisting 
their  own  advance,  or  in  checking  the  advance  of  the  enemy, 
and  will  have  considerable  time  to  operate  l>efore  hostile  artil- 
lery fire  can  silence  them. 

Care  must  be  taken  not  to  leave  them  too  long  in  action. 

540.  They  are  valuable  to  a  rear  guard  which  seeks  to  check 
a  vigorous  pursuit  or  to  gain  time. 

541.  In  attack,  if  fire  of  position  is  practicable,  they  are  of 
great  value.  In  this  case  fire  should  not  be  opened  by  the 
machine  guns  until  the  attack  is  well  advanced.  At  a  critical 
period  in  the  attack,  such  fire,  if  suddenly  and  unexpectedly 
opened,  will  greatly  assist  the  advancing  line.  The  fire  must  be 
as  heavy  as  possible  and  must  be  continued  until  masked  by 
friendly  troops  or  until  the  hostile  artillery  finds  the  machine 
guns. 

542.  In  the  defense,  machine  guns  should  be  used  in  the 
same  general  manner  as  described  above  for  the  attack.  Con- 
cealment and  patient  waiting  for  critical  moments  and  excep- 
tional opportunities  are  the  s|)ecial  characteristics  of  the  ma- 
chine-gun service  in  decisive  actions. 

543.  As  part  of  the  reserve,  machine  guns  have  special  iui 
portance.     If  they  are  with  the  troops  told  off  to  protect  the 
flanks,  and  if  they  are  well  placed,  they  will  often  produce  de- 

123 


124  MISCELLANEOUS. 

cisive  results  against  a  hostile  turniug  movement.  They  are 
especially  qualified  to  cover  a  withdrawal  or  make  a  captured 
position  secure. 

544.  Machine  guns  shonld  not  be  assignefd  to  the  firing  line  of 
an  attack.  They  should  be  so  placed  that  fire  directed  upon 
them  is  not  likely  to  fall  upon  the  firing  line. 

545.  A  skirmish  line  can  not  advance  by  walking  or  running 
when  hostile  machine  guns  have  the  correct  range  and  are 
ready  to  fire.  Machine-gun  fire  is  not  specially  effective  against 
troops  lying  on  the  ground  or  crawling. 

546.  When  opposed  by  machine  guns  and  without  artillery 
to  destroy  them,  infantry  itself  must  silence  them  before  it  can 
advance. 

An  infantry  command  that  must  depend  upon  itself  for  pro- 
tection against  machine  guns  should  concentrate  a  large  number 
of  rifles  on  each  gun  in  turn  and  until  it  has  silenced  it. 

AMMUNITION  SUPPLY. 

54  7.  The  method  of  supply  of  ammunition  to  the  combat 
trains  is  explained  in  Field  Service  Regulations. 

548.  The  combat  train  is  the  immediate  reserve  supply  of 
the  battalion,  and  the  major  is  responsible  for  its  proper  use. 
He  will  take  measures  to  insure  the  maintenance  of  the  pre- 
scribed allowance  at  all  times. 

In  the  absence  of  instructions,  he  will'  cause  the  train  to 
march  immediately  in  rear  of  his  battalion,  and,  upon  sepa- 
rating from  it  to  enter  an  engagement,  will  cause  the  ammuni- 
tion therein  to  be  issued.  When  emptied,  he  will  direct  that 
the  wagons  proceed  to  the  proper  rendezvous  to  be  refilled. 
Ordinarily  a  rendezvous  is  appointed  for  each  brigade  and  the 
necessary  number  of  wagons  sent  forward  to  it  from  the  ammu- 
nition column. 

549.  When  refilled,  the  combat  wagons  will  rejoin  their  bat- 
talions, or,  if  the  latter  be  engaged,  will  join  or  establish 
communication  with  the  regimental  reserve. 

550.  Company  commanders  are  responsible  that  the  belts  of 
the  men  in  their  companies  are  kept  filled  at  all  tim^s,  except 
when  the  ammunition  is  being  expended  in  action.  In  the 
firing  line  the  ammunition  of  the  dead  and  wounded  should  be 
secured  whenever  practicable. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  MB 

651.  Ammunition  in  the  bandoleers  will  ordinarily  be  ex- 
pended first.  Thirty  roxiuds  in  the  right  pociiet  section  of  the 
belt  will  be  held  as  a  reserve,  to  be  expended  only  wher 
ordered  by  an  otficer. 

552.  When  necessary  to  resupply  the  firing  line,  ammunition 
will  be  sent  forward  with  reenforcements,  generally  from  the 
regimental  reserve. 

Men  will  never  be  sent  back  from  the  firing  line  for  ammu- 
nition. Men  sent  forward  with  ammunition  remain  with  the 
firing  line. 

553.  As  soon  as  possible  after  an  engagement  the  belts  of  the 
men  and  the  combat  wagons  are  resupplied  to  their  normal 
capacities.  Ammunition  which  can  not  be  reloaded  on  combat 
wagons  will  be  piled  up  in  a  convenient  place, and  left  under 
guard. 

MOUNTED  SCOUTS. 

554.  The  mounted  scouts  should  be  thoroughly  trained  in 
patrolling  and  reconnaissance.  They  are  used  for  communi- 
cation with  neighboring  troops,  for  patrolling  off  the  route  of 
march,  for  march  outposts,  outpost  patrols,  combat  patrols, 
reconnaissance  ahead  of  columns,  etc.  Their  further  use  is, 
in  general,  confined  to  e.scori  and  uiessenger  duty.  They  should 
be  freely  used  for  all  these  purposes,  but  for  these  purposes 
on^y. 

555.  When  infantry  is  acting  alone,  or  when  the  cavalry  of 
a  mixed  command  has  been  sent  to  a  distance,  the  mounted 
scouts  are  of  special  importance  to  covering  detachments  and 
should  be  used  to  nialce  the  reconnaissance  which  would  other- 
wise fall  to  cavalry. 

556.  In  reconnaissance,  scouts  should  be  used  in  preference 
to  other  troops  as  much  as  possible.  When  not  needed  for 
mounted  duty,  they  should  be  employed  for  necessary  dis- 
mounted patrolling. 

557.  Battalion  staff  officers  should  be  specially  trained  in 
patrolling  and  reconnaissance  work  in  order  that  they  may  be 
available  when  a  mQ,uuted  officer's  patrol  is  required. 

N/GHT  OPERATIONS. 

558.  By  employing  night  operations  troops  make  use  of  the 
cover  of  darkness  to  minimize  losses  from  hostile  fire  or  to 


126  MISCELLANEOUS. 

escape  observation.  Night  operations  may  also  be  necessary  for 
the  purpose  of  gaining  time.  Control  is  diflacult  and  confusion 
is  frequently  unavoidable. 

It  may  be  necessary  to  take  advantage  of  darkness  in  order 
to  assault  from  a  point  gained  during  the  day,  or  to  approach  a 
point  from  which  a  daylight  assault  is  to  be  made,  or  tp  effect 
both  the  approach  and  the  assault.  ' 

559.  Offensive  and  defensive  night  operations  should  be 
practiced  frequently  in  order  that  troops  may  learn  to  cover 
ground  in  the  dark  and  arrive  at  a  destination  quietly  and  in 
good  order,  and  In  order  to  train  officers  in  the  necessary  prep- 
aration and  reconnaissance. 

Only  simple  and  well-appointed  formations  should  be  em- 
ployed. 

Troops  should  be  thoroughly  trained  in  the  necessary  details^ — 
e.  g.,  night  patrolling,  night  marching,  and  communication  at 
night. 

560.  The  ground  to  be  traversed  should  be  studied  by  day- 
light and,  if  practicable,  at  night.  It  should  be  cleared  of 
hostile  detachments  before  dark,  and,  if  practicable,  should  be 
occupied  by  covering  troops. 

Orders  must  be  formulated  with  great  care  and  clearness. 
Each  unit  must  be  given  a  definite 'objective  and  direction,  and 
care  must  be  exercised  to  avoid  collision  between  units. 

Whenever  contact  with  the  enemy  is  anticipated,  a  distinctive 
badge  should  be  worn  by  all. 

561.  Preparations  must  be  made  with  secrecy.  When  the 
movement  is  started,  and  not  until  then,  the  officers  and  men 
should  be  acquainted  with  the  general  design,  the  composition 
of  the  whole  force,  and  should  be  given  such  additional  informa- 
tion as  will  insure  cooperation  and  eliminate  mistakes. 

During  the  movement  every  precaution  must  be  taken  to  keep 
secret  the  fact  that  troops  are  abroad. 

Unfriendly  guides  must  frequently  be  impressed.  These 
should  be  secured  against  escape,  outcry,  or  deception. 

Fire  action  should  be  avoided  in  offensive  operations.  In 
general,  pieces  should  not  be  loaded.  Jleu  must  be  trained  to 
rely  upon  the  bayonet  and  to  use  it  aggressively. 

562.  Long  night  marches  should  be  made  only  over  well- 
defined  routes.  March  discipline  must  be  rigidly  enforced.  The 
troops  should  be  marched  in  as  compact  a  formation  as  prac- 
ticable, with  the  usual  oove^'lug  detachments.    Advance  and  rear 


MISCELLANEOUS.  127 

guard  distances  should  be  greatly  reduced.  They  are  shortest 
when  the  mission  is  an  offensive  one.  The  connecting  files  are 
numerous.  » 

563.  A  night  advance  made  with  a  view  to  making  an  attack 
by  day  usually  terminates  with  the  hasty  construction  of  in- 
trenchments  in  the  dark.  Such  an  advance  should  be  timed  so 
as  to  allow  an  hour  or  more  of  darkness  for  intrenching. 

An  advance  that  is  to  terminate  in  an  assault  at  the  break  of 
day  should  be  timed  so  that  the  troops  will  not  arrive  long 
before  the  assault  is  to  be  made;  otherwise  the  advantage  of 
partial  surprise  will  be  lost  and  the  enemy  will  be  allowed  to 
reenforce  the  threatened  point. 

5G4.  The  night  attack  is  ordinarily  confined  to  small  forces, 
or  to  minor  engagements  in  a  general  battle,  or  to  seizure  of 
positions  occupied  by  covering  or  advanced  detachments.  Deci- 
si^e  results  are  not  often  obtained. 

Poorly  disciplined  and  untrained  troops  are  unfit  for  night 
attacks  or  for  night  operations  demanding  the  exercise  of  skill 
and  care. 

Troops  attacking  at  night  can  advance  close  to  the  enemy  in 
compact  formations  and  without  suffering  loss  from  hostile  ar- 
tillery or  infantry  fire.  The  defender  is  ignorant  of  the  strength 
or  direction  of  the  attack. 

A  force  which  makes  a  vigorous  bayonet  charge  in  the  dark 
will  often  throw  a  much  larger  force  into  disorder. 

565.  Reconnaissance  should  be  made  to  ascertain  theix)Sitiou 
and  strength  of  the  enemy  and  to  study  the  terrain  to  be 
traversed.  Oflieers  who  are  to  participate  in  the  attack  should 
conduct  this  reconnaissance.  Reconnaissance  at  night  is  espe- 
cially valuable.  Features  that  are  distinguishable  at  night 
should  be  carefully  noted,  and  their  distances  from  the  enemy, 
from  the  starting  point  of  the  troops,  and  from  other  important 
points  should  be  made  known. 

Preparations  should  have  in  view  as  complete  a  surprise  as 
possible.  An  attack  once  begun  must  be  carried  to  its  conclu- 
sion, even  if  the  surprise  is  not  as  complete  as  was  planned  or 
anticipated. 

566.  The  time  of  night  at  which  the  attack  should  be  made 
depends  upon  the  object  sought.  If  a  decisive  attack  is  in- 
tended, it  will  generally  yield  the  best  results  if  made  just  be- 
fore daylight.  If  the  object  is  merely  to  gain  an  intrenched 
position  for  further  operations,  an  earlier  hour  is  necessary  in 


128  MISCELLANEOUS. 

order  that  the  position  gained  may  be  intrenched  under  cover  of 
darliness. 

56  7.  The  formation  for  attacli  must  be  simple.  It  should  be 
carefully  effected  and  the  troops  verified  at  a  safe  distance 
from  the  enemy.  The  attacking  troops  should  be  formed  in 
compact  lines  and  with  strong  supports  at  short  distances.  The 
reserve  should  be  far  enough  in  rear  to  avoid  being  drawn  into 
the  action  until  the  commander  so  desires.  Bayonets  are  fixed, 
pieces  are  not  loaded. 

Darliness  causes  fire  to  be  wild  and  ineffective.  The  attack- 
ing troops  should  march  steadily  on  the  enemy  without  firing, 
but  should  be  prepared  and  determined  to  fight  vigorously  with 
the  bayonet. 

In  advancing  to  the  attack  the  aim  should  be  to  get  as  close 
as  possible  to  the  enemy  before  being  discovered,  then  to  trust 
to  the  bayonet. 

If  the  assault  is  successful,  preparations  must  be  made  at 
once  to  repel  a  counterattack. 

568.  On  the  defense,  preparations  to  resist  night  attacks 
should  be  made  by  daylight  whenever  such  attacks  are  to  be 
feared. 

Obstacles  placed  in  front  of  a  defensive  position  are  especially 
valuable  to  the  defense  at  night.  Many  forms  of  obstacles 
which  would  give  an  attacker  little  concern  in  the  daytime  be- 
come serious  hindrances  at  night. 

After  dark  the  foreground  should  be  illuminated  whenever 
practicable  and  strong  patrols  should  be  pushed  to  the  front. 

When  it  is  learned  that  the  enemy  is  approaching,  the  trenches 
are  manned  and  the  supports  moved  close  to  the  firing  line. 

Supports  fix  bayonets,  but  do  not  load.  Whenever  practicable 
and  necessary  they  should  be  used  for  counterattacks,  prefer- 
ably against  a  hostile  flank. 

The  defender  should  open  fire  as  soon  as  results  may  be  ex- 
pected. This  fire  may  avert  or  postpone  the  bayonet  combat, 
and  it  warns  all  supporting  troops.  It  is  not  likely  that  fire 
alone  can  stop  the  attack.  The  defender  must  be  resolved  to 
fight  with  the  bayonet. 

Ordinarily  fire  will  not  be  effective  at  ranges  exceeding  50 
yards. 

A  white  rag  around  the  muzzle  of  the  rifle  will   assist  in 
sighting  the  piece  when  the  front  sight  is  not  visible. 
.  See  paragraphs  450,  482,  483,  509,  510. 


MISCELLANEOtlS.  1^9 

INFANTRY  AGAINST  CAVALRY. 

569.  A  cavalry  charge  can  accomplish  little  against  infantry, 
even  in  inferior  numbers,  unless  the  latter  are  surprised,  become 
panic-stricken,  run  away,  or  can  not  use  their  rifles. 

570.  A  charge  from  the  front  is  easily  checked  by  a  well- 
directed  and  sustained  fire. 

If  the  charge  is  directed  against  the  flank  of  the  firing  line, 
the  supports,  reserves,  or  machine  guns  should  stop  it.  If  this 
disposition  is  impracticable,  part  of  the  line  must  meet  the 
charge  by  a  timely  change  of  front.  If  the  flank  company,  or 
companies,  in  the  firing  line  execute  platoons  right,  the  successive 
firing  lines  can  ordinarily  break  a  charge  against  the  flank.  If 
the  cavalry  line  passes  through  the  firing  line,  the  latter  will 
be  little  damaged  if  the  men  retain  their  presence  of  mind. 
They  should  be  on  the  watch  for  succeeding  cavalry  lines  and 
leave  those  that  have  passed  through  to  friendly  troops  in  rear. 

571.  Men  standing  are  in  the  best  position  to  meet  a  charge, 
but  other  considerations  may  compel  them  to  meet  it  lying 
prone. 

572.  In  a  melee,  the  infantryman  with  his  bayonet  has  at 
least  an  even  chance  with  the  cavalryman,  but  the  main  de- 
pendence of  infantry  is  rifle  fire.  AJiy  formation  is  suitable 
that  permits  the  free  use  of  the  necessary  number  of  rifles. 

Ordinarily  there  will  be  no  time  to  change  or  set  sights.  Fire 
at  will  at  battle  sight  should  be  used,  whatever  the  range  may 
be.     It  will  usually  be  unwise  to  open  fire  at  long  ranges. 

573.  An  infantry  column  that  encounters  cavalry  should 
deploy  at  once.  If  attacked  from  the  head  or  rear  of  the 
column,  and  if  time  is  pressing,  it  may  form  a  succession  of 
skirmish  lines.  Infantry,  by  deploying  50  or  100  yards  in  rear 
of  an  obstacle,  may  check  cavalry  and  hold  it  under  fire  beyond 
effective  pistol  range. 

In  any  situation,  to  try  to  escape  the  issue  by  running  is 
the  worst  and  most  dangerous  course  the  infantry  can  adopt. 

574.  In  attacking  dismounted  cavalry,  infantry  should  close 
rapidly  and  endeavor  to  prevent  remounting.  Infantry  which 
adopts  this  course  will  not  be  seriously  checked  by  delaying 
cavalry. 

Every  effort  should  be  made  to  locate  and  open  fire  on  the 
led  horses. 

190G0''--  {  I .1 


130  MISCELLANEOUS. 

INFANTRY  AGAINST  ARTILLERY. 

575.  A  frontal  attack  against  artillery  lias  little  chantfl^  of 
succeeding  unless  it  can  be  started  from  cover  at  comparatively 
short  range.  Beyond  siiort  range,  the  frontal  fire  of  infantry 
has  little  effect  against  the  artillery  personnel  because  of  their 
protective  shields. 

Machine  guns,  because  their  cone  of  fire  is  more  compact,  will 
Lave  greater  effect,  but  on  the  other  hand  they  will  have  fewer 
opportunities  and  they  are  limited  to  fire  attack  only. 

As  a  rule,  one's  own  artillery  is  the  best  weapon  against 
hostile  artillei'y. 

5  76.  Artillery  attacked  in  flank  by  infantry  can  be  severely 
damaged.  Oblique  or  flank  fire  will  begin  to  have  decisive 
effect  when  delivered  at  effective  range  from  a  point  to  one 
side  of  the  artillery's  line  of  fire  and  distant  from  it  by  about 
half  the  range.  Artillery  is  better  protected  on  the  side  of  the 
caisson. 

577.  Guns  out  of  ammunition,  but  otherwise  secure  against 
infantry  attack,  may  be  immobilized  by  fire  which  will  prevent 
their  withdrawal,  or  by  locating  and  driving  off  their  limbers. 
Or  they  may  be  kept  out  of  action  by  fii*e  which  will  prevent  the 
receipt  of  ammunition. 

578.  Artillery  when  limbered  is  helpless  against  infantry 
fire.  If  caught  at  effective  range  while  coming  into  action  or 
while  limbering,  artillery  can  be  severely  punished  by  infantry 
fire. 

In  attacking  artillery  that  is  trying  to  escape,  the  wheel 
horses  are  the  best  targets. 

ARTILLERY  SUPPORTS. 

579.  The  purpose  of  the  artillery  support  is  to  guard  the 
artillery  against  surprise  or  attack. 

Artillery  on  the  march  or  in  action  is  ordinarily  so  placed  as 
to  be  amply  protected  by  the  infantry.  Infantry  always  pro- 
tects artillery  in  its  neighborhood. 

580.  The  detail  of  a  support  is  not  necessary  except  when 
the  artillery  is  separated  from  the  main  body  or  occupies  a 
position  in  which  its  flanks  are  not  protected. 

The  detail  of  a  special  support  will  be  avoided  whenever 
possible. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  131 

581.  The  formation  of  an  artillery  support  depends  upon 
circumstances.  On  the  march  it  may  often  be  necessary  to  pro- 
vide advance,  flank,  and  rear  protection.  The  country  must  be 
thoroughly  reconnoitered  by  patrols  within  long  rifle  range. 

582.  In  action,  the  formation  and  location  of  the  support 
must  be  such  as  to  gain  and  give  timely  information  of  the 
enemy's  approach  and  to  oflier  actual  resistance  to  the  enemy 
beyond  effective  rifle  range  of  the  artillery's  flanks.  It  should 
not  be  close  enough  to  the  artillery  to  suffer  from  Are  directed 
at  the  artillery.  In  most  cases  a  position  somewhat  to  the 
flank  and  rear  best  fulfills  these  conditions. 

583.  The  support  cominander  is  charged  only  with  the  pro- 
tection of  the  artillery.  The  tactical  employment  of  each  arm 
rests  with  its  commander.    The  two  should  cooperate. 

INTRENCHMENTS. 

(Plate  V.) 

584.  Ordinarily,  infantry  intrenches  itself  whenever  it  is 
compelled  to  halt  for  a  considerable  time  in  the  presence  of  the 
enemy. 

Infantry  charged  with  a  resisting  mission  should  intrench 
whenever  there  is  any  likelihood  that  the  cover  constructed 
will  be  of  use. 

585.  Except  in  permanent  fortifications  or  in  fortifications 
prepared  long  in  advance,  the  infantry  plans  and  constructs  the 
field  works  that  it  will  occupy. 

When  performing  their  duties  in  this  connection  officers 
should  bear  in  mind  that  profile  and  construction  are  simple 
matters  compared  with  location  and  correct  tactical  use. 

586.  Intrenchments  enable  the  commander  to  hold  a  position 
with  the  least  possible  number  of  men  and  to  prolong  his  line 
or  increase  his  reserve. 

They  ai'e  constructed  with  a  view  to  giving  cover  which  will 
diminish  losses,  but  they  must  not  be  so  built  or  placed  as  to 
interfere  with  the  free  use  of  the  rifle.  Fire  effect  is  the  first 
consideration. 

587.  The  trace  of  a  fire  trench  or  of  a  system  of  fire  trenches 
depends  upon  the  ground  and  the  proposed  density  of  the  entire 
firing  line.  The  trenches  are  laid  out  in  company  lengths,  if 
possible. 


132  MISCELLANEOUS. 

Adjoining  trenches  should  afford  each  other  mutual  support. 
The  flanlis  and  important  gaps  in  the  line  should  be  protected 
by  fire  trenches  echeloned  in  rear.     (Fig.  6). 

588.  To  locate  the  trace,  lie  on  the  ground  at  intervals  and 
select  the  best  field  of  fire  consistent  with  the  requirements  of 
the  situation. 

A  profile  should  be  selected  which  will  permit  the  fire  to 
sweep  the  foreground,  require  the  minimum  of  labor  and  time, 
and  permit  the  best  concealment.  No  fixed  type  can  be  pre- 
scribed. The  type  must  be  selected  with  due  regard  to  the 
terrain,  the  enemy,  time,  tools,  materials,  soil,  etc. 

589.  Hasiy  cover.  With  the  intrenching  tool,  troops  can 
quickly  throw  up  a  low  parapet  about  3  feet  thick  which  will 
furnish  considerable  cover  against  rifle  fire,  but  scarcely  any 
against  shrapnel.  Such  cover  is  frequently  of  value  to  an 
attack  that  is  temporarily  unable  to  continue.  In  time,  and 
particularly  at  night,  it  may  be  developed  into  a  deep  fire  or 
cover  trench. 

590.  Fire  trenches  should  be  placed  and  constructed  so  as  to 
give  a  good  field  of  fire  and  to  give  the  troops  protection  behind 
a  vertical  wall,  preferably  with  some  head  or  overhead  cover. 
They  should  be  concealed  or  inconspicuous  iu  order  to  avoid 
artillery  fire  or  to  decx'ease  its  accuracy.  They  should  have 
natural  or  artificial  communication  with  their  supports,  but  in 
establishing  the  trace  this  is  a  secondary  consideration. 

The  simplest  form  of  fire  trench  is  deep  and  narrow  and 
has  a  flat,  concealed  parapet.  (Fig.  1.)  In  ordinary  soil,  and 
on  a  basis  of  two  reliefs  and  tasks  of  5  feet,  it  can  be  con- 
structed in  about  two  hours  with  intrenching  tools. 

This  trench  affords  fair  cover  for  troops  subjected  to  fire,  but 
not  actually  firing.  When  it  is  probable  that  time  will  permit 
elaboration,  the  simple  trench  should  be  planned  with  a  view 
to  developing  it  ultimately  into  a  more  complete  form.  (Figs. 
2  and  3.)  Devices  should  be  added  to  increase  the  security  of 
the  trench  and  the  comfort  of  the  men. 

Where  the  excavated  earth  is  easily  removed,  a  fire  trench 
without  parapet  may  be  the  one  best  suited  to  the  soil  and 
other  conditions  affecting  the  choice  of  profile.  (Fig.  4.)  The 
enemy's  infantry,  as  well  as  his  artillery,  will  generally  have 
great  difiiculty  in  seeing  this  type  of  trench. 

In  very  difficult  soil,  if  the  time  is  short,  it  may  be  necessary 
to  dig  a  wider,  shallower  trench  with  a  higher  parapet. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 


138 


'  I  foot  command 


Foothold 


Plonks  orpokj  an^ 
bni^'i  laid  before  jHy  , 
other  work  on  Figi-^ 
Chamber  mined  after  compkh 


Packets  may  k  aca\        ^f necessary  £/aiiaf& 


vatfd for  ammunition  ^        f^'''''^  ^^'^  '*''**' 

No pi3r:ipet -waste  the  earfh 
FigA 


SQUAD  TRENCH       ^/tit 


SQUAO  TRENCH 


Fig.5. 


ir:SE\     50UA0  THLN^n 

I ' 

PAS^££       / 


Possible  arrangement  of  2  Bns.  of  Inf  intrenched  (Regimental  Reserve  of  I  Bn  not  show/) 
A       Firing  trenches. 
B     Cover  trenches. 

C      Comrrjijnicating  trench:  D  ^me  hnversed ;  E  canmanicafing  way 
F      Closed  Supporting  point  for  flank  protection 
MO   Possible  position   tor  machine  guns,  concealed  tronn  front 
FigG 


134  MISCELLANEOUS. 

Head  cover,  notches,  and  loop  Iioles  are  of  value  to  troops 
when  firing,  but  many  forms  weaken  and  disclose  the  location 
of  the  parapet.  Filled  sandbags  kept  in  the  trench  when  the 
men  are  not  firing  may  be  thrown  on  the  parapet  to  form 
notches  or  loopholes  when  the  troops  in  the  trench  open  fire 
and  concealment  of  the  trench  is  no  longer  necessary  or  possible. 

By  the  use  of  observation  stations  the  maximum  rest  and  se- 
curity is  afforded  the  troops.  Stations  are  best  located  in  the 
angles  of  traverses  or  at  the  end  of  the  trench. 

591.  Where  the  nature  of  the  position  makes  it  advisable  to 
construct  traverses  at  regular  intervals  it  is  generally  best  to 
construct  a  section  of  trench  for  each  squad,  with  traverses  be- 
tween squads.      (Fig.  5.) 

592.  Cover  trenches  are  placed  as  closely  as  practicable  to 
tlieir  respective  fire  trenches.  Where  natural  cover  is  not 
available,  each  fire  trench  should  have  artificial  cover  in  rear 
for  its  support — either  a  cover  trench  of  its  own  or  one  in  com- 
mon with  an  adjoining  fire  trench. 

The  cover  trench  is  simple  and  rectangular  in  profile.  Con- 
cealment is  indispensable.  It  is  generally  concealed  by  the 
contour  of  the  ground  or  by  natural  features,  but  to  guard 
against  hostile  searching  fire  overhead  cover  is  frequently 
advisable. 

Cover  trenches  should  be  made  as  comfortable  as  possible. 
It  will  often  be  advisable  to  make  them  extensive  enough  to 
provide  cooking  and  resting  facilities  for  the  garrisons  of  the 
corresponding  fire  trenches. 

593.  Communicating  trenches  are  frequently  neee.<^snry  in  or- 
der to  connect  fire  trenches  with  their  corresponding  cover 
trenches  wliere  natural,  covered  communication  is  impracti- 
cable. They  are  generally  rectangular  in  profile,  deep,  and  nar- 
row.    They  are  traversed  or  zigzagged  to  escape  enfilade. 

Returns  or  pockets  should  be  provided  for  use  as  latrines, 
storerooms,  dressing  stations,  passing  points  for  troops,  etc. 

Cover  from  observation  while  passing  through  the  trench 
may  insiu'e  against  loss  as  effectively  as  material  cover  from 
the  enemj^'s  fire. 

Communicating  ways,  naturally  or  artificially  screened  from 
the  enemy's  view,  sometimes  provide  sufficient  cover  for  the 
passage  of  troops. 

594.  Dummy  trenches  frequently  draw  the  enemy's  attention 
and  fire  and  thus  protect  the  true  fire  trench. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  135 

Any  type  is  suitable  wliicli  presents  to  the  enemy  the  appear- 
ance of  a  true  trench  imperfectly  concealed. 

595.  When  it  is  uucertaiu  whether  time  will  permit  the  com- 
pletion of  all  the  work  planned,  work  should  proceed  with  due 
regard  to  the  order  of  importance  of  tlie  several  operations. 
Ordinarily  the  order  of  importance  will  be : 

1.  Clearing  foreground  to  improve  the  field  of  fire  and  con- 
struction of  fire  trench. 

2.  Head  or  overhead  cover;  concealment. 

3.  Placing  obstacles  and  recording  ranges. 

4.  Cover  trenches  for  supports  and  local  reserves. 

5.  Communicating  (renohes. 

6.  Widening  and  deepening  of  trenches;  interior  conven- 
iences. 

See  paragraph  568. 

lit /NOR  WARFARE. 

596.  Minor  warfare  embraces  both  regular  and  irregular 
operations. 

Regular  operations  consist  of  minor  actions  involving  small 
bodies  of  trained  and  organized  troops  on  both  sides. 

The  tactics  employed  are  in  genei-al  those  prescribed  for  the 
smaller  units. 

597.  Irregular  operations  consist  of  actions  against  unor- 
ganized or  partially  organized  forces,  acting  in  independent  or 
semi-independent  bodies.  Such  bodies  have  little  or  only  crude 
training  and  are  under  nominal  and  loose  leadei'ship  and  con- 
trol. They  assemble,  roam  about,  and  disperse  at  will.  They 
endeavor  to  win  by  stealth  or  by  force  of  superior  numbers, 
employing  ambuscades,  sudden  dashes  or  rushes,  and  hand-to- 
hand  fighting. 

Troops  operating  against  such  an  enemy  usually  do  so  in 
small  units,  such  as  platoons,  detaclunonts,  or  companies,  and 
the  tactics  employed  must  be  adapted  to  meet  the  requirements 
of  the  situation.  Frequently  the  enemy's  own  methods  may  be 
employed  to  advantage. 

In  general,  such  operations  should  not  be  undertaken  hastily ; 
every  preparation  should  be  made  to  strike  suddenly  and  to 
inflict  the  maximum  punishment. 

598.  In  general,  the  service  of  information  will  be  insuffi- 
cient;   adequate    reconnaissance    will    rarely    be    practicable. 


136  MISCELLANEOUS. 

March  and  bivouac  formations  must  be  such  as  to  admit  of 
rapid  deployment  and  fire  action  in  any  direction. 

599.  In  the  open  country,  where  surprise  is  not  probable, 
troops  may  be  marched  in  column  of  squads  preceded,  within 
sight,  by  a  squad  as  an  advance  party. 

600.  In  close  country,  where  surprise  is  possible,  the  troops 
must  be  held  in  a  close  formation.  The  use  of  flank  patrols  be- 
comes difficult.  Occasionally,  an  advance  party — never  less  than 
a  squad — may  be  sent  out.  In  general,  however,  such  a  party 
accomplishes  little,  since  an  enemy  intent  on  surprise  will  per- 
mit it  to  pass  unmolested  and  will  fall  upon  the  main  body. 

Under  such  conditions,  especially  when  the  road  or  trail  is 
narrow,  the  column  of  twos  or  files  is  a  convenient  formation, 
the  ofiicers  placing  themselves  in  the  column  so  as  to  divide  it 
into  nearly  equal  parts.  If  rushed  from  a  flank,  such  a  column 
will  be  in  readiness  to  face  and  fire  toward  either  or  both 
flank,  the  ranks  being  back  to  back;  if  rushed  from  the  front, 
the  head  of  the  column  may  be  deployed,  the  rest  of  the  column 
closing  up  to  support  it  and  to  protect  its  flanks  and  rear.  In 
any  event,  the  men  should  be  taught  to  take  some  form  of  a 
closed  back-to-back  formation. 

601.  The  column  may  often  be  broken  into  two  or  more 
approximately  equal  detachments  separated  on  the  march  by 
distances  of  50  to  100  yards.  As  a  rule  the  detachments  should 
not  consist  of  Jess  than  25  men  each.  With  this  arrangement 
of  the  column,  it  will  rarely  be  possible  for  an  enemy  to  close 
simultaneously  with  all  of  the  detachments,  one  or  more  being 
left  unengaged  and  under  control  to  support  those  engaged  or 
to  inflict  severe  punishment  upon  the  enemy  when  he  is  repulsed. 

602.  The  site  for  camp  or  bivouac  should  be  selected  with 
special  reference  to  economical  and  effective  protection  against 
surprise.  Double  sentinels  are  posted  on  the  avenues  of  ap- 
proach and  the  troops  sleep  in  readiness  for  instant  action. 
When  practicable,  troops  should  be  instructed  in  advance  as  to 
what  they  are  to  do  in  case  of  attack  at  night. 

603.  Night  operations  are  frequently  advisable.  With  the 
small  forces  employed,  control  is  not  difiicult.  Irregular  troops 
rarely  provide  proper  camp  protection,  and  they  may  frequently 
be  surprised  and  severely  punished  by  a  properly  conducted 
night  march  and  attack. 


MISCELLANEOTIS.  137 

PA TROLS. 

604.  The  following  paragraphs  on  patrols  are  placed  here 
for  convenience.  They  relate  in  particular  to  the  conduct  of 
the  patrol  and  its  leader,  and  apply  to  patrols  employed  In  cover- 
ing detachments  as  well  as  in  combat  reconnaissance. 

605.  A  patrol  is  a  detachment  sent  out  from  a  command  to 
gain  information  of  the  country  or  of  the  enemy,  or  to  prevent 
the  enemy  from  gaining  information.  In  special  cases  patrols 
may  be  given  missions  other  than  these. 

606.  The  commander  must  have  clearly  in  mind  the  purpose 
for  which  the  patrol  is  to  be  used  in  order  that  he  may  deter- 
mine its  pi'oper  strength,  select  its  leader,  and  give  the  latter 
proper  instructions. 

In  general,  a  patrol  should  be  sent  out  for  one  definite  purpose 
only. 

607.  The  strength  of  a  patrol  varies  from  two  or  three  men 
to  a  company.  It  should  be  strong  enough  to  accomplish  its 
purpose,  and  no  stronger. 

If  the  purpose  is  to  gain  information  only,  a  small  patrol  is 
better  than  a  large  one.  The  former  conceals  itself  more  readily 
and  moves  less  conspicuously.  For  observing  from  some  point 
in  plain  view  of  the  command  or  for  visiting  or  reconnoitering 
between  outguards  two  men  are  sufficient. 

If  messages  are  to  be  sent  back,  the  patrol  must  be  strong 
enough  to  furnish  the  probable  number  of  messengers  without 
reducing  the  patrol  to  less  than  two  men.  If  hostile  patrols 
are  likely  to  be  met  and  must  be  driven  off,  the  patrol  must  b,? 
strong. 

In  friendly  territory,  a  weaker  patrol  may  be  used  than  would 
be  used  for  the  corresponding  purpose  in  hostile  territory. 

608.  The  character  of  the  leader  selected  for  the  patrol  de- 
pends upon  the  importance  of  the  work  in  hand. 

For  patrolling  between  the  groups  or  along  the  lines  of  an 
outpost,  or  for  the  simpler  patrols  sent  out  from  a  covering  de- 
tachment, the  average  soldier  will  be  a  comjietent  leader. 

609.  For  a  patrol  sent  out  to  gain  information,  or  for  a  dis- 
tant patrol  sent  out  from  a  covering  detachment,  the  leader 
must  be  specially  selected.  He  must  be  able  to  cover  large 
areas  with  few  men;  he  must  be  able  to  estimate  the  strength 
of  hostile  forces,  to  report  intelligently  as  to  their  dispositions, 
to  read  indications,  and  to  judge  as  to  the  importance  of  the 


138  MISCELLANEOUS. 

iuformation  gained.  He  must  possess  endurance,  courage,  and 
good  judgment. 

His  instructions  should  be  full  and  clear.  He  must  be  made 
to  understand  exactly  wliat  is  required  of  him,  where  to  go  and 
when  to  return.  He  should  be  given  such  information  of  the 
enemy  and  country  as  may  be  of  value  to  him.  He  should  be 
informed  as  to  the  general  location  of  his  own  forces,  particu- 
larly of  those  with  whom  he  may  come  in  contact.  If  possible, 
he  should  be  given  a  map  of  the  country  he  is  to  traverse,  and 
in  many  cases  his  route  may  be  specified. 

Besides  his  arms  and  ammunition,  the  patrol  leader  should 
have  a  compass,  a  watch,  a  pencil,  a  note  book,  and.  when  prac- 
ticable, field  message  blanks  and  a  map  of  the  country. 

The  patrol  leader  assembles  the  men  detailed  for  the  patrol. 
He  inspects  their  arms  and  amnumition  and  satisfies  himself 
that  they  are  in  suitable  condition  for  the  duty.  He  sees  that 
none  has  any  pai^ers,  maps,  etc.,  that  would  be  of  value  to  the 
enemy  if  captured.  He  sees  that  their  accoutermeuts  do  not 
glisten  or  rattle  when  they  move.  He  then  repeats  his  instruc- 
tions to  the  patrol  and  assures  himself  that  every  man  under- 
stands them.  He  explains  the  signals  to  be  used  and  satisfies 
himself  that  they  are  understood.  He  designates  a  man  to  take 
his  place  should  he  be  disabled. 

CIO.  The  formation  and  movements  of  the  patrol  must  be 
reguliited  so  as  to  render  probable  the  escape  of  at  least  one  man 
should  the  patrol  encounter  a  superior  force.  The  formation 
will  depend  upon  the  nature  of  the  ground  traversed  and  the 
cover  afforded.  The  leader  must  adopt  the  formation  and 
measures  best  suited  to  the  accomplishment  of  his  object. 

In  general.  It  should  have  the  formation  of  a  main  bodj'  with 
advance,  rear,  and.  flank  guards,  though  each  be  represented  only 
by  a  single  man. 

611.  The  distances  separating  the  members  of  the  patrol 
vary  according  to  the  ground.  If  too  close  together,  they  see  no 
more  than  one  man ;  if  too  widely  separated  they  are  likely  to 
be  lost  to  the  control  of  the  leader. 

With  a  patrol  of  four  or  five  men  the  distances  may  vary  from 
25  to  50  yards;  with  a  larger  patrol  they  may  be  as  great  as 
100  yards. 

At  times  a  column  of  files,  separated  by  the  distances  pre- 
scribed, is  a  satisfactory  foroiation. 


MISCELLANEOUS.  139 

612.  The  country  must  be  carefully  observed  as  the  patrol 
advances.  In  passing  over  a  hill,  the  country  beyond  should 
lirst  be  observed  by  one  man ;  houses,  inclosures,  etc.,  should  be 
approached  in  a  similar  manner  or  avoided  entirely ;  woods 
should  generally  be  recounoitered  in  a  thin  skirmish  line. 

613.  The  strength  and  composition  of  hostile  troops  must  be 
observed.  If  they  can  not  be  counted,  their  strength  may  be 
estimated  by  the  length  of  time  a  column  consumes  in  passing 
a  given  point,  or  by  the  area  covered  if  in  camp. 

Patrol  leaders  should  know,  if  practicable,  the  uniforms, 
guidons,  etc.,  of  the  enemy,  as  it  will  assist  in  determining  the 
class  of  troops  seen  when  no  other  means  for  doing  so  are 
available. 

Insignia  from  the  enemy's  uniforms,  picked  up  by  patrols, 
often  convey  valuable  information  by  indicating  what  troops 
are  in  the  vicinity. 

614.  Patrols  avoid  fighting,  except  in  self-defense  or  in  order 
to  prevent  the  enemy's  patrols  from  gaining  valuable  informa- 
tion, or  when  necessary  in  order  to  accomplish  their  mission. 
In  such  cases,  a  patrol  should  fight  resolutely  even  though 
inferior  in  numbers. 

6  15.  Information  gained  by  patrols  is  generally  of  no  value 
unless  recei\ed  in  time  to  be  of  use  to  the  commander.  Patrol 
leaders  must  therefore  send  back  information  of  importance  as 
soon  as  it  is  gained  unless  the  pntrol  itself  is  to  return  at  once. 

616.  If  written,  messages  should  state  the  place,  date,  hour, 
and  minute  of  their  dispatch.  Tlie  information  contained  in 
them  should  be  clearly  and  concisely  expressed.  They  should 
be  signed  by  the  patrol  leader. 

The  authorized  message  book  s^hould  be  used  and  the  form 
therein  adhered  to. 

617.  If  the  message  be  an  oral  one,  the  patrol  leader  should 
require  the  messenger  to  repeat  it  before  starting  back.  In 
general,  an  oral  message  should  cover  but  one  point.  Except 
when  there  is  little  chance  of  error  in  transmission,  messages 
should  be  written. 

618.  When  in  friendly  territory  and  not  very  far  from 
friendly  troops,  one  messenger  is  sufficient  unless  the  message 
is  very  important.  In  hostile  territory,  either  two  men  should 
go  together  or  the  message  should  be  sent  in  duplicate  by 
different  routes. 


140  MISCFXLANEOTJS. 

619.  Whether  the  Information  gained  is  of  sufficient  impor- 
tance to  be  reported  at  once  or  may  await  the  return  of  the 
patrol  is  a  question  which  must  be  decided  in  each  case.  In 
ease  of  reasonable  doubt,  it  is  generally  better  to  send  the  re- 
port promptly.  If  the  patrol  leader  has  received  proper  instruc- 
tions before  starting  out  and  has  the  requisite  ability  to  lead  a 
patrol,  he  can  generally  decide  such  questions  satisfactorily  as 
they  arise. 

620.  Infantry  patrols  are  generally  used  for  work  within  2 
miles  of  supporting  troops,  but  cases  arise  where  they  must  go 
to  greater  distances. 

621.  Patrols  composed  of  mounted  scouts  are  conducted  like 
cavalry  patrols  and  should  be  trained  in  accordance  with  the 
Cavalry  Drill  Regulations. 

For  distant  patrolling,  a  mounted  patrol  under  an  officer 
should  be  used. 

622.  For  controlling  the  movements  of  the  patrol,  the  leader 
should,  when  necessary,  make  use  of  the  arm  signals  prescribed 
in  these  regulations. 

On  account  of  the  short  distances  separating  them,  ordinary 
communication  between  members  of  the  patrol  is  best  effected 
quietly  by  word  of  mouth. 

When  a  member  of  a  patrol  is  sent  to  a  distant  point,  com- 
munication may  be  effected  by  means  of  simple,  preari-anged 
signals. 

When  practicable,  the  patrol  leader  may  communicate  with 
the  main  body  by  means  of  visual  signaling. 


Part  III.— MARCHES  AND  CAMPS. 


MARCHES. 

TRAINING  AND  DISCIPLINE. 

623.  Marcliing  constitutes  the  principal  occupation  of  troops 
in  campaign  and  is  one  of  the  heaviest  causes  of  loss.  This 
loss  may  i)e  matei-ially  reduced  by  proper  training  and  by  the 
proper  conduct  of  the  nmrch. 

624.  The  training  of  infantry  should  consist  of  systematic 
physical  exercises  to  develop  the  general  physique  and  of 
actual  marching  to  accustom  men  to  the  fatigue  of  bearing 
arms  and  equipment. 

Before  mobilization  troops  should  be  kept  in  good  physical 
condition  and  so  practiced  as  to  teach  them  thoroughly  the 
principles  of  marching.  At  the  first  opportunity  after  mobiliza- 
tion the  men  should  be  hardened  to  cover  long  distances  without 
loss. 

62.5.  With  new  or  untrained  troops,  the  process  of  hardening 
the  men  to  this  work  nuist  be  gradual.  Immediately  after  bev 
ing  mustered  into  the  service  the  physical  exercises  and  march- 
ing should  be  begun.  Ten-minute  periods  of  vigorous  setting- 
up  exercises  should  be  given  three  times  a  day  to  loosen  and 
develop  the  muscles.  One  march  should  be  made  each  day 
with  full  equipment,  beginning  with  a  distance  of  2  or  3  miles 
and  increasing  the  distance  daily  as  the  ti'oops  become  hard- 
ened, until  a  full  day's  march  under  full  equipment  may  be 
made  without  exhaustion. 

626.  A  long  march  should  not  be  made  with  untrained 
troops.  If  a  long  distance  must  be  covered  in  a  few  days,  the 
first  march  should  be  short,  the  length  being  increased  each 
succeeding  day. 

627.  Special  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  fitting  of  shoes 
and  the  care  of  feet.     Shoes  should  not  be  too  wide  or  too 

141 


142  MAECHES. 

short.  Sores  and  blisters  on  the  feet  should  be  promptly 
dressed  during  halts.  At  the  end  of  the  march  feet  should  be 
bathed  and  dressed ;  the  socks  and,  if  practicable,  the  shoes 
should  be  changed. 

628.  The  drinking  of  water  on  the  march  should  be  avoided. 
The  thirst  should  be  thoroughly  quenched  before  starting  on 
the  march  and  after  arrival  in  camp.  On  the  march  the  use 
of  vi'ater  should,  in  general,  be  confined  to  gargling  the  mouth 
and  throat  or  to  an  occasional  small  drink  at  most. 

629.  Except  for  urgent  reasons,  marches  should  not  begin 
before  an  hour  after  daylight,  but  if  the  distance  to  be  cov- 
ered necessitates  either  breaking  camp  before  daylight  or  mak- 
ing camp  after  dark,  it  is  better  to  do  the  former. 

Night  marching  should  be  avoided  when  possible. 

630.  A  halt  of  15  minutes  should  be  made  after  the  first  half 
or  three-quarters  of  an  hour  of  marching;  thereafter  a  halt 
of  10  minutes  is  made  in  each  hour.  The  number  and  length 
of  halts  may  be  varied,  according  to  the  weather,  the  condition 
of  the  roads,  and  the  equipment  carried  by  the  men.  When  the 
day's  march  is  long  a  halt  of  an  hour  should  be  made  at  noon 
and  the  men  allowed  to  eat. 

631.  The  rate  of  march  is  regulated  by  the  commander  of  the 
leading  company  of  each  regiment,  or,  if  the  battalions  be  sepa- 
rated by  greater  than  normal  distances,  by  the  commander  of 
the  leading  company  of  each  battalion.  He  should  maintain  a 
iiniform  rate,  iminfluenced  by  the  movements  of  troops  or 
mounted  men  in  fi'ont  of  him. 

The  position  of  companies  in  the  battalion  and  of  battalions 
in  the  regiment  is  ordinarily  changed  daily  so  that  each  in  turn 
leads. 

632.  The  mai'ching  efliciency  of  an  organization  is  judged 
by  the  amount  of  straggling  and  elongation  and  the  condition 
of  the  men  at  the  end  of  the  march. 

An  officer  of  each  company  marches  in  its  rear  to  prevent 
undue  elongation  and  straggling. 

When  necessary  for  a  man  to  fall  out  on  account  of  sickness, 
he  should  be  given  a  permit  to  do  so.  This  is  presented  to  the 
surgeon,  who  will  admit  him  to  the  ambulance,  have  him  wait 
for  the  trains,  or  follow  and  i-ejoiu  his  company  at  the  first  halt. 

633.  Special  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  rate  of  march. 
It  is  greater  for  trained  than  for  untrained  troops;  for  small 
commands  than  for  large  ones;  for  lightly  burdened  than  for 


MARCHES.  143 

heavily  burdened  troops.  It  is  greater  during  cool  than  during 
hot  weather.  With  trained  troops,  in  commands  of  a  regiment 
or  less,  marching  over  average  roads,  the  rate  should  be  from 
2f  to  3  miles  per  hour.  With  larger  commands  carrying  full 
equipment,  the  rate  will  be  from  2  to  2i  miles  per  hour. 

634.  The  marching  capacity  of  trained  infantry  in  small 
commands  is  from  20  to  25  miles  per  day.  This  distance  will 
decrease  as  the  size  of  the  command  increases.  For  a  com- 
plete division  the  distance  can  seldom  exceed  I2i  miles  per  day 
unless  the  division  camps  in  column. 

C35.  In  large  commands  the  mai'ching  capacity  of  troops  is 
greatly  reduced  by  faulty  march  orders  and  poor  march  disci 
pline. 

Tlie  march  order  should  contain  such  instructions  as  will  en- 
able the  troops  to  take  their  proper  places  in  column  promptly. 
Dt^-lny  or  confusion  in  doing  so  should  be  investigated.  On  the 
otlier  hand,  organization  commanders  should  be  required  to  time 
their  mo^'ements  so  that  the  troops  will  not  be  formed  sooner 
than  necessary. 

The  halts  and  starts  of  the  units  of  a  column  should  be  regu- 
l:ited  by  the  watch  and  be  simultaneous. 

t!losing  up  during  a  halt,  or  changing  gait  to  gain  or  lose 
distance  should  be  prohibited. 

Quartermaster  sergeants,  cooks,  artificers,  and  company  clerhr 
niiireh  with  the  field  train,  under  command  of  the  supply  officer 
in  charge  of  the  train. 

PROTECTION  OF  THE  MARCH. 
General  Considerations. 

636.  A  column  on  the  march  in  the  vicinity  of  the  enemy  is 
covered  by  detachments  called  "advance  guards,"  "rear  guards," 
or  "  flank  guards."  The  object  of  these  covering  detachments  is 
to  facilitate  the  advance  of  the  main  body  and  to  protect  it 
from  surprise  or  observation. 

They  facilitate  the  advance  of  the  main  body  by  promptly 
driving  off  small  bodies  of  the  enemy  who  seek  to  harass  or 
delay  it;  by  removing  obstacles  from  the  line  of  advance,  by 
repairing  roads,  bridges,  etc.,  thus  enabling  the  main  body  to 
advance  uninterruptedly  in  convenient  marching  formations. 

They  protect  the  main  body  by  pi'eventing  the  enemy  from 
firing  into  it  when  in  close  formation ;  by  holding  the  enemy  and 
enabling  the  main  body  to  deploy  before  coming  under  effective 
fire;  by  preventing  its  size  and  condition  fi'om  being  observed 


144  MARCHES. 

by  the  enemy;  and,  in  retreat,  by  gaining  time  for  it  to  make  its 
escape  or  to  reorganize  its  forces. 

637.  Tactical  units  should  not  be  broken  in  making  details 
for  covering  detachments. 

638.  The  march  order  of  the  whole  command  should  explain 
the  situation,  and,  among  other  things,  detail  the  commander 
and  troops  for  each  covering  detachment.  It  should  specify  the 
route  to  be  taken  and  the  distance  to  be  maintained  between 
the  main  body  and  its  covering  detachments.  It  should  order 
such  reconnaissance  as  the  commander  specially  desires  to  have 
made. 

The  order  of  the  commander  of  a  covering  detachment  should 
clearly  explain  the  situation  to  subordinates,  assign  the  troops 
to  the  subdivisions,  prescribe  their  distances,  and  order  such 
special  reconnaissance  as  may  be  deemed  necessary  in  the  be- 
ginning. 

An  advance  or  flank  guard  commander  marches  well  to  the 
front  and,  from  time  to  time,  orders  such  additional  reconnais- 
sance or  makes  such  changes  in  his  dispositions  as  the  circum- 
stances of  the  case  demand. 

Advance  Guards. 

639.  An  advance  guard  is  a  detachment  of  the  main  body 
which  precedes  and  covers  it  on  the  march. 

640.  The  advance  guard  commander  is  responsible  for  its 
formation  and  conduct.  He  should  bear  in  mind  that  its  pur- 
pose is  to  facilitate  and  protect  the  march  of  the  main  body. 
Its  own  security  must  be  effected  by  proper  dispositions  and 
reconnaissance,  not  by  timid  or  cautious  advance.  It  must 
advance  at  normal  gait  and  seai'ch  aggressively  for  information 
of  the  enemy.  Its  action  when  the  enemy  attempts  to  block  it 
with  a  large  force  depends  upon  the  situation  and  plans  of  the 
commander  of  the  troops. 

641.  The  strength  of  the  advance  guard  varies  from  one- 
twentieth  to  one-third  of  the  main  body,  depending  upon  the 
size  of  the  main  body  and  the  service  expected  of  the  advance 
guard. 

642.  The  formation  of  the  advance  guard  must  be  such  that 
the  enemy  will  be  met  first  by  a  patrol,  then  in  turn  by  one  or 
more  larger  detachments,  each  capable  of  holding  the  enemy 
until  the  next  in  rear  has  time  to  deploy  before  coming  under 
effective  fire. 

643.  Generally  an  advance  guard  consisting  of  a  battalion  or 
more   is    divided    primarily    into    the   reserve   and    the    support. 


MARCHES.  149 

When  the  advance  guard  consists  of  less  than  a  battalion,  the 
reserve  Is  generally  omitted. 

644.  In  an  advance  guard  consisting  of  two  battalions  or 
less,  the  reserve  and  support,  if  both  are  used,  are  approxi- 
mately equal ;  in  larger  advance  guards,  the  reserve  is  approxi- 
mately two-thirds  of  the  whole  detachment. 

In  an  advance  guard  consisting  of  one  battalion,  the  machine 
guns,  if  any,  form  part  of  the  reserve.  In  an  advance  guard 
consisting  of  two  or  more  battalions,  the  machine  guns  form 
part  of  the  support. 

645.  The  support  sends  forward  an  advance  party.  The  ad- 
vance  party,  in  turn,  sends  a  patrol,  called  a  point,  still  farther 
to  the  front.  Patrols  are  sent  out  to  the  flanks  when  necessary. 
When  the  distance  between  parts  of  the  advance  guard  or  the 
nature  of  the  country  is  such  as  to  make  direct  communication 
difficult,  connecting  files  march  between  the  subdivisions  to 
keep  up  communication.  Each  element  of  the  column  sends  the 
necessary  connecting  files  to  its  front. 

646.  A  battalion  acting  as  an  advance  guard  should  be 
formed  about  as  follows:  The  reserve,  two  companies;  the  sup- 
port, two  companies ;  the  advance  party,  three  to  eight  squads 
(about  a  half  company),  depending  upon  the  strength  of  the 
companies  and  the  reconnaissance  to  be  made;  the  point,  a  non- 
commissioned officer  and  three  or  four  men.  Or  the  reserve 
may  be  omitted.  In  such  case  the  advance  party  will  consist 
of  one  company  preceded  by  a  strong  point.  The  remaining 
companies  form  the  support. 

64  7.  The  distances  separating  the  parts  of  an  advance  guard 
vary  according  to  the  mission  of  the  whole  force,  the  size  of 
the  advance  guard,  the  proximity  and  character  of  the  enemy, 
the  nature  of  the  country,  etc.  They  increase  as  the  strength 
of  the  main  boily  increases;  they  are  less  when  opei'ating  in 
rolling,  broken  country  than  in  open  country ;  when  in  pursuit 
of  a  defeated  enemy  than  against  an  aggressive  foe;  when 
operating  against  cavalry  than  when  against  infantry. 

If  there  be  a  mounted  point,  it  should  precede  the  dismounted 
point  by  250  to  tjUO  yards.  The  advance  party  may  be  stronger 
when  there  is  a  mounted  point  in  front.  The  infantry  main- 
tains its  gait  without  reference  to  the  mounted  point,  the  lat- 
ter regulating  its  march  on  the  former. 

648.  To  afford  protection  to  an  infantry  column,  the  country 
must  be  observed  on  each  side  of  the  road  as  far  as  the  terrain 
19069°— 14 10 


146  MARCHES. 

affords  positions  for  effective  rifle  fire  upon  the  column.  If  the 
Country  that  it  is  necessary  to  observe  be  open  to  view  from 
the  road,  reconnaissance  is  not  necessary. 

049.  The  advance  guard  is  responsible  for  the  necessary 
reconnaissance  of  the  country  on  both  sides  of  the  line  of  march. 

Special  recoiuiaissance  may  be  directed  by  the  commander  of 
the  troops,  or  cavalry  may  be  recomioitering  at  considerable  dis- 
tances to  the  front  and  flanks,  but  this  does  not  relieve  the  ad- 
vance guard  from  the  duty  of  local  reconnaissance. 

650.  This  reconnaissance  is  effected  by  patrols  sent  out  by 
the  leading  subdivisions  of  the  advance  guard.  In  a  large  ad- 
vance guard  the  support  commander  orders  the  necessary  re- 
connaissance. 

Patrols  should  be  sent  to  the  flanks  when  necessary  to  re- 
connoiter  a  specified  locality  and  should  rejoin  the  column  and 
their  proper  subdivision  as  soun  as  practicable.  When  the  ad- 
vance party  is  strong  enough,  the  patrols  should  be  sent  out. 
from  it.  When  depleted  by  the  patrols  sent  out,  the  advance 
party  should  be  reenforced  during  a  halt  by  ruen  sent  forward 
from  the  support.  If  it  be  impracticable  to  send  patrols  from 
the  advance  party,  they  will  be  sent  from  the  support. 

Where  the  country  is  generally  open  to  view,  but  localities  in 
it  might  conceal  an  enemy  of  some  size,  reconnaissance  is  nec- 
essary. Where  the  road  is  exposed  to  fire  and  the  view  is  re- 
stricted, a  patrol  should  be  sent  to  examine  the  country  in  the 
direction  from  which  danger  threatens.  The  object  may  be  ac- 
complished by  sending  patrols  to  observe  from  prominent  points. 
When  the  ground  permits  and  the  nec'cssity  exists,  patrols  may 
be  sent  to  march  abreast  of  the  colunui  at  distances  which  per- 
mit them  to  see  important  features  nut  visible  from  the  road. 

Mounted  scouts  or  cavalry,  wlien  available,  should  be  used  for 
flank  patrols. 

651.  Cases  may  arise  where  the  best  means  of  covering  the 
head  and  flanks  of  the  column  will  be  by  a  line  of  skirmishers 
extending  for  several  hundred  yards  to  both  sides  of  the  road, 
and  deployed  at  intervals  of  from  10  to  50  yards.  A  column 
may  thus  protect  itself  when  passing  through  country  covered 
with  high  corn  or  similar  vegetation.  In  such  case,  the  vege- 
tation forms  a  natural  protection  from  rifle  fire  beyond  very 
short  ranges. 

652.  Fixed  rules  for  the  strength,  formation,  or  conduct  of 
advance  guards  can  not  be  given.  Each  case  must  be  treated 
to  meet  conditions  as  they  exist.    That  solution  is  generally  the 


MARCHES.  147 

best  which,  with  the  fewest  meu  and  unbroljen  units,  amply 
protects  the  colnuin  and  facilitates  the  advance. 

Rear  Guards. 

653.  A  rear  guard  is  a  detachment  detailed  to  protect  the 
main  body  from  attaclv  in  rear.  In  a  retreat,  it  checks  pursuit 
and  enables  the  main  body  to  increase  the  distance  between  it 
and  the  enemy  and  to  re-form  if  disorganized. 

The  general  formation  is  that  of  an  advance  guard  reversed. 

654.  Its  commander  should  take  advantage  of  every  favor- 
able opportunity  to  delay  the  pursuers  by  obstructing  the  road 
or  by  taking  up  specially  favorable  positions  from  which  to 
force  the  enemy  to  deploy.  In  this  latter  case  care  must  be 
taken  not  to  become  so  closely  engaged  as  to  render  withdrawal 
uuneces.sarlly  difficult.  The  position  taken  should  be  selected 
with  refei'ence  to  ease  of  withdrawal  and  ability  to  bring  the 
enemy  under  tire  at  long  range. 

655.  In  large  coumiands  artillery  and  cavalry  form  a  very 
important  part  of  the  rear  guard. 

Flank  Guards, 

656.  A  f/ank  guard  is  a  detachment  detailed  to  cover  the  flank 
of  a  column  marching  past,  or  across  the  front  of,  an  enemy. 
It  may  be  placed  in  position  to  protect  the  passage,  or  it  may  be 
so  marched  as  to  cover  the  passage. 

657.  The  object  of  the  tlaidv  guard  is  to  hold  the  enemy  in 
check  long  enough  to  enable  the  main  body  to  pass,  or,  like  the 
advance  guard,  to  enable  the  main  body  to  deploy. 

Like  all  other  detachments,  it  should  be  no  larger  than  is 
necessary,  and  should  not  be  detailed  except  when  its  protection 
is  required. 

658.  When  a  tiank  guard  consists  of  a  regiment  or  less,  its 
distance  from  the  main  body  should  not  exceed  a  mile  and  ;>. 
half.  Practicable  t-ommunication  must  exist  between  it  and 
the  main  body.  V,.. 

659.  The  flank  guard  is  marched  as  a  separate  command; 
that  is,  with  advance  or  rear  guards  or  both,  as  circumstances 
demand,  and  with  patrolling  on  the  exposed  flank. 

660.  At  times  it  may  be  necessary  for  an  advance-guard 
commander  to  send  out  large  reconnoitering  parties  which  tem- 
lX)rari]y  assume  the  character  and  duties  of  a  flank  guard. 
Such  parties  should  be  given  specific  orders  as  to  when  and 
where  they  are  to  rejoin  the  column. 


CAMPS. 

fi  A  NIT  AT  ION. 

66 1.  If  the  area  of  the  available  gronntl  is  snfTioient  and 
suitable,  the  camp  of  the  battalion  or  regiment  shouUl  conform 
to  the  plates  published  in  the  Field  Service  Regulations.  Under 
similar  favorable  conditions,  the  brigade  may  camp  in  column  or 
in  line  of  columns.  In  the  latter  formation  the  interval  between 
regiments  should  be  about  50  yards.  When  the  camp  site  has 
a  restricted  area,  intervals  and  distances  are  reduced. 

Under  service  conditions,  camp  sites  that  will  permit  the  en- 
campment of  regiments  and  brigades  as  above  indicated  will 
not  often  be  available  and  regularity  must  be  sacrificed. 

662.  In  large  commands  the  halt  order  should  assign  camp 
sites  to  the  next  smaller  commands,  and  the  commanders  of  the 
latter  should  locate  tlieir  respective  commands  to  the  best  ad- 
vantage on  the  area  assigned  them. 

The  Selection  of  Camp  Sites. 

663.  In  campaign,  tactical  necessity  may  leave  little  choice 
in  the  selection  of  camp  sites,  but  under  any  conditions  the  re- 
quirements of  sanitation  should  be  given  every  consideration 
consistent  with  the  tactical  situation. 

664.  Great  care  should  be  exercised  in  selecting  sites.  In 
general,  the  following  principles  govern : 

The  site  should  be  convenient  to  an  abundant  supply  of  pure 
water. 

Good  roads  should  lead  to  the  camp.  Interior  communica- 
tion throughout  the  camp  should  be  easy.  A  cam]»  near  a  main 
road  is  undesirable  on  account  of  dust  and  noise. 

Wood,  grass,  forage,  and  supplies  should  be  :il  h.iml  nv  easily 
obtainable. 
148 


CAMPS.  149 

The  ground  should  accommodate  the  command  without  crowd- 
ing and  without  comi>elling  the  troops  of  one  unit  to  pass 
through  the  camp  of  another. 

The  site  should  be  sufficiently  high  and  rolling  to  drain  off 
storm  water  readily,  and,  if  the  season  be  hot,  to  catch  the 
breeze.  In  cold  weather  it  should  preferably  have  a  southern 
exposure,  with  woods  to  the  north  to  break  the  cold  winds.  In 
warm  weather  an  eastern  exposure,  with  the  site  moderately 
shaded  by  trees,  is  desirable. 

The  site  should  be  dry.  For  this  reason  porous  soil,  covered 
with  stout  turf  and  underlaid  by  a  sandy  or  gravelly  subsoil,  is 
best.  A  site  on  clay  soil,  or  where  the  ground  water  approaches 
the  surface,  is  damp,  cold,  and  unhealthful. 

xMluvial  soils,  marshy  ground,  and  ground  near  the  base  of 
hills,  or  near  thick  woods  or  dense  vegetation,  are  imdesirable 
as  camp  sites  on  account  of  dampness.  Ravines  aiid  depressions 
are  likely  to  be  unduly  warm  and  to  have  insufficient  or  unde- 
sirable air  currents. 

Proximity  to  marshes  or  stagnant  water  is  undesirable  on 
account  of  the  dampness,  mosquitoes,  and  the  diseases  which 
the  latter  transmit.  The  high  banks  of  lakes  or  large  streams 
often  make  desirable  camp  sites. 

Dry  beds  of  streams  should  be  avoided;  they  are  subject  to 
sudden  freshet. 

6C5.  The  occulta tion  of  old  camp  sites  is  dangerous,  since 
these  are  often  jjermeated  by  elements  of  disease  which  persist 
for  considerable  periods.  Camp  sites  must  be  changed  promptly 
when  there  i.s  evidence  of  soil  pollution  or  when  epidemic  dis- 
ease threatens,  but  the  need  for  frequent  changes  on  this  ac- 
count may  be  a  reflection  on  the  sanitary  administration  of  the 
camp. 

A  change  of  camp  site  is  often  desirable  in  order  to  secure  a 
change  of  surroundings  and  to  abandon  areas  which  have  be- 
come dusty  and  cut  up. 

Water  Supply. 

666.  Immediately  on  making  camp  a  guard  should  be  placed 
over  the  water  .supply.  If  the  water  be  obtained  from  a  stream, 
places  should  be  designated  for  drawing  water  (1)  for  drinking 
and  cooking,    (2>    for  watering  animals,    (3)    for  bathing  and 


150  CAMPS. 

washing  clotliing.  The  first  named  should  be  dnnvn  f:irthest 
up  the  stream ;  the  others,  in  the  order  named,  downstream. 

If  the  stream  be  small,  the  water  supply  may  be  increased  by 
building  a  dam.  Small  springs  may  be  dug  out  and  each  lined 
with  a  gabion,  or  a  barrel  or  box  with  both  ends  removed,  or 
with  stones,  the  space  between  the  lining  and  the  earth  being 
filled  with  puddled  clay.  A  rim  of  clay  should  be  built  to  keep 
out  surface  drainage;  The  same  method  may  be  used  near 
swamps,  streams,  or  lakes  to  increase  or  clarify  the  water 
supply. 

66  7.  Water  that  is  not  known  to  be  pure  should  be  boiled 
20  minutes;  it  should  then  be  cooled  and  aerated  by  being 
poured  repeatedly  from  one  clean  'Container  to  another,  or  it 
may  be  purified  by  approved  apparatus  supplied  for  the  purpose. 

668.  Arrangements  should  be  made  for  men  to  draw  water 
from  the  authorized  receptacles  by  means  of  a  spigot  or  other 
similar  arrangement.  The  dipping  of  water  from  the  recepta- 
cles, or  the  use  of  a  common  drinking  cup,  should  be  prohibited. 

Kitchens. 

669.  Camp  kettles'can  be  hung  on  a  support  consisting^  of 'a 
green  pole  lying  in  the  crotches  of  two  upright  posts  of  the  same 
character. 

A  narrow  trench  for  the  fire,  about  1  foot  deep,  dug  under  the 
pole,  not  only  protects  the  fire  from  the  wind  but  saves  fuel.  A 
still  greater  economy  of  fuel  can  be  effected  by  digging  a  similar 
trench  in  the  direction  of  the  wind  an("  slightly  narrower  than 
the  diameter  of  the  kettles.  The  kettles  are  then  placed  on  the 
trench  and  the  space  between  the  kettles  filled  in  with  stones, 
clay,  etc.,  leaving  the  flue  running  beneath  the  kettles.  The 
draft  can  be  improved  by  building  a  chimney  of  stones,  clay, 
etc.,  at  the  leeward  end  of  the  flue. 

Four  such  trenches  radiating  from  a  cominon  central  chimney 
will  give  one  flue  for  use  whatever  may  be  the  direction  of  the 
wind. 

A  slight  slope  of  the  flue,  from  the  chimney  down,  provides 
for  drainage  and  improves  the  draft. 

670.  The  lack  of  portable  ovens  can  be  met  by  ovens  con- 
tdructed  cf  stone  and  covered  with  earth  to  better  retain  the 
heat.     If  no  stone  is  available,  an  empty  barrel,  with  one  head 


CAMPS.  151 

out,  is  laid  on  its  side,  covered  with  wet  clay  to  a  depth  of  6  or 
more  inches  and  then  with  a  layer  of  dry  earth  equally  thick. 
A  Hue  is  constructed  with  the  clay  above  the  closed  end  of  the 
barrel,  which  is  then  burned  out  with  a  hot  tire.  This  leaves  a 
baked  clay  covering  for  the  oven. 

A  recess  can  be  similarly  constructed  with  boards  or  even 
brushwood,  supported  on  a  horizontal  pole  resting,  on  upright 
posts,  covered  and  burnt  out  as  in  the  case  of  the  barrel. 

When  clay  banks  are  available,  an  oven  may  be  excavated 
therein  and  used  at  once. 

To  bake  in  such  ovens,  first  heat  them  and  then  close  flues  and 
ends. 

6  71.  Food  must  be  protected  from  flies,  dust,  and  sun.  Fa- 
cilities must  be  provided  for  cleaning  and  scalding  the  mess 
equipment  of  the  men.  Kitchens  and  the  ground  around  them 
must  be  kept  scrupulously  clean. 

6  72.  Solid  I'efuse  should  be  promptly  burned,  either  in  the 
kitchen  fire  or  in  an  improvised  crematory. 

6  73.  In  temporary  camps,  if  the  soil  is  porous,  liquid  refuse 
from  the  kitchens  may  be  strained  through  gunny  sacking  into 
seepage  pits  dug  near  the  kitchen.  Flies  must  not  have  access 
to  these  pits.  Boards  or  poles,  covered  with  brush  or  grass 
and  a  layer  of  earth  may  be  used  for  this  purpose.  The 
strainers  should  also  be  protected  from  flies.  Pits  of  this  kind, 
dug  in  clayey  soil,  will  nut  operate  successfully.  All  pits  should 
be  filled  with  earth  before  marching. 

Disposal  of  Excreta. 

6  74.  Immediately  on  arriving  in  camp  sinks  should  be  dug. 
This  is  a  matter  of  fundamental  sanitary  imixtrtauce,  since  the 
most  serious  epidemics  of  camp  diseases  are  spread  from  human 
excreta. 

One  sink  is  usuallj'  provided  for  each  company  and  one  for  the 
oflicers  of  each  battalion.  Those  for  the  men  are  invariably 
located  on  the  side  of  camp  opposite  the  kitchens.  All  sinks 
should  be  so  placed  that  they  can  not  pollute  the  water  supply 
or  camp  site  ;is  a  result  of  drainage  or  overflow.  To  insure 
this,  their  location  and  their  distance  from  camp  may  be  varied. 

When  camp  is  made  for  a  single  night,  shallow  trenches,  12 
inches  deep  and  15  to  18  inches  wide,  which  the  men  may 
straddle,  will  sutfice. 


152  CAMFS. 

In  more  permanent  camps,  the  trenches  should  be  about  2  feet 
wide,  G  feet  deep,  and  15  feet  long.  They  should  be  provided 
with  seats  and  back  rests  made  of  poles,  and  should  be  screened 
by  brush  or  old  tent  flys. 

675.  In  cold  weather  the  contents  of  sinks  should  be  covered 
once  daily  with  quicklime,  ashes,  or  dry  earth.  When  filled 
to  within  2  feet  of  the  top,  sinks  should  be  discontinued  and 
filled  in. 

Open  pits  are  dangerous  during  the  fly  season.  However,  the 
danger  may  be  greatly  reduced  by  covering  the  excreta  with 
earth  or  by  a  thorough  daily  burning  of  the  entire  area  of  the 
trench.  Combustible  sweepings  or  straw,  saturated  with  oil, 
may  be  used  for  this  purpose. 

In  liy  season,  trenches  may  be  closed  with  seats  covered  down 
to  tlie  ground  Vvlth  muslin  and  supplied  with  self-closing  lids. 
Urinal  troughs,  made  of  muslin  and  coated  with  oil  or  paint, 
should  discharge  into  the  trenches. 

6  76.  In  permanent  camps  special  sanitary  facilities  for  the 
disposal  of  excreta  will  orfiinarily  be  provided. 

If  necessary,  urinal  tubs  may  be  placed  in  the  company  streets 
at  night  and  removed  at  reveille.  Their  location  should  be 
plainly  marked  and  thoroughly  and  frequently  disinfected. 

677.  When  troops  bivouac  for  the  night  the  necessity  for 
extensive  sanitary  precautions  is  not  great ;  however,  shallow 
sink  trenches  should  be  dug  to  prevent  general  pollution  of  the 
A'icinity.  If  the  cooking  be  collective,  shallow  kitchen  sinks 
should  be  dug.  If  the  cooking  be  Individual,  the  men  should  be 
required  to  build  their  fires  on  the  leeward  flank  of  the  camp 
or  bivouac. 

Before  marching,  all  trenches  should  be  filled  in. 

PROTECTION    OF    CAMP    OR    BIVOUAC. 
General  Considerations, 

678.  The  outpost  is  a  covering  detachment  detailed  to  secure 
the  camp  or  bivouac  against  surprise  and  to  prevent  an  attack 
upon  it  before  the  troops  can  prepare  to  resist. 

6  79.  The  size  and  disposition  of  the  outpost  will  depend  upon 
many  circumstances,  such  as  the  size  of  the  whole  command,  the 
proximity  of  the  enemy  and  the  situation  with  respec-t  to  him. 
the  nature  of  the  terrain,  etc. 


CAMPS.  153 

A  suitable  strength  may  vary  from  a  very  small  fraction  to 
one-third  of  the  whole  force.  For  a  single  company  in  bivouac 
a  few  sentinels  and  patrols  will  suffice;  for  a  large  command  a 
more  elaborate  outpost  system  must  be  provided.  It  should  be 
no  stronger  than  is  consistent  with  reasonable  security. 

The  most  economical  protection  is  furnished  by  keeping  close 
contact  with  the  enemy  by  means  of  outpost  patrols,  in  con- 
junction with  resisting  detachments  on  the  avenues  of  approach. 

The  outpost  should  be  composed  of  complete  organizations. 

680.  In  a  brigade  or  smaller  force  on  the  march  toward  the 
enemy,  the  outpost  is  generally  formed  from  the  advance  guard, 
and  is  relieved  the  following  day  when  the  new  advance  guard 
crosses  the  line  of  outguards.  In  a  retreat,  the  detail  for  out- 
post duty  is  generally  made  from  the  main  body.  The  new  out- 
post becomes  the  rear  guard  tbe  following  day. 

68  1.  When,  as  in  large  forces,  an  advance  and  rear  guard 
performs  such  duty  for  several  days,  the  outpost,  during  tliis 
period,  is  furnished  by  the  advance  or  rear  guards. 

When  the  command  is  small  and  stationary  for  several  days, 
the  outpost  is  relieved  daily.  In  large  commands,  the  outpost 
will,  as  a  rule,  be  relieved  at  intervals  of  several  days. 

682.  The  positions  held  by  the  subdivisions  of  the  outpost 
should  generally  be  prepared  for  defense,  but  conditions  may 
render  this  unnecessary. 

Troops  on  outpost  keep  concealed  as  much  as  is  consistent 
with  the  proi)er  performance  of  their  duties ;  especially  do  they 
avoid  appearing  on  the  sky  line. 

Outpost  troops  do  not  render  honors. 

Distribution  of  Outpost  Troops. 

683.  The  outpost  will  generally  be  divided  into  three  parts. 
These,  in  order  from  the  main  body,  are  the  reserve,  the  line  of 
supports,  and  the  line  of  outguards. 

The  distances  separating  these  parts,  and  their  distance  from 
the  main  body,  will  depend  upon  the  object  sought,  the  nature 
of  the  terrain,  and  the  size  of  the  command.  There  can  be  no 
uniformity  in  the  distance  between  supports  and  reserve,  nor 
between  outguards  and  supports,  even  in  the  same  outpost.  The 
avenues  of  approach  and  the  important  features  of  the  terrain 
will  largely  control  their  exact  positions 


154  CAMPS. 

The  outpost  of  a  small  force  should  ordinarily  hold  the  enemy 
beyond  effective  rifle  range  of  the  main  body  until  the  latter  can 
deploy.  For  the  same  purpose  the  outpost  of  a  large  force 
should  hold  the  enemy  beyond  artillery  range. 

C84.  The  reserve  constitutes  the  main  body  of  the  outpost 
and  is  held  at  some  central  point  from  which  it  can  readily 
support  the  troops  in  front  or  hold  a  rallying  position  on  which 
they  may  retire.  The  reserve  may  be  omitted  when  the  outpost 
consists  of  less  than  two  companies. 

The  reserve  may  comprise  one-fourth  to  two-thirds  of  the 
strength  of  the  outix)st. 

685.  The  supports  constitute  a  line  of  supporting  and  resist- 
ing detachments,  varying  in  size  from  a  half  company  to  a 
battalion.     They  furnish  the  line  of  outguards. 

The  supports  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left. 
They  are  placed  at  the  more  important  points  on  the  outpost 
line,  usually  in  the  line  on  which  resistance  is  to  be  made  in 
case  of  attack.  .        : 

686.  As  a  general  rule,  roads  exercise  the  greatest  influence 
on  the  location  of  supports,  and  a  suppox't  will  generally  be 
placed  on  or  near  a  road.  The  section  which  it  is  to  cover 
should  be  clearly  defined  by  means  of  tangible  lines  on  the 
ground  and  should  be  such  that  the  supiwrt  is  centrally  located 
therein. 

687.  The  outguards  constitute  the  line  of  small  detachments 
farthest  to  the  front  and  nearest  to  the  enemy.  For  convenience 
they  are  classified  as  pickets,  sentry  squads,  and  cossack  posts. 
They  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right  to  left  iu  each 
support. 

688.  A  picket  is  a  group  consisting  of  two  or  more  squads, 
ordinarily  not  exceeding  half  a  company,  posted  in  the  line  of 
outguards  to  cover  a  given  sector.  It  furnishes  patrols  and  one 
or  more  sentinels,  double  sentinels,  sentry  squads,  or  cossack 
posts  for  observation. 

Pickets  are  placed  at  the  more  important  points  iu  the  line 
of  outguards,  such  as  road  foi'ks.  The  strength  of  each  depends 
upon  the  number  of  small  groups  required  to  observe  properly 
its  sector. 

689.  A  sentry  squad  is  a  squad  posted  iu  observation  at  an 
indicated  point.  It  posts  a  double  sentinel  in  observation,  the 
remaining  men  resting  near  by  and  furnishing  the  reliefs  of 
sentinels.    In  some  cases  it  may  be  required  to  furnish  a  patrol. 


CAMPS.  155 

690.  A  cossack  post  consists  of  four  men.  It  is  an  observa- 
tion group  similar  to  a  sentry  squad,  but  employs  a  single 
sentinel. 

691.  At  night,  it  will  sometimes  be  advisable  to  place  some 
of  the  outguards  or  their  sentinels  in  a  position  different  from 
that  which  they  occupy  in  the  daytime.  In  such  case  the  ground 
should  be  carefully  studied  before  dark  and  the  change  made 
at  dusk.  However,  a  change  in  the  position  of  the  outguard 
will  be  exceptional. 

692.  Sentinels  are  generally  used  singly  in  daytime,  but  at 
night  double  sentinels  will  be  required  in  most  cases.  Sentinels 
furnished  by  cossack  posts  or  sentry  .squads  are  kept  near  their 
group.  Those  furnished  by  pickets  may  be  as  far  as  100  yards 
away. 

Every  sentinel  sliould  be  able  to  communicate  readily  with 
the  body  to  which  he  belongs. 

693.  Sentinel  posts  are  numbered  consecutively  from  right 
to  left  in  each  outguard.  Sentry  squads  and  cossack  posts  fur- 
nished by  pickets  are  counted  as  sentinel  pf)Sts. 

694.  Instead  of  using  outguards  along  the  entire  front  of 
observation,  part  of  this  front  may  be  covered  by  patrols  only. 
These  should  be  used  to  cover  such  sections  of  the  front  as  can 
be  crossed  by  the  enemy  only  with  diflSeulty  and  over  which  he 
is  not  likely  to  attempt  a  crossing  after  dark. 

In  daylight  much  of  the  local  patrolling  may  be  dispensed 
with  if  the  country  can  be  seen  from  the  posts  of  Lh3  sentinels. 
However,  patrols  should  frequently  be  pushed  well  to  the  front 
unless  the  ground  in  that  direction  is  exceptionally  open. 

695.  Patrols  or  sentinels  must  be  the  first  troops  which  the 
enemy  meets,  and  each  body  in  rear  must  have  time  to  prepare 
for  the  blow.  These  bodies  cause  as  much  delay  as  possible 
without  sacrificing  themselves,  and  gradually  retire  to  the  line 
where  the  outpost  is  to  make  its  resistance. 

696.  Patrols  must  be  used  to  keep  up  connection  between  the 
parts  of  the  outpost- except  when,  during  daylight,  certain  frac- 
tions or  groups  are  mutually  visible.  After  dark  this  connec- 
tion must  be  maintained  throughout  the  outpost  except  where 
the  larger  subdivisions  are  provided  with  wire  communication. 

697.  In  addition  to  ordinary  outguards,  the  outpost  com- 
mander may  detail  from  the  reserve  one  or  more  detached  posts 
to  cover  roads  or  areas  not  In  the  general  line  assigned  to  the 
supports. 


156  CAMPS. 

In  like  manner  the  commander  of  the  whole  force  may  order 
detached  posts  to  be  sent  from  the  main  body  to  cover  important 
roads  or  localities  not  included  in  the  outpost  Hue. 

The  number  and  strength  of  detached  posts  are  reduced  to 
the  absolute  needs  of  the  situation. 

Establishing  the  Outpost. 

698.  The  outpost  is  posted  as  quickly  as  possible  so  that 
the  troops  can  the  sooner  obtain  rest.  Until  the  leading  outpost 
troops  are  able  to  assume  their  duties,  temporary  protection, 
known  as  the  march  outpost,  is  furnished  by  the  nearest  avail- 
able troops. 

699.  The  halt  order  of  the  commander,  besides  giving  the 
necessary  information  and  assigning  camp  sites  to  the  parts  of 
the  conmiand,  details  the  troops  to  constitute  the  outpost,  as- 
signs a  commander  therefor,  designates  the  geueral  line  to  be 
occupied,  and,  when  practicable,  points  out  the  position  to  be 
held  in  case  of  attack. 

700.  The  outpost  commander,  upon  receipt  of  this  order, 
should  issue  the  outitost  order  with  the  least  practicable  delay. 
In  large  commands  it  may  often  be  necessary  to  give  the  order 
from  the  map,  but  usually  the  outpost  commander  will  have  to 
make  some  preliminary  reconnaissance,  unless  he  has  an  accu- 
rate and  detailed  map. 

The  order  gives  such  available  information  of  the  situation  as 
is  necessary  to  the  comi)lete  and  proper  guidance  of  subordi- 
nates ;  designates  the  troops  to  constitute  the  supports ;  assigns 
their  location  and  the  sector  each  is  to  cover;  provides  for  the 
necessary  detacheil  posts;  indicates  any  special  reconnaissance 
that  is  to  be  made;  orders  the  location  and  disposition  of  the 
reserve;  disposes  of  the  train  if  same  is  ordered  to  join  the 
outpost;  and  informs  subordinates  where  information  will  be 
sent. 

701.  Generally  it  is  preferable  for  the  outpost  commander  to 
give  verbal  orders  to  his  support  commanders  from  some  local- 
ity which  overlooks  the  terrain.  The  time  and  locality  should 
be  so  selected  that  the  support  commanders  may  join  their 
commands  and  conduct  them  to  their  positions  without  causing 
unnecessary  delay  to  their  troops.  The  reserve  commander 
should,  if  possible,  receive  Lis  orders  at  the  same  time  as  the 


CAMPS.  157 

support  commanders.  Siibortliiifites  to  whom  lie  gives  orders 
separately  should  be  informed  of  the  location  of  other  parts  of 
the  outpost. 

In  large  outposts,  written  orders  are  frequently  most  con- 
venient. 

After  issuing  the  initial  orders,  the  outpost  couuuander  in- 
spects the  outpost,  orders  the  necessary  changes  or  additions, 
and  sends  his  superior  a  report  of  his  dispositions. 

702.  The  reserve  is  marched  to  its  post  by  its  commander, 
who  tlien  sends  out  such  detachments  as  have  been  ordered  and 
places  the  rest  in  camp  or  bivouac,  over  which  at  least  one 
sentinel  should  be  posted.  Connection  must  be  maintained  with 
the  main  body,  the  supports  and  nearby  detached  posts. 

703.  The  supports  march  to  their  posts,  using  the  necessary 
covering  detachmenls  when  in  advance  of  the  march  outpost. 
A  support  commander's  order  should  fully  explain  the  situation 
to  subordinates,  or  to  the  entire  conunand,  if  it  be  small.  It 
should  detail  the  troops  for  the  different  outguards  and,  when 
necessary,  define  the  sector  each  is  to  cover.  It  should  provide 
the  necessai-y  sentinels  at  the  post  of  the  support,  the  patrols 
to  be  sent  therefrom,  and  should  arrange  for  the  necessary  in- 
trenching. Connection  should  be  maintained  with  adjoining 
sui)ports  and  witli  the  outguards  furnished  by  the  support. 

704.  In  posting  his  conmiand  the  support  commander  must 
seek  to  cover  his  sector  in  such  manner  that  the  enemy  can  not 
reach,  in  dangerous  numbers  and  unobserved,  the  position  of 
the  support  or  pass  by  it  within  the  sector  intrusted  to  tlie 
support.  On  the  other  hand,  he  must  economize  men  on  ob.ser- 
vation  and  patrol  duty,  for  these  duties  are  unusually  fatiguing. 
He  must  practice  the  greatest  economy  of  men  consistent  with 
the  requirements  of  practical  security. 

705.  As  soon  as  the  posting  of  tlie  support  is  completed,  its 
commander  carefully  inspects  the  dispositions  and  corrects  de- 
fects, if  any,  and  reports  the  disposition  of  his  support,  includ- 
ing the  patrolling  ordered,  to  the  outpost  commander.  This  re- 
port is  preferably  made  by  means  of  a  sketch. 

706.  Each  outguard  is  marched  by  its  commander  to  its 
assigned  station,  and,  especially  in  the  case  of  a  picket,  is  cov- 
ered by  the  necessary  patrolling  to  prevent  surprise. 

Having  reached  the  position,  the  commander  explains  the 
situation  to  his  men  and  establishes  reliefs  for  each  sentinel, 


158  CAHPS. 

and,  if  possible,  for  each  patrol  to  be  furnished.  Besides  these 
sentinels  and  patrols,  a  picket  must  have  a  sentinel  at  its  post. 

The  commander  then  posts  the  sentinels  and  points  out  to 
them  the  principal  features,  such  as  towns,  roads,  and  streams, 
and  gives  their  names.  He  gives  the  direction  and  location  of 
the  enemy,  if  known,  and  of  adjoining  parts  of  the  outpost. 

He  gives  to  patrols  the  same  information  and  the  necessary 
orders  as  to  their  routes  and  the  frequency  with  which  the 
same  shall  be  covered.  Each  patrol  should  go  over  its  route 
once  before  dark. 

707.  Every  picket  should  maintain  connection  by  patrols 
with  outguards  on  its  right  and  left.  Each  coniiaander  will 
take  precaution  to  conceal  his  outguard  and  w'll  generally 
strengthen  his  position  by  intrenching. 


Part  IV.— CEREMONIES  AND  INSPEC- 
TIONS. 


CEREMONIES. 

General  Rules  for  Ceremonies. 

708.  The  order  in  which  the  troops  of  the  various  arms  are 
arranged  for  ceremonies  is  prescribed  by  Army  Regulations. 

When  forming  for  ceremonies  the  companies  of  the  battalion 
and  the  battalions  of  the  regiment  are  i>osted  from  right  to  left 
in  line  and  from  head  to  rear  in  col\imn,  in  the  order  of  rank 
of  their  resr>ective  commanders  present  in  the  formation,  the 
senior  on  the  right  or  at  the  head. 

The  commander  faces  the  command ;  subordinate  commanders 
face  to  the  front. 

709.  At  the  command  present  arms,  given  by  the  colonel,  the 
lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  colonel's  staff  salute;  the  major's 
staff  salute  at  the  major's  command.  Each  staff  returns  to  the 
carry  or  order  when  the  command  order  arms  is  given  by  Its 
chief. 

710.  At  the  assembly  for  a  ceremony  companies  are  formed 
on  their  own  parades  and  informally  inspected. 

At  adjutant's  call,  excejit  for  ceremonies  involving  a  single 
battalion,  each  battalion  is  formed  on  its  own  parade,  reports 
are  receiveti,  and  the  battalion  presented  to  the  major.  At  the 
second  sounding  of  adjutant's  call  the  regiment  is  formed. 

REI//EWS. 

General  Rules. 

711.  The  adjutant  posts  men  or  otherwise  marks  the  points 
where  the  column  changes  direction  in  such  manner  that  its 
flank  in  passing  will  be  about  12  paces  from  the  reviewing 
officer. 

159 


160  CEREMONIES. 

The  post  of  the  reviewing  officer,  usually  opposite  the  center 
of  the  line,  is  indicated  by  a  marker. 

Officers  of  the  same  or  higher  grade,  and  distinguished  per- 
sonages invited  to  accompany  the  reviewing  officer,  place  tjiem- 
selves  on  his  left;  their  staffs  and  orderlies  place  themselves 
respectively  on  the  left  of  the  staff  and  orderlies  of  the  review- 
ing officer ;  all  others  who  accomi^any  the  reviewing  officer  place 
themselves  on  the  left  of  his  staff,  their  orderlies  in  rear.  A 
staff  officer  is  designated  to  escort  distinguished  personages  and 
to  indicate  to  them  their  proper  positions. 

712.  While  riding  around  the  troops,  the  reviewing  officer 
may  direct  his  staff,  tlag  and  orderlies  to  remain  at  the  post 
of  the  reviewing  officer,  or  that  only  his  personal  staff  and  flag 
shall  accompany  him ;  in  either  case  the  commanding  officer 
alone  accompanies  the  reviewing  officer.  If  the  reviewing  officer 
is  accompanied  by  his  entire  staff,  the  staff  oHicers  of  the  com- 
mander ijlace  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  staff  of  the  review- 
ing officer. 

The  reviewing  officer  and  others  at  the  reviewing  stand  salute 
the  color  as  it  passes;  when  passing  around  the  troops,  the  re- 
viewing officer  and  those  accompanying  him  salute  the  color 
when  passing  in  front  of  it. 

The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  salute  of  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  troops  only.  Those  who  accompany  the  reviewing 
officer  do  not  salute. 

713.  In  passing  in  review,  each  staff  salutes  with  its  com- 
mander. 

714.  After  saluting  the  reviewing  officer,  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  troops  turns  out  of  the  column  and  takes  his  post 
on  the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer,  his  staff  on  the  right  of 
the  reviewing  officer's  staff.  When  the  rear  element  of  his 
command  has  passed,  without  changing  his  position,  he  salutes 
the  reviewing  officer  and  then  rejoins  his  command.  The  com- 
manding officer  of  the  troops  and  his  staff  are  the  only  ones 
who  turn  out  of  column. 

715.  If  the  person  reviewing  the  command  is  not  mounted, 
the  commanding  officer  and  his  staff  on  turning  out  of  the 
column  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer  dismount  preparatory 
to  taking  ijost.  In  such  case,  the  salute  of  the  commanding  offi- 
cer, prior  to  rejoining  his  command,  is  made  with  the  hand  be- 
fore remounting. 

716.  When  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer  entitles  him  to 
the  honor,  each  regimental  color  salutes  at  the  command  present 


CEREMONIES.  161 

arms,  given  or  repeated  by  the  major  of  the  battalion  witli 
which  it  is  posted ;  and  again  in  passing  in  review. 

717.  The  band  of  an  organization  plays  while  the  reviewing 
officer  is  passing  in  front  of  and  in  rear  of  the  organization. 

Each  band,  immediately  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer, 
turns  out  of  the  column,  takes  post  in  front  of  and  facing  him, 
continues  to  play  until  its  regiment  has  passed,  then  ceases 
playing  and  follows  in  rear  of  its  regiment;  the  band  of  the 
following  regiment  commences  to  play  as  soon  as  the  preceding 
band  has  ceased. 

While  marching  in  review  but  one  band  in  each  brigade  plays 
at  a  time,  and  but  one  baud  at  a  time  when  within  100  paces  of 
the  reviewing  officer. 

718.  If  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  officer  entitles  him  to  the 
honor,  the  band  plays  the  prescribed  national  air  or  the  field 
music  sounds  to  the  color,  march,  flourishes,  or  ruffles  when  ai'ms 
are  presented.  When  passing  in  review  at  the  moment  the 
regimental  color  salutes,  the  musicians  halted  in  front  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  sound  to  the  color,  march,  flourishes,  or  ruffles. 

719.  The  formation  for  review  may  be  modified  to  suit  the 
ground,  and  the  present  arms  and  the  ride  around  the  liae  by 
the  reviewing  officer  may  be  dispensed  with. 

720.  If  the  post  of  the  reviewing  officer  is  on  the  left  of  the 
column,  the  troops  march  in  review  with  the  guide  left :  the 
commanding  officer  and  his  staff  turn  out  of  the  cohunn  to  the 
left,  taking  post  as  prescribed  above,  but  to  the  left  of  the 
reviewing  officer ;  in  saluting,  the  captains  give  the  command : 
1.  Eyes,  2.  LEFT. 

721.  Except  in  the  review  of  a  single  battalion,  the  troops 
pass  in  review  in  quick  time  only. 

722.  In  reviews  of  brigades  or  larger  commands,  each  bat- 
talion, after  the  rear  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer  50  paces, 
takes  the  double  time  for  100  yards  in  order  not  to  interfere 
with  the  march  of  the  column  in  rear;  if  necessary,  it  then  turns 
out  of  the  column  and  returns  to  camp  by  the  most  i)racticable 
route;  the  leading  battalion  of  each  regiment  is  followed  by  the 
other  units  of  the  regiment. 

723.  In  a  brigade  or  larger  review  a  regimental  commander 
may  cause  his  regiment  to  stand  at  ease,  rest,  m-  stack  arms  and 
fall  out  and  resume  attention,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the 
Ceremony. 

19069°— 14 11 


162  CEREMONIES. 

724.  When  an  organization  is  to  be  reviewed  before  an  in- 
spector junior  in  rank  to  the  commanding  officer,  the  command- 
ing officer  receives  the  review  and  is  accompanied  by  the  in- 
spector, who  takes  post  on  his  left. 

Battalion  Review. 

725.  The  battalion  having  been  formed  in  line,  the  major 
faces  to  the  front ;  the  reviewing  officer  moves  a  few  paces  toward 
the  major  and  halts ;  the  major  turns  about  and  commands : 
].  Present,  2.  AR/itS,  and  again  turns  about  and  salutes. 

The  reviewing  officer  returns  the  salute;  the  major  turns 
about,  brings  the  battalion  to  order  arms,  and  again  turns  to 
the  front. 

The  reviewing  officer  approaches  to  about  6  paces  from  the 
major,  the  latter  salutes,  takes  post  on  his  right,  and  accompa- 
nies him  around  the  battalion.  The  baud  plays.  The  reviewing 
officer  proceeds  to  the  right  of  the  band,  passes  in  front  of  the 
captains  to  the  left  of  the  line  and  returns  to  the  right,  passing 
in  rear  of  the  file  closers  and  the  band. 

On  arriving  again  at  the  right  of  the  line,  the  major  salutes, 
halts,  and  when  the  reviewing  officer  and  staff  have  passed 
moves  directly  to  his  post  in  front  of  the  battalion,  faces  it,  and 
commands:  1.  Pass  in  review,  2.  Squads  right,  3.  MARCH. 
■  At  the  first  command  the  band  changes  direction  if  necessary, 
and  halts. 

At  the  third  command,  given  when  the  band  has  changed 
dii'eetion,  the  battalion  moves  off,  the  baud  playing;  without 
command  from  the  major  the  column  changes  direction  at  the 
points  indicated,  and  column  of  companies  at  full  distance  is 
formed  successively  to  the  left  at  the  second  change  of  direc- 
tion ;  the  major  takes  his  post  30  paces  in  front  of  the  ban^ 
immediately  after  the  second  change;  the  band  having  passed 
the  reviewing  officer,  tunis  to  the  left  out  of  the  column,  takes 
post  in  front  of  and  facing  the  reviewing  officer,  and  remains 
there  until  the  review  terminates. 

The  major  and  staff  salute,  turn  the  head  as  in  eyes  right, 
and  look  toward  the  reviewing  officer  when  the  major  is  6 
paces  from  him;  they  return  to  the  carry  and  turn  the  head 
and  eyes  to  the  front  when  the  major  has  passed  6  paces  be- 
yond  him. 


CEREMONIES.  163 

Without  facing  about,  each  captain  or  special  unit  commander, 
except  the  drum  major,  commands:  ].  Eyes,  in  time  to  add, 
2.  RIGHT,  when  at  6  paces  from  the  reviewing  officer,  and  com- 
mands FRONT  when  at  6  paces  beyond  him.  At  the  command 
eyes  tie  company  officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed 
with  the  saber  execute  the  first  motion  of  present  saber ;  at  the 
command  righi  all  turn  head  and  eyes  to  the  right  and  the  com- 
pany officers  complete  present  saber;  at  the  command  front  all 
turn  head  and  eyes  to  the  front  and  resume  the  carry  saber. 

Noncommissioned  stafC  officers,  noncommissioned  officers  in 
command  of  subdivisions,  and  the  drum  major  salute,  turn  the 
head  and  eyes,  return  to  the  front,  resume  the  carry  or  drop  the 
hand,  at  the  iioints  prescribed  for  the  major.  Officers  and  dis- 
mounted noncommissioned  officers  in  command  of  subdivision,s 
with  arms  in  hand  render  the  rifle  or  saber  salute.  Guides 
charged  with  the  step,  trace,  and  direction  do  not  execute  eyes 
right. 

If  the  reviewing  officer  is  entitled  to  a  salute  from  the  color 
the  regimental  color  salutes  when  at  6  paces  from  him,  and  is 
raised  when  at  6  paces  beyond  him. 

The  major,  having  saluted,  takes  post  on  the  right  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  remains  there  imtil  the  rear  of  the  battalion 
has  passed,  then  salutes  and  rejoins  his  battalion.  The  band 
ceases  to  play  when  the  column  has  completed  its  second  change 
of  direction  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer. 

726.  When  the  battalion  arrives  at  its  original  position  in 
column,  the  major  commands:  1.  Double  time,  2.  MARCH. 

The  band  plays  in  double  time. 

The  battalion  passt^s  in  review  as  before,  except  that  in  double 
time  the  command  eyes  right  is  omitted  and  there  is  no  saluting 
except  by  the  major  when  he  leaves  the  reviewing  officer. 

The  review  terminates  when  the  rear  company  has  passed 
the  reviewing  officer;  the  band  then  ceases  to  play,  and,  unless 
otherwise  directed  by  the  major,  returns  to  the  iwsitiou  it  occu- 
pied before  marching  in  review,  or  is  dismissed;  the  major 
rejoins  the  battalion  and  brings  it  to  quick  time.  The  battalion 
then  executes  such  movements  as  the  reviewing  officer  may 
have  directed,  or  is  marched  to  its  parade  ground  and  dismissed. 

Marching  past  in  double  time  may,  in  the  discretion  of  the 
reviewing  officer,  be  omitted;  the  review  terminates  when  the 
major  rejoins  his  battalion. 

727.  At  battalion  review  the  major  and  his  staff  may  be  dis- 
mounted in  the  discretion  of  the  commanding  officer. 


164  CEREMONIES. 

ttegimental  Review. 

728.  The  regiment  is  formed  in  line  or  in  line  of  masses. 

In  line  the  review  proceeds  as  in  the  battalion,  substituting 
"  colonel  "  for  "  major  "  and  "  regiment  "  for  "  battalion." 

To  march  the  regiment  in  review,  the  colonel  commands : 
PASS  IN  REVIEW.  The  band  changes  direction,  if  necessary,  and 
halts.     Each  major  then  commands :  1.  Squads  right,  2.  MARCH. 

The  band  marches  at  the  command  of  the  major  of  the  lead- 
ing battalion. 

At  the  second  change  of  direction  each  major  takes  post  20 
paces  in  front  of  his  leading  company. 

The  rear  of  the  column  having  passed  the  reviewing  officer, 
the  battalions,  unless  otherwise  directed,  are  marched  to  their 
parades  and  dismissed. 

In  line  of  masses,  when  the  reviewing  officer  has  passed  around 
the  regiment,  the  colonel  commands:  PASS  IN  REVIEW.  The 
band  changes  direction,  if  necessary,  and  halts.  The  major  of 
the  right  battalion  then  commands :  1.  Column  of  squads,  first 
company,  squads  right,  2.  MARCH.  At  the  command  march  the 
band  and  the  leading  company  of  the  right  battalion  move  off. 
Each  company  and  battalion  in  rear  moves  off  in  time  to  follow 
at  its  proper  distance. 

729.  The  review  of  a  small  body  of  troops  composed  of 
different  arms  is  conducted  on  the  principles  laid  down  for  the 
regiment.  The  troops  of  each  arm  are  formed  and  man-hed 
according  to  the  drill  regulations  for  that  arm. 

Review  of  Large  Commands. 

730.  A  command  consisting  of  one  regiment,  or  less,  and 
detachments  of  other  arms  is  formed  for  review  as  ordered  by 
the  commanding  officer.  The  principles  of  regimental  review 
will  be  observed  whenever  practicable. 

731.  In  the  review  of  a  brigade  or  larger  command  the 
present  arms  and  the  ride  around  the  line  by  the  reviewing 
officer  are  omitted.  The  troops  form  and  march  in  the  order 
prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

PARADES. 
General  Rules, 

732.  If  dismounted,  the  officer  receiving  tjie  parade,  and  his 
staff,  stand  at  parade  rest,  with  arms  folded,  while  the  baad  is 


CEREMONIES.  165 

sounding  oEf;   they   resume  attention  with  the  adjutant.    If 
mounted,  they  remain  at  attention. 

733.  At  the  command  report,  given  by  a  battalion  adjutant, 
the  captains  in  succession  from  the  right  salute  and  report: 
A  ^or  other)  company,  present  or  accounted  for;  or,  A  ^or  other) 
company,  (so  many)  officers  or  enlisted  men  absent,  and  resume 
the  order  saber ;  at  the  same  command  given  by  the  regimental 
adjutant,  the  majors  similarly  report  their  battalions. 

Battalion  Parade. 

734.  At  adjutant's  call  the  battalion  is  formed  in  line  but 
not  presented.  Lieutenants  take  their  posts  in  front  of  the 
center  of  their  respective  platoons  at  the  captain's  command 
for  dressing  his  company  on  the  line.  The  major  takes  post  at 
a  convenient  distance  in  front  of  the  center  and  facing  the 
battalion. 

The  adjutant,  from  his  post  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
battalion,  after  commanding:  1.  Guides,  2.  POSTS,  adds:  1. 
Parade,  2.  REST;  the  battalion  executes  parade  rest.  The  adju- 
tant directs  the  band  :  SOUND  OFF. 

The  band,  playing  in  quick  time,  passes  in  front  of  the  line  of 
oflicers  to  the  left  of  the  line  and  back  to  its  post  on  the  right, 
when  it  ceases  playing.  At  evening  parade,  when  the  band 
ceases  playing,  retreat  is  sounded  by  the  field  music  and,  follow- 
ing the  last  note  and  while  the  flag  is  being  lowered,  the  baud 
{(lays  the  Star  Spangled  Banner. 

Just  before  the  last  note  of  retreat,  the  adjutant  comes  to 
attention  and,  as  the  last  note  ends,  commands:  1.  Battalion, 
2.  ATTENTION.  Wlien  the  band  ceases  playing  he  commands: 
1.  Present,  2.  ARMS.  He  then  turns  about  and  reports:  Sir, 
the  parade  is  formed.  The  major  directs  the  adjutant:  Take 
your  post,  Sir.  Tlio  adjutant  moves  at  a  trot  (if  dismounted, 
in  quick  time),  passes  by  the  major's  right,  and  takes  his  post. 

The  major  draws  saber  and  commands:  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS, 
and  adds  such  exercises  in  the  manual  of  arms  as  he  may  de- 
sire. Officers,  noncommissioned  officers  commanding  companies 
or  armed  with  the  saber,  and  the  color  guard,  having  once 
executed  oi'der  arms,  remain  in  that  position  during  the  exer- 
cises in  the  manual. 

The  major  then  dli'ects  the  adjutant:  Receive  the  reports,  Sir. 
The  adjutant,  passing  by  the  major's  right,  advances  at  a  trot 
(if  dismounted,  in  quick  time)   toward  the  center  of  the  line. 


166  CEREMONIES. 

halts  midway  between  it  and  the  major,  and  commands: 
REPORT. 

The  reports  received,  the  adjutant  turns  about,  and  reports : 
Sir,  all  are  present  or  accounted  for;  or  Sir,  (so  many)  officers  or 
enlisted  men  are  absent,  including  in  the  list  of  absentees  those 
from  the  baud  and  field  music  reported  to  him  by  the  drum 
major  prior  to  the  parade. 

The  major  directs :  Publish  the  orders.  Sir. 

The  adjutant  turns  about  and  commands:  Attention  to  orders; 
he  then  reads  the  orders,  and  commands :  1.  Oncers,  2.  CENTER, 
3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  center,  the  company  officers  carry  saber  and 
face  to  the  center.  At  the  command  march,  they  close  to  the 
center  and  face  to  the  front ;  the  adjutant  turns  about  and  takes 
his  post. 

The  officers  having  closed  and  faced  to  the  front,  the  senior 
commands:  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH.  The  officers  advance,  the 
band  playing;  the  left  officer  of  the  center  or  right  center  com- 
pany is  the  guide,  and  marches  on  the  major ;  the  officers  are 
halted  at  6  paces  from  the  major  by  the  senior  who  commands: 

1.  Officers,  2.  HALT.  They  halt  and  salute,  returning  to  the 
carry  saber  with  the  major.  The  major  then  gives  such  instruc- 
tions   as    he    deems  necessary,    and    commands;     1.    Officers, 

2.  POSTS,  3.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  posts,  company  officers  face  about. 

At  the  command  march,  they  step  off  with  guide  as  before, 
and  the  senior  commands :  1.  Oncers,  2.  HALT,  so  as  to  halt  3 
paces  from  the  line;  he  then  adds:  1.  POSTS,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  posts,  officers  face  outward  and.  at  the  com- 
mand march,  step  off  in  succession  at  4  paces  distance,  resume 
their  posts  and  order  saber ;  the  lieutenants  march  directly  to 
their  posts  in  rear  of  their  companies. 

The  music  ceases  when  all  officers  have  resumed  their  posts. 

The  major  then  commands:  1.  Pass  in  review,  2.  Squads  right, 

3.  MARCH,  and  returns  saber. 

The  battalion  marches  according  to  the  principles  of  review ; 
when  the  last  company  has  passed,  the  ceremony  is  concluded. 

The  baud  continues  to  play  while  the  companies  are  in  march 
upon  the  parade  ground.  Companies  are  formed  in  column  of 
squads,  without  halting,  and  are  marched  to  their  respective 
parades  by  their  captains. 

When  the  eompany  officers  have  saluted  the  major,  he  may 
direct  them  to  form  line  with  the  staff,  in  which  case  they  indi- 


CEREMONIES.  167 

vidually  move  to  the  front,  passing  to  the  right  and  left  of  the 
major  and  staff,  halt  on  the  line  established  by  the  staff,  face 
about,  and  stand  at  attention.  The  music  ceases  when  the  offi- 
cers join  the  staff.  The  major  causes  the  companies  to  pass  in 
review  under  the  command  of  their  first  sergeants  by  the  same 
commands  as  before.  The  company  oflBcers  return  saber  with 
the  major  and  remain  at  attention. 

Regimenial  Parade. 

735.  The  regiment  is  formed  in  line  or  in  line  of  masses; 
the  formation  having  proceeded  up  to,  but  not  including  the 
present,  the  parade  proceeds  as  described  for  the  battalion,  with 
the  following  exceptions : 

'  "  Colonel  "  is  substituted  for  "  major"  "  regiment "  for  bat- 
'talion,"  in  the  description,  and  "  battalions  "  for  "  battalion  "  in 
'the  commands. 

Lieutenants  remain  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

After  publishing  the  orders,  the  adjutant  commands:  1.  Offi- 
cers, center,  2.  MARCH. 

The  company  commanders  remain  at  their  posts  with  their 
companies. 

The  field  and  staff  officers  form  one  line,  closing  on  the  center. 
The  senior  commands :  1.  Forward,  2.  MARCH. 

The  second  major  is  the  guide  and  marches  on  the  colonel. 

After  being  dismissed  by  the  colonel,  each  major  moves  in- 
dividually to  the  front,  turns  outward,  and  followed  by  his  staff' 
resumes  his  post  by  the  most  direct  line.  The  colonel  directs 
the  lieutenant  colonel  to  march  the  regiment  in  review ;  the 
latter  moves  to  a  point  midway  between  the  colonel  and  the 
regiment  and  marches  the  regiment  iu  review  as  prescribed.  If 
the  lieutenant  lolonel  is  not  present  the  colonel  gives  the  neces- 
sary commands  for  marching  the  regiment  in  review. 

ESCORTS. 

Escort  of  the  Color. 

736.  The  regiment  being  in  line,  the  colonel  details  a  com- 
pany, other  than  the  color  company,  to  receive  and  escort  the 
national  color  to  its  place  in  line.  During  the  ceremony  the 
regimental  color  I'emaius  with  the  color  guard  at  its  post  with 
the  regiment. 

The  band  moves  straight  to  its  front  until  clear  of  the  line  of 
field  officers,  changes  direction  to  the  right,  and  is  halted;  the 
designated  company  forms  column  of  platoons  in  rear  of  the 
baud,  the  color  beaVer  or  bearers  between  the  platoons. 


168  CEREMONIES. 

The  escort  then  marches  without  music  to  the  colonel's  office 
or  quarters  and  is  formed  in  line  facing  the  entrance,  the  band 
on  the  right,  the  color  bearer  in  the  line  of  file  closers. 

The  color  bearer,  preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant  and  fol- 
lowed by  a  sergeant  of  the  escort,  then  goes  to  obtain  the  color. 

When  the  color  bearer  comes  out,  followed  by  the  lieutenant 
and  sergeant,  he  halts  before  the  entrance,  facing  the  escort; 
the  lieutenant  places  himself  on  the  right,  the  sergeant  on  the 
left  of  the  color  bearer;  the  escort  presents  arms,  and  the  field 
music  sounds  to  the  color;  the  first  lieutenant  and  sergeant 
salute. 

Arms  are  brought  to  the  order;  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant 
return  to  their  posts;  the  company  is  formed  in  column  of 
platoons,  the  band  taking  post  in  front  of  the  column ;  the  color 
bearer  places  himself  between  the  platoons ;  the  escort  marches 
in  quick  time,  with  guide  left,  back  to  the  regiment,  the  band 
playing ;  the  march  is  so  conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives 
at  50  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of  the  regiment,  the  direction 
of  the  march  shall  be  parallel  to  its  front;  when  the  color 
arrives  opposite  its  place  in  line,  the  escort  is  formed  in  line  to 
the  left;  the  color  bearer,  passing  between  the  platoons,  ad- 
vances and  halts  12  paces  in  front  of  the  colonel. 

The  color  bearer  having  halted,  the  colonel,  who  has  taken 
post  30  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  his  regiment,  faces  about, 
commands:  1.  Present,  2.  ARMS,  resumes  his  front,  and  salutes; 
the  field  music  sounds  io  the  color;  and  the  regimental  color 
bearer  executes  the  color  salute  at  the  command  present  arms. 

The  colonel  then  faces  about,  brings  the  regiment  to  the 
order,  at  which  the  color  bearer  takes  his  post  with  the  color 
company. 

The  escort  presents  arms  and  comes  to  the  order  with  the  regi- 
ment, at  the  command  of  the  colonel,  after  which  the  captain 
forms  it  again  in  column  of  platoons,  and,  preceded  by  the  band, 
marches  it  to  its  place  in  line,  passing  around  the  left  flank  of 
the  regiment. 

The  band  plays  until  the  escort  passes  the  left  of  the  line, 
when  it  ceases  playing  and  returns  to  its  post  on  the  right, 
passing  in  rear  of  the  regiment. 

The  regiment  may  be  brought  to  a  rest  when  the  escort 
passes  the  left  of  the  line. 

737.  Escort  of  the  color  is  executed  by  a  battalion  according 
to  the  same  principles. 


CEREMONIES.  169 

Escorts  of  Honor. 

738.  Escorts  of  honor  are  detailed  for  the  purpose  of  receiv- 
ing and  escorting  personages  of  high  ranli,  civil  or  military. 
The  troops  for  this  purpose  are  selected  for  their  soldierly 
appearance  and  superior  discipline. 

The  escort  forms  in  line,  opposite  the  place  where  the  per- 
sonage presents  himself,  the  band  on  the  flank  of  the  escort 
toward  which  it  will  march.  On  the  appearance  of  the  person- 
age, he  is  received  with  the  honors  due  to  his  rank.  The  escort 
is  formed  into  column  of  companies,  platoons  or  squads,  and 
takes  up  the  march,  the  personage  and  his  staff  or  retinue  tak- 
Ijig  positions  in  rear  <.)f  the  column ;  when  he  leaves  the  escort, 
line  is  formed  and  the  same  honors  are  paid  as  before. 

When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a  considerable  distance 
from  the  point  where  the  personage  is  to  be  received,  as  for  in- 
stance, where  a  courtyai'd  or  wharf  intervenes,  a  double  line 
of  sentinels  is  posted  from  that  point  to  the  escort,  facing  in- 
ward; the  sentinels  successively  salute  as  he  passes  and  are 
then  relieved  and  join  the  escort. 

An  officer  is  appointed  to  attend  him  and  bear  such  com- 
munication as  he  may  have  to  make  to  the  commander  of  the 
escort. 

Funeral  Escort. 

739.  The  composition  and  strength  of  the  escort  are  pre- 
scribed in  Army  Regulations. 

The  escort  is  formed  opposite  the  quarters  of  the  deceased; 

the  band  on  that  flank  of  the  escort  toward  which  it  is  to  march. 

Upon  the  appearance  of  the  coffin,  the  commander  commands; 

1.  Present,  2.  ARMS,  and  the  band  plays  an  appropriate  air; 
arms  are  then  brought  to  the  order. 

The  escort  is  next  formed  into  column  of  companies,  platoons, 
or  squads.  If  the  escort  be  small,  it  may  be  marched  in  line. 
The    procession    is    formed    in    the    following    order:  1.  Music, 

2.  Escort,  3.  Clergy,  4.  Coffin  and  pallbearers,  5.  Mourners,  G.  Mem- 
bers of  the  former  command  of  the  deceased,  7.  Other  officers  and 
enlisted  men,  S.  Distinguished  persons,  9.  Delegations,  10.  Socie- 
ties, 11.  Civilians.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  (Nos.  6  and  7).. 
with  side  arms,  are  in  the  order  of  rank,  seniors  in  front. 

The  procession  being  formed,  the  commander  of  the  escorl 
puts  it  in  march. 

The  escort  marches  slowly  to  solemn  music ;  the  column  hav- 
ing arrived  opposite  the  grave,  line  is  formed  facing  it. 


170  CEREMONIES. 

The  coffin  is  then  carried  along  the  front  of  the  escort  to  the 
grave ;  arms  are  presented,  the  music  plays  an  appropriate  air ; 
the  coffin  having  been  placed  over  the  grave,  the  music  ceases 
and  arms  are  brought  to  the  order. 

The  commander  next  commands:  1.  Parade,  2.  REST.  The 
escort  executes  parade  rest,  officers  and  men  inclining  the  head. 

When  the  funeral  services  are  completed  and  the  coffin  low- 
ered into  the  grave  the  commander  causes  the  escort  to  resume 
attention  and  fire  three  rounds  of  blank  cartridges,  the  muzzles 
of  the  pieces  being  elevated.  When  the  escort  is  greater  than  a 
battalion,  one  battalion  is  designated  to  fire  the  volleys. 

A  musician  then  sounds  taps. 

The  escort  is  then  formed  into  column,  marched  in  quick 
time  to  the  point  whex'e  it  was  assembled,  and  dismissed. 

The  band  does  not  play  until  it  has  left  the  inclosure. 

When  the  distance  to  the  place  of  interment  is  considerable, 
the  escort,  after  having  left  the  camp  or  garrison,  may  march 
at  ease  in  quick  time  until  it  approaches  the  burial  ground,  when 
it  is  brought  to  attention.  The  music  does  not  play  while  march- 
ing at  ease. 

In  marching  at  attention,  the  field  music  may  alternate  with 
the  baud  in  playing. 

740.  When  arms  are  presented  at  the  funeral  of  a  person 
entitled  to  any  of  the  following  honors,  the  band  plays  the  pre- 
scribed national  air,  or  the  field  music  sounds  to  tfie  color,  march, 
flourishes,  or  ruffles,  according  to  the  i-ank  of  the  deceased,  after 
which  the  band  plays  an  appropriate  air.  The  commander  of 
the  escort,  in  forming  column,  gives  the  appropriate  commands 
for  the  different  arms. 

741.  At  the  funeral  of  a  mounted  officer  or  enlisted  man,  his 
horse,  in  mourning  caparison,  follows  the  hearse. 

742.  Should  the  entrance  of  the  cemetery  prevent  the  hearse 
accompanying  the  escort  till  the  latter  halts  at  the  grave,  the 
column  is  halted  at  the  entrance  long  enough  to  take  the  coffin 
from  the  hearse,  when  the  column  is  again  put  in  march.  The 
Cavalry  and  Artillery,  when  unable  to  enter  the  inclosure,  turn 
out  of  the  column,  face  the  column,  and  salute  the  remains  as 
they  pass. 

743.  When  necessary  to  escort  the  remains  from  the  quarters 
of  the  deceased  to  the  church  before  the  funeral  service,  arms 
are  presented  upon  receiving  the  remains  at  the  quarters  and 
also  as  they  are  borne  into  the  church. 

744.  The  commander  of  the  escort,  previous  to  the  funeral, 
gives  the  clergyman  and  pallbearers  all  needful  directions. 


INSPECTIONS.  ! 

Company  Inspeciion. 

745.  Being  in  line  at  a  halt:  1.  Open  ranks,  2,  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  the  front  rank  executes  right  dress; 
the  rear  rank  and  the  file  closers  march  backward  4  steps,  halt, 
and  execute  right  dress ;  the  lieutenants  pass  around  their 
respective  flanks  and  take  post,  facing  to  the  front,  3  paces  iu 
front  of  the  center  of  their  respective  platoons.  The  captaiu 
aligns  the  front  rank,  rear  rank,  and  file  closers,  takes  post 
3  paces  in  front  of  the  right  guide,  facing  to  the  left,  and  com- 
mands :  1.  FRONT,  2.  PREPARE  FOR  INSPECTION. 

At  the  second  command  the  lieutenants  carry  saber;  the 
captain  returns  saber  and  inspects  them,  after  which  they  face 
about,  order  saber,  and  stand  at  ease;  upon  the  completion  of 
the  inspection  they  carry  saber,  face  about,  and  order  saber. 
The  captain  may  direct  the  lieutenants  to  accompany  or  assist 
him,  in  which  case  they  return  saber  and,  at  the  close  of  the 
inspection,  resume  their  posts  in  front  of  the  company,  draw 
and  carry  saber. 

Having  inspected  the  lieutenants,  the  captain  proceeds  to  the 
right  of  the  company.  Each  man,  as  the  captain  approaches 
him,  executes  inspection  arms. 

The  captain  takes  the  piece,  grasping  it  with  his  right  hand 
just  above  the  rear  sight,  the  man  dropping  his  hands.  The 
captain  inspects  the  piece,  and,  with  the  hand  and  piece  in  the 
same  position  as  in  receiving  it,  hands  it  back  to  the  man,  who 
takes  it  with  the  left  band  at  the  balance  and  executes  order 
arms. 

As  the  captaiu  return.s  the  piece  the  next  man  executes 
inspection  arms,  and  so  on  through  the  company. 

Should  the  piece  be  inspected  without  handling,  each  man 
executes  order  arms  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes  to  the  next 
man. 

The  inspection  is  from  righi  to  left  in  front,  and  from  left  to 
right  in  rear,  of  each  rank  ana  of  the  line  of  file  closers. 

171 


172  INSPECTIONS. 

When  approached  by  the  captain  the  first  sergeant  executes 
inspection  saber.  Enlisted  men  armed  with  the  pistol  execute 
inspection  pistol  by  drawing  the  pistol  from  the  holster  and  hold- 
ing it  diagonally  across  the  body,  barrel  up,  and  6  inches  in 
front  of  the  neck,  muzzle  pointing  up  and  to  the  left.  The 
pistol  is  returned  to  the  holster  as  soon  as  the  captain  passes. 

Upon  completion  of  the  inspection  the  captain  takes  post 
facing  to  the  left  in  front  of  the  right  guide  and  on  line  with 
the  lieutenants  and  commands  :  1.  Close  ranks,  2.  MARCH. 

At  the  command  march  the  lieutenants  resume  their  posts  in 
line;  the  rear  rank  closes  to  40  inches,  each  man  covering  his 
file  Jeader ;  the  file  closers  close  to  2  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

746.  If  the  company  is  dismissed,  rifles  are  put  away.  In 
quarters  headdress  and  accouterments  are  removed  and  the 
men  stand  near  their  respective  bunks;  in  camp  they  stand 
covered,  but  without  accouterments,  in  front  of  their  tents. 

The  captain,  accompanied  by  the  lieutenants,  then  inspects 
the  quarters  or  camp.  The  first  sergeant  precedes  the  captain 
and  calls  the  men  to  attention  on  entering  each  squad  room  or 
on  approaching  the  tents ;  the  men  stand  at  attention,  but  do  not 
salute. 

747.  If  the  inspection  is  to  include  an  examination  of  the 
equipment,  the  captain,  after  closing  ranks,  causes  the  company 
to  stack  arms,  to  march  backward  until  4  paces  in  rear  of  the 
stacks  and  to  take  intervals.  He  then  commands:  1.  UNSUNG 
EQUIPMENT,  2.  OPEN  PACKS. 

At  the  first  command  each  man  unslings  his  equipment  and 
places  It  on  the  gromid  at  his  feet,  haversack  to  the  front,  end 
of  the  pack  1  foot  in  front  of  toes. 

At  the  second  command,  pack  carriers  are  unstrapped,  packs 
removed  and  unrolled,  the  longer  edges  of  the  pack  along  the 
lower  edge  of  the  cartridge  belt.  Each  man  exposes  shelter- 
tent  pins;  removes  meat  can,  knife,  fork,  and  spoon  from  the 
meat-can  pouch,  and  places  them  on  the  right  of  the  haversack, 
knife,  fork,  and  spoon  in  the  opened  meat  can ;  removes  the 
canteen  and  cup  from  the  cover  and  places  them  on  the  left 
side  of  the  haversack ;  unstraps  and  spreads  out  haversack  so 
as  to  expose  its  contents;  folds  up  the  carrier  to  uncover  the 
cartridge  pouches;  opens  same;  unrolls  toilet  articles  and  places 
them  on  the  outer  flap  of  the  haversack;  opens  first-aid  pouch 
and  exposes  contents  to  view.  Each  man  then  resumes  the 
attention.      (PI.  VI.) 


INSPECTIONS.  178 

When  the  rations  are  not  carried  in  the  haversack  the  inspec- 
tion proceeds  as  described,  except  that  the  toilet  articles  and 
bacon  and  condiment  cans  are  displayed  on  the  unrolled  paclis. 

The  captain  then  passes  along  the  ranks  and  file  closers  as 
before,  inspects  the  equipments,  returns  to  the  right,  and  com- 
mands:  CLOSE  PACKS. 

Each  man  rolls  up  his  toilet  articles,  straps  up  his  haversack 
and  its  contents,  replaces  the  meat  can.  knife,  fork,  and  spoon, 
and  the  canteen  and  cup ;  closes  cartridge  pockets  and  first-aid 
pouch ;  rolls  up  and  replaces  pack  in  carrier,  and,  leaving  the 
equipment  in  its  position  on  the  ground,  resumes  the  position 
of  attention. 

All  equipments  being  packed,  the  captain  commands:  SLING 
EQUIPMENT. 

The  equipments  are  slung  and  belts  fastened. 

The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  assemble  and  take 
arms.    The  inspection  is  completed  as  already  explained. 

748.  Should  the  inspector  be  other  than  the  captain,  the 
latter,  after  commanding  front,  adds  REST,  and  faces  to  the 
front.  When  the  inspector  approaches,  the  captain  faces  to  the 
left,  brings  the  company  to  attention,  faces  to  the  front,  and 
salutes.  The  salute  acknowledged,  the  captain  carries  saber, 
faces  to  the  left,  commands:  PREPARE  FOR  INSPECTION,  and 
again  faces  to  the  front. 

The  inspection  proceeds  as  before;  the  captain  returns  saber 
and  accompanies  the  inspector  as  soon  as  the  latter  passes  him. 

Battalion  Inspection. 

749.  If  there  be  both  inspection  and  review,  the  inspection 
may  either  precede  or  follow  the  review. 

The  battalion  being  in  column  of  comi)anies  at  full  distance, 
all  offieers  dismounted,  the  major  commands:  1.  Prepare  for  in- 
spection, 2.  MARCH. 

At  the  first  command  each  captain  commands :  Open  ranks. 

At  the  command  march  the  ranlis  are  opened  in  each  company, 
as  in  the  inspection  of  the  company. 

The  field  musicians  join  their  companies. 

The  drum  major  conducts  the  band  to  a  position  30  paces  in 
rear  of  the  column,  if  not  already  there,  and  opens  ranlis. 


174  INSPECTIONS, 

The  major  takes  post  facing  to  the  front  and  20  paces  in  front 
of  the  center  of  the  leading  company.  The  staff  takes  post  as 
if  mounted.    The  color  takes  post  5  paces  in  rear  of  the  staff. 

Field  and  staff  officers  senior  in  rank  to  the  inspector  do  not 
take  post  in  front  of  the  column  but  accompany  him. 

The  inspector  inspects  the  major,  and,  accompanied  by  the 
latter,  inspects  the  staff  officers. 

The  major  then  commands:  REST,  returns  saber,  and,  with 
his  staff,  accompanies  the  inspector. 

If  the  major  is  the  inspector  he  commands:  REST,  returns 
saber,  and  inspects  his  staff",  which  then  accompanies  him. 

The  inspector,  commencing  at  the  head  of  the  column,  thea 
makes  a  minute  inspection  of  the  color  guard,  the  noncommis- 
sioned staff,  and  the  arms,  accouternicuts,  dress,  and  ammuni- 
tion of  each  soldier  of  the  several  companies  in  succession,  and 
inspects  the  band. 

The  adjutant  gives  the  necessary  commands  for  the  inspection 
of  the  color  guard,  noncommissioned  staff",  and  band. 

The  color  guard  and  noncommissioned  staff"  may  be  dismissed 
as  soon  as  inspected. 

750.  As  the  inspector  approaches  each  company  its  captain 
commands:  1.  Company,  2.  ATTENTION,  8.  PREPARE  FOR  IN- 
SPECTION, and  faces  to  the  front;  as  soon  as  inspected  he 
returns  saber  and  accompanies  the  inspector.  The  inspection 
proceeds  as  in  company  inspection.  At  its  completion  the  cap- 
tain closes  ranks  and  commands:  REST.  Unless  otherwise 
directed  by  the  inspector,  the  major  directs  that  the  company 
be  marched  to  its  parade  and  dismissed. 

751.  If  the  inspection  will  probably  last  a  long  time  the  rear 
companies  may  be  permitted  to  stack  arms  and  fall  out;  before 
the  inspector  approaches  they  fall  in  and  take  arms. 

752.  The  band  plays  during  the  inspection  of  the  companies.' 
When  the  insijector  approaches  the  band  the  adjutant  com- 
mands: />/?£P/I/?£ /"O/?  W5P£C7"/0yV.  ""I 

As  the  inspector  approaches  him  each  man  raises  his  instrtr* 
meut  in  front  of  the  body,  reverses  it  so  as  to  show  both  sides, 
and  then  returns  it. 

Company  musicians  execute  inspection  similarly. 

753.  At  the  insi^ection  of  quarters  or  camp  the  inspector 
is  accompanied  by  the  captain,  followed  by  the  other  officers 
or  by  such  of  them  as  he  may  designate.  The  inspection  is 
conducted  as  described  in  the  company  inspection. 


MUSTER.  175 

Regimental  Inspection. 

754.  The  commands,  means,  and  principles  are  the  same  as 
desci'ibed  for  a  battalion. 

Tlie  colonel  takes  post  facing  to  the  front  and  20  paces  in 
front  of  the  major  of  the  leading  battalion.  His  staff  takes 
post  as  if  mounted.  The  color  takes  post  5  paces  in  rear  of  the 
staff. 

The  inspector  inspects  the  colonel  and  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
and,  accompanied  by  the  colonel,  inspects  the  staff  officers. 

The  colonel  then  commands :  REST,  retui-us  saber,  and,  with 
the  lieutenant  colonel  and  staff,  accompanies  the  inspector. 

If  the  colonel  is  the  inspector  he  commands:  REST,  returns 
saber,  and  inspects  the  Ueutenant  colonel  and  staff,  all  of  whom 
then  accompany  him. 

The  inspector,  commencing  at  the  head  of  the  column,  makes 
a  minute  inspection  of  the  color  guard,  noncommissioned  staff, 
each  battalion  in  succession,  and  the  band. 

On  the  approach  of  the  inspector  each  major  brings  his  bat- 
talion to  attention.     Battalion  inspection  follows. 

MUSTER. 
Regimental,  Battalion,  or  Company  Muster. 

755.  Muster  is  preceded  by  an  inspection,  and,  when  prac- 
ticable, by  a  review. 

The  adjutant  is  provided  with  the  muster  roll  of  the  field, 
staff,  and  band,  the  surgeon  with  the  hospital  roll ;  each  captain 
with  the  roll  of  his  company.  A  list  of  absentees,  alphabetically 
arranged,  showing  cause  and  place  of  absence,  accompanies 
each  roll. 

756.  Being  in  column  of  companies  at  open  ranks,  each  cap- 
tain, as  the  mustering  officer  approaches,  brings  his  company  to 
right  shoulder  arms,  and  commands:  ATTENTION  TO  MUSTER. 

The  mustering  officer  or  captain  then  calls  the  names  on  the 
roll ;  each  man,  as  his  name  is  called,  anwers  Here  and  brings 
his  piece  to  order  arms. 

After  muster,  the  mustering  officer,  accompanied  by  the  com- 
pany commanders  and  such  other  officers  as  he  may  designate 


176  HONORS  AND  SALUTES. 

verifies  the  presence  of  the  men  reported  in  hospital,  on  guard, 
etc. 

757.  A  company  may  be  mustered  in  the  same  manner  on 
its  own  parade  ground,  the  muster  to  follow  the  company 
inspection. 

HONORS  AND  SALUTES. 

758.  Further  rules  governing  honors,  courtesies,  etc.,  are  pre- 
scribed in  Army  Regulations. 

759.  Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recognition  is 
easy.     In  general  it  does  not  exceed  30  paces. 

In  approaching  or  passing  each  other  within  saluting  distance 
individuals  or  bodies  of  troops  exchange  salutes  when  at  a 
distance  of  about  6  paces.  If  they  do  not  approach  each  other 
that  closely  the  salute  is  exchanged  at  the  point  of  nearest 
approach. 

760.  Eyes  right  and  present  arms  are  not  executed  by  troops 
except  in  the  ceremonies  and  in  saluting  the  color. 

761.  The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  salutes  all  general 
officers  and  his  regimentt^l,  post,  battalion,  or  company  com- 
mander, by  bringing  his  command  to  attention  and  saluting  in 
person.  The  troops  are  brought  to  attention  in  time  to  permit 
the  salute  to  be  rendered  at  the  prescribed  distance;  they  are 
held  at  attention  until  after  the  salute  has  been  acknowledged. 

When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  iu  rear  of  a 
body  of  troops,  it  is  brought  to  attention  while  he  is  opposite 
the  post  of  the  commander. 

The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  salutes  in  per.sou  all 
other  officers  senior  to  him  in  rank ;  the  troops  are  not  brought 
to  attention  except  that  a  noncommissioned  officer  commanding 
a  detachment  less  than  a  company  will  bring  it  to  attention 
before  saluting  an  officer. 

The  commander  of  a  body  of  troops  exchanges  salutes  with 
the  commanders  of  other  bodies  of  troops;  the  troops  are 
brought  to  attention  duriaig  the  exchange. 

762.  An  officer  commanding  a  body  of  troops  is  saluted  by 
all  officers  junior  to  him  in  rank  and  by  all  enlisted  men.  He 
acknowledges  the  salutes  in  person ;  the  command  is  not  brought 
to  attention. 


HONORS  AND   SALUTES.  l?? 

763.  When  covered,  all  eullsted  men  within  saluting  dis- 
tance and  not  in  raulvs,  salute  all  oMicers.  The  hand  is  held  lu 
the  position  of  salute  until  the  salute  has  been  acknowledged  or 
until  the  officer  has  passed  or  has  been  passed.  If  uncovered 
stand  at  attention,  without  saluting. 

The  rule  for  officers  is  stated  in  paragraph  26. 

Enlisted  men  out  of  doors  and  armed  with  the  rifle,  salute 
with  the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder ;  if  indoors  the  rifle  salute 
is  rendered  at  the  order  or  trail. 

764.  Officers  not  in  uniform  are  saluted  if  recognized. 

765.  Officers  will  acknowledge  salutes  smartly  and  promptly 
19069°— 14 12 


Part  V.— MANUALS. 


THE  COLOR. 

766.  Tlie  word  "  color  "  implies  the  national  color;  it  includes 
tbe  regimental  color  when  both  are  present.  '' 

The  rules  i>rescribing  the  colors  to  be  carried  by  regiments 
and  battalions  on  all  occasions  are  contained  in  Army  Regula- 
tions. 

767.  In  garrison  the  colors,  when  not  in  use,  are  kept  in  the 
oflSce  or  quarters  of  the  colonel,  and  are  escorted  thereto  and 
therefrom  by  the  color  guard.  In  camp  the  colors,  when  not  in' 
use,  are  in  front  of  the  colonel's  tent.  From  reveille  to  retreat, 
when  the  weather  permits,  they  are  displayed  uncased ;  from  re- 
treat to  reveille  and  during  inclement  weather  they  are  cased. 

Colors  are  said  to  be  cased  wheii  furled  and  protected  by  the 
oil-cloth  covering. 

768  The  regimental  color  salute's  in  the  ceremony  of  escort 
of  the  color,  and  when  saluting  an  officer  entitled  to  the  honor, 
but  in  no  other  case.  ; 

If  marching,  the  salute  is  executed  when  at  6  paces  from  thel 
officer  entitled  to  the  salute;  the  carry  is  resumed  when  6  paces 
beyond  him.  ^ 

The  national  color  renders  no  salnte. 

The  Color  Guard. 

769.  The  color  guard  consists  pf  two  corot  sergeants,  who 
are  the  color  bearers,  and  two  experienced  privates  selected  by 
the  colonel.  The  senior  color  .sergeant  carries  the  national 
color ;  the  junior  color  sergeant  carries  the  regimental  color. 
The  regimental  color,  when  carried,  is  always  on  the  left  of  the 
national  color,  in  whatever  direction  they  may  face. 

179 


180  THE  COLOR. 

770.  The  color  guard  is  formed  and  marched  in  one  rank, 
the  color  bearers  in  the  center.  It  is  marched  in  the  same  man- 
ner and  by  the  same  commands  as  a  squad,  substituting,  when 
necessary,  guard  for  squad. 

771.  The  color  company  is  the  center  or  I'ight  center  com- 
pany of  the  center  or  right  center  battalion.  The  color  guard 
remains  with  that  company  unless  otherwise  directed. 

772.  In  line  the  color  guard  is  in  the  interval  between  the 
inner  guides  of  the  right  and  left  center  companies. 

In  line  of  columns  or  in  close  line,  the  color  guard  is  midway 
between  the  right  and  left  center  companies  and  on  line  with 
the  captains. 

In  column  of  companies  or  platoons  the  color  guard  is  mid- 
way between  the  color  company  and  the  company  in  rear  of 
the  color  company  and  eyuidistant  from  the  flaulis  of  the 
column. 

In  close  column  the  color  guard  is  on  the  flank  of  the  color 
company. 

In  column  of  .squads  the  color  guard  is  in  the  column  between 
the  color  company  and  the  company  originally  on  its  left. 

When  the  regiment  is  formed  in  line  of  masses  for  ceremonies, 
the  color  forms  on  the  left  of  the  leading  company  of  the  center 
(right  center)  battalion.  It  rejoins  the  color  company  when 
the  regiment  changes  from  line  of  masses. 

773.  TLe  color  guard  when  with  a  battalion  that  takes  the 
battle  formation,  joins  the  regimental  reserve,  whose  commander 
directs  the  color  guard  to  juin  a  certain  company  of  the  reserve. 

774.  Tbe  color  guard  e.xeeutes  neither  loadings  nor  firings; 
in  rendering  honors,  it  executes  all  movements  in  the  manual ; 
iu  drill,  all  movements  unless  specially  excused. 

To  Receive  the  Color. 

775.  The  color  guard,  by  command  of  the  senior  color  ser- 
geant, presents  arms  on  receiving  and  parting  with  the  color. 
After  parting  with  the  color,  the  color  guard  is  brought  to 
order  arms  by  command  of  the  senior  member  who  is  placed  as 
the  right  man  of  the  guard. 

776.  At  drills  and  ceremonies,  excepting  escort  of  the  color, 
the  color,  if  present,  is  received  by  the  color  company  ^fter  its 
formation. 


THE  COLOR.  181 

The  formation  of  the  color  compauy  completed,  the  captain 
faces  to  the  front;  the  color  guard,  conducted  by  the  senior  ser- 
geant, approaches  from  the  front  and  halts  at  a  distance  of  10 
paces  from  the  captain,  who  then  faces  about,  brings  the  com- 
pauy to  the  present,  faces  to  the  front,  salutes,  again  faces 
about  and  brings  the  company  to  the  order.  The  color  guard 
comes  to  the  present  and  order  at  the  command  of  the  captain, 
and  is  then  marched  by  the  color  sergeant  directly  to  its  post  on 
the  left  of  the  color  company. 

7  77.  When  the  battalion  is  dismissed  the  color  guard  escorts 
the  color  to  the  ulfice  or  quarters  of  the  colonel. 

Manual  of  the  Color. 

778.  At  the  carry  the  liet-I  of  the  i)ike  rests  in  the  socket  of 
the  sling;  the  right  hand  grasps  the  pike  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulder. 

At  the  order  the  heel  of  the  pike  rests  on  the  ground  near  the 
right  toe,  the  right  hand  holding  the  pike  in  a  vertical  position. 

At  parade  rest  the  heel  of  the  pike  is  on  the  ground,  as  at  the 
order;  the  pike  is  held  with  both  hands  in  front  of  the  center  of 
the  body,  left  hand  uppermost. 

The  order  is  resumed  at  the  command  attention. 

The  left  hand  assists  the  right  when  necessary. 

The  carry  is  the  habitual  position  when  the  troops  are  at  a 
shoulder,  port,  or  trail. 

The  order  and  parade  rest  are  executed  with  the  troops. 

Tfie  color  salute:  Being  at  a  carry,  slip  the  right  hand  up  the 
pike  to  the  height  of  the  eye  then  lower  the  pike  by  straighten- 
ing the  arm  to  the  front. 


THE  BAND. 

779.  Tile  band  Is  formed  in  two  or  more  ranks,  witb  suffi- 
cient intervals  between  the  men  and  distances  between  the 
ranks  to  permit  of  a  free  use  of  the  instruments. 

The  field  music,  when  united,  forms  with  and  in  rear  of  the 
band;  when  the  band  is  not  present  the  posts,  movements,  and 
duties  of  the  field  music  are  the  same  as  prescribed  for  the  band ; 
when  a  musician  is  in  charge  his  position  is  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank.  When  the  battalion  or  regiment  turns  about  by 
squads,  the  band  executes  the  countermarch;  when  the  battalion 
or  regiment  executes  right,  left,  or  about  face,  the  band  faces  in 
the  same  manner. 

In  marching,  each  rank  dresses  to  the  right. 

In  executing  open  ranks  each  rank  of  the  band  takes  the  dis- 
tance of  3  paces  from  the  rank  next  in  front;  the  drum  major 
verifies  the  alignment. 

The  field  music  sounds  the  marcfi,  flourisfies,  or  ruffles,  and  to 
the  color  at  the  signal  of  the  drum  major. 

780.  The  drum  major  is  3  paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  the 
front  rank,  and  gives  the  signals  or  commands  for  the  move- 
ments of  the  band  as  for  a  squad,  substituting  in  the  commands 
band  for  squad. 

Signals  of  the  Drum  Major. 

781.  Preparatory  to  a  signal  the  staff  is  held  with  the  right 
hand  near  the  head  of  the  staff,  hand  below  the  chin,  back  to 
the  front,  ferrule  pointed  upward  and  to  the  right. 

Prepare  to  play:  Face  toward  the  band  and  extend  the  right 
arm  to  its  full  length  in  the  direction  of  the  staff.  Play:  Bring 
the  arm  back  to  its  original  ix)sition  in  front  of  the  body. 

Prepare  to  cease  playing:  Extend  the  right  arm  to  its  full 
length  in  the  direction  of  the  staff.  Cease  playing:  Bring  the 
arm  back  to  its  original  position  in  front  of  the  body. 

To  march:  Turn  the  wrist  and  bring  the  staff  to  the  front, 
the  ferrule  pointing  upward  and  to  the  front;  extend  the  arm 
to  its  full  length  in  the  direction  of  the  staff. 

To  halt:  Lower  the  staff  into  the  raised  left  hand  and  raise 
the  staff  horizontally  above  the  head  with  both  hands,  the  arms 
18P 


THE  BAND.  183 

extended ;  lower  the  staff  with  both  hands  to  a  horizontal  posi- 
tion al  the  height  of  the  hips. 

To  countermarch:  Face  toward  the  band  and  give  the  signal 
to  march.  The  countermarch  is  executed  by  each  front-rank 
man  to  the  right  of  the  drum  major  turning  to  the  right  about, 
each  to  the  left,  turning  to  the  left  about,  each  followed  by  the 
men  covering  him.     The  drum  major  passes  through  the  center. 

To  oblique:  Bring  the  staff  to  a  horizontal  position,  the  head 
of  the  staff  opposite  the  neck,  the  ferrule  pointing  in  the  direc- 
tion the  oblique  is  to  he  made ;  extend  the  arm  to  its  full  length 
in  the  direction  of  the  staff. 

To  march  by  the  right  f/an/c:  Extend  the  arm  to  the  right,  the 
staff  vertical,  ferrule  upward,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  rear. 

To  march  by  the  left  flank:  Extend  the  arm  to  the  left,  the 
staff  vertical,  ferrule  upward,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

To  diminish  front:  Let  the  ferrule  full  into  the  left  hand  at  the 
height  of  the  eyes,  right  hand  at  the  height  of  the  hip. 

To  increase  front:  Let  the  ferrule  fall  into  the  left  hand  at  the 
height  of  the  hip,  right  hand  at  the  height  of  the  neck. 

'i'he  march,  flourishes,  or  ruffles:  Bring  the  staff  to  a  vertical 
position,  hand  opiX)site  the  neck,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front, 
ferrule  pointing  down. 

To  the  color:  Bring  the  staff'  to  a  horizontal  position  at  the 
height  of  the  neck,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  rear,  ferrule  point- 
ing to  the  left. 

^^'hen  the  baud  is  playing,  in  marching,  the  drum  major  beats 
the  time  with  his  staff'  and  supports  the  left  hand  at  the  hip, 
fingers  in  front,  thumb  to  the  rear. 

The  drum  major,  with  .stalf  in  hand,  salutes  by  bringing  his 
staff  to  a  vertical  position,  head  of  the  staff"  up  and  opposite 
the  left  shouhler. 

The  drum  major,  marching  in  review  with  staff"  in  hand, 
salutes  by  bringing  his  staff'  to  a  vertical  position,  head  of  the 
staff'  up  and  opposite  the  left  shoulder. 

At  a  halt,  and  the  band  not  playing,  the  drum  major  holds 
his  staff"  with  the  ferrule  touching  the  ground  about  1  inch  from 
toe  of  right  foot,  at  an  angle  of  about  60^,  ball  pointing  upward 
to  the  right,  right  hand  grasping  staff'  near  the  ball,  back  of 
the  hand  to  the  front:  left  hand  at  the  hip,  fingers  in  front, 
thumb  to  the  rear. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER. 

782.  1.  Draw,  2.  SABER. 

At  the  comumncl  draw  vmliook  the  saber  with  the  thumb  and 
first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  thumb  on  the  end  of  the  hook, 
fingers  lifting  the  upper  ring;  grasp  the  scabbard  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  upper  band,  bring  the  hilt  a  little  forward,  seize 
the  grip  with  the  right  hand,  and  draw  the  blade  6  inches  out 
of  the  scabbard,  pressing  the  scabbard  against  the  thigh  with 
the  left  hand. 

At  the  command  saber  draw  the  saber  quickly,  raising  the 
arm  to  its  full  extent  to  the  right  front,  at  an  angle  of  about 
45°  with  the  horizontal,  the  saber,  edge  down,  in  a  straight  line 
with  the  arm;  make  a  slight  pause  and  bring  the  back  of  tho 
blade  against  the  shoulder,  edge  to  the  front,  arm  nearly  ex- 
tended, hand  by  the  side,  elbow  back,  third  and  fourth  fingers 
back  of  the  grip ;  at  the  same  time  hook  up  the  scabbard  with 
the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  thumb  through 
the  upper  ring,  fingers  supporting  It ;  drop  the  left  hand  by  the 
side. 

This  is  the  position  of  carry  saber  dismounted. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  the  saber 
unhook  the  scabbard  before  mounting;  when  mounted,  in  the 
first  motion  of  draw  saber  they  I'each  with  the  right  hand  over 
the  bridle  hand  and  without  the  aid  of  the  bridle  hand  draw 
the  saber  as  before;  the  right  hand  at  the  carry  rests  on  the 
right  thigh. 

On  foot  the  scabbard  is  carried  hooked  up. 

783.  When  publishing  orders,  calling  the  roll,  etc.,  the  saber 
is  held  suspended  from  the  right  wrist  by  the  saber  knot ;  when 
the  saber  knot  is  used  it  is  placed  on  the  wrist  before  drawing 
saber  and  taken  off  after  returning  saber. 

784.  Being  at  the  order  or  carry:  1.  Present,  2.  SABER  (or 
ARMS). 

At  the  command  present  raise  and  carry  the  saber  to  the 
front,  base  of  the  hilt  as  high  as  the  chin  and  6  inches  in  front 
of  the  neck,  edge  to  the  left,  point  6  inches  farther  to  the  front 
than  the  hilt,  thumb  extended  on  the  left  of  the  grip,  all  fingers 
grasping  the  grip. 
184 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER.  185 

At  the  command  saber,  or  arms,  lower  the  saber,  point  in 
prolongation  of  the  right  foot  and  near  the  ground,  »?dge  to  tho 
left,  hand  by  the  side,  thumb  on  left  of  grip,  arm  extended.  If 
mounted,  the  hand  is  held  behind  the  thigh,  point  a  little  to  the 
right  and  front  of  the  stirrup. 

In  rendering  honors  with  troops  officers  execute  the  first  mo- 
tion of  the  salute  at  the  command  present,  the  second  motion  at 
the  command  arms;  enlisted  men  with  the  saber  execute  the 
first  motion  at  the  command  arms  and  omit  the  second  motion. 

785.  Being  at  a  carry:  1.  Order,  2.  SABER  (or  ARMS). 

Drop  the  point  of  the  saber  directly  to  the  front,  point  on  or 
near  the  ground,  edge  down,  thumb  on  back  of  grip. 

Being  at  the  present  saber,  should  the  next  coumiaud  be  order 
arms,  officers  and  noueomniissioned  officers  armed  with  the 
saber  order  saber;  if  the  command  be  other  than  order  arms,  Ihey 
execute  carry  saber. 

When  arms  are  brought  to  the  order  the  officers  or  enlisted 
men  with  the  saber  drawn  order  saber. 

78G.  The  saber  i.^  held  at  the  carry  while  giving  commands, 
marching  at  attention,  or  changing  position  in  quick  time. 

When  at  the  order  sabers  are  brought  to  the  carry  when  arms 
are  brought  to  any  position  except  the  present  or  parade  rest. 

787.  Being  at  the  order  :  1.  Parade,  2.  REST. 

Take  the  position  of  parade  rest  except  that  the  left  hand  is 
uppermost  and  rests  on  the  right  hand,  point  of  saber  on  or 
near  the  ground  i?"  front  of  the  center  of  the  body,  edge  to  the 
right. 

At  the  command  attention  resume  the  order  saber  and  the 
position  of  the  soldier. 

788.  In  marching  in  double  time  the  saber  is  carried  diag- 
onally across  the  breast,  edge  to  the  front;  the  left  hand 
steadies  the  scabbard. 

789.  Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  the 
saber,  on  all  duties  under  arms  draw  and  return  saber  without 
waiting  for  command.  All  commands  to  soldiers  under  arms 
are  given  with  the  saber  drawn. 

790.  Being  at  a  carry:  1.  Return,  2.  SABER. 

At  the  command  return  carry  the  right  hand  opt)osite  to  and 
tJ  inches  from  the  left  shoulder,  saber  vertical,  edge  to  the  left ; 
at  the  same  time  unhook  and  lower  the  scabbard  with  the  left 
hand  and  grasp  it  at  the  upper  band. 


186  MANUAL  OF  THE  SABER. 

At  the  commaud  saber  drop  the  point  to  the  rear  and  pass  the 
blade  across  and  along  the  left  arm ;  turn  the  head  slightly  to 
the  left,  fixing  the  eyes  on  the  opening  of  the  scabbard,  raise 
the  right  hand,  insert  and  return  the  blade ;  free  the  wrist  from 
the  saber  knot  (if  inserted  in  it),  turn  the  head  to  the  front, 
drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side ;  Liok  up  the  scabbard  with  the 
left  hand,  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Officers  and  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  the  saber, 
when  mounted,  return  saber  without  using  the  left  hand;  the 
scabbard  is  hooked  up  on  dismounting. 

791.  At  inspection  enlisted  men  with  the  saber  drawn  exe- 
cute the  first  motion  of  present  saber  and  turn  the  wrist  to 
show  both  sides  of  the  blade,  resuming  the  carry  when  the  in- 
spei'tor  has  passed. 


MANUAL  OF  TENT  PITCHING. 

Shelter  Tents. 

792.  Being  in  line  or  in  column  of  platoons,  the;  captain 
commands:  FORM  FOR  SHELTER  TENTS. 

The  officers,  first  sergeant,  and  guides  fall  out;  the  cooks  form 
a  file  on  the  flank  of  the  company  nearest  the  kitchen,  the  first 
sergeant  and  right  guide  fall  in,  forming  the  right  file  of  the 
company ;  blank  files  are  filled  by  the  file  closers  or  by  men 
taken  from  the  front  rank;  the  remaining  guide,  or  guides,  and 
file  closers  form  on  a  convenient  flank.  Before  forming  column 
of  platoons,  preparatory  to  pitching  tents,  the  company  may  be 
redivided  into  two  or  more  platoons,  regardless  of  the  size  o^ 
each.  I J 

793.  The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  take  intervals 
as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  and  commands:  PITCH 
TENTS. 

At  the  command  pitch  tents,  each  man  steps  off  obliquely  to 
the  right  with  the  right  foot  and  lays  his  rifle  on  the  ground,  the 
butt  of  the  rifle  near  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  muzzle  to  the 
front,  barrel  to  the  left,  and  steps  back  into  his  place;  each 
front-rank  man  then  draws  his  bayonet  and  sticks  it  in  the 
ground  by  the  outside  of  the  right  heel.   , 

Equipments  are  unslung,  packs  opened,  shelter  half  and  pins 
removed ;  each  man  then  spreads  his  shelter  half,  small  triangle 
to  the  rear,  flat  upon  the  ground  the  tent  is  to  occupy,  the  rear-^ 
rank  man's  half  on  the  right.  The  halves  are  then  buttoned  to'-, 
gether;  the  guy  loops  at  both  ends  of  the  upper  half  are  passed 
through  the  buttonholes  provided  in  the  upper  half;  the 
whipped  end  of  the  guy  rope  is  then  passed  through  both  guy 
loops  and  secured,  this  at  both  ends  of  the  tent.  Each  front-rank 
man  inserts  the  muzzle  of  his  rifle  under  the  front  end  of  the 
ridge  and  holds  the  rifle  upright,  sling  to  the  front,  heel  of  butt 
on  the  ground  beside  the  bayonet.  His  rear-rank  man  pins 
down  the  front  corners  of  the  tent  on  the  line  of  bayonets, 
stretthing  the  tent  taut ;  he  then  inserts  a  pin  In  the  eye  of  the 
front  guy  rope  and  drives  the  pin  at  such  a  distance  in  front  of 
the  rifle  as  to  hold  the  rope  taut ;  both  men  go  to  the  rear  of  the 
tent,  each  pins  down  a  corner,  stretching  the  sides  and  rear  of 
the  tent  before  securing;  the  rear-rank  man  then  inserts  an  in- 
trenching tool,  or  a  bayonet  in  its  scabbard,  under  the  rear  end 

187 


188  MANUAL  OF  TENT  PITCHING. 

of  the  ridge  inside  the  tent,  the  front-rank  man  pegging  down 
the  end  of  the  rear  guy  ropes;  the  rest  of  the  pins  are  then 
driven  by  both  men,  the  rear-rank  man  working  on  the  right. 

The  front  flaps  of  the  tent  are  not  fastened  down,  but  thrown 
back  on  the  tent. 

As  soon  as  the  tent  is  pitched  each  man  arranges  his  equip- 
ment and  the  contents  of  his  pack  in  the  tent  and  stands  at  at- 
tention in  front  of  his  own  half  on  line  with  the  front  guy- 
rope  pin. 

To  have  a  uniform  slope  when  the  tents  are  pitched,  the  guy 
ropes  should  all  be  of  the  same  length. 

794.  When  the  pack  is  uot  carried  the  company  is  formed  for 
shelter  tents,  intervals  are  taken,  arms  are  laid  aside  or  on  the 
ground,  the  men  are  dismissed  and  proceed  to  the  wagon,  secure 
their  packs,  return  to  their  places,  and  pitch  tents  as  heretofore 
described. 

795.  Double  shelter  tents  may  be  pitched  by  first  pitching 
one  tent  as  heretofore  described,  then  pitching  a  second  tent 
against  the  opening  of  the  first,  using  one  rifie  to  support  both 
tents,  and  passing  the  front  guy  ropes  over  and  down  the  sides 
of  the  opposite  tents.  The  front  corner  of  one  tent  is  uot  pegged 
down,  but  is  thrown  back  to  permit  an  opening  into  the  tent. 

Single  Sleeping  Bag. 

796.  Spread  the  poncho  on  the  ground,  buttoned  end  at  the 
feet,  buttoned  side  to  the  left;  fold  the  blanket  once  across  its 
short  dimension  and  lay  it  on  the  poueho,  folded  side  along  the 
right  side  of  the  poncho;  tie  the  blanket  together  along  the  left 
side  by  means  of  the  tapes  provided;  fold  the  left  half  of  the 
poncho  over  the  blanket  anti  button  it  together  along  the  side 
and  bottom. 

Double  Sleeping  Bag. 

797.  Spread  one  poncho  on  the  ground,  buttoned  end  at  the 
feet,  buttoned  side  to  the  left ;  spread  the  blankets  on  top  of  the 
poncho;  tie  the  edges  of  the  blankets  together  with  the  tapes 
provided ;  spread  a  second  poncho  on  top  of  the  blankets,  but- 
toned end  at  the  feet,  buttoned  side  to  the  right ;  button  the  two 
ponchos  together  along  both  sides  and  across  the  end. 


MANUAL  OF  TENT  PITCHING.  li» 

To  Strike  Shelter  Tents. 

798.  The  men  standiug  iu  front  of  their  tents:  STRIKE 
TENTS. 

Equipments  and  rifles  are  removed  from  the  tent;  the  tents 
are  lowered,  paclis  made  up,  and  equipments  slung,  and  the  men 
stand  at  attention  in  the  places  originally  occupied  after  taking 
intervnls. 

In  shelter-tent  camps,  in  localities  where  suitable  material  is 
procurable,  tent  poles  may  be  improvised  and  used  in  lieu  of  the 
rifle  and  bayonet  or  intrenching  tool  as  supports  for  the  shelter 
tent. 

Common  and  Wall  Tents. 

799.  Four  men  pitch  each  tent. 

Drive  a  pin  to  marlc  the  center  of  the  door ;  spread  the  tent 
on  the  ground  to  be  occui)ied;  phiee  door  loops  over  door  pin; 
draw  front  corners  taut,  align,  and  peg  them  down ;  lace  rear 
door,  if  necessary  ;  draw  rear  corners  taut  iu  both  directions  and 
peg  them  down;  the  four  corner  guy  pins  are  then  driven  in  pro- 
longation of  the  diagonals  of  the  tent  and  about  2  paces  beyond 
the  corner  pins;  temporarily  loosen  the  front  door  and  the  lee 
corner  loops  from  the  pins ;  insert  uprights  and  ridge  pole,  insert- 
ing the  pole  pins  iu  ridge  i)ole  and  in  eyelets  of  tent  and  fly ;  raise 
the  tent;  hold  it  in  position:  replace  lee  corner  loops,  and  Secure 
corner  and  fly  guy  ropes;  tighten  same  to  hold  poles  vertical; 
drive  wall  pins  through  the  loops  as  they  hang;  drive  inter-- 
mediate  guy  pins,  aligning  them  on  corner  pins  already  driven. 

The  Pyramidal  Tent. 

800.  One  squad  pitches  each  tent. 

The  corporal  drives  a  pin  to  mark  the  center  of  the  door. 
The  others  of  the  squad  unfold  the  tent  and  spread  it  out  on 
the  ground  to  be  occupied,  pole  and  tripod  underneath.  The 
corporal  places  the  door  loops  over  the  door  pin;  one  man  goes 
to  each  corner  of  the  tent;  the  two  men  in  front  draw  the 
front  corners  taut,  align  the  front  of  the  tent  with  the  company 
line  of  tents,  and  peg  the  corners  down;  the  two  men  in  rear 
draw  rear  corners  taut  in  both  directions  and  peg  them  down. 
The  same  four  men  drive  the  four  corner  guy  pins  iu  prolonga- 
tion of  the  diagonals  of  the  lent,  about  2  paces  l)eyond  the 
corner  pins.  Meantime,  the  other  men  of  the  squad,  having 
crept  under  the  tent,  insert  the  tent  pole  spindle  in  top  plate, 
the  corporal  placing  the  hood  in  position ;  the  pole  is  raised  and 
the  lower  end  inserted  iu  the  tripod  socket ;  the  tripod  is  raised 


190  MANTTAt  OF  tENT  PlTCHlU©, 

to  its  proper  height.  Under  the  supervision  of  the  corporal  the 
men  inside  the  tent  shift  the  tripod  and  the  men  outside  the 
tent  handle  the  corner  guy  lines  in  such  manner  as  to  erect 
the  tent  with  the  corner  eaves  directly  above  the  corner  pins. 
Each  outside  man,  moving  to  the  left,  drives  pins  for  the  wall 
loops  along  one  side  of  the  tent  and,  returning,  drives  the  inter- 
mediate guy  pins;  in  both  cases  the  pins  are  aligned  oh  the  cor-.' 
ner  pins.     The  inside  men  assist.  ^ 

Conical  Wall  Tent. 

801.  Drive  the  door  pin  and  center  pin  S  feet  3  inches  apatt. 
Using  the  hood  lines  with  center  pin  as  center,  describe  two  con- 
centric circles  with  radii  8  feet  3  inches  and  11  feet  3  inches. 
In  the  outer  circle  drive  two  door  guy  pins  3  feet  apart.  At 
intervals  of  about  3  feet  drive  the  other  guy  pin. 

In  other  respects  conical  tents  are  erectied  practically  as  in 
the  case  of  pyramidal  tents. 

To  Strike  Common,  Wall,  Pyramidal,  and  Conical  Wall  Tents. 

802.  STRIKE  TENTS. 

The  men  first  remove  all  pins  except  those  of  the  four  corner 
guy  ropes,  or  the  four  quadrant  guy  ropes  in  the  case  of  the 
conical  wall  tent.  The  pins  are  neatly  piled  or  placed  in  their 
receptacle. 

One  man  holds  each  guy,  and  when  the  ground  is  clear  the 
tent  is  lowered,  folded,  or  rolled  and  tied,  the  poles  or  tripod 
and  pole  fastened  together,  and  the  remaining  pins  collected. 

To  Fold  Tents. 

803.  For  folding  common,  wall,  hospital,  and  storage  tents: 
Spread  the  tent  flat  on  the  ground,  folded  at  the  ridge  so  that 
bottoms  of  side  walls  are  even,  ends  of  tent  forming  triangles 
to  the  right  and  left;  fold  the  triangular  ends  of  the  tent  in 
toward  the  middle,  making  it  I'ectangular  in  shape;  fold  the  top 
over  about  9  inches;  fold  the  tent  in  two  by  carrying  the  top 
fold  over  clear  to  the  foot;  fold  again  in  two  from  the  top  to  the 
foot ;  throw  all  guys  on  tent  except  the  second  from  each  end ; 
fold  the  ends  in  so  as  to  cover  about  two-thirds  of  the  second 
cloths ;  fold  the  left  end  over  to  meet  the  turned-iu  edge  of  the 

1    bO'xi    L>n  •    ,1/111  Jl;l<i    il.\'. 


MANUAL  OF  TENT  PITCHING.  191 

right  end,  then  fold  the  right  eud  over  the  top,  completing  the 
bundle;  tie  with  the  two  exposed  guys. 

Method  of  Folding  Pyramidal  Tent. 

The  tent  is  thrown  toward  the  rear  and  the  back  wall  and 
I'oof  canvas  pulled  out  smooth.  This  may  be  most  easily 
accomplished  by  leaving  the  rear-corner  wall  pins  in  the  ground 
with  the  wall  loops  attached,  one  man  at  each  rear-corner  guy. 
and  one  holding  the  square  iron  in  a  perpendicular  position 
and  pulling  the  canvas  to  its  limit  away  from  the  former  front 
of  the  tent.  This  leaves  the  three  remaining  sides  of  the  tent 
on  top  of  the  rear  side,  with  the  door  side  in  the  middle. 

Now  carry  the  right-front  corner  over  and  lay  it  on  the  left- 
rear  corner.  Pull  all  canvas  smooth,  throw  guys  toward  square 
iron,  and  pull  bottom  edges  even.  Then  take  the  right-front 
corner  and  return  to  the  right,  covering  the  right-rear  corner. 
This  folds  the  right  side  of  the  tent  on  itself,  with  the  crease 
in  the  middle  and  under  the  front  side  of  tent. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BUGLE. 

Warning  Calls. 

804.  First  call,  guard  mounting,  full  dress,  overcoats,  drill, 
stable,  water,  and  boots  and  saddles  precede  the  assembly  by  such 
interval  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

Mess,  church,  and  fatigue,  classed  as  service  calls,  may  also  be 
used  as  warning  calls. 

First  call  is  the  first  signal  for  formation  for  roll  call  and  for 
all  ceremonies  except  guard  mounting. 

Guard  mounting  is  the  first  signal  fur  guard  mounting. 

The  field  music  assembles  at  first  call  and  guard  mounting. 

In  a  mixed  command,  boots  and  saddles  is  the  signal  to 
mounted  troops  that  their  formation  is  to  be  mounted ;  for 
mounted  guard  mounting  or  mounted  drill,  it  immediately  fol- 
lows the  signal  guard  mounting  or  drill. 

When  full  dress  or  overcoats  are  to  be  worn,  the  full  dress  or 
overcoat  call  immediately  follows  first  call,  guard  mounting,  or 
boots  and  saddles. 

Formation   Calls. 

805.  Assembly:  The  signal  for  companies  or  details  to  fall  in. 
Adjutant's  call:  The  signal  for  companies  to  form  battalion; 

also  for  the  guard  details  to  form  for  guard  mounting  on  the 
camp  or  garrison  parade  ground ;  it  follows  the  assembly  at 
such  interval  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  oflicer. 

It  is  also  used  as  a  signal  for  the  battalions  to  form  regiment, 
following  the  first  adjutant's  call  at  such  interval  as  the  com- 
manding officer  may  prescribe. 

To  the  color:  Is  sounded  when  the  color  salutes. 

Alarm  Calls. 

806.  Fire  call:  The  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in,  without 
arms,  to  extinguish  fire. 

To  arms:  The  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in.  under  arms,  on 
their  company  parade  grounds  as  quickly  as  possiblo- 
192 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BUGLE.  193 

To  horse:  The  signal  for  mounted  men  to  proceed  imder  arms 
to  their  horses,  saddle,  mount  and  assemble  at  a  designated 
place  as  quickly  as  possible.  In  extended  order  this  signal  is 
used  to  remount  troops. 

Service  Calls. 

807.  Tattoo,  taps,  mess,  sick,  church,  recall,  issue,  officers',  cap- 
tains', first  sergeants',  fatigue,  school,  and  the  general. 

The  general  is  the  signal  for  striliing  tents  and  loading  wagons 
preparatory  to  marching. 

Reveille  precedes  the  assembly  for  roll  call ;  retreat  follows  the 
assembly,  the  interval  between  being  only  that  requii'ed  for 
formation  and  roll  call,  except  when  there  is  parade. 

Taps  is  the  signal  for  extinguishing  lights;  it  is  usually  pre- 
ceded by  call  to  quarters  by  such  interval  as  prescribed  by  Army 
Regulations. 

Assembly,  reveille,  retreat,  adjutant's  call,  to  the  color,  the 
flourishes,  ruffles,  and  the  marches  are  sounded  by  all  the  field 
music  united;  the  other  calls,  as  a  rule,  ai'e  sounded  by  the 
musician  of  the  guard  or  orderly  musician ;  he  may  also  sound 
the  assembly  when  the  musicians  are  not  united. 

The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note  of  reveille,  or,  if 
marches  be  played  before  reveille,  it  is  fired  at  the  comBience- 
ment  of  the  first  march. 

The  evening  gun  is  fired  at  the  last  note  of  retreat. 

190G9°— 14 13 


BUGLE  CALLS. 


1.    First  Call. 


i^N^^S 


2.    Guard  Mounting. 


Quick: 


194 


BUGLE  CALLS. 
3.  Full  Dress. 
-s- 


196 


4.    Overcoats. 


^^^d^^i 


-f=^ 


t^: 


Quick. 


5.    Drill. 


E5e-f 


6.    Stable. 


Quick. 


)-8^-*-' 


ft  fPftip^ri^L 


^-4- 


fe-####- 


:zq^ 


r_-W=i=i=i^z5 


•i»-y  p  w  p  p 


i^^s^ 


g^  r  r  f  r^  f^?^^-^.^ 


196 


f 


Quick. 


BUGLE  CALLS. 
7.   Water. 


^^ 


i^ 


3.    Boots  and  Saddles. 


Quick. 


9.    Assembly. 
Moderate. 


3^; 


3^ 


+' — — Lm 


-^— ^- 


inw i-~ 


I 


Quick. 


10.    ADJUTANT'S  Call. 


-^— f-P 


^— brnj — ^ 


t^ 


^ 


Qtttct  time. 


11.    To  THE  Color. 


BUGLE  CALIS. 

To  THE  Color— Concluded. 


197 


End. 


-*-•- 


-f-tf-rr- 


r?   p  fi  0  ff  0 

•| 1 'mmi — t— i— 


^t=f^ 


i=r=p: 


D.a 


^ — !^w 


12.    Fire. 

/7N 


^m^M 


:^ 


i ^     i  .     I 


:^ 


— ^in. 


-(2. 


^i^fe 


^3^ 


*zi54^ 


-#-^ 


im'iriinli   I?     Lii    I     iLhimJ" 


#^- 


---t- 


i 


Repeat  at  wiU. 


zt: 


1  3.    To  Arms. 


Q«jcfc_2_^    -,, 


Repeat  at  will. 


F^=fb±J 


^-#-^- 


i^^-f-^ 


H 


az4=^r:|t 


198 


BUGLE  CALIS. 


14.    To  Horse. 


Presto. 


-^ 


^    y    ,    O    , T 3 rf    f    -    ^ i^?-r 


15.    Reveille. 


!^ 


^=ti=^ 


^Eg=p^_iS3^^^=^e=fg 


Z).G 


:tpp: 


ii=tl 


g 


16.    Retreat. 


Moderate. 


^ ^-^fi- 


^  I      L^ 


.(2. 


#-^ 


f--W-r-?^ 


<|J— -f    •       i'Hft 


.*_•_ 


1:4— u 


-a---0- 


^ 


# — ^-t. 


i=i: 


BUGLE  CALLS. 


199 


R  ETREAT— Concluded. 

-P5 -X-H2- 


-^-^-^ 


#-a-^ 


=I=U: 


f— ^---r 


±t=^lt= 


3?= 


1=4 


^s-f^ 


mJi-J^ 


1 


^^£ 


^-^"^ 

r-^^=5 --1 

r^ 

=ti^ 

f7\ 

s*      " 

g^  1    «- 

#-i — #-1 — 1 — 

-^^ * — • 

— 1 1 \ 

-# — 

— 1 — 1 — 

.■TS 

— — 

-^ 

-1 t_MJ 

_| M—. 

.-1 — 

— ;_j — 

— 1 — 

-;     ;    J    ■ 

-# — 

~S— J— 

-4 

soo 


Quich 


3Zz&-^-.:=J:i 


BUGLE  CALLS. 
1 7.   Tattoo. 


ijczt: 


*=:=ti4: 


—  0-0 


sie3 


:v-±-it5 


-B—^—S—^- 


# 0-^0-0 #- 


5E 


^^=^'- 


-F=p- 


3=333 


ll^l^^S^iS 


-T^n- 


)— p— g— F-^H^-| —     *         •- — 0-}-\ 0 — I— — jr 


-#      I  ■       ■^— I • 1 • — \—0-  ■ 


^^^^^^^ 


—I ItH — I h 

-0 — 0^0-0 — if- 


r 1 -=;-    i        J 


-■I imm—\- 


^^^=g=5=- 


:a=i= 


BUGLE  CALLS. 

Tattoo— Continued. 


201 


^^^^^^^m 


-ft — ^- 


4=t 


-< — p- 


M 


^-=j3^.^ 


j__,_. 


0 — »-^-#-#- 


I — -i^-  -0 — 0-^-0-0^^^0^^0^i — !   :  T  I   r-^- 


^^jp^_feg?^gl^^ 


202 


BUGLE  CALLS. 

Tattoo— Conc^Mded. 


fff^fEJEEgi 


^T==jE^^=g=g 


E^ 


# 


i 


■N (5*- 


^ 


q=F=5 


^ 


±=^-.E^ir^ 


•\   P       ^ 


:t=t=±=ti 


3^ 


^?3E1SE?E^: 


BUGLE  CALLS. 
18.   Call  to  Quarters. 


203 


Slow. 


t 


/r\    /r\    oi 


-*     ^  I   ^- 


^ 


19.   Taps. 


■^  W      •  I  — IP- 


-fSl 


n 


^ 


±M- 


i 


i 


-(2-i- 


*=F 


3-^ 


4^ 


^^-*^ 


20.    Mess. 


Qviick. 


-M    \      y    4- 


5-5- 


■#— ^-#H«-#— +- 


:l=?=^ 


:^^ 
^ 


-# «    «    0    0 


S 


204 


BUGLE  GALLS. 

21.   Sick. 


Quick. 


=h- ^ 


^^F 


-^H«- 


:t::t±l 


-^-^Z^-fi'- 


■s=±± 


—f—s-B- 


X-t 


^ 


3=P 


nzW 


:^=w:w:^zMzX^ 


m 


22.    Church. 


S/ow, 


rF-i-'*-t — I—- 1— 


-^::*4i^«_r:=i;;^fr. 


^f--? 


-p-*-t — *-i — H — I — I — I — F-F-> — "L  i    r^ — r 


23.    Recall. 


Moderato. 


24.    Issue. 


Allegro. 


BUGLE  GALLS. 

25.    OFFICERS'  Call. 


206 


Quick, 


26.    Captains'  Call. 


Quick. 


zit^''^ 


-/«-i-^^^-# 


x=^ 


rit: 


^.-.-trr^ 


1.-0 — Nt-<5^— I 


27.    First  Sergeants'  Call. 


Quich. 


28.  Fatigue. 

s 


m^^ 


:S=i=t:=p:: 


1^^ 


v^T 


:£: 


i»  ^  f-^ 


f--3 


206 


Quick. 


BirOLE  GALLS. 

29.     SCHCXJL. 


^ 


^^pJ^^^ifs-Jzj^i^J4Qa 


■^S— ! it-d-  -^-i— P- 


-U=5=i^ 


tit 


30.   The  General. 


Quick. 


'— — -l  j    ■^^il^^ — LtL"'  I^— ni — llIhl' — i— i— i — t^fc 


i 


l—l»l  r~i'~l  ^^    Ls      1^* 


--•-#—•-•-•- 


£^S^:^ 


^?*=^^«=S 


s — ^ 


^^ 


±=^ 


i 


30K.    Flourishes  for  Review. 


Quick. 


jsi   J 


^ 


m\ 


BUGLE    SIGNALS. 

See  paragraph  41. 


31.    Assemble.    MARCH. 
Same  as  Assembly,  No.  9. 

32.    Attention. 

SlOtP.  jm 


2— i 


d^. 


i 


33.    Attention  to  Orders. 
Slow,  ^m 


% 


t=3S 


4    try- 


e 


-#i— u 


34.    Forward.    MARCH. 
Slow.  -^ 


35.    Halt. 


s 


36.    Double  Time.    MARCH. 
Quick 


^^^^^S. 


207 


208 


i 


Slow. 


BTJGLE  SIGNALS. 
37.    To  THE  Rear.    MARCH 
— s— a- 


H 0 « 


:=i: 


i^^ 


38,    Commence  Firing. 


* 


Quick. 


2— f- 


S^ 


f--   i  p      J .   h=-  — 1*-^— 


*-!— V- 


:S;t 


39.    Cease  Firing. 


Quick. 


$ 


Quxck 


40.    Fix   Bayonets. 

It-. ^- 


^^ 


(■  #  #»   —      ^    i»  i*"F 


1 


i 


m  m  m 


1 


Qutcl;. 


41 .   Charge. 


Repeat  at  will. 


i^^^i^^ 


APPENDIX  A. 


War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 

Washington,  December  2,  1911. 
The  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911,  have  been  prepared  for 
the  use  of  troops  armed  with  the  United  States  magazine  ritle, 
model  1903.  For  the  guidance  of  organizations  armed  with  the 
United  States  magazine  ritle,  model  1898,  the  following  alter- 
native paragraphs  are  published  and  will  be  considered  as  sub- 
stitute paragraphs  for  the  corresponding  paragraphs  in  the 
text :  75  (in  part),  96,  98,  99,  134,  139,  141,  142,  148,  and  150. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Utaff. 

75.   *     *     * 

Third.  The  cut-off  is  kept  turned  down,  except  when  using 
the  magazine. 

****♦♦♦ 

96.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Unfix,  BAYONET. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  on  the  belt :  Take  the  posi- 
tion of  parade  rest,  grasp  the  handle  of  the  bayonet  firmly  with 
the  right  hand,  press  the  spring  with  the  forefinger  of  the  left 
hand,  raise  the  bayonet  until  the  handle  is  about  G  inches 
above  the  muzzle  of  the  piece,  drop  the  point  to  the  left,  back 
of  hand  toward  the  body,  and,  glancing  at  the  scabbard,  return 
the  bayonet,  the  blade  passing  between  the  left  arm  and  body ; 
regrasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  resume  the  order. 

19069°— 14 14  209 


210  APPENDIX. 

If  the  bayonet  scabbard  is  carried  r.n  the  haversack:  Take 
the  bayonet  from  the  ritle  with  the  left  hand  and  return  it  to 
ilie  scabbard  in  the  most  convenient  manner. 

If  marching  or  lying  down,  the  bayonet  is  fixed  and  unfixed 
\n  the  most  expeditious  and  convenient  manner  and  the  piece 
returned  to  the  original  position. 

Fix  and  unfix  bayonet  are  executed  with  promptness  and  reg- 
ularity, but  not  in  cadence. 

98.  Being  at  order  arms:  1.  Inspection,  2.  ARMS. 

At  the  second  command,  talie  the  position  of  port  arms. 
(TWO)  With  the  right  hand  open  the  magazine  gate,  turn  the 
bolt  handle  up,  draw  the  bolt  back  and  glance  at  the  magazine 
and  chamber.  Having  found  them  empty,  or  liaving  emi>tied 
them,  raise  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  front. 

99.  Being  at  inspection  arms:  1.  Order  (Right  shoulder,  port), 
2.  ARMS. 

At  the  preparatory  command,  push  the  bolt  forward,  turn  the 
handle  down,  close  the  magazine  gate,  pull  the  trigger,  and 
resume  port  arms.  At  the  command  arms,  coinyilete  the  move- 
ment ordei"ed. 

134.  Pieces  being  loaded  and  in  the  position  of  load,  to  exe- 
cute other  movements  with  the  pieces  loaded :  1.  Lock,  2.  PIECES. 

At  the  command  Pieces  turn  the  safety  lock  fully  to  the  right. 

The  safety  lock  is  said  to  be  at  the  "  ready  "  when  turned  to 
the  left,  and  at  the  "  safe  "  when  turned  to  the  right. 

The  cut-off  is  said  to  be  "on"  when  turned  up  and  "off" 
when  turned  down. 

139.  Being  in  line  or  skii'fflish  line  at  halt:  1.  With  dummy 
(blank  or  ball)  cartridges,  2.  LOAD. 

At  the  conunand  load  each  front-rank  man  or  skTi*hiJ shier  faces 
half  right  and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  aboilt  one  foot, 
to  such  position  as  will  insure  the  greatest  firumess  and  steadi- 
ness of  the  body ;  raises  or  lowers  the  piece  and  drops  it  into 
the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  left  thumb  extended  along  the 
stock,  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the  breast.  With  the  I'ight  hatid 
he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back,  takes  a  cartridge  lietween 
the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  and  places  it  in  the  receiver; 
places  palm  of  the  hand  against  the  back  of  the  bolt  handle; 


APPENDIX.  211 

thrusts  the  bolt  home  with  a  qui<'k  motion,  turning  down  the 
handle,  and  carries  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock.  Each 
rear-rank  man  moves  to  the  right  front,  takes  a  similar  position 
opposite  the  interval  to  the  right  of  his  front-rank  man,  muzzle 
of  the  piece  extending  beyond  the  front  rank,  and  loads. 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  pieces  being  held 
as  nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of  load. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting  the  position  of  the  piece  is  similar;  if 
kneeling  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh;  if  sitting  the 
elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees.  If  lying  down  the  left  hand 
steadies  and  supports  the  piece  at  the  balance,  the  toe  of  the 
butt  resting  on  the  ground,  the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling,  and  lying 
down)  are  designated  as  that  of  load. 

141.  FILL  MAGAZINE. 

Take  the  position  of  load,  if  not  already  there,  open  the  gate 
of  the  magazine  with  the  right  thumb,  take  five  cartridges  from 
the  box  or  belt,  and  place  them,  with  the  bullets  to  the  front,  in 
the  magazine,  turning  the  barrel  slightly  to  the  left  to  facilitate 
the  insertion  of  the  cartridges;  close  the  gate  and  carry  the 
right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock. 

To  load  from  the  magazine  the  command  From  magazine  will 
be  given  preceding  that  of  LOAD ;  the  cut-off  will  be  turned  up  on 
coming  to  the  position  of  load. 

To  resume  loading  from  the  belt  the  command  From  belt  will 
be  given  preceding  the  command  LOAD;  the  cut-off  will  be  turned 
down  on  coming  to  the  position  of  load. 

The  commands  from  magazine  and  from  belt,  indicating  the 
change  in  the  manner  of  loading,  will  not  be  repeated  in  subse- 
quent commands. 

The  words  from  belt  apply  to  cartridge  box  as  well  as  belt. 

In  loading  from  the  magazine  care  should  be  taken  to  push 
the  bolt  fully  forward  and  turn  the  handle  down  before  draw- 
ing the  bolt  back,  as  otherwise  the  extractor  will  not  catch  the 
cartridge  in  the  chamber,  and  jamming  will  occur  with  the 
cartridge  following. 

To  tire  from  the  magazine,  the  command  MAGAZINE  FIRE  may 
be  given  at  any  time.  The  cut-off  is  turned  up  and  an  increased 
rate  of  fire  is  executed.  After  the  magazine  is  exhausted  the 
cut-oft'  is  turned  down  and  the  firing  continued,  loading  from 
the  belt. 


212  APPENDIX  A. 

Magazine  fire  is  employed  only  when,  iu  the  opinion  of  the 
platoon  leader  or  company  commander,  the  maximum  rate  of 
tire  becomes  necessal-y. 

142.  UNLOAD. 

All  take  the  position  of  load,  turn  the  cut-off  up,  if  not  already 
there,  turn  the  safety  lock  to  the  left,  and  alternately  open  and 
close  the  chamber  until  all  the  cartridges  are  ejected.  After 
the  last  cartridge  is  ejected  the  chamber  is  closed  and  the  trig- 
ger pulled.  The  cartridges  are  then  picked  up,  cleaned,  and 
returned  to  the  box  or  belt,  and  the  piece  brought  to  the  order. 

148.  CUP  FIRE. 

Turn  the  cut-off  up;  fire  at  will  (reloading  from  the  maga- 
zine) until  the  cartridges  in  the  piece  are  exhausted ;  turn  the 
cut-off  down ;  fill  magazine ;  reload  and  take  the  position  of 
suspend  firing. 

150.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the 
position  of  load,  the  cartridge  is  drawn  or  the  empty  shell  is 
ejected,  the  trigger  is  pulled,  sights  are  laid  down,  and  the  piece 
is  brought  to  the  order. 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses  to  prepare  for  changes  of 
position  or  to  steady  the  men. 


APPENDIX  B. 


Was  Department, 

Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff. 

Washington,  December  2,  1911. 
Paragraphs  747,  792.  793.  794,  795.  796,  797,  and  798,  Infantry 
Drill  Regulations.  1911.  apply  only  to  troops  equipped  with  the 
Infantry  Equipment,  nimlel  1910.  For  troops  equipped  under 
General  Orders,  No.  2;5,  War  Department,  1906.  and  orders 
amendatory  thereof,  the  alternative  paragi'aphs  published  here- 
with will  govern. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War : 

Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General.  Chief  of  Staff. 

747.  If  the  inspection  is  to  include  an  examination  of  the 
blanket  rolls  the  captain,  before  dismissing  the  company  and 
after  inspecting  the  tile  closers,  directs  the  lieutenants  to  remain 
in  place,  closes  ranks,  stacks  arms,  dresses  the  company  back  to 
four  paces  from  the  stacks,  takes  intervals,  and  commands : 
1.  Unsling,  2.  PACKS,  3.  Open,  4.  PACKS. 

At  the  second  command  each  man  unslings  his  roll  and  places 
it  on  the  ground  at  his  feet,  rounded  end  to  the  front,  square 
end  of  shelter  half  to  the  right. 

At  the  fourth  command  the  rolls  are  untied,  laid  perpendicu- 
lar to  the  front  with  tlie  triangular  end  of  the  shelter  half  to 
the  front,  opened,  and  unrolled  to  the  left ;  each  man  prepares 
the  contents  of  his  roll  for  inspection  and  resumes  the  attention. 

The  captain  then  returns  saber,  passes  along  the  ranks  and 
file  closers  as  before,  inspects  the  rolls,  returns  to  the  right, 
draws  saber  and  commands:  1.  Close,  2.  PACKS. 

At  the  second  connnaud  each  man.  with  his  shelter  half 
smoothly  spread  on  the  gi'ound  with  buttons  up  and  triangular 
end  to  the  front,  folds  his  blanket  once  across  its  length  and 
places  it  upon  the  shelter  half,  fold  toward  the  bottom,  edge 

213 


214  APPENDIX  B. 

oue-lialf  inch  from  the  square  end,  the  same  amount  of  canva.s 
uncovered  at  the  top  and  bottom.  He  then  places  the  parts  of 
the  pole  on  the  side  of  the  blanket  next  the  square  end  of  shelter 
half,  near  and  parallel  to  the  fold,  end  of  pole  about  6  inches 
from  the  edge  of  the  blanket ;  nests  the  pins  similarly  near  the 
opposite  edge  of  the  blanket  and  distributes  the  other  articles 
carried  in  the  roll :  folds  the  triangular  end  and  then  the  ex- 
posed portion  of  the  bottom  of  the  shelter  half  over  the  blanket. 

The  two  men  in  each  file  roll  and  fasten  first  the  roll  of  the 
front  and  then  of  the  rear  rank  man.  The  file  closers  work  simi- 
larly two  and  two.  or  with  the  front  rank  man  of  a  blank  file. 
Each  pair  stands  on  the  folded  side,  rolls  the  blanket  roll  closely 
and  buckles  the  straps,  passing  the  end  of  the  strap  through 
both  keeper  and  buckle,  back  over  the  buckle  and  under  the 
keeper.  With  the  roll  so  lying  on  the  ground  that  the  edge  of 
the  shelter  half  can  just  be  seen  when  looking  vertically  down- 
ward one  end  is  bent  upward  and  over  to  meet  the  other,  a 
clove  hitch  is  taken  with  the  guj"  rope  first  around  the  end  to 
which  it  is  attached  and  then  around  the  other  end,  adjusting 
the  length  of  rope  between  hitches  to  suit  the  wearer. 

As  soon  as  a  file  completes  its  two  rolls  each  man  places  his 
roll  in  the  position  it  was  in  after  being  unslung  and  stands  at 
attention. 

All  the  rolls  being  completed,  the  captain  commands:  1.  Sling, 
2.  PACKS. 

At  the  second  command  the  rolls  are  slung,  the  end  contain- 
ing the  pole  to  the  rear. 

The  company  is  assembled,  takes  arms,  and  the  captain  com- 
pletes the  inspection  as  before. 

792.  Being  in  line  or  in  column  of  platoons,  the  captain 
commands:  FORM  FOR  SHELTER  TENTS. 

The  officers,  first  sergeant,  and  guides  fall  out;  the  cooks 
form  a  file  on  the  flank  of  the  company  nearest  the  kitchen,  the 
first  sergeant  and  right  guide  fall  in.  forming  the  right  file  of 
the  company ;  blank  files  are  filled  by  the  file  closers  or  by  men 
taken  from  the  front  rank ;  the  remaining  guide  or  guides,  and 
file  closers  form  on  a  convenient  flank.  Before  forming  column 
of  platoons,  preparatoiy  to  pitching  tents,  the  company  may 
be  redivided  into  two  or  more  platoons  regardless  of  the  size  of 
each. 

793.  The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  take  intervals 
as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  and  commands :  PITCH 
TENTS. 


APPENDIX  B.  ^IS 

At  the  command  pitch  tents,  each  man  steps  off  obliquely  to 
the  right  with  the  right  foot  and  lays  his  rifle  on  the  ground,  the 
butt  of  the  rifle  near  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  muzzle  to  the 
front,  barrel  to  the  left,  and  steps  back  into  his  place;  each 
front  rank  man  then  draws  his  bayonet  and  sticks  it  in  the 
ground  by  the  outside  of  the  right  heel.  All  unsling  and  open 
the  blanket  rolls  and  take  out  the  shelter  half,  poles,  and  pins. 
Bach  then  spreads  his  shelter  half,  triangle  to  the  rear,  flat 
upon  the  ground  the  tent  is  to  occupy,  rear  rank  man's  half 
on  the  right.  The  halves  are  then  buttoned  together.  Each 
front  rank  man  joins  his  pole,  inserts  the  top  in  the  eyes  of  the 
halves,  and  holds  the  pole  upright  beside  the  pin  placed  in  the 
grttund;  his  rear  i"ank  man.  using  the  pins  in  front,  pins  down 
the  front  corners  of  the  tent  on  the  line  of  pins,  stretching  the 
canvas  taut;  he  then  inserts  a  pin  in  the  eye  of  the  rope  and 
drives  the  pin  at  such  distance  in  front  of  the  pole  as  to  hold 
Mie  rope  taut.  Both  then  go  to  the  rear  of  the  tent ;  the  rear 
rank  man  adjusts  the  pole  and  the  front  rank  man  drives  the 
pins.  The  rest  of  the  jiins  are  then  driven  by  both  men,  the 
rear  rank  man  working  on  the  right. 

As  soon  as  the  tent  is  pitched  each  man  arranges  the  contents 
of  the  blanket  roll  in  the  tent  and  stands  at  attention  in  front 
of  his  own  half  on  line  with  the  front  guy  rope  pin. 

The  guy  ropes,  to  have  a  uniform  slope  when  the  shelter  tents 
are  pitched,  should  all  be  of  the  same  length. 

794.  When  the  blanket  roll  is  not  carried,  intervals  are 
taken  as  described  above ;  the  position  of  the  front  pole  is 
marked  with  a  bayonet  and  equipments  are  laid  aside.  The 
men  then  proceed  to  the  wagon,  secure  their  I'olls,  i-eturn  to 
their  places,  and  pitch  tents  as  heretofore  described. 

795.  To  pitch  double  shelter  tent,  the  captain  gives  the  same 
commands  as  before,  except  Take  half  interval  is  given  instead  of 
Take  interval.  In  taking  interval  each  man  follows  the  preced- 
ing ui.m  at  2  paces.  The  captain  then  commands:  PITCH 
DOUBLE  TENTS. 

The  first  sergeant  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  right 
guide  and  with  him  pitches  a  single  shelter  tent. 

Only  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  mark  the  line  with 
the  bayonet. 

'I'he  tent  is  formed  by  buttoning  together  the  square  ends  of 
two  single  tents.  Two  complete  tents,  except  one  pole,  are  used. 
Two  guy  ropes  are  used  at  each  end,  the  guy  plus  being  placed 
In  front  of  the  corner  pin& 


216  APPENDIX  B. 

Tlie  tents  are  pitched  by  numbers  1  and  2,  front  and  rear 
rank ;  and  by  numbers  3  and  4,  front  and  rear  rank ;  the  men 
falling  in  on  tlie  left  are  numbered,  counting  ofC  if  necessary. 

All  the  men  spread  their  shelter  halves  on  the  ground  the 
tent  is  to  occupy.  Those  of  the  front  rank  are  placed  with  the 
triangular  ends  to  the  front.  All  four  halves  are  then  buttoned 
together,  first  the  ridges  and  then  the  square  ends.  The  front 
corners  of  tlie  tent  are  pinned  by  the  front-rank  men,  the  odd 
number  holding  the  poles,  the  even  number  driving  the  pins. 
The  rear-rank  men  similarly  pin  the  rear  corners. 

While  the  odd  numbers  steady  the  poles,  each  even  number  of 
the  front  rank  takes  his  pole  and  enters  the  tent,  where,  assisted 
by  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank  he  adjusts  the  pole  to  the 
center  eyes  of  the  shelter  halves  in  tlie  following  order:  (1) 
The  lower  half  of  the  fi'ont  tent;  (2)  the  lower  half  of  the  rear 
tent;  (3)  the  upper  half  of  the  front  tent;  (4)  the  upper  half 
of  the  rear  tent.     The  guy  ropes  are  then  adjusted. 

The  tents  having  been  pitched,  the  triangular  ends  are  turned 
back,  contents  of  the  rolls  arranged,  and  the  men  stand  at 
attention,  each  opposite  his  own  shelter  half  and  facing  out  from 
the  tent. 

796.  Omitted. 

797.  Omitted. 

798.  Omitted. 


APPENDIX  C. 


MANUAL   OF   THE   BAYONET. 

War  Department, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 
Washington,  February  20,  1913. 
The  following  Manun!  of  the  Bayonet,  prepared  by  a  board 
consisting  of  Capt.  Herschel  Tupes,  First  Infantry,  and  Capt, 
Grosvenor  L.  Towiisend,  First  Infantry,  is  approved  and  issued 
for  the  information  and  government  of  the  Regular  Army  and 
the  Organized  Militia  of  the  United  States. 
By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War. 

Leonard  Wood, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

217 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 

UNITED  STATES  ARMY. 


1.  The  infantry  soldier  relies  mainly  on  fire  action  to  disable 
the  enemy,  bnt  he  should  know  that  personal  combat  is  often 
necessary  to  obtain  success.  Therefore,  he  must  be  instructed 
ill  the  use  of  the  rifle  and  bayonet  in  hand-to-hand  encounters. 

2.  The  object  of  this  instruction  is  to  teach  the  soldier  how  to 
make  effective  use  of  the  rifle  and  bayonet  in  personal  combat ; 
to  make  him  quick  and  proficient  in  handling  his  rifle;  to  give 
him  an  accurate  eye  and  a  steady  hand;  and  to  give  him  con- 
fidence in  the  bayonet  in  offense  and  defense.  When  skill  in 
these  exercises  has  been  acquired,  the  rifle  will  still  remain  a 
most  formidable  weapon  at  close  quarters  should  the  bayonet 
be  lost  or  disabled. 

3.  Efficiency  of  organizations  in  bayonet  fighting  will  be 
judged  by  the  skill  shown  by  individuals  in  personal  combat. 
For  this  purpose  pairs  or  groups  of  opponents,  selected  at  ran- 
dom from  among  recruits  and  trained  soldiers,  should  engage 
in  assaults,  using  the  fencing  equipment  provided  for  the  pur- 
pose. 

4.  Officers  and  specially  selected  and  thoroughly  instructed 
noncommissioned  officers  will  act  as  instructors. 

5.  Instruction  in  bayonet  combat  should  begin  as  soon  as  the 
soldier  is  familiar  with  the  handling  of  his  rifle  and  will  pro- 
gress, as  far  as  practicable,  in  the  order  followed  in  the  text. 

6.  Instruction  is  ordinarily  given  on  even  ground ;  but  prac- 
tice should  also  be  had  on  uneven  ground,  especially  in  the  at- 
tack and  defense  of  intrenchmeuts. 

7.  These  exercises  will  not  be  used  as  a  calesthenic  drill. 

8.  The  principles  of  the  commands  are  the  same  as  those  given 
in  paragraphs  9,  15,  and  38,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations.     luter- 

219 


220 


MANITAI  OP  THE  BAYONET. 


vals  and  distances  will  be  talien  as  in  paragraphs  109  and  111, 
Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  except  that,  in  formations  for  bayo- 
net exercises,  the  men  should  be  at  least  four  paces  apart  in 
every  direction. 

9.  Before  requiring  soldiers  to  take  a  position  or  execute  a 
movement  for  the  first  time,  the  instructor  executes  the  same 
for  the  purpose  of  illustration,  after  which  he  requires  the  sol- 
diers to  execute  the  movement  individually.  Movements  pre- 
scribed in  this  manual  will  not  be  executed  in  cadence  as  the 
attempt  to  do  so  results  in  incomplete  execution  and  lack  of 
vigor.  Each  movement  will  be  executed  correctly  as  quickly 
as  possible  by  every  man.  As  soon  as  the  movements  are  ex- 
ecuted accurately,  the  commands  are  given  rapidly,  as  expert- 
ness  with  the  bayonet  depends  chiefly  upon  quickness  of  motion. 
■  10.  The  exercises  will  be  interrupted  at  first  by  short  and  fre- 
quent rests.  The  rests  will  be  less  frequent  as  proficiency  is 
attained.  Fatigue  and  exhaustion  will  be  specially  guarded 
against  as  they  prevent  proper  interest  being  taken  in  the 
exercises  and  delay  the  progress  of  the  instruction.  Rests  will 
be  given  from  the  position  of  order  arms  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed in  Infantry  Drill  Regulations. 

THE  BAYONET. 

Nomenclature  and  Description. 

11.  The  bayonet  is  a  cutting  and  thrusting  weapon  consisting 
of  three  principal  parts,  viz,  the  blade,  guard,  and  (/rip. 


powf 


MANUAL  or  THE  BAYONET.  »21 

12.  The  blade  has  the  following  parts :  Edge,  false  edge,  back, 
grooves,  poiut,  aud  tang.  The  length  of  the  blade  from  guard 
to  point  is  10  inche.s,  the  edge  14.5  inches,  aud  the  false  edge 
5.6  inches.  Length  of  the  rifle,  bayonet  fixed,  is  59.4  inches. 
The  weight  of  the  bayonet  is  1  pound ;  weight  of  rifle  without 
bayonet  is  8.69  pounds.  The  center  of  gravity  of  the  rifle,  with 
bayonet  fixed,  is  just  in  front  of  the  rear  sight. 

I.   INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT   THE  RIFLE. 

13.  The  instructor  explains  the  importance  of  good  footwork 
and  impresses  on  the  men  the  fact  that  quickness  of  foot  and 
suppleness  of  body  are  as  important  for  attack  and  defense  as 
is  the  ability  to  parry  and  deliver  a  strong  point  or  cut. 

14.  All  foot  movements  should  be  made  from  the  position  of 
guard.  As  far  as  practicable,  they  will  be  made  on  the  balls  of 
the  feet  to  insure  quickness  and  agility.  No  hard  and  fast  rule 
can  be  laid  down  as  to  the  length  of  the  various  foot  move- 
ments; this  deiJends  entirely  on  the  situations  occurring  in 
combat. 

15.  The  men  having  taken  intervals  or  distances,  the  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Bayonet  exercise,  2.  GUARD. 

At  the  command  guard,  half  face  to  the  right,  carry  back  and 
place  the  right  foot  about  once  and  a  half  its  length  to  the  rear 
and  about  3  inches  to  the  right,  tlie  feet  forming  with  each  other 
an  angle  of  about  G0°,  weight  of  the  body  balanced  equally  on 
the  balls  of  the  feet,  knees  slightly  bent,  palms  of  hands  on 
hips,  fingers  to  the  front,  thumbs  to  the  rear,  head  erect,  head 
and  eyes  straight  to  the  front. 

16.  To  resume  the  attention,  1.  Squad,  2.  ATTENTION.  The 
men  take  the  position  of  the  soldier  and  fix  their  attention. 

17.  ADVANCE.  Advance  the  left  foot  quickly  about  once  its 
length,  follow  immediately  with  the  right  foot  the  same  distance. 

18.  RETIRE.  Move  the  right  foot  quickly  to  the  rear  about 
once  its  length,  follow  immediately  with  the  left  foot  the  same 
distance. 

19.  1.  Froni,  2.  PASS.  Place  the  right  foot  quickly  about  once 
its  length  in  front  of  the  left,  advance  the  left  foot  to  its  proper 
position  in  front  of  the  right. 


222  MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 

20.  1.  Rear,  2.  PASS.  Place  the  left  foot  quickly  about  once 
its  length  in  rear  of  the  right,  retire  the  right  foot  to  its  proper 
position  in  rear  of  the  left. 

The  passes  are  used  to  get  quickly  within  striking  distance  or 
to  withdraw  quickly  therefrom. 

21.  1.  Right,  2.  STEP.  Step  to  the  right  with  the  right  foot 
about  once  its  length  and  place  the  left  foot  in  its  proper  relative 
position. 

22.  1.  Left,  2.  STEP.  Step  to  the  left  with  the  left  foot  about 
once  its  length  and  place  the  right  foot  in  its  proper  relative 
lX)sition. 

These  steps  are  used  to  circle  around  an  enemy,  to  secure  a 
more  favorable  line  of  attack,  or  to  avoid  the  opponent's  attack. 
Better  ground  or  more  favorable  light  may  be  gained  in  this 
way.  In  bayonet  fencing  and  in  actual  combat  the  foot  first 
moved  in  stepping  to  the  right  or  left  is  the  one  which  at  the 
moment  bears  the  least  weight. 

II.   INSTRUCTION  WITH  THE  RIFLE. 

23.  The  commands  for  and  the  execution  of  the  foot  move- 
ments are  the  same  as  already  given  for  movements  without  the 
rifle. 

24.  The  men  having  taken  intervals  or  distances,  the  instructor 
commands : 

1.  Bayonet  exercise,  2.  GUARD. 

At  the  second  command  take  the  position  of  guard  (see  par. 
15)  ;  at  the  some  time  throw  the  rifle  smartly  to  the  front,  grasp 
the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  just  below  the  lower  band,  fingers 
between  the  stock  and  gun  sling,  barrel  turned  slightly  to  the 
left,  the  right  hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock  about  0 
inches  in  front  of  the  right  hip,  elbows  free  from  the  body, 
bayonet  point  at  the  height  of  the  chin. 

25.  1.  Order,  2.  ARMS. 

Bring  the  right  foot  up  to  the  left  and  the  rifle  to  the  posi- 
tion of  order  arms,  at  the  same  time  resuming  the  position  of 
attention. 

26.  During  the  preliminary  instruction,  attacks  and  defenses 
will  be  executed  from  guard  until  proficiency  is  attained,  ^fter 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 


223 


Par.  24, 


224 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET- 


Par.  28. 


MANUAL  or  THE  BAYONET.  SSS5 

which  they  may  he  executed  from  any  position  in  whicli  the 
rifle  is  held. 

Attacks. 

27.  1.   THRUST. 

Thrust  the  rifle  quickly  forward  to  the  full  length  of  the  left 
arm,  turning  the  barrel  to  the  left,  and  direct  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  at  the  point  to  be  attacked,  butt  covering  the  right  fore- 
arm. At  the  same  time  straighten  the  right  leg  vigorously  and 
throw  the  weight  of  the  body  forward  and  on  tlie  left  leg,  the 
ball  of  the  right  foot  always  on  the  ground.  Guard  is  resumed 
immediately  without  command. 

The  force  of  the  thrust  is  delivered  principally  with  the  right 
arm,  the  left  being  used  to  direct  the  bayonet.  The  points  at 
which  the  attack  should  be  directed  are,  in  order  of  their  im- 
portance, stomach,  chest,  head,  neck,  and  limbs. 

28.  1.  LUNGE. 

Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  thrust,  except  that  the 
left  foot  is  carried  forward  about  twice  its  length.  The  left 
heel  must  always  be  in  rear  of  the  left  knee.  Guard  is  resumed 
immediately  without  command.  Guard  may  also  be  resumed  by 
advancing  the  right  foot  if,  for  any  reason,  it  is  desired  to  hold 
the  ground  gained  in  lunging.  In  the  latter  case,  the  prepara- 
tory comman  forward  will  be  given.  Each  method  should  be 
practiced. 

29.  1.  Butt,  2.  STRIKE. 

Straighten  right  arm  and  right  leg  vigorously  and  swing  butt 
of  rifle  against  point  of  attack,  pivoting  the  rifle  in  the  left 
Land  at  about  the  height  of  the  left  shoulder,  allowing  the 
bayonet  to  pass  to  the  rear  on  the  left  ^ide  of  the  head.  Guard 
is  resumed  without  command. 

The  points  of  attack  in  their  order  of  importance  are,  head, 
neck,  stomach,  and  crotch. 

30.  1.  Cut,  2.  DOWN. 

Execute  a  quick  downward  stroke,  edge  of  bayonet  directed 
at  point  of  attack.     Guard  is  resumed  without  command. 

31.  1.  Cut.  2.  RIGHT  (LEFT). 

With  a  quick  extension  of  the  arms  execute  a  cut  to  the  right 
(left),  directing  the  edge  toward  <^he  point  attacked.  Guard  is 
resumed  without  command. 

19069°      14 15 


226 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 


ler  9rij  5. 


fff«H  <*ff+  riifw  vHi 


I'ar.  29. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 


22': 


The  cuts  are  especially  useful  against  the  head,  neck,  and 
hands  of  an  enemy.  In  executing  left  cut  it  should  be  remem- 
bered that  the  false,  or  back  edge,  is  only  5.6  inches  long.  The 
cuts  can  be  executed  in  continuation  of  strokes,  thrusts,  lunges, 
and  parries. 

32.  To  direct  an  attack  to  the  right,  left,  or  rear  the  soldier 
will  change  front  as  quickly  as  possible  in  the  most  convenient 
manner,  for  example:  1.  To  the  right  rear,  2.  Cut,  3.  DOWN; 
1.  To  the  right,  2.  LUNGE;  1.  To  the  left,  2.  THRUST,  etc. 

Whenever  possible  the  impetus  gained  by  the  turning  more- 
nient  of  the  body  should  be  thrown  into  the  attack.  In  gener.il 
this  will  be  best  accomplished  by  turning  on  the  ball  of  the 
I'ight  foot. 

These  movements  constitute  a  change  of  front  in  which  the 
position  of  guard  is  resumed  at  the  completion  of  the  movement. 

33.  Good  judgment  of  distance  is  essential.  Accuracy  ia 
thrusting  and  lunging  is  best  attained  by  practicing  these  at- 
tacks against  rings  or  other  convenient  oi)enings,  about  3  inches 
in  diameter,  suitably  suspended  at  desired  heights. 

34.  The  thrust  and  lunges  at  rings  should  first  be  practiced  by 
endeavoring  to  hit  the  opening  looked  at.  This  should  be  fol- 
lowed by  directing  the  attack  against  one  opening  while  looking 
at  another. 

35.  The  soldier  should  also  experience  the  effect  of  actual 
resistance  offered  to  the  bayonet  and  the  butt  of  the  rifle  in 
attacks.  This  will  be  taught  by  practicing  attacks  against  a 
dummy. 

36.  Dummies  should  be  constructed  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
permit  the  execution  of  attacks  without  injury  to  the  point  or 
edge  of  the  bayonet  or  to  the  barrel  or  stock  of  the  rifle.  A 
suitable  dummy  can  be  made  from  pieces  of  rope  about  5  feet 
in  length  plaited  closely  together  into  a  cable  between  6  and 
12  inches  in  diameter.  Old  rope  is  preferable.  Bags  weighted 
and  stuffed  with  hay,  straw,  shavings,  etc.,  are  also  suitable. 


/^-. 


Defenses. 


\ 


37.  In  the  preliminary  drills  in  the  defenses  the  position  of 
guard  is  resumed,  by  command,  after .  each  parry.     When  the 


228 


Par.  33. 


Par.  36. 


MANUAL  OF  IHE  3AY0NET. 


229 


.iff 


Par.  41. 


230  MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 

men  have  become  proficient,  the  instructor  will  cause  them  to 
resume  the  position  of  guard  instantly  without  command  after 
the  execution  of  each  parry. 

38.  1.  Parry,  2.  RIGHT. 

Keeping  the  right  hand  in  the  guard  position,  move  the  rifle 
sharply  to  the  right  with  the  left  arm,  so  that  the  bayonet  point 
is  about  6  inches  to  the  right. 

39.  1.  Parry,  2.  LEFT. 

Move  the  rifle  sharply  to  the  left  front  with  both  hands  so  as 
to  cover  the  point  attaclied. 

40.  1.  Parry,  2.  HIGH. 

Raise  the  rifle  with  both  hands  high  enough  to  clear  the  line 
of  vision,  barrel  downward,  point  of  the  bayonet  to  the  left 
front. 

When  necessary  to  raise  the  rifle  well  above  the  head,  it  may 
be  supported  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand. 
This  position  will  be  necessary  against  attacks  from  higher  ele- 
vations, such  as  men  mounted  or  on  top  of  parapets. 

41.  1.  Low  parry,  2,  RIGHT  (LEFT). 

Carry  the  point  of  the  bayonet  down  until  it  is  at  the  height 
of  the  knee,  moving  the  point  of  the  bayonet  sufficiently  to  the 
right  (left)  to  keep  the  opponent's  attacks  clear  of  the  point 
threatened. 

These  parries  are  rarely  used,  as  an  attack  below  the  waist 
leaves  the  head  and  body  exixjsed. 

42.  Parries  nnist  not  be  too  wide  or  sweeping,  but  sharp,  short 
motions,  finished  with  a  jerk  or  quick  catch.  The  hands  should, 
as  far  as  posible,  be  kept  in  the  line  of  attack.  Parries  against 
butt  strike  are  made  by  quickly  moving  the  guard  so  as  to  cover 
the  point  attacked. 

43.  To  provide  against  attack  from  the  right,  left,  or  rear  the 
soldier  will  change  front  as  quickly  as  possible  in  the  most  con- 
venient manner ;  for  example ;  1.  To  the  left  rear,  2.  Parry, 
3.  HIGH;  1.  To  the  right,  2.  Parry,  3.  RIGHT,  etc. 

These  movements  constitute  a  change  of  front  in  which  the 
position  of  guard  is  resumed  at  the  completion  of  the  movement. 

In  changing  front  for  the  purpose  of  attack  or  defense,  if 
there  is  danger  of  wounding  a  comrade,  the  rifle  should  first  be 
brought  to  a  vertical  position. 


MANITAI  OF  THE  BAYONET. 


Par.  41. 


Par.  44. 


232  MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET, 

III.   INSTRUCTION  WITHOUT  THE  BAYONET. 

44.  1.  Club  rifle,  2.  SWING. 

Being  at  order  arms,  at  the  preparatory  command  quickly 
raise  and  turn  the  rifle,  regrasping  it  with  both  hands  between 
the  rear  sight  and  muzzle,  barrel  down,  thumbs  around  the 
stock  and  toward  the  butt;  at  the  same  time  raise  the  rifle 
above  the  shoulder  farthest  from  the  opponent,  butt  elevated 
and  to  the  rear,  elbows  slightly  bent  and  knees  straight.  Each 
Individual  takes  such  position  of  the  feet,  shoulders,  and  hands 
as  best  accords  with  his  natural  dexterity.  SWING.  Tighten 
the  gi-asp  of  the  hands  and  swing  the  rifle  to  the  front  and 
downward,  directing  it  at  the  head  of  the  opponent  and  imme- 
diately return  to  the  position  of  club  rifle  by  completing  the 
swing  of  the  rifle  downward  and  to  the  rear.  Repeat  by  the 
command.  SWING. 

The  rifle  should  be  swung  with  sufficient  force  to  break 
through  any  guard  or  parry  that  may  be  interposed. 

Being  at  club  rifle,  order  arms  is  resumed  by  command. 

The  use  of  this  attack  against  dummies  or  in  fencing  is  pro- 
hibited. 

45.  The  position  of  club  rifle  may  be  taken  from  any  position 
of  the  rifle  prescribed  in  the  Manual  of  Arms.  It  will  not  be 
taken  in  personal  combat  unless  the  emergency  is  such  as  to 
preclude  the  use  of  the  bayonet. 

IV.   COMBINED  MOVEMENTS. 

46.  The  purpose  of  combined  movements  is  to  develop  more 
vigorous  attacks  and  more  effective  defenses  than  are  obtained 
by  the  single  movements;  to  develop  skill  in  passing  from  at- 
tack to  defense  and  the  reverse.  Every  movement  to  the  front 
should  be  accompanied  by  an  attack,  which  is  increased  in 
effectiveness  by  the  forward  movement  of  the  body.  Every 
movement  to  the  rear  should  oi'dinarily  be  accompanied  by  a 
parry  and  should  always  be  followed  by  an  attack.  Movements 
to  the  right  or  left  may  be  accompanied  by  attacks  or  defenses. 

47.  Not  more  than  three  movements  will  be  used  in  any  com- 
bination.   The  instructor  should  first  indicate  the  number  of 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 


233 


234  MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 

movements  that  are  to  be  combined  as  two  movements  or  three 
movements.  The  execution  is  determined  by  one  command  of 
execution,  and  the  position  of  guard  is  talieu  upon  the  comple- 
tion of  the  last  movement  only. 

Examples. 
Front  pass  and  LUNGE. 
Right  step  and  THRUST. 
Left  step  and  low  parry  RIGHT. 
Rear  pass,  parry  left  and  LUNGE, 
Lunge  and  cut  RIGHT. 
Parry  right  and  parry  HIGH, 
Butt  strike  and  cut  DOWN. 
Thrust  and  parry  HIGH. 
Parry  high  and  LUNGE. 
Advance,  thrust  and  cut  RIGHT. 
Right  step,  parry  left  and  cut  DOWN. 
To  the  left,  butt  strike  and  cut  DOWN. 
To  the  right  rear,  cut  down  and  butt  STRIKE. 

48.  Attacks  against  dummies  will  be  practiced.  The  approach 
will  be  made  against  the  dummies  both  in  quick  time  and 
double  time. 

V.  PRACTICAL  BAYONET  COMBAT. 

49.  The  principles  of  practical  bayonet  combat  should  be 
taught  as  far  as  possible  during  the  progress  of  instruction  In 
bayonet  exercises. 

50.  The  soldier  must  be  continually  impressed  with  the  ex- 
treme importance  of  the  offensive  due  to  its  moral  effect.  Should 
an  attack  fall,  it  should  be  followed  immediately  by  another 
attack  before  the  opponent  has  an  opportunity  to  assume  the 
offensive.  Keep  the  opponent  on  the  defensive.  If,  due  to  cir- 
cumstances, it  is  necessary  to  take  the  defensive,  constantly 
watch  for  an  opportunity  to  assume  the  offensive  and  take 
immediate  advantage  of  it. 

51.  Observe  the  ground  with  a  view  to  obtaining  the  best  foot- 
ing. Time  for  this  will  generally  be  too  limited  to  permit  more 
than  a  single  hasty  glance. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  23S 

52.  In  personal  combat  watch  the  opponent's  eyes  if  they  can 
be  plainly  seen,  and  do  not  fix  the  eyes  on  his  weapon  nor  upon 
the  point  of  your  attack.  If  his  eyes  can  not  be  plainly  seen, 
as  in  night  attacks,  watch  the  movements  of  his  weapon  and 
of  his  body. 

53.  Keep  the  body  well  covered  and  deliver  attacks  vigorously. 
The  point  of  the  baj-onet  should  always  be  kept  as  nearly  as 
possible  in  the  line  of  attack.  The  less  the  rifle  is  moved  up- 
ward, downward,  to  the  right,  or  to  the  left,  the  better  prepared 
the  soldier  is  for  attack  or  defense. 

54.  Constantly  watch  for  a  chance  to  attack  the  opponent's 
Jeft  hand.  His  position  of  guard  will  not  differ  materially  from 
that  described  in  paragraph  24.  If  his  bayonet  is  without  a 
cutting  edge,  he  will  be  at  a  great  disadvantage. 

55.  The  butt  is  used  for  close  and  sudden  attacks.  It  is  par- 
ticularly useful  in  riot  duty.  From  the  position  of  port  arms  a 
sentry  can  strike  a  severe  blow  with  the  butt  of  the  rifle. 

56.  Against  a  man  on  foot,  armed  with  a  sword,  be  careful 
that  the  muzzle  of  the  rifle  is  not  grasped.  All  the  swordsman's 
energies  will  be  directed  toward  getting  past  the  bayonet.  At- 
tack him  with  short,  stabbing  thrusts,  and  keep  him  beyond 
striking  distance  of  his  weapon. 

57.  The  adversary  may  attempt  a  greater  extension  in  the 
thrust  and  lunge  by  quitting  the  grasp  of  his  piece  with  the  left 
hand  and  advancing  the  right  as  far  as  possible.  When  this 
is  done,  a  sharp  parry  may  cause  him  to  lose  control  of  his 
rifle,  leaving  him  exix)sed  to  a  counter  attack,  which  should 
follow  promptly. 

58.  Against  odds  a  small  number  of  men  can  fight  to  best 
advantage  by  grouping  themselves  so  as  to  prevent  their  beinc 
attacked  from  behind. 

59.  In  fighting  a  mounted  man  armed  with  a  saber  every 
effort  must  be  made  to  get  on  his  near  or  left  side,  because  here 
his  reach  is  much  shorter  and  his  parries  much  weaker.  If  not 
possible  to  disable  such  an  enemy,  attack  his  horse  and  then 
renew  the  attack  on  the  horseman. 

60.  In  receiving  night  attacks  the  assailant's  movements  can 
be  best  observed  from  the  kneeling  ov  prone  position,  as  his 


236  MANTTAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 

approach  generally  brings  him  against  the  sky  line.  When  he 
arrives  within  attacking  distance  rise  quickly  and  lunge  well 
forward  at  the  middle  of  his  body. 

VI.   FENCING  EXERCISES. 

61.  Fencing  exercises  in  two  lines  consist  of  combinations  of 
thrusts,  parries,  and  foot  movements  executed  at  command  or 
at  will,  the  opponent  replying  with  suitable  parries  and  returns. 

62.  The  instructor  will  inspect  the  entire  fencing  equipment 
before  the  exercise  begins  and  assure  himself  that  everything  is 
in  such  condition  as  will  prevent  accidents. 

63.  The  men  equip  themselves  and  form  in  two  lines  at  the 
order,  facing  each  other,  with  intervals  of  about  4  paces  between 
files  and  a  distance  of  about  2  paces  between  ILues.  One  line 
is  designated  as  number  1 ;  the  other,  number  2.  Also  as  attack 
and  defense. 

64.  The  opponents  being  at  the  order  facing  each  other,  the 
instructor  commands:  SALUTE. 

Each  man,  with  eyes  on  his  opponent,  carries  the  left  hand 
smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm  of  the  hand  down,  thumb  and 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  forearm  horizontal,  forefinger 
touching  the  bayonet.  (Two.)  Drop  the  arm  smartly  by  the 
side. 

This  salute  is  the  fencing  salute. 

All  fencing  exercises  and  all  fencing  at  will  between  indi- 
viduals will  begin  and  terminate  with  the  formal  courtesy  of 
the  fencing  salute. 

65.  After  the  fencing  salute  has  been  rendered  the  instructor 
commands:  1.  Fencing  exercise,  2.  GUARD. 

At  the  command  guard  each  man  comes  to  the  position  of 
guard,  heretofore  defined,  bayonets  crossed,  each  man's  bayonet 
bearing  lightly  to  the  right  against  the  corresponding  portion 
of  the  opponent's  bayonet.  This  position  is  known  as  the 
engage  or  engage  right. 

66.  Being  at  the  engage  rigf)t:  ENGAGE  LEFT. 

The  attack  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  quickly  until  clear 
of  his  opponent's  rifle  and  describes  a  semicircle  with  it  upward 
and  to  the  right ;  bayonets  are  ci'ossed  similarly  as  in  the  en- 


MANUAL  OF   THE  BAYONET.  SS? 

gaged  position,  each  man's  bayonet  bearing  liglitly  to  the  left 
against  the  corresponding  portion  of  the  opponent's  bayonet. 

67.  Being  at  engage  left:  ENGAGE  RIGHT. 

The  attacli  quicldy  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  until  clear 
of  his  opponent's  rifle  and  describes  a  semicircle  with  it  upward 
and  to  the  left  and  engages. 

68.  Being  engaged:  ENGAGE  LEFT  AND  RIGHT. 

.   .   The  attacli  engages  left  and  then  immediately  engages  rig  fit. 
[,  :   69.  Being  engaged  left:  ENGAGE  RIGHT  AND  LEFT. 

The  attack  engages  right  and  then  immediately  engages  left. 

70.  1.  Number  one,  .ENGAGE  RIGHT  (LEFT); ^2.  Number  two, 
COUNTER. 

Number  one  executes  the  movement  ordered,  as  above;  num- 
_  bar  two  quickly  drops  the  point  of  his  bayonet  and  circles  it 
'  upward  to  the  original  position. 

71.  In  all  fencing  while  maintaining  the  pressure  in  the  en- 
gage, a  certain  freedom  of  motion  of  the  rifle  is  allowable,  con- 
sisting of  the  play,  or  up-and-dowu  motion,  of  one  bayonet 
against  the  other.  This  is  necessary  to  prevent  the  opiwnent 
from  divining  the  intended  attack.  It  also  prevents  his  using 
the  point  of  contact  as  a  pivot  for  his  assaults.  In  changing 
from  one  engage  to  the  other  the  movement  is  controlled  by  the 
left  hand,  the  right  remaining  stationary. 

72.  After  some  exercise  in  engage,  engage  left,  and  counter, 
exercises  will  be  given  in  the  assaults. 

Assaults. 

73.  The  part  of  the  body  to  be  attacked  will  be  designated  by 
name,  as  head,  neck,  chest,  stomach,  legs.  No  attacks  will  be 
made  below  the  knees.  The  commands  are  given  and  the  move- 
ments for  each  line  are  first  explained  thoroughly  by  the  in- 
structor; the  execution  begins  at  the  command  assault.  Num- 
ber one  executes  the  attack,  and  number  two  parries ;  conversely, 
at  command,  number  two  attacks  and  number  one  parries. 

74.  For  convenience  in  instruction  assaults  are  divided  into 
simple  attacks,  counter  attacks,  attacks  on  the  rifle,  and  feints. 


238  toANTIAI  OF  THE  BAYONET. 

Simple  Attacks. 

75.  Success  in  these  attacks  depends  on  quickness  of  move- 
ment. There  are  three  simple  attacks — the  straight,  the  disen- 
gagement, and  the  counter  disengagement.  They  are  not  preceded 
by  a  feint. 

76.  In  the  straight  the  bayonet  is  directed  straight  at  an  open- 
ing from  the  engaged  position.  Contact  with  the  opponent's 
ritle  may,  or  may  not,  be  abandoned  while  making  it.  If  the 
opening  be  high  or  low,  contact  with  tlie  rifle  will  usually  be 
abandoned  on  commencing  the  attack.  If  the  opening  be  near 
his  guard,  the  light  pressure  used  in  the  engage  may  be  con- 
tinued in  the  attack. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  one,  at  neck 
(head,  chest,  right  leg,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right; 
3.  ASSAULT. 

77.  In  the  disengagement  contact  with  the  opponent's  rifle  is 
abandoned  and  the  point  of  the  bayonet  is  circled  under  or  oVer 
his  bayonet  or  rifle  and  directed  into  the  opening  attacked.  This 
attack  Is  delivered  by  one  continuous  spiral  movement  of  the 
bayonet  fi'om  the  moment  contact  is  abandoned. 

Example :  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  one,  at  stomach 
(left  chest,  left  leg,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  left  (etc.)  ; 

3.  ASSAULT. 

78.  In  the  counter  disengagement  a  swift  attack  is  made  into 
the  opening  disclosed  while  the  opponent  is  attempting  to  change 
the  engagement  of  his  rifle.  It  is  delivered  by  one  continuous 
spiral  movement  of  the  bayonet  into  the  opening. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage  right,  1.  Number  two,  engage 
left;  2.  Number  one,  at  chest,  thrust;  3.  Number  two,  parry  left; 

4.  ASSAULT. 

Number  two  initiates  the  movement,  number  one  thrusts  as 
soon  as  the  opening  is  made,  and  number  two  then  attempts  to 
parry. 

79.  A  counter  attack  or  return  is  one  made  instantly  after  or 
in  continuation  uf  a  parry.  The  parry  should  be  as  narrow  as 
possible.  This  makes  it  more  dittJcult  for  the  opponent  to  re- 
cover and  counter  parity.     The  counter  attack  should  also  be 


UANTTAL  OP  THE  BAYONET.  239 

made  at,  or  just  before,  the  full  extension  of  the  opponent's 
attack,  as  when  it  is  so  made,  a  simple  extension  of  the  arms 
will  generally  be  suflBcient  to  reach  the  opponent's  body. 

Example:  Being  at  engage,  1.  Number  two,  at  chest,  lunge; 
2.  Number  one,  parry  right,  and  at  stomach  (chest,  head,  etc.), 
thrust;  3.  ASSAULT. 

Attacks  on  the  Rifle. 

80.  These  movements  are  made  for  the  purpose  of  forcing  or 
disclosing  an  opening  into  which  an  attack  can  be  made.  They 
are  the  press,  the  beat,  and  the  twist. 

81.  In  the  press  the  attack  quickly  presses  against  the  oppo- 
nent's bayonet  or  rifle  with  his  own  and  continues  the  pressure 
as  the  attack  is  delivered. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  press,  and  at 
chest,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right;  3.  ASSAULT. 

82.  The  attack  by  disengagement  is  particularly  effective  fol- 
,  lowing  the  press. 

•''    Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  press,  and  at 
stomach,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  low  parry  left;  3.  ASSAULT. 

83.  The  beat  is  an  attack  in  which  a  sharp  blow  is  struck 
against  the  opponent's  rifle  for  the  purpose  of  forcing  him  to 
expose  an  opening  into  which  an  attack  immediately  follows. 
It  is  used  when  there  is  but  slight  opposition  or  no  contact  of 
rifles. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  beat,  and  at 
stomach  (chest,  etc.),  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  left;  3.  ^5- 
SAULT. 

84.  In  the  twist  the  rifle  is  crossed  over  the  opponent's  rifle 
or  bayonet  and  his  bayonet  forced  downward  with  a  circular 
motion  and  a  straight  attack  made  into  the  opening.  It  requires 
superior  strength  on  the  part  of  the  attack. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  twist,  and  at 
stomach,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  low  parry,  left;  3.  ASSAULT,, ^^^ 

Feints. 

85.  Feints  are  movements  which  threaten  or  simulate  attacks 
and  are  made  with  a  view  to  inducing  an  opening  or  parry  that 


240  MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 

exposes  the  desired  point  of  attack.  They  are  either  single  or 
double,  according  to  the  number  of  such  movements  made  by  the 
attack. 

86.  In  order  that  the  attack  may  be  changed  quickly,  as  little 
force  as  possible  is  put  into  a  feint. 

Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  Number  one,  feint  head  thrust; 

at  stomach,  lunge;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right  and  low  parry  right; 

3.  ASSAULT. 

J.    Number  one  executes  the  feint  and  then  the  attack.    Number 
ytwo  executes  both  parries. 

87.  In  double  feints  first  one  part  of  the  body  and  then  an- 
other is  threatened  and  a  third  attacked. 

Example :  Beipg  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  feint  straight 
thrust  at  chest;  disengagement  at  chest;  at  stomach,  lunge; 
2.  Number  two,  parry  right,  parry  left,  and  low  parry  left;  3.  AS- 
SAULT. 

88.  An  opening  may  be  offered  or  procured  by  opposition,  as 
in  the  press  or  beat. 

89.  In  fencing  exercises  every  feint  should  at  first  be  parried. 
When  the  defense  is  able  to  .iudge  or  divine  the  character  of 
the  attack  the  feint  is  not  necessarily  parried,  but  may  be  nulli- 
fied by  a  counter  feint. 

90.  A  counter  feint  is  a  feint  following  the  opponent's  feint  or 
folloviing  a  parry  of  his  attack  and  generally  ^OQCUys  in  com- 
bined  movements.  .•>,,; 

Combined  Movements.  >.?;  ifT  •    ^-;,   .,, 

"*  M.  When  the  men  have  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the 
various  foot  movements,  parries,  guards,  attacks,  feints,  etc., 
the  instructor  combines  several  of  them  and  gives  the  com- 
mands in  quick  succession,  increasing  the  rapidity  and  number 
of  movelnents  as  the  men  become  more  skillful.  Opponents  will 
be  changed  frequently.  ' 

1.  Example :  Being  at  the  engage,  1.  Number  one,  by  disen- 
gagement at  chest,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  left,  tight  step 
(left  foot  first),  and  lunge;  3.  ASSAULT. 

2.  Example:  Being  at  engage  left,  Number  one,  press  and 
lunge;  2.  Number  two,  parry  right,  left  step,  and  thrust;  3  AS- 
SAULT, 


MANUAI  OP  THE  BAYONET.  241 

3.  Example:  Being  at  the  engage,  Number  one,  by  disengage- 
ment at  chest,  thrust;  2.  Number  two,  parry  left,  front  pass,  and 
at  head  butt  strike;  3.  Number  one,  rigftt  step;  4.  ASSAULT. 

92.  Examples  1  and  2  are  typical  of  movements  known  as 
cross  counters,  and  example  No.  3  of  movements  known  as  c/ose 
counters. 

93.  A  chancery  is  an  attack  by  means  of  which  the  opponent  is 
disarmed,  which  causes  him  to  lose  control  of  his  rifle,  or  which 
disables  his  weapon. 

94.  When  the  different  combinations  are  executed  with  sufli- 
cient  skill  the  instructor  will  devise  series  of  movements  to  be 
memorized  and  executed  at  the  command  assau/t.  The  accuracy 
and  celerity  of  the  movements  will  be  carefully  watched  by  the 
instructor,  with  a  view  to  the  correction  of  faulty  execution. 

95.  It  is  not  intended  to  restrict  the  number  of  movements, 
but  to  leave  to  the  discretion  of  company  commanders  and  the 
ingenuity  of  instructors  the  selection  of  such  other  exercises  as 
accord  with  the  object  of  the  drill. 

VII.   FENCING  AT  WILL. 

96.  As  satisfactory  progiess  is  made  the  instructor  will  pro- 
ceed to  the  exercises  at  will,  by  which  is  meant  assaults  between 
two  men,  each  endeavoring  to  hit  the  other  and  to  avoid  being 
hit  himself.  Fencing  at  will  should  not  be  allowed  to  degenerate 
Into  random  attacks  and  defenses. 

97.  The  instructor  can  supervise  but  one  pair  of  combatants 
at  a  time.  Frequent  changes  should  be  made  so  that  the  men 
may  learn  different  methods  of  attack  and  defense  from  each 
other. 

98.  The  contest  should  begin  with  simple,  careful  movements, 
with  a  view  to  forming  a  correct  opinion  of  the  adversary: 
afterwards  everything  will  depend  on  coolness,  rapid  and  correct 
execution  of  the  movements  and  quick  perception  of  the  adver- 
sary's intentions. 

99.  Continual  retreat  from  the  adversary's  attack  and  fre- 
quent dodging  to  escape  attacks  should  be  avoided.  The 
offensive  should  be  continually  encouraged. 

19069°^  14 It; 


242  MANUAL  OP  THE  BAYONET. 

100.  In  fencing  at  will,  when  no  commands  are  given,  oppo- 
nents facing  each  other  at  the  position  of  order  arms,  salute. 
They  then  immediately  and  simultaneously  assume  the  position 
of  guard,  rifles  engaged.  Neither  man  may  take  the  position 
of  guard  before  his  opponent  has  completed  his  salute.  The 
choice  of  position  is  decided  before  the  salute. 

101.  The  opponents  being  about  two  paces  apart  and  the  fenc- 
ing salute  having  been  rendered,  the  instructor  commands,  At 
will,  2.  ASSAULT,  after  which  either  party  has  the  right  to 
attack.  To  interrupt  the  contest  the  instructor  will  command 
HALT,  at  which  the  combatants  will  immediately  come  to  the 
order.  To  terminate  the  contest  the  instructor  will  command, 
1.  Halt,  2.  SALUTE,  at  which  the  combatants  will  immediately 
come  to  the  order,  salute,  and  remove  their  masks. 

102.  When  men  have  acquired  confidence  in  fencing  at  will, 
one  opponent  should  be  required  to  advance  upon  the  other  in 
quick  time  at  charge  bayonet,  from  a  distance  not  to  exceed  10 
yards,  and  deliver  an  attack.  As  soon  as  a  hit  is  made  by 
either  opponent  the  instructor  commands,  HALT,  and  the  assault 
terminates.  Opponents  alternate  in  assaulting.  The  assailant 
is  likewise  required  to  advance  at  double  time  from  a  distance 
not  exceeding  20  yards  and  at  a  run  from  a  distance  not  exceed- 
ing 30  yards. 

103.  The  instructor  will  closely  observe  the  contest  and  decide 
doubtful  points.  He  will  at  once  stop  the  contest  upon  the 
slightest  indication  of  temper.  After  conclusion  of  the  combat 
he  will  comment  on  the  action  of  both  parties,  point  out  errors 
and  deficiencies  and  explain  how  they  may  be  avoided  in  the 
future. 

104.  As  additional  instruction,  the  men  may  be  permitted  to 
wield  the  rifle  left  handed,  that  is  on  the  left  side  of  the  body, 
left  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock.  Many  men  will  be  able  to 
use  this  method  to  advantage.  It  is  also  of  value  in  case  the 
left  hand  is  wounded. 

105.  After  men  have  fenced  in  pairs,  practice  should  be  given 
in  fencing  between  groups,  equally  and  unequally  divided.  When 
practicable,  intrenchments  will  be  used  iu  fencing  of  this  char- 
acter. 


UAtrakL  OF  THE  BAYONET. 


243 


Par.  104. 


244  MAWTJAI.   OF  THE  BAYONET. 

In  group  fencing  it  will  be  necessary  to  have  a  sufBcient  num- 
ber of  umpires  to  decide  hits.  An  individual  receiving  a  hit  is 
withdrawn  at  once  from  the  bout,  which  is  decided  in  favor  of 
the  group  having  the  numerical  superiority  at  the  end.  The 
fencing  salute  is  not  required  in  group  fencing. 

Rules  foe  Fencing  at  Will. 

106.  1.  Hits  on  the  legs  below  the  knees  will  not  be  counted. 
No  hit  counts  unless,  in  the  opinion  of  the  instructor,  it  has 
sufficient  force  to  disable. 

2.  Upon  receiving  a  hit,  call  out  "  hit." 

3.  After  receiving  a  fair  hit  a  counter  attack  is  not  permitted. 
A  position  of  engage  is  taken. 

4.  A  second  or  third  hit  in  a  combined  attack  will  be  counted 
only  when  the  first  hit  was  not  called. 

5.  When  it  is  necessary  to  stop  the  contest — for  example,  be- 
cause of  breaking  of  weapons  or  displacement  of  means  of  pro- 
tection— take  the  position  of  the  order. 

G.  When  it  is  necessary  to  suspend  the  assault  for  any  cause, 
it  will  not  be  resumed  until  the  adversary  is  ready  and  in  con- 
dition to  defend  himself. 

7.  Attacks  directed  at  the  crotch  are  prohibited  in  fencing, 

8.  Stepping  out  of  bounds,  when  established,  counts  as  a  hit. 

Suggestions  for  Fencing  at  Will. 

107.  When  engaging  in  an  assault,  first  study  the  adversary's 
position  and  proceed  by  false  attacks,  executed  with  speed,  to 
discover,  if  possible,  his  instinctive  parries.  In  order  to  draw 
the  adversary  out  and  Induce  him  to  expose  that  part  of  the 
body  at  which  the  attack  is  to  be  made,  it  is  advisable  to  simu- 
late an  attack  by  a  feint  and  then  make  the  real  attack. 

108.  Return  attacks  should  be  frequently  practiced,  as  they 
are  difficult  to  parry,  and  the  opponent  is  within  easier  reach 
and  more  exposed.  The  return  can  be  made  a  continuation  of 
the  parry,  as  there  is  no  previous  warning  of  its  delivery,  al- 


MANUAL  OF  THE  BAYONET.  245 

though  it  sbonkl  always  be  expected,     rietnrns  are  made  with- 
out luugins  if  the  adversary  can  be  reached  by  thrusts  or  cuts. 

109.  Endeavor  to  overcome  the  tencjency  to  make  a  return 
without  Ivuowing  where  it  will  hit.  Malving  returns  blindly  is 
a  bad  habit  and  leads  to  instinctive  returns — that  is,  habitual 
returns  with  certain  attacks  from  certain  parries — a  fault  which 
the  skilled  opponent  will  soon  discover. 

110.  Do  not  draw  the  rifle  back  preparatory  to  thrusting  and 
lunging. 

111.  The  puiijose  of  fencing  at  will  is  to  teach  the  soldier  as 
many  forms  of  simple,  effective  attacks  and  defenses  as  pos- 
sible. Complicated  and  intricate  movements  should  not"  be  at- 
tempted. 

Hints  for  Instructors. 

112.  The  influence  of  the  instructor  is  great.  He  must  be 
master  of  his  weapon,  not  only  to  show  the  various  movements, 
but  also  to  lead  in  the  exercises  at  will.  He  should  stimulate 
the  zeal  of  the  men  and  arouse  pleasure  in  the  work.  Oflicers 
should  qualify  themselves  as  instructors  by  fencing  with  each 
other. 

113.  The  character  of  each  man,  his  bodily  conformation,  and 
his  degree  of  skill  must  always  be  taken  into  account.  When 
the  instructor  is  demonstrating  the  combinations,  feints,  re- 
turns, and  parries  the  rapidity  of  his  attack  should  be  regu- 
lated by  the  skill  of  the  pupil  and  no  more  force  than  is  neces- 
sary should  be  used.  If  the  pupil  exposes  himself  too  much  in 
the  feints  and  parries  the  instructor  will,  by  an  attack,  con- 
vince him  of  his  error;  but  if  these  returns  be  too  swiftly  or 
too  strongly  made  the  pupil  will  l)ecome  overcautious  and  the 
precision  of  his  attack  will  be  impaired.  The  object  is  to  teach 
the  pupil,  not  to  give  exhibitions  of  superior  skill. 

114.  Occasionally  the  instructor  should  leave  himself  uncov- 
ered and  fail  to  parry,  in  order  to  teach  the  pupil  to  take  quick 
advantage  uf  such  oppoi-tuuities. 


246 


MANTJAI  OP  THE  BAYONET. 
VIII.   COMPETITIONS. 


115.  In  competitions  between  different  organizations  none  but 
skillful  fencers  will  be  allowed  to  participate. 

116.  In  contests  between  two  men  judges  may  assign  values 
to  hits  as  follows: 


Thrusta 

and 
lunges. 

Cuts. 

Butt  rrf 
Of       " 

rifle. 
HI 

stomach 

4 
3 
3 
2 

1 

1 

1 

Chest 

Head 

2 
2 
1 
1 

3 

Neck 

2 

Legs 

V    '.Ui 

Ii 

■•Tl 

Stepping  out  oX  boimds,  4  points. 

117.  When  superiority  between  two  men  is  decided  by  bouts, 
each  bout  will  be  decided  by  itself,  i.  e.,  points  won  in  one  bout 
can  not  be  carried  over  to  another. 

118.  Details  other  than  those  mentioned  above  will  be  sl^-. 
ranged  by  the  officials  of  the  competition.  . 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


ChanoesI  war   department, 

No.  7.    I  Wabhinqton,  Janvxiry  tl,  1914. 

Paragraph  150,  as  published  in  appendix  tx)  Infantry  Drill  Regu- 
lations, 1911,  is  changed  as  followB: 

150.  CEASE  FIRING. 

Firing  stops;  pieces  not  already  there  are  brought  to  the  position 
of  load,  the  cut-off  turned  down  if  firing  from  magazine,  the  car- 
tridge is  drawn  or  the  empty  shell  is  ejected,  the  trigger  is  pulled, 
sights  are  laid  down,  and  the  piece  is  brought  to  the  order. 

Cease  firing  is  used  for  long  pauses  to  prepare  for  changes  of  posi- 
tion or  to  steady  the  men.     (C.  /.  D.  R.  No.  7,  Jan.  21,  1914.) 

(2107860,  A.  G.  0.| 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  op  War: 

LEONARD  WOOD, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 
Official: 

GEO.  ANDREWS, 

The  Adjutant  General. 


tC.  I.  L>.  R.  8] 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

Changes!  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  8.   J  Washington,  September  3,  1914- 

I.. Paragraphs  34,  47,  792,  793,  794,  795,  798,  and  803,  Infantry 
Drill  Regulations,  1911,  are  changed  as  follows: 

34.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  and  edition  con'ected  to 
November,  1913.)  Except  in  movements  executed  at  attention, 
commanders  or  leaders  of  subdivisions  repeat  orders,  commands,  or 
signals  whenever  such  repetition  is  deemed  necessaiy  to  insure 
prompt  and  correct  execution. 

Officers,  platoon  leaders,  guides,  and  musicians  ai-e  equipped 
with  whistles.  Guides  and  musicians  assist  by  repeating  signals 
when  necessary. 

Battalion  and  company  commanders  will  use  a  whistle  of  different 
tone  from  that  of  the  whistle  used  bv  platoon  leaders,  guides,  and 
musicians.     (C.  I.  D.  R.,  No.  8,  Sept.  3,  1914.) 

[2127092  A— A.  G.  O.] 

47.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911.)  For  communication 
between  the  firing  line  and  the  reserve  or  commander  in  rear,  the 
subjoined  signals  (Signal  Corps  codes)  are  prescribed  and  should  be 
memorized.  In  transmission,  their  concealment  from  the  enemy's 
\"iew  should  be  insured.  In  the  ibsence  of  signal  flags,  the  headdress 
or  other  substitute  may  be  used. 


[C.  I.  D.  R.  8] 


Letter  of 
alphabet. 


If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the 
firhig  Ime. 


I  f  signaled  from  the  firing  line  to 
the  rear. 


A  A  A. 
CCC. 

C  F.... 
D  T... 
F 

FB... 
HHII 

L 

N 

O 

Q 

R 

R  T... 

s  s  s . . 

S  U  F. 

T 

Y 


Ammunition  going  forwai'd 

Charge  (mandatory  at  all  times) 

Cease  firing 

Double  time  or  "rush" 

Commence  firing 

Fix  bayonets 

Halt 

Left 

Negative 

Move  forward , 

"What  is  the  range? 

Range 

Right 

Support  going  forward 

Suspend  firing 

Target 

Affirmative 


Ammimition  required. 

Am  al)out  to  charge  if  no  instruc- 
tions to  the  contrary. 

Cease  firing. 

Double  time  or  "rush." 

Am  about  to  commence  firing  if  no 
Instructions  to  the  contrary. 


Left. 

Negative. 

Am  about  to  move  forward. 

What  is  the  range? 

Range. 

Right. 

Support  needed. 

Suspend  firing. 

Target. 

Affirmative.  ■     t,- ,-.    i|. 


(C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept.  3,  1914.) 

[2171825,  A.  G.  O.] 

792.  (Appendix  approved  December  2,  1911.  Changed  by  C.  I. 
D.  R.  No.  2,  W.  D.,  1913.)  Omit  in  the  second  and  third  lines  the 
words  "causes  the  company  to  stack  arms,  dresses  it  back  to  four 
paces  from  the  stacks,  and".     (C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept.  3, 1914.) 

[2171825,  A.  G.  O.] 

793.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911.  Changed  by  C.  I.  D.  R. 
No.  2  and  No.  5,  W.  D.,  1913.)  The  change  published  inC.  I.  D.  R., 
No.  2,  W.  D.,  1913,  is  rescinded. 

Third  section,  fifth  line,  change  the  word  "upper"  to  ''  lower;" 
sixth  line,  insert  the  words  "lower  and  "  before  the  word  "upper," 
and  change  the  word  "half"  to " halves."  (C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept. 
S,  1914.) 

12171825,  A.  Q.  0.| 


re.  I.  D.  R.  81 


793.  (Appendix  approved  December  2,  1911.  Changed  by  C.  I. 
D.  E..  No.  2,  W.  D.,  1913.)  The  captain  then  caiises  the  company 
to  take  intervals  as  described  in  the  School  of  the  Squad,  and  com- 
mands: PITCH  TENTS. 

At  the  command  pitch  tents,  each  man  steps  off  obliquely  to  the 
right  with  the  right  foot  and  lays  his  rifle  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of 
the  rifle  near  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  muzzle  to  the  front,  barrel  to 
the  left,  and  steps  back  into  his  place;  each  front  rank  man  then 
draws  his  bayonet  and  sticks  it  in  the  ground  by  the  outside  of  the 
right  heel.  All  unsling  and  open  the  blanket  rolls  and  take  out  the 
shelter  half,  poles,  and  pins.  Each  then  spreads  his  shelter  half, 
triangle  to  the  rear,  fiat  upon  the  ground  the  tent  is  to  occupy,  rear 
rank  man 's  half  on  tlie  right.  The  halves  are  then  buttoned  together. 
Each  front  rank  man  joins  his  pole,  inserts  the  top  in  the  eyes  of  the 
halves,  and  holds  the  pole  upright  beside  the  bayonet  placed  in  the 
ground;  his  rear  rank  man,  using  the  pins  in  front,  pins  down  the 
front  corners  of  the  tent  on  the  line  of  bayonets,  stretching  the  can- 
vas taut;  he  then  inserts  a  pin  in  the  eye  of  the  rope  and  drives 
the  pin  at  such  distance  in  front  of  the  pole  as  to  hold  the  rope  taut. 
Both  then  go  to  the  rear  of  the  tent;  tlie  rear  rank  man  adjusts  the 
pole  and  the  front  rank  man  drives  the  pins.  The  rest  of  the  pina 
are  then  driven  by  both  men,  tlie  rear  rank  man  working  on  the  right. 

As  soon  as  the  tent  is  pitched  each  man  arranges  the  contents  of  the 
blanket  roll  in  the  tent  and  stands  at  attention  in  front  of  his  own 
half  on  line  with  the  front  guy-rope  pin. 

The  guy  ropes,  to  have  a  uniform  slope  when  the  shelter  tents  are 
pitched,  should  all  be  of  the  same  length.  (C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept. 
3,  1914.) 

[2171825,  A.  G.O.] 

793.  (Edition  corrected  to  November,  1913.)  Third  section,  fifth 
line,  change  the  word  "upper"  to  "lower;"  sixth  line,  insert  the 
words  ' '  lower  and ' '  before  the  word  ' '  upper, ' '  and  change  the  word 
"half"  to  "halves." 

Add  the  last  section  of  paragraph  798,  which  section  was  printed 
by  error  in  that  paragraph.     (C.  /.  D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept.  3,  1914) 

12171825,  A.  O.  O.] 


re.  r.  D.  -R.  81 

4 

793.  (Edition  corrected  to  November,  1913,  Appendix  B.)  Sec- 
ond section,  twelfth  line,  change  the  word  "pin"  to  "bayonet"; 
fourteenth  line,  change  the  word  "pins"  to  "bayonets."  (C.I.D.  R. 
No.  S,  Sept.  3,  1914.) 

[2171825,  A.  G.  O.] 

794.  (Appendix  approved  December  2,  1911.)  Omit  the  words 
"arms  are  stacked  and"  in  first  and  second  lines,  and  add  the  word 
"  are"  after  the  word  "  intervals"  in  second  line.  ( C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  8, 
Sept.  3,  1914.) 

[2171825,  A.  G.  O.] 

795.  (Appendix  approved  December  2,  1911.)  In  third  sectionV' 
substitute  the  word  "bayonet"  for  the  last  two  words  "tent  pin. "^ 
{C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept.  3,  1914.) 

[2171825,  A.  G.  O.] 

798.  (Appendix  approved  December  2,  1911.)  Hescinded.     (C  I. 
D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept.  3,  191^.) 
[2171825,  A.  G.O.] 

798.  (Edition  corrected  to  November,  1913.)  Omit  the  last  sec- 
tion.    (6\  I.  D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept.  S,  1914.) 

[2171825,  A.  G.  O.j 

803.  (Edition  corrected  to  November,  1913.)  Add  the  following 
to  "Method  of  folding  pyramidal  tent": 

Next  carry  the  left-front  corner  to  the  right  and  back  aa  described 
above;  this  when  completed  will  leave  the  front  and  rear  sides  of  the 
tent  lying  smooth  and  flat  and  the  two  side  walls  folded  inward, 
each  on  itself. 

Place  the  hood  in  the  square  iron  which  has  been  folded  down- 
ward toward  the  bottom  of  tent,  and  continue  to  fold  around  the 
square  iron  as  a  core,  pi'essing  all  folds  down  flat  and  smooth,  and 
parallel  with  the  bottom  ut  the  tent.  If  each  fold  is  compactly 
made  and  the  canvas  koi)t  smooth,  the  last  fold  will  exactly  cover 
the  lower  edge  uf  the  cauvas.     Lay  all  exposed  guys  along  the 


[C.  I.  D.  R.  8] 


folded  canvas  except  the  two  on  tke  center  width,  which  should  be 
pulled  out  and  away  from  bottom  edge  to  their  extreme  length  for 
tying.  Now,  beginning  at  one  end,  fold  toward  the  center  on  the 
first  seam  (that  joining  the  first  and  second  widths)  and  fold  again 
toward  the  center  so  that  the  already  folded  canvas  will  come  to 
^vithin  about  3  inches  of  the  middle  width.  Then  fold  over  to 
the  opposite  edge  of  middle  width  of  canvas.  Then  begin  folding 
from  opposite  end,  folding  the  first  width  in  half,  then  making  a 
second  fold  to  come  within  about  4  or  5  inches  of  that  already 
folded,  turn  this  fold  entirely  over  that  alrea«ly  folded.  Take  the 
exposed  guys  and  draw  them  taut  across  each  other,  turn  bundle 
over  on  the  under  guy,  cross  guys  on  top  of  bundle  drawing  tight. 
Turn  bundle  over  on  the  crossed  guys  and  tie  lengthwise. 

When  properly  tied  and  pressed  together  this  will  make  a  package 
11  by  23  by  34  inches,  requiring  about  8,855  cubic  inches  to  store  or 
pack. 

Stencil  the  organization  designation  on  the  lower  half  of  the 
middle  width  of  canvas  in  the  back  wall.  (C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  8,  Sept. 
S,  1914.) 

[2171325,  A.G.O.] 


fC.  I.  D.  R.  81 


II.  .The  following  bugle  call  is  added  on  page  206,  Infantry  Drill 
Regulations,  1911  (edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  and  edition 
corrected  to  November,  1913): 

29^  THE  GENERAL'S  MARCH. 
Quick  time. 

I 


^^ 


:p=r=i 


t==? 


^ 


-a 


■»  *■• 


#-A- 


^^^ 


=P=?= 


3^=2: 


-9—arfi 


|=f::qpiE 


-^JS~  ^1=^"=g"^ 


(C.  /.  D.  R.  No.  S,  Sept.  3,  1914.) 
[2192050,  A.  G.  O.l 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

W.  W.  WOTHERSPOON, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 
Official: 

H.  P.  McCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  General. 


[C.  I.  D.  R.  9.] 

INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ChanqesI  war  department, 

No.  9.    J  Washington,  November  14,  1914- 

Paragraph  47,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  is  changed  as  follows: 
47.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  and  edition  corrected  to 
November,  1913.  Changed  by  C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  8,  W.  D.,  1914.) 
For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the  reserve  or 
commander  in  rear,  the  subjoined  eimals  (Signal  Corps  codes)  are 
prescribed  and  should  be  memorized.  In  transmission,  their  con- 
cealment from  the  enemy's  view  should  be  insured.  In  the  absence 
of  signal  flags,  the  headdress  or  other  substitute  may  be  used. 


If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the 
firing  line. 


Ammunition  going  forward 

Charge  (mandatory  at  all  1  imes) 

Cease  firing 

Double  lima  or  "  rush" 

Commence  firing 

Fix  bayonets 

Move  forward 

Halt 

Negative 

Left 

What  is  the(R  N,  etc.)? 

Affirmative 

Range 

Right 

Support  going  forward 

Suspend  firing 

Target 


If  signaled  from  the  firing  line 
to  the  rear. 


Ammunition  required. 
Am  about  to  charge  if  no  instruc- 
tions to  the  contrary. 
Cease  firing. 
Double  time  or  "  rush." 


Preparing  to  move  forward. 

Negative. 

Left. 

What  is  the  (RN,  etc.)? 

Affirmative. 

Range. 

Right. 

Support  needed. 

Suspend  firing. 

Target. 


(C.  J.  D.  R.  No.  9,  Nov.  14,  1914.) 

[2220245,  A.  G.  O.] 

By  order  op  the  Secretary  of  War: 

W.  W.  WOTHERSPOON, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff, 
Official  : 

H.  P.  McCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  General. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ChangesI  war  department, 

No.  10.  I  Washington,  December  2S,  1914' 

Paragraphs   714   and   725,   Infantry    Drill   Regulations,    are'- 
clianged  as  follows ;  ' 

714.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  and  edition  cor- 
rected to  November,  1913.)  After  saluting  the  reviewing  officer, 
the  commanding  officer  of  the  troops  turns  out  of  the  column, 
takes  post  on  the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer,  and  returns 
saber;  the  members  of  his  stafl;  accompanying  him  take  post 
on  the  right  of  the  reviewing  officer's  staff  and  return  saber. 
"\^'hen  the  rear  element  of  his  command  has  pas.sed,  v.'ithout 
changing  his  position,  the  commanding  officer  of  the  troops 
salutes  the  reviewing  officer;  ho  and  the  members  of  his  staff 
accompanying  him  tlien  draw  saber  and  rejoin  his  command. 
The  commanding  officer  of  the  troops  and  the  members  of  his 
staff  are  the  only  ones  who  turn  out  of  the  column.  (0.  I.  D.  R., 
No.  10,  Dec.  28,  19U.) 

725.  ( Edition  approved  August  19, 1911,  changed  by  C.  I.  D.  R. 
No.  6,  W.  D.,  1913;  and  edition  corrected  to  November,  1913.) 
Change  the  eighth  and  last  sections  to  read  as  follows: 

Without  facing  about,  each  captain  or  special  unit  commander, 
except  the  drum  major,  commands:  1.  Eyes,  in  time  to  add, 
2.  RIGHT,  when  at  6  paces  from  the  reviewing  officer,  and  com- 
mands FRONT  when  at  G  paces  beyond  him.  At  the  command 
eyes  the  company  officers  armed  with  the  saber  execute  the  first 
motion  of  present  saber;  at  the  command  right  all  turn  head 
and  eyes  to  the  right,  the  company  officers  complete  present 
saber  and  the  noncommissioned  officers  armed  with  the  saber 
execute  the  first  motion  of  present  saber;  at  the  command 
front  all  turn  head  and  eyes  to  the  front,  and  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  armed  with  the  saber  resume  the  carry 
saber ;  without  arms  in  hand  the  first  motion  of  the  hand 
salute  is  made  at  the  command  right  and  the  second  motion 
not  made  until  the  command  front. 

******* 
19069°— 14 17 


tC.  I.  D.  R.  10.1 

9 

The  major,  having  saluted,  lakes  post  on  the  rfght  or  the 
reviewing  officer,  returns  saber  iiud  remains  there  until  the  rear 
of  the  battalion  has  passed,  then  salutes,  draws  saber,:  and  re- 
joins his  battalion.  Tlic  bfind  ceases  to  play  when  the.  oeilumu 
has  completed  its  second  change,  of  direction  after  passing  the 
reviewing  officer.     (C  /.  D.  R.,  No.  10,  Dec.  28,  191/f.) 

[2211347,  A.. ft,  0|1   ,,     ;.,      ::,;     _-,_ 

By  oedeb  of  the  Secbetaey  of  Wae;       ,    ,       ,  ovc" 

Brigadier  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

OFFICIAt:      lUllx    i-'Xl 

H.  p.  MCCAIN. 

The  Adjutant  General. 


fC.  I.  D.  U.  ll.j 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ChangesT  WAli,  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  11.  /      _  ,  .  -.      .;.i  .  .     Washington,  Ju^y  26,  ^9i5. 

I    ■t-w^rTtS   " iiil  -JP  b^"  ,    ' 

Paragrapjia  799  and.  8D0,'Tnfanlry  Drill  Regulations  (edition  ap- 
proved August  19,  1911,  and  edition  corrected  to  November,  1913), 
are  changed  as  follows: 

799.  To  pitch  all  tj'pes  of  Army  tents,  except  shelter  and  conical 
wall  tents:  Mark  line  of  tents  by  driving  a  wall  pin  on  tlie  spot  to 
be  occupied  by  the  right  (or  left)  corner  of  each  tent.  For  pyram- 
idal tents  the  interval  between  adjacent  pins  should  be  about  30 
feet,  which  will  give  a  passage  of  two  feet  between  tents.  Spread 
tripod  on  the  ground  where  the  center  of  tent  is  to  be,  if  tripod  is 
used.  Spread  the  tent  on  the  ground  to  be  occupied,  door  to  the 
front,  and  place  the  right  (or  left)  front  wall  loop  over  the  pin. 
The  door  (or  doors,  if  more  than  one)  being  fastened  and  held 
together  at  the  bottom,  the  left  (or  right)  corner  wall  loop  is  carried 
to  the  left  (or  right)  a^i  far  as  it  will  go  and  a  wall  pin  driven  through 
it,  the  pin  being  placed  in  line  with  the  right  (or  left)  corner  pins 
already  driven.  At  the  same  time  the  rear  corner  wall  loops  are 
pulled  to  the  rear  and  outward  so  that  the  rear  wall  of  the  tent  is 
stretched  to  complete  the  rectangle.  Wall  pins  are  then  driven 
through  these  loops.  Each  corner  pin  should  be  directly  in  rear  of 
the  corresponding  front  corner  pin.  making  a  rectangle.  Unless  the 
canvas  be  wel ,  a  small  amount  of  slack  sliould  be  allowed  before  the 
corner  pins  are  driven.  According  to  the  size  of  the  tent  one  or  two 
men,  crawling  under  the  tent  if  necessary,  fit  each  pole  or  ridge  or 
upright  into  the  ring  or  ridge  pole  holes,  and  such  accessories  as 
hood,  fly,  and  brace  ropes  are  adjusted.  If  a  tripod  be  used  an 
additional  man  will  go  under  the  tent  to  adjust  it.  The  tent 
steadied  by  the  remaining  men,  one  at  each  corner  guy  rope,  will 
then  be  raised.  If  the  tent  is  a  ward  or  storage  type,  corner  poles 
will  now  be  placed  at  the  four  corners.  The  four  corner  guy  ropes 
are  then  placed  over  the  lower  notches  of  the  large  pins  driven  in 
prolongation  of  the  diagonals  at  such  distance  as  to  hold  the  walls 


[C.I.  D.  R  111 


and  ends  of  the  tent  vertical  and  smooth  when  the  guy  ropes  are 
drawn  taut.  A  wall  pin  ia  then  driven  through  each  remaining  wall 
loop  and  a  large  pin  for  each  guy  rope  is  driven  in  line  with  the 
corner  guy  pins  akeady  driven.  The  guy  ropes  of  the  tent  are 
placed  over  the  lower  notches,  while  the  guy  ropes  of  the  fly  are 
placed  over  the  upper  notches,  and  are  then  drawn  taut.  Brace 
ropes,  when  used,  are  then  secured  to  stakes  or  pins  suitably  placed. 
(C.  I.  D.  R.,  No.  11,  July  26,  1915.)  '^'^ 

800.  Rescinded.     (C.  /.  D.  R.,  No.  11,  July  26,  1915.) 

[2258589,  A.  G.  O.] 
By  order  op  the  Secretary  of  War: 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

Official: 

H.  r.  McCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  General. 


lib  edi  lo 


[C.  I.  D.  R.  12] 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

ChangesI  war  department, 

No.  12.  /  Washington,  August  28,  1915. 

Paragraphs  26  and  G35,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  are  changed 
as  follows: 

26.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  changed  by  C.  I.  D.  R., 
No.  6,  W.  D.,  1913,  and  edition  corrected  to  November,  1913.) 
Change  last  sentence  of  second  section  to  read  as  follows:  "  Except 
in  the  field  under  campaign  or  simulated  campaign  conditions, 
a  mounted  officer  dismounts  before  addressing  a  superior  not 
momited."     (C.  /.  D.  R.,  No.  12,  Aug.  28,  1915.) 

635.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  changed  by  C.  I.  D.  R., 
No.  2,  W.  D.,   1913,  and   edition   corrected  to   November,   1913.) 
Rescind  last  section,     (f?.  /.  D.  R.,  No.  12,  Aug.  28,  1915.) 
[2246145,  A.  G.  O] 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

TASKER  H.  BLISS, 

Brigadier  General,  Acting  Chief  of  Staff". 
Official: 

H.  P.  McCain, 

The  Adjutant  General, 


Changes 
No.  13. 


[C.  1.  D.  R.  13.J 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
Washington,  February  4,  1916. 


Paragraph  47,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations  (edition  approved  August 
19,  1911,  and  edition  corrected  to  November,  1913),  as  amended  by 
C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  9,  W.  D.,  1914,  is  rescinded  and  the  following  sub- 
stituted therefor:  •  ' 

47.  (1)  For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the  reserve 
or  commander  in  the  rear,  the  subjoined  signals  (Signal  Corps  codes) 
are  prescribed  and  sliould  be  memorized.  In  transmission,  their 
concealment  from  the  enemy's  view  should  be  insured,  in  the 
absence  of  signal  flags,  the  headdress  or  other  substitute  may  be 
used. 


Letter  of 
alphabet. 


AM 

CO  C 

OF 

DT 

F 

FB 

FL 

G 

HHil 

K 

LT 

O 

(Ardois  and 

semaphore 

only.) 


If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  tlio 
Uriag  lino. 


Ammunition  going  forward 

C'iiarge  (mandatory  at  all  times) 

Cease  firing 

Double,  time  or  "rush" 

Commence  firing 

Fix  bayonets 

Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses 

Move  forward 

Halt 

Negative 

Left 

What  is  the(H.  N.,etc.)?    luter 
rogatory. 


If  signaled  from  the  firing 
Line  to  the  rear.  .    , 


Ammunition  required. 
Am  al)Out  to  charge  if  nn  in- 
structions to  the  contrary. 
Cease  firing. 

Double  time  or  "rush." 
Commence  firing. 
Fix  bayonets. 

Artilleryflre  is  causing  ur;  losses. 
Preparing  to  move  forwui  tl. 
Halt. 
Negative. 
Left. 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)'!"    In- 
terrogatory. 


[C.  1.  D.  R.  13,] 


Letter  of 
alphabet. 


(All  metttods 
but  ai'dois 
ana  sema- 
phore.) 

kn7. 

RT.;'. .'. 

s  s  s 

SUP 

TJ. ..::.. 


If  signaled  from  the  rear  to  the 
firing  line. 


What  is  the  (R.  N., etc.)?    Inter 
rogatory. 

Affirmative 

Acknowledgment 

Range 

Right 

Support  going  forward 

Suspend  firing , 

Target. . . : 


If  signaled  from  tl'.e  firi 
line  to  the  rear. 


What  is  the  (R.  N.,etc.)?    In- 
terrogatory. 


Affirmative. 

Acknowledgment . 

Range. 

Right. 

Support  needed. 

Suspend  firing. 

Target. 


(2)  The  Two-arm  Semaphore  Code. 
(See  illustrations  on  pages  following.) 

(C.  I.  D.  R.,  No.  13,  Feb.  4,  1916.) 
[2268790  D— A.  G.  O.] 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 


Official: 

H.  P.  McCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  General- 


;  ~7  "    H.  L.  SCOTT, 
'  Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff . 


3  [C.  I.  D.  R.  13. 

TWO-ARM    SEMIPHORE    CODE. 


(C.  I.  D.  R.  13]  4 

'AFriFiMATlVE 


Q 


ACKNOWLLDGEl 


R 


U 


W 


X 


[C.  I.  D.  R.  14.] 


INFANTRY   DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


ChangesI  war  department, 

No.  14.  I  WASHiNGTO>r,  May  18,  1916. 

Paragraph  43,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations  (corrected  to  Novem- 
ber, 1913),  is  changed  as  follows: 

Insert  after  eighth  line,  page  19,  the  following: 

What  range  are  you  using?  or  W/iat  is  the  range?  Extend  the  arms 
toward  the  person  addressed,  one  hand  open,  palm  to  the  front, 
resting  on  the  other  hand,  fist  closed. 

Are  you  ready?  or  /  am  ready.  Raise  the  hand,  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  palm  toward  the  person  addressed. 

Commence  firing.  Move  the  arm  extended  in  full  length,  hand 
palm  down,  several  times  through  a  horizontal  arc  in  front  of  the 
body. 

Fire  faster.     Execute  rapidly  the  signal  "Commence  firing." 

Fire  slower.     Execute  slowly  the  signal  "  Commence  firing." 

To  swing  the  cone  of  fire  to  the  right,  or  left.  Extend  the  arm  in  full 
length  to  the  front,  palm  to  the  right  (left);  swing  the  arm  to  right 
(left),  and  point  in  the  direction  of  the  new  target. 

Fix  Bayonet.  Simulate  the  movement  of  the  right  hand  in  "  Fix 
bayonet"  (paragraph  95).— (C.  /.  D.  /?.,  No.  14,  May  IS,  1916.) 

[2380982,  A.  G.  O.] 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 


Official: 

H.  P.  McCAIN, 

2'he  Adjutant  General. 


H.  L.  SCOTT, 

Major  General,  Chief  of  Stajf'. 


'm*- 


3\i'::l  'hS  Ttrw 


[C.  I.  D.  R.  15.] 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


Changes]  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  15.  J  Washington,  July  31,  1916 

Paragraphs  34  and  42,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911,  are  changed 
as  follows: 

34.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  and  edition  corrected  to 
November,  1913.  Changed  by  C.  I.  D.  R.,  No.  8,  W.  D.,  1914). 
Except  in  movements  executed  at  attention,  commanders  or  leaders 
of  subdivisions  repeat  orders,  commands,  or  signals  whenever  such 
repetition  is  deemed  necessary  to  insure  prompt  and  correct 
execution. 

Officers,  battalion  noncommissioned  staff  officers,  platoon  leaders, 
guides,  and  musicians  are  equipped  with  wliistles. 

The  major  and  his  staff  will  use  a  whistle  of  distinctive  tone;  the 
captain  and  company  musicians  a  second  and  distinctive  whistl§; 
the  platoon  leaders  and  guides  a  third  distinctive  whistle. 

(C.  I.  D.  R.,  No.  15,  July  31,  1916.) 
[2409852,  A.  G.  O.] 

42.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  and  edition  corrected  to 
November,  1913).  Add  the  following:  "All  other  whistle  signals 
are  prohibited." 

(C.  I.  D.  R.,  No.  15,  July  31,  1916.) 

[2409852,  A.  G.  O.] 
By  order  op  the  Secretary  of  War: 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 
Official: 

H.  P.  McCAIN, 

The  Adjutant  General. 


.r:  /J  171  I  r  u,  s  '.'vil 


lisrMNTit^  DiiiiL  Mgulations. 

Changes'!  WAR  DEPARTMENT,     . 

No.  16.  J  Washington,  Aug%ist  25, 1916. 

Paragraphs  746  and  747,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911,  arc 
changed  as  follows:.  ...  .     . 

746.  (Edition  approved  August  19,  1911,  and  edition  corrected  to 
November,  1913.)  If  the  jcompany  is  dismissed,  rifles  are  put  away. 
In  quarters,  headdress  and  accouterments  are  removed  and  the  men 
stand  near  their  respective  bunlcs;  in  camp  they  stand  covered,  but 
without  accoTi{.ci:ments,  in  front  of  their  tents. 

If  the  personal  field  equipment  has  not  been  inspected  in  rankQ 
and  its  inspection  -  in  quarters  or  camp  is  ordered,  each  man  will 
arrange  the  prescribed  articles  on  his  bunfj,  if  in  quarters  or  permanent 
camp,  or  in  front  of  his  half  of,  the, tent,  if  in  shelter  tent  camp, 
in  the  same  .relative  order  as  directed  in  paragraph  747. 

The  captain,  acconipaniqd  .by  the  lieutenants,  then  inspects  the 
quarters  or  camp.  The  first  sergeant  precedes  the  captain  and  calls 
the  men  to  attention  on  entering  each  squad  rooni  or  on  approach- 
ing the  tents;  the  men  stand  at  attention  but  do  not  salute.  (C  I. 
D.R.,  No.  16,  Aug.  25,  1916.) 

747.  (Edition  approved  August il9y.  1911,.  and  edition  corrected. to 
November,  1913.)  If.  the  inspection  is  to  include  an  examination 
of  the  equipment  while  in  ranks,  the  captain,  after  closing. nxnks., 
causes  the  company  to  stack  arms,  to  march  backward  uijtU.  .4.  paces 
in  rear  of  the  stacks  and  to  take  intervals.     He  then  commands: 

1.  UNSLING  EQUIPMENT.     2.  OPEN  PACKS. 

At  the  first  command,  each  man  unslings  his  equipment  and  places 
it  on  the  gi'ound  at  hia  feet,  haversack  to  che  front  end  of  the  pack 
1  foot  in  front  of  toes.  -;     -■    l.. 

At  the  second  command,  pack  carriers  are  unstrap^ed[,  -  packs 
removed  and  unrolled,  the  longer  edge  of  the  pack  along  the  lower 
edge  of  the  cartridge  belt.    Each  man  exposes  shelter  tent  pins 


[C.  I.  D.  R.  16.] 


removes  meat  can,  knife,  fork,  and  spoon  from  the  meat-can  pouch, 
and  places  them  on  the  right  of  the  haversack,  knife,  fork,  and  spoon 
in  the  open  meat  can ;  removes  the  canteen  and  cup  from  the  cover 
and  places  them  on  the  left  side  of  the  haversack;  unstraps  and 
spreads  out  haversack  so  as  to  expose  its  contents;  folds  up  the  carrier 
to  uncover  the  cartridge  pockets;  opens  same;  unrolls  toilet  articles 
and  places  them  on  the  outer  flap  of  the  haversack;  places  underwear 
carried  iu  pack  on  the  left  half  of  the  open  pack,  with  round  fold 
paiallel  with  front  edge  of  pack;  opens  first-aid  pouch  and  exposes 
contents  to  view.  Special  articles  carried  by  individual  men,  such 
as  flag  kit,  field  glasses,  compass,  steel  tape,  notebook,  etc.,  will  bo 
aiTanged  on  the  right  half  of  the  open  pack.  Each  man  then  resumes 
the  attention.  Plate  VI  shows  the  relative  position  of  all  articlea 
except  underwear  and  special  articles. 

The  captain  then  passes  along  the  ranks  and  file  closers  as  before, 
inspects  the  equipment,  returns  to  the  right,  and  commands: 
CLOSE  PACKS. 

_Each  man  rolls  up  his  toilet  articlea  and  underwear,  straps  up 
his  ha^•ersack  and  its  contents,  replaces  the  meat  can,  knife,  fork, 
and  spoon,  and  the  canteen  and  cup;  closes  cartridge  pocket?  and 
first-aid  pouch;  restores  special  articles  to  their  proper  receptacles; 
rolls  up  and  replaces  pack  in  carrier;  and,  leaving  the  equipment  in 
its  position  on  the  ground,  resumes  the  attention. 

All  equipments  being  packed,  the  captain  commands:  SLnTG- 

EaTrrpMENT. 

The  equipments  are  slung  and  belts  fastened. 

The  captain  then  causes  the  company  to  assemble  and  take  arms. 
The  inspection  is  completed  as  already  explained.  (C.  /.  D.  R.yl 
No.  16,  Aug.  25,  1916.)  --t 

[2438252,  A.  G.  O.]  ^ 

By  order  op  the  Secretary  of  War: 

n.  L.  SCOTT, 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 
Official:  i 

H.  P.  McCain, 

The  Adjutant  General.  , 


[C.  I.  D.  Fv.  t7.J 

INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 


Changes  1  WAll  DEPARTMENT, 

i    No.  17.    J  Washington,  January  9,  1911. 

J  J    Paragraphs  26,  240,  247,  251,  759,  760,  761,  762,  763,  764,  and 

765,  Infantry  Drill  Regulationo   (edition  approved  August  19, 

1911,  and  edition  corrected  to  November,  1913),  are  changed  to 

read  as  follows: 

26.  When  making  or  receiving  official  reports,  or  on  meeting 
out  of  doors,  all  officers  vrill  salute. 

Militarj'  courtesy  requires  the  junior  to  salute  first,  but  v?hen 
the  salute  is  introductory  to  a  report  made  at  a  military  cere- 
mony or  formation,  to  the  representative  of  a  common  superior 
(as,  for  example,  to  the  adjutant,  officer  of  the  day,  etc.),  the 
officer  making  the  report,  whatever  his  rank,  will  sahite  first; 
the  officer  to  whom  the  report  is  made  will  acknowledge  by 
saluting  that  he  has  received  and  xmderstood  the  report. 

(C.  /.  D.  R.  No.  11,  Jan.  9,  1911.) 

24:0.  Except  in  a  deliberately  prepared  defensive  position, 
the  most  accurate  and  only  practicable  method  of  determining 
the  range  will  generally  be  to  take  the  mean  of  several  esti- 
mates. 

Five  or  six  oJBcers  or  men,  selected  from  the  most  acciu^te  esti- 
mators in  the  company,  are  designated  as  range  estimators  and  are 
specially  trained  in  estimating  distances. 

Whenever  necessary  and  practicable,  the  captain  assembles 
the  range  estimators,  points  out  the  target  to  tlieni,  and 
adopts  the  mean  of  their  estimates.  The  range  estimators 
then  take  their  customary  posts. 

(0.  /.  D.  R.  No.  11,  Jan.  9,  1911.) 

247.  If  the  target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye,  platoon 
leaders  select  an  object  in  front  of  or  behind  it,  designate  this  as 
the  aiming  target,  and  direct  a  sight  setting  which  will  carry  the 
cone  of  fire  into  the  target. 

(C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  11,  Jan.  9,  1911.) 


[C.  I.  D.  n.  17.1 


251.  Eachi  platoon  leader  puts  into  execution  the  commands  or 
directions  of  the  captaili,  having  first  taken  such  precautions  to 
insure  correct  eight  setting  and  clear  description  of  the  target  or 
aiming  target  as  the  situation  permits  or  requires;  thereafter,  he 
gives  such  additional  commands  or  directions  as  are  necessajy  to 
exact  compliance  with  the  captain's  will.  He  corrects  the  sight 
setting  when  necessary.  He  designates  an  aiming  target  when  the 
target  can  not  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye. 

(C.  I.  D.  R.  No.  11,  Jan,  9,  1917.) 

769.  (1)  Salutes  shall  be  exchanged  between  officers  and 
enlisted  men  not  in  a  military  formation,  nor  at  drill,  work, 
games,  or  mess,  on  every  occasion  of  their  meeting,  passing  near 
or  being  addres^sed,  the  oflicer  junior  in  rank  or  the  enlisted 
man  saluting  first. 

(2)  When  an  officer  enters  a  room  where  there  are  several 
enlisted  men,  the  word  "attention"  is  given  by  some  one  who 
perceives  him,  when  all  rise,  uncover,  and  remain  standing  at 
attention  until  the  officer  leaves  the  room  or  directs  otherwise. 
Enlisted  men  at  meals  stop  eating  and  remain  seated  at 
attention. 

(3)  An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the  approach  of  an 
officer,  faces  townrd  him,  stands  at  attention,  and  Sfilutef;. 
Standing  he  faces  an  officer  for  the  same  purpose.  If  the 
parties  remain  In  the  same  place  or  on  the  same  ground,  such 
compliments  need  not  be  repeated.  Soldiers  actually  at  work 
do  not  cease  work  to  salute  an  officer  unless  addressed  by  him. 

(4)  Before  oddressing  an  officer,  an  enlisted  man  makes  the 
prescribed  salute  with  the  weapon  with  w^hich  he  is  armed,  or,  if 
unarmed,  with  the  right  hand.  He  also  makes  the  same  salute 
after  receiving  a  reply. 

(5)  In  uniform,  covered  or  uncovered,  but  not  in  formation, 
officers  and  enlisted  men  salute  militai-y  persons  as  follows: 
With  arms  in  hand,  the  salute  prescribed  for  that  arm  (senti- 
nels on  interior  guard  duty  excepted)  ;  without  arms,  the  right- 
hand  salute. 

c.     (6)   lu    civilian    dress,    covered   or    iracovered,    officers   and 

"enlisted  men  salute  military  persons  with  the  right-hand  salute. 

(7)  Officers  and   enlisted   men   will    render   the   prescribed 


[C.  I.  D.E.I  7.  ] 


salutes  in  a  military  ruauner,  the  officer  junior  in  rank,  or  the 
enliiited  men,  saluting  first.  When  several  officers  in  company 
are  suluted,  all  entitled  to  the  salute  shall  return  it. 

(S)  Except  in  the  field  under  campaign  or  simulated  cam- 
paign couditious,  a  mounted  officer  (or  soldier)  dismounts  before 
addressing  a  superior  officer  not  mounted. 

(9)  A  man  in  formation  shall  not  salute  ^Yhen  directly  ad- 
dressed, but  shall  come  to  attention  if  at  rest  or  at  ease. 

(10)  Saluting  distance  is  that  within  which  recognition  H 
easy.    In  general,  it  does  not  exceed  30  paces. 

(11>  When  an  officer  entitled  to  the  salute  passes  in  rear  of 
a  body  of  troops,  it  is  brought  to  attention  while  he  is  opposite 
the  post  of  the  commander. 

(12)  In  public  conveyances,  such  as  railway  trains  and 
street  cars,  and  in  public  places,  such  as  theaters,  honoi-s  and 
personal  sn lutes  may  be  omitted  when  palpably  inappropriate 
or  apt  to  disturb  or  annoy  civilians  present. 

(13)  Soldiers  at  all  times  and  in  all  situations  pay  the  same 
compliments  to  officers  of  the  Army,  Navy,  Marine  Coi-ps,  and 
Volunteers,  and  to  officers  of  the  National  Guard  as  to  officers 
of  their  own  regiment,  coi-ps,  or  arm  of  service. 

(14)  Sentinels  on  post  doing  interior  guard  duty  conform  to 
the  foregoing  principles,  but  salute  by  prese7iting  arms  when 
armed  with  the  rifle.  They  will  not  salute  i^  it  interferes  with 
the  proper  performance  of  their  duties.  Troops  under  arms 
will  salute  as  prescribed  in  drill  regulations. 

(C.  /.  D.  F.  No.  17,  Jan.  9,  1011.)   'UWA  oi!'  -c) 

760.  (1)  Commanders  of  detachments  or  otlier  commands 
will  salute  officers  of  grades  higher  than  tlie  person  coumuind- 
ing  the  unit,  by  first  bringing  the  unit  to  attention  and  then 
saluting  as  required  b.v  subparagraph  (5),  paragraph  759. 
If  the  ])trsan  saluted  is  of  a  junior  or  equal  grade,  the  unit 
need  not  be  at  attention  in  the  exchange  of  salutes. 

(2)  If  two  detachments  or  other  commands  meet,  their  com- 
manders will  exchange  salutes,  both  commands  being  at 
attention. 

(C.  /.  D.  /?.  1^0.  n,  Jan.  9,  1911.) 


LC.  1. 1>.  R.  17.] 

4 

761.  Salutes  and  honors,  as  a  rule,  are  not  paid  by  troops 
actually  engaged  in  drill,  on  tbe  inarch,  or  in  the  field  under 
campaign  or  simulated  campaign  conditions.  Troops  on  the 
service  of  security  pay  no  compliments  \vliatever. 

(C.  /.  D.  It.  No.  17,  Jan.  i),  1917.) 

762.  li:  the  command  is  in  line  at  a  halt  (not  in  the  field)  and 
armed  with  the  rifie,  or  with  sabers  drawn,  it  shall  he  brought  to 
present  arms  or  present  sabers  before  its  commander  salutes  in 
the  following  cases :  When  the  National  Anthem  is  played,  or 
when  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is  sounded  during  ceremo- 
nies, or  wlien  a  person  is  saluted  who  is  its  immediate  or  higher 
connnander  or  a  general  officer,  or  when  the  national  or  regi- 
mental color  is  saluted. 

(C.  I.  D.  It.  No.  17,  Jan.  0,  1917.) 

763.  At  parades  and  other  ceremonies,  under  arms,  the  com- 
mand shall  render  the  prescribed  salute  and  shall  remain  in  the 
position  of  salute  while  the  National  Anthem  is  being  played ; 
also  at  retreat  and  during  ceremonies  when  to  the  color  is 
played,  if  no  band  is  present.  If  not  under  arms,  the  organiza- 
tions shall  be  brouglit  to  attention  at  the  first  note  of  the  Na- 
tional Anthem,  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard,  and  the  salute 
rendered  by  the  officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  in  command  as 
prescribed  in  regulations,  as  amended  herein. 

(C.  /.  D.  R.  No.  17,  Jan.  9,  1917.) 

764.  Whenever  the  National  Anthem  is  plaj-ed  at  any  place 
when  ijersons  belonging  to  the  military  service  iu-e  i>reseut,  all 
officers  and  enlisted  men  not  in  formation  shall  stand  at  atten- 
tion facing  toward  the  music  (except  at  retreat,  wlieu  they 
shall  face  toward  the  flag).  If  in  uniform,  covered  or  uncov- 
ered, or  in  civilian  clotlies,  uncovered,  they  shall  salute  at  the 
first  note  of  the  anthem,  retaining  the  position  of  salute  until 
the  last  note  of  the  anthem.  If  not  in  uniform  and  covered* 
they  shall  uncover  at  the  first  note  of  the  anth(>m,  liolding  the 
headdress  opposite  the  left  shoulder  and  so  remain  until  its 
close,  except  that  in  inclement  weather  tlie  headdress  may  be 
slightly  raised. 


[C.  I.  D.  1M7. 


The  same  rules  apply  when  io  the  color  or  to  the  standara  i.s 
sounded  as  when  the  National  Anthem  is  phiyed. 

AVhen  played  by  an  Army  band,  the  National  Anthem  shall 
be  played  through  without  repetition  of  any  part  not  required 
to  be  repeatetl  to  make  it  complete. 

The  same  marks  of  respect  prescribed  for  observance  during 
the  playing  of  the  National  Anthem  of  the  United  States  shall 
be  shown  to^^•ard  the  national  anthem  of  any  other  country 
when  plaved  upon  official  occasions. 

(C.  /.  D.  B.  No.  17,  Jan.  9,  1917.) 

765.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  color  will 
render  honors  as  follows:  If  in  uniform,  they  will  salute  as 
n^uired  by  subparagraph  (o),  paragraph  7.59;  if  in  civilian 
dress  and  covered,  they  will  uncover,  holding  the  headdress 
t)pposite  the  left  shoulder  with  the  right  hand;  if  uncovered 
they  will  salute  with  the  riglit-hand  salute. 

(C.  /.  D.  R.  Nu.  17,  Jan.  9,  1917.) 
[24S0221,  A.  G.  O.] 

Br    OEDEU    OF    THE    SECRETARY    OF    WaR  : 

H.  L.  SCOTT, 
Major  acneral,  Chief  of  Staff. 
Officiat.  : 

H.  P.  McCain, 

Ttto  Adjutant  (leneral. 


[C.  I.  D.  R.  18.] 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS. 

HANGES    1 
No.  18.     J 


Changes  i  WAR    DEPARTMENT, 

No.  18.    /  Washington,  February  12,  1917. 


Para.uT.iph  58,  Infnntry  Drill  Regulations  (edition  approved 
August  19,  1911,  and  edition  corrected  to  November,  1913),  la 
changed  to  read  as  follows ; 

58.  1.  Hand.  2.  SALUTE. 

Raise  the  right  luind  smartly  till  the  tip  of  the  forefinger 
touches  the  lower  part  of  the  headdress  or  forehead  above  the 
right  eye,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and  .inined.  palm  to  the 
left,  forearm  inclined  at  about  45°,  hand  and  wrist  straight; 
at  the  same  time  look  toward  the  person  saluted.  (TWO)  Drop 
the  arm  smartly  by  the  side. 

For  rules  governing  salutes,  see  "  Honors  and  Salutes,"  para- 
graphs 758-7(3.1.      (C.  I.  D.  JR.,  No.  18,  Frh.  12,  1917.) 
[2.50174fi.  A.  G.  O.l 

By  oKUKE  OF  THE  Secretary  of  War  : 

H.  L.  SCOTT. 
Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 
Offictai,  : 

H.  P.  McCain, 

TIic  Adjutant  General. 
78804°— 17 


WASHINGTON  :  GOVEE.XME.NT  PKINTING  OFFICB  :  X91T 


This  book  is  DUE  on  ths  last 
date  stamped  below 

MAR  22  194* 

^.^^IS^'NUG    8  1985 
^^^       mm 

^^^      _^HEN£WAL        ^jnv  9  7  1985 

REC'D  LD-URL 

;3     "i}^i>JEWAL 


1986 


n-^o  iiRi     JAN  14 
jAN31^9t3URL 

.^W   FEBl9iaoc, 
mXHARGfcll&i  JUN  1 8  1^8G  . 

SEP  141978     SEP  061986 

S,  APR: 
'"S    JUN251985 

""  APR  07 1986      , 


,[{{;  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


AA    001259  250 


